Page 1
List of undergraduate courses at Central South University
Business school
(2) Subject Education Module Courses
Principles of Management
Course Number : 160101X1
Course Title: Principles of Management
English name : Management
Class hours and credits: 48/3
Prerequisite course requirements: none
Adapt to majors : economics and management majors
Reference textbook: Edited by Xiong Yongqing. Management. Hunan People's Publishing House, 2010.09
Course introduction:
"Principles of Management" is a science that systematically studies the universal laws and general methods of management activities.
It is the basic subject of various majors in management, after learning production management, marketing management, financial management, etc.
The theoretical foundation of the continuation course is also the first course that students encounter when entering the hall of management knowledge. This course
The process is extremely applicable and practical. This course mainly teaches the basic connotation of management and the development of management thinking
The basic functions of history and management (planning, organization, leadership and control), through the study of this course, not only
It is necessary for students to master the basic principles of management, and to train students to apply the basic principles of management to analyze and solve problems.
Ability to implement various practical problems in management. Course teaching will adopt theoretical teaching, case analysis, social survey,
The method of combining is discussed from time to time in class to deepen students' understanding of what is learned.
Syllabus:
1. The nature and tasks of the course
"Principles of Management" is a basic subject for various majors in management. It is for learning production management and marketing.
The theoretical basis for subsequent courses such as management and financial management. This course mainly teaches the theoretical system and management of management
The development history of Neo-Confucianism and the basic functions of management; training students to apply management theory and management knowledge to solve practical problems
The ability of interpersonal problems lays a theoretical and methodological foundation for learning subsequent professional management courses.
2. Basic requirements of the course
Through this course, students are required to systematically understand and master the basic principles of management and management
Page 2
The basic functions of management, the basic principles of applying management, basic methods to analyze and solve practical management problems
The ability to question.
3. The basic content, key points and difficulties of the course
The first summary
Chapter One Management and Management Science
The first section of the connotation of management (focus on mastering)
Section 2 Functions and Roles of Management (Key Master)
Section 3 Types and Skill Requirements of Managers
Section 4 Management Research Objects and Methods
Chapter II Development of Management Thoughts and Theories
The first section of early management ideas budding
Section 2 Classical Management Theory (Key Mastering)
Section 3 Neoclassical Management Theory (Key Mastering)
Section 4 Modern Management Theory
Section 5 Chinese Management Thoughts and Practice
Chapter III Management and Environment
Section 1: The relationship between management and environment
Section 2 Analysis of the Characteristics of Organizational Environment (Key Mastering)
Section 3 Analysis of the Internal Environment of the Enterprise
Chapter 4 Corporate Ethics and Social Responsibility
Section 1 Corporate Ethics
Section 2 Corporate Social Responsibility
The second plan
Chapter 5 Principles and Methods of Decision Making
The first section of the concept and type of decision-making
Section 2 Decision-making process and influencing factors
The third section of decision-making methods (emphasis on mastering, difficult content)
Chapter VI Planning and Planning Work
The meaning and function of the first section plan
Section 2 Types and levels of plans
Section 3 Planning Work Procedure
The fourth section plan preparation method (focus on mastering)
Chapter Three Organization
Chapter VII Basic Issues in Organization
Section 1 Organization and Organizational Work
Section 2 Types of Organization
Section 3 Management Range and Management Level (Key Master)
Section 4 Centralization and Decentralization (Key Mastery)
Chapter 8 Organization Design
Section 1 Contents and Procedures of Organizational Design
Section 2 Types of Organizational Structure (Key to Master, Difficult Content)
Section 3 Organizational Change and Development
Page 3
Chapter 9 Staffing
Section 1 The tasks and principles of staffing
Section 2 Selection and Employment of Managers
Section 3 Evaluation of Managers (Key Master)
Section 5 Management Training
Chapter 10 Organizational Culture
Section 1 The connotation and characteristics of organizational culture
Section 2 Elements and Types of Organizational Culture (Key Master)
Section 3 Function of Organizational Culture and Ways of Construction
Chapter 4 Leadership
Chapter 11 Leadership and Leadership Theory
The first section human nature hypothesis theory (emphasis on mastering)
Section 2 Leadership Nature and Content
The third section leadership characteristics theory
The fourth section leadership behavior theory (emphasis, difficult content)
Section 5 Leadership Contingency Theory (Key mastery, difficult content)
Chapter 12 Motivation
The first section of the meaning and constituent elements of motivation
Section 2 Content-based Motivation Theory (Key mastery, difficult content)
Section 3 Process Motivation Theory (Key mastery, difficult content)
Section 4 Application of Motivation Theory (Key Mastery, Difficult Content)
Chapter 13 Communication
The first section of the meaning of communication and communication process
Section 2 Formal communication and informal communication (emphasis, difficult content)
Section 3 Obstacles to Effective Communication and Their Overcoming
Section 4 Conflict Management
Chapter 5 Control
Chapter 14 Control and Control Process
The connotation of control
The second section of the control type (emphasis control, difficult content)
Section 3 Requirements for Effective Control
Chapter 15 Control Methods
Section 1 Budget Control
Section 2 Production Control
Section 3 Ratio Analysis
Section 4 Audit Control
Four, experimental requirements
During the course teaching, arrange case discussions 4-5 times
5. Course hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Page 4
Chapter One
Management and Management
3
Case discussion included 1 class hour
Chapter two
Development of management thought and theory
3
third chapter
Management and environment
2
Chapter Four
Corporate Ethics and Social Responsibility
2
chapter Five
Decision-making principles and methods
4
Chapter Six
Planning and planning work
2
Chapter VII
Basic problems in the organization
2
chapter eight
Organization design
6
Case discussion included 2 class hours
Chapter nine
Staffing
6
Case discussion included 2 class hours
chapter Ten
group Culture
2
Chapter 11 Leadership and Leadership Theory
2
Chapter 12 Motivation
5
Case discussion included 2 class hours
Chapter 13 Communication
3
Case discussion included 1 class hour
Chapter 14 Control and Control Process
2
Chapter 15 Control Methods
2
examination
examination
2
Six, assessment method
1. Course assessment methods: final exam, written exam (open book or closed book).
2. The composition of the overall evaluation scores: 30% for case analysis and 70% for examination results.
7. Author: Xiong Yongqing
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Office software (OFFICE) advanced applications
Course Number : 160201X1
Course Name : Advanced Application of Office Software (OFFICE)
English name : Advanced Application of OFFICE
Class hours and credits : 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 16)
Prerequisite course requirements : none
Adapt to majors : management majors, economics majors
Reference materials :
Textbook:
Sun Chuanqing, "Office Advanced Applications", Northwestern Polytechnical University Press, December 2011
reference book:
Chengjun Bian, "OFFICE2010 High-Efficiency Office Super Manual", China Machinery Industry Press, April 2011
Course introduction :
Page 5
This course is a public elective course for students of all majors in economics and management.
On the basis of the course of "Computer Application Fundamentals", the learners will learn more about Office
Advanced application of public software, understand and master the deep level of three fields (Word, Excel, PowerPoint)
Know how. This course focuses on the application of office software Office, emphasizing practicality and operability, and also strong
The knowledge and system are adjusted.
Its task is to enable students to further master the proficient use of Microsoft Office software packages.
Improve the practical ability of the computer.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
1. The position of the curriculum in the training program
This course is a public elective course for management majors and economics majors, and it is also a professional basic course.
2. Teaching purpose
"Office Software (OFFICE) Advanced Application" is a very practical basic course, mainly focusing on
Cultivate the practical ability of learning to do. The content involves Office series Word, Excel, PowerPoint
Advanced operations. Through the study of this course, students will be able to master word processing, mixed questioning, and advanced Word
Functions, table operations, data processing, production and design of slides, and integrated applications of office software.
3. Teaching tasks
Cultivate students' operating and application ability of Office software, through the basic knowledge of existing computer
Knowledgeable students explain the advanced application skills and practical application methods of Office software so that students can
You need to flexibly process documents, spreadsheets, and PPT documents, so as to write and complete various documents in the future.
Lay the foundation for typesetting, data analysis and processing of professional papers.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Familiar with the basic operations and advanced applications of Word, Excel, PowerPoint in the Office series
Skills, flexible and comprehensive application of Office series software for editing and processing various office documents
And demonstrated ability.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. The foundation of Chinese Office and the improvement of Word2010
•
Office installation details
•
Understand the working interface of Office applications
•
Ways to get help
•
Style application and replacement
•
Vertical text
•
Application of document structure diagram
•
Automatic generation of catalog
•
Use of annotation and revision functions
•
Encrypt and protect documents
2. Basic operation of Chinese Word
•
Multiple views of Word documents
•
Mail merge
•
Format paragraph
Page 6
•
Tab stop, drop cap setting, text direction change, and upper-lowercase English change
•
Set the border and shading
•
Set document background
3. Document page setting and printing (emphasis)
•
Paging and sectioning
•
Set column
•
Add headers and footers to documents
•
Settings page
•
Document printing
4. Excel basic operation skills
•
Introduction to Excel
•
Toolbar and menu
•
Operation workbook
•
Operation worksheet
•
data processing
•
Cell format
•
Cell name definition
•
Conditional Formatting
•
Cell reference
•
Data validity
•
print
5. Excel advanced application (emphasis, difficulty)
•
Window splitting and freezing
•
Data analysis one by one sorting and filtering
•
Subtotals
•
Pivot
•
Common functions
•
Array formula
•
Multiple calculations and array formulas
•
Univariate solution
•
Random number generation
•
Mutual Reference and Conversion of Word and Excel Data Table
6. PowerPoint basic operation (emphasis)
•
Operation of the presentation
•
Slide operation
•
Text Editor
•
Object usage and setting
•
Formatting
•
Animation
•
Use of hyperlinks
7. PowerPoint advanced application skills (difficulty)
•
Use of charts
•
Multimedia application
Page 7
•
Advanced animation
•
Advanced screening
•
Multi-format output of presentations
•
Reference and Conversion of Word and Excel Objects in PowerPoint
8. Application of VBA (difficulty)
•
Introduction to VBA
•
VBA programming basics
•
VBA examples and applications
4. Requirements for course practice
This course is a very physical course, students must be hands-on to master relevant knowledge and skills,
Therefore, it needs to be equipped with basic hands-on experiments, using Office2010 as the experimental environment. The content of the experiment
And the requirements are as follows:
1. Basic operations of Word2010 files;
2. The main methods of Word2010 document editing;
3. Word2010 document settings;
4. Excel2010 basic operation;
5. Excel2010 advanced application;
6. Excel2010 data analysis;
7. PowerPoint basic operation;
8. PowerPoint multimedia applications;
9. PowerPoint animation production.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
One of the experiments (computer hours)
Remarks
1
Chinese Office basics and
Improvement of Word2010
2
2
2
Chinese Word basic operation
4
2
3
Document page setup and printing
6
4
4
Excel basic operation skills
4
2
5
Excel advanced applications
6
4
6
PowerPoint basic operation
4
2
7
PowerPoint advanced application skills
4
2
8
VBA application
2
2
6. Course assessment method
The examination mainly adopts the closed-book method. The scope of the examination should cover all the content taught, and the content of the examination should be able to
Views reflect students’ memory and mastery of the main concepts of this course, and their understanding and mastery of relevant theories
And comprehensive application ability. Exam question types should be as diverse as possible.
Overall assessment results: 30% of the usual homework, 70% of the closed-book examination.
7. Formulation writer: Hu Dongbin
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Page 8
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Operations Research
Course Number : 160202X1
Course Name : Operations Research
English name : Operational Research
Class hours and credits : 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites : Management, Advanced Mathematics, Linear Algebra, Probability Theory and Mathematical Statistics
Adapt to majors : credit management, e-commerce, business, finance, accounting
Textbooks and reference books :
[1] Xu Xuanhua, etc. Operations Research. Hunan People's Publishing House, March 2007 edition;
[2] Tao Qiankan. Operations Research. Xi'an Jiaotong University Press, 1987 edition;
[3] Cai Haitao, Xu Xuanhua. Operational Research Typical Examples and Solutions. National Defense University Press, 2003
Version.
Course introduction :
Operations research is responsible for helping students master quantitative analysis methods and cultivating students’ creative thinking skills.
Ability, the ability to comprehensively apply knowledge to propose and solve problems in the face of actual background, so that students can compare theory with practice
The ability to integrate has been significantly improved, and there has been a significant improvement in the decision-making ability that decision-makers should have.
This course focuses on teaching principles, proper computer-based problem solving, combining individual research and group discussion, etc.
Students master the methods and skills of abstracting practical problems into operational research models, and master several types of economic management fields
Common typical models of operations research, with the ability and requirements to use computer software to solve various operations research models
The ability to understand the results for management analysis.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Operations research is a subject that focuses on quantitative analysis. It is responsible for helping students master quantitative analysis methods.
The role of. Cultivate students’ creative thinking ability, and comprehensively use knowledge to raise and solve problems facing the actual background
The ability of the students to combine theory and practice significantly improves their ability to solve problems.
Significant progress has been made in the decision-making abilities that employees should have.
This course will focus on teaching principles, appropriate computer-based problem solving, combining individual research and group discussion, etc.
To enable students to master several typical models of operations research commonly used in economic management, and to understand the use of these models and
The role of quantitative analysis methods in solving problems in the economic and management fields and improving efficiency;
Grasp the methods and skills of abstracting practical problems into operational research models; have the ability to use computer software to solve various operations
The ability to study the model and the ability to simply analyze the solution results.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
"Operational Research" is a compulsory professional basic course for all majors in business schools. Major in information management and information systems
As far as e-commerce majors are concerned, "Operational Research" is one of the management courses that these two majors must offer.
Page 9
It is directly related to the basic requirements for training these two professionals.
Operational research is a subject that focuses on quantitative analysis. It is responsible for helping students master quantitative analysis methods.
The role of law. Cultivate students' creative thinking ability, and comprehensively apply knowledge to propose and solve problems facing the actual background
The ability to solve problems can significantly improve students’ ability in combining theory and practice.
There is a significant improvement in strength.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
(1) Basic content of the course
Chapter 1: Linear Programming
1.1 Overview of linear programming
1.2 Linear programming problem and its mathematical model
1.3 Modeling linear programming problems
1.4 Graphical method of linear programming and its geometric significance
1.5 Linear programming simplex method and simplex table
1.6 Simplex economic information
1.7 Simplex theory analysis
1.8 Simplex method under artificial foundation
1.9 Typical examples and applications of linear programming (including modeling, software solution, analysis)
Chapter 2: Topic on Linear Programming
2.1 Dual planning
2.2 Dual simplex method
2.3 Sensitivity analysis
2.4 Transport issues
2.5 Multi-objective planning
2.6 Typical examples and applications (including modeling, software solution, analysis)
Chapter 3: Integer Programming
3.1 Concepts and characteristics of integer programming
3.2 Branch and bound method
3.3 Cut plane method
3.4 0-1 planning and implicit enumeration
3.5 Assignment issues and Hungarian law
3.6 Typical examples and applications (including modeling, software solution, analysis)
Chapter 4: Dynamic Programming
4.1 Multi-stage decision problem
4.2 Basic concepts of dynamic programming
4.3 Principle of Optimization
4.4 Shortest route problem
4.5 Resource allocation issues
4.6 Knapsack problem
4.7 Warehouse storage problems
4.8 Production problems
4.9 Typical examples and applications (including modeling, software solution, analysis)
Chapter 5: Graph and Network Analysis
Page 10
5.1 Diagram
5.2 Tree
5.3 Shortest route problem
5.4 Network planning technology
5.5 Maximum network flow problem
5.6 The problem of minimum cost and maximum flow
5.7 Network planning technology
5.8 Typical examples and applications (including modeling, software solution, analysis)
Chapter 6: Storage Theory
6.1 Inventory control system
6.2 Deterministic storage model
6.3 Discussion of deterministic storage model
6.4 Random storage model
6.5 Typical examples and applications (including modeling, software solution, analysis)
Chapter 7: Queuing Theory
7.1 Basic concepts of queuing system
7.2 M/M/1/∞/∞/FCFS single-server queuing model
7.3 M/M/1/N/∞/FCFS single server queuing model
7.4 M/M/1/∞/m/FCFS single server queuing model
7.5 M/M/c/∞/∞/FCFS multi-server queuing model
7.6 Typical examples and applications (including modeling, software solution, analysis)
Chapter 8: Decision Theory
8.1 Basic concepts of decision theory
8.2 Uncertain decision-making
8.3 Risky decision
8.4 Application of Utility Theory in Decision-making
8.5 Sequence Decision and Decision Tree
8.6 Typical examples and applications (including modeling, software solution, analysis)
(2) Key points and difficulties of the course
Focus: Use the knowledge learned to establish mathematical models for various practical problems; master the optimization of various models
Methods and problem-solving skills; the economic significance of correctly understanding and applying various parameters.
Difficulties: understanding of basic principles of operations research and decision-making analysis of practical problems.
In teaching, explain the basic principles clearly, and use a large number of examples to explain and explain. Students read
The textbook can better grasp the corresponding knowledge. In class lectures, in addition to clarifying the basic principles, teachers’
Related scientific research results and experience, and use some typical cases and practical applications to illustrate the corresponding principles, so
It not only enhances students’ interest in learning, but also enables students to deepen their understanding of the principles and master these
Know how. In the practice teaching link, through experiments, curriculum design, etc., to deepen students’ understanding of the principles of classroom teaching
Master and understand. Through self-study of students, find relevant technology and application materials on the Internet, and promptly guide learning
Students apply these principles to the case analysis of practical problems, so that students can master and flexibly use all
Learn content. Discussion on a topic through online Q&A and teacher forums not only solves the problem of students
Problems encountered in learning, but also to cultivate students' ability to analyze and solve problems, and stimulate their creativity
Sex. Through the course design, students are required to solve a small operation research case, and cooperate with the operation research professional computer software
To solve the problem, use the software solution results to focus on case analysis and discussion to achieve the purpose of integration.
Page 11
4. Requirements for course practice
Operations research course experiments focus on decision-making problem modeling, computer software solving, problem analysis and problem solving
center of. Enable students to correctly understand the basic principles of operations research, proficiently master computer software solving techniques,
Be good at using operations research software to solve the results of analysis problems and economic significance. Go through
Deep, from the local to the overall, from simulation to actual training, so that students can understand and learn from each other
Prepare to learn and become a qualified economic management professional. Finally, complete the design and analysis of a large case.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One
Linear programming
6
Chapter two
Linear Programming Topics
8
third chapter
Integer programming
6
2
Chapter Four
Dynamic programming
6
chapter Five
Network Planning
6
Chapter Six
Storage theory
6
2
Chapter VII
queuing theory
6
2
chapter eight
Decision theory
4
2
total
48
8
6. Course assessment method
1. Course assessment method: final exam, written exam.
2. The composition of the overall assessment scores: 30% of homework and attendance, and 70% of test scores.
7. Authors: Xu Xuanhua, Wu Lianggang, Wang Jianqiang, He Xiaojie
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
MIS
Course Number : 160203X1
Course Title : Management Information System
Class hours and credits : 40 /2.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
English name : Management Information System
Prerequisite course requirements : computer programming, database application foundation, management
Adapt to majors : information management and information systems, e-commerce, business management, financial management
Textbooks and reference books:
Edited by Chen Xiaohong and others. Information System Tutorial. Beijing: Tsinghua University Press, 2003;
Page 12
Edited by Huang Tiyun. Management Information System. Beijing: Higher Education Press, 2000
Course introduction :
This course is a comprehensive and practical subject and course. It is based on C language programming.
Fundamentals, database application fundamentals and management are the important knowledge and skills that management college students should possess.
This is especially true in the information age. The basic content of this course includes management information system overview, management
Information system technology foundation, system development method, system planning, system analysis, system design, system implementation,
The development trend of management information system and other parts. The focus is on system planning, system analysis, system design and
System implementation and other content. At the same time, the actual information system construction case should be analyzed to enable students to broaden their horizons and expand
Combine broad thinking, theory and practice. Through learning, make students have a better understanding of the role and construction of the management information system
Basic understanding to train students in the investigation, system analysis, system design and system management of management information systems
And the ability to maintain, better adapt to the needs of enterprise informatization.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a comprehensive and practical subject and course, which is based on C language programming
Fundamentals, database application fundamentals and management are the important knowledge and skills that management college students should possess.
This is especially true in the information age. Through learning, enable students to play a role in the management information system and construction
Have a basic understanding and train them to investigate, system analysis, system design and system management of management information systems
The ability of management and maintenance can better meet the needs of enterprise informatization.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The basic content of this course includes management information system overview, management information system technical foundation, system development
Development methods, system planning, system analysis, system design, system implementation, management information system development trends
Wait a few parts. The focus is on system planning, system analysis, system design, and system implementation. At the same time
Cases of actual information system construction should be analyzed to enable students to broaden their horizons, broaden their thinking, and integrate theory with practice
Together. The course content can be divided into about 8 chapters.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
(1) Basic concepts and theoretical basis
1. Teaching content and requirements:
Grasp the related concepts of management information system and the relationship between information system and management.
(1) Basic concepts of information
(2) Concept of system and information system
(3) Information system and management
(4) Concept of management information system
(5) The structure of information system and the category of management information system
(6) The relationship between the management information system and the organization
2. Teaching focus: the concept, classification, characteristics, level, life cycle of information; data, information and
The relationship of knowledge; the concept, classification and characteristics of the system; the significance of information management in enterprise management;
The relationship between the information system and the organization.
3. Teaching difficulties: the relationship between data, information and knowledge; the relationship between management information systems and organizations.
(2) Technical basis
1. Teaching content and requirements:
Page 13
Familiar with the relevant technologies required for management information systems.
(1) Computer hardware and software technology
(2) Computer network technology
(3) Data communication technology
(4) Database management technology
2. Teaching focus: network topology sorting; data communication system model; data structure and file grouping
Organization type; E-R diagram, introduction to paradigm.
3. Teaching difficulties: the development stage of data processing; the organization and level of data; the development of relational databases
concept.
(3) Development method of management information system
1. Teaching content and requirements:
Master the common development methods of management information systems.
(1) Structured system development method
(2) Prototype method
(3) Other development methods
2. Teaching focus: the basic ideas, process, advantages and disadvantages of the structured system development method and the prototype method
Conditions apply.
3. Teaching difficulties: the difference between structured system development method and prototype method
(4) System planning
1. Teaching content and requirements:
Master the role, content and methods of system planning.
(1) Tasks and characteristics of system planning
(2) Nolan model and its guiding role in system planning
(3) Enterprise System Planning Law
(4) Key success factor method and strategic target transfer method
(5) Business process reengineering
2. Teaching focus: the basics of enterprise system planning method, critical success factor method and strategic goal transfer method
Ideas, processes, tools and advantages and disadvantages; the basic ideas and implementation strategies of business process reengineering.
3. Teaching difficulties: the difference between the enterprise system planning method, the key success factor method and the strategic goal transfer method.
(5) System analysis
1. Teaching content and requirements:
Master the content and tools of system analysis; master the mutual transformation of business flowcharts and data flowcharts.
(1) The content and investigation method of system analysis
(2) Investigation and analysis of organizational structure and functions
(3) Business process investigation and analysis
(4) Investigation and analysis of data and data flow
(5) Investigation and analysis of business processing
(6) Function/data analysis
(7) New system logic model
2. Teaching focus: business flow chart; data flow chart; data dictionary; processing logic.
3. Teaching difficulties: the drawing of business flowcharts; the drawing of data flowcharts; the content of the data dictionary
Writing; a description tool for processing logic.
(6) System design
Page 14
1. Teaching content and requirements:
Master the content and tools of system design.
(1) System design overview
(2) System overall structure design
(3) Code design
(4) Database design
(5) Input and output design
(6) Process design
(7) The content of the system design report
2. Teaching focus: module structure diagram, program block diagram; database storage design
3. Teaching difficulties: the concept, function and classification of codes; the format design of input and output.
(7) System implementation and management
1. Teaching content and requirements
Master the key issues of system implementation, be familiar with the method of system testing, understand the method of system conversion,
Grasp the content of system maintenance and clarify the main content of system evaluation.
(1) Overview of system implementation
(2) System test
(3) System conversion
(4) System operation management and maintenance
(5) Systematic evaluation
2. Teaching focus: the basic ideas of structured system implementation; preparation and conversion methods before system conversion;
The content of system maintenance.
3. Teaching difficulties: the content and methods of system testing; the content of system evaluation.
(8) Development trend and frontier
1. Teaching content and requirements:
Understand the production and development of decision support systems and knowledge management systems. Master the Decision Support System (DSS)
Definition, function, composition and relationship with MIS. Familiar with the concepts of smart DSS and group DSS and
composition. Master the development history and main research fields of artificial intelligence.
(1) Decision support system
(2) Knowledge management system
2. Teaching focus: the definition, function, composition of decision support system (DSS) and the relationship with MIS
system.
3. Teaching difficulties: the relationship among decision support systems (DSS), MIS and artificial intelligence
4. Requirements for course practice
no.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One Basic Concepts and Theoretical Foundation
4
Chapter 2 Technical Foundation
6
2
Chapter III Management Information System Development Methods
4
Page 15
Chapter 4 System Planning
4
Chapter 5 System Analysis
11
6
Chapter VI System Design
9
4
Chapter 7 System Implementation and Management
7
4
Chapter 8 Development Trends and Frontiers
2
Summary of Full Course Study
1
6. Course assessment method
(1) Experiment: 20%
(2) Class participation: 10%
(3) Examination: 70%
7. Formulation writer: Tang Zhongjun
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Computer programming
Course Number : 160204X1
Course Title : Computer Programming
English name : Computer Programming
Class hours and credits : 56/3.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 24)
Prerequisites : University Computer Fundamentals
Adapt to majors : majors in business school
Textbooks and reference books :
Textbook:
Tan Haoqiang, "C Programming (Fourth Edition)", Tsinghua University Press, June 2010
reference book:
Tan Haoqiang, "C Programming (Fourth Edition) Learning Guidance", Tsinghua University Press, 2010 7
month
Course introduction :
The computer programming course is an elective basic course for all majors of the business school. This course is through
After introducing computer programming language-(currently mainly introducing high-level programming language-C language)
Data types, operations, sentence structure and basic methods of programming, so that students understand the programming
Basic concepts and methods, learn to use C language to solve general computer application problems.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
The computer programming course is an elective basic course for all majors of the business school.
A course for learning advanced computer programming languages.
Page 16
This course introduces data types, operations and sentences in computer programming language (C language)
The basic method of structure and program design enables students to master a high-level programming language and understand program design
The basic concepts and methods of calculation, and then learn to use the C language to learn to solve general application problems, and for the "data
Structure" and other follow-up courses lay the foundation for program design.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Master various data types, operators, three basic sentence flow structures in C language, and C language
Write custom functions, understand the relationship between functions and programs. Train students to design and compile in combination with practical applications
The ability of effective procedures.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. C language overview
·The development and characteristics of C language
·The structural characteristics and general writing format of C program
·Computer steps of C program
2. Algorithm
·The concept and characteristics of the algorithm
·Three basic structures of structured program and NS structure flow chart.
3. Data types, operators and expressions (emphasis)
·The concept of identifiers, constants and variables; integer, single-precision real, double-precision in the basic data types
Definition and usage of real type, character type constant and variable
·Arithmetic operators and arithmetic expressions, assignment operators and assignment expressions
·The priority and associativity of operators; the way of data type conversion; self-increment and self-decrement operations
·Data input function
·Data output function
4. Sequential programming (emphasis)
·The grammatical format of assignment statement, input and output statement
·The basic method of sequence structure programming
5. Select structure program design (emphasis)
·The composition of expression statements, the composition of compound statements, the grammar and usage of if statements and switch statements
law
·Relational operators and relational expressions, logical operators and logical expressions, conditional operators and conditions
expression
·Select the basic method of structural programming
6. Cycle control (emphasis)
·The syntax and usage of while statement, do-while statement and for statement
·The syntax and usage of break statement and continue statement
·Comma operator and comma expression
·Program design method of loop control structure
7. Array (emphasis)
·The definition and use of one-dimensional array
·The definition and use of two-dimensional array
·The definition and use of character arrays, commonly used string processing functions
Page 17
8. Function (difficulty)
·The concept of the function, the definition of the function, the formal and actual parameters of the function, and the return value of the function
·Method of function call, nested call of function, recursive call of function, parameters of function call
transfer
·Array as function parameter, pointer as function parameter, main() function parameter
·Local variables and global variables
·The concept of internal function and external function
9. Preprocessing commands
Use of pre-compiled macro definition commands, file include commands and conditional compilation commands
10. Pointer (difficulty)
·The concept of pointers, the definition and assignment of pointer variables, pointer operators, pointer operations
·The definition and application of one-dimensional array pointers and string pointers
11. Structure and Union
·The concept and definition of structure type, structure variable, structure array and structure variable pointer
Definitions, member operators and references to structure variables
·The concept and definition of union type, the concept and definition of enumeration type, use typedef to define the type
4. Requirements for course practice
This course is both theoretical and practical courses. In addition to appropriate thinking exercises, each section also
Equipped with basic hands-on experiments, using Microsoft Visual C++ (or other C language tools) as
development tools. The content and requirements of the experiment are as follows:
1. The basics of editing, compiling and running C programs under the Microsoft Visual C++ integrated development environment
Method of operation.
2. The use of constants and variables, the use of plastic data, real data and character data, and data output
Use of functions and data entry functions;
3. Sequence structure, selection structure, cycle structure program design;
4. Definition and use of one-dimensional arrays, definition and use of character arrays, common string processing functions
use;
5. Function definition, function call and parameter transfer, function nested call, local variable and global
Use of local variables;
6. Use of pre-compiled macro definition commands, file include commands and conditional compilation commands;
7. Definition and initialization of pointer variables, pointer operations, application of array pointer variables, string pointers
Application of variables;
8. The definition, initialization and reference of structure variables.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
One of the experiments (computer hours)
Remarks
1
C language overview
4
2
2
algorithm
2
0
3
Data types, operators and tables
Express
6
2
4
Sequential programming
4
2
5
Select structure programming
4
2
Page 18
6
Loop control
6
4
7
Array
6
2
8
function
10
4
9
pointer
8
4
10
Structure and union
4
2
review
2
0
6. Course assessment method
The examination mainly adopts the closed-book method. The scope of the examination should cover all the content taught, and the content of the examination should be able to
Views reflect students’ memory and mastery of the main concepts of this course, and their understanding and mastery of relevant theories
And comprehensive application ability. Exam question types should be as diverse as possible.
Overall assessment results: 30% of the usual homework, 70% of the closed-book examination.
7. Formulation Author: Chen Ke
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Database application foundation
Course Number : 160206X1
Course Name : Basics of Database Application
English name : Database Technology and Application
Class hours and credits : 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 16)
Prerequisites : University computer foundation, computer programming
Adapt to majors : majors in business school
Textbooks and reference books :
1. Textbook
Editor-in-Chief Gao Yang. Database Technology and Application (2nd Edition). Publishing House of Electronics Industry, September 2009
2. reference book
[1] Miao Xuelan, editor in chief. Database technology and application. China Machinery Industry Press, March 2005
[2] Books on relational database language SQL
[3] SQL SERVER related reference books
Course introduction :
This course mainly teaches the introduction of database system, relational database system, the normative theory of relational database,
Relational database standard language SQL, relational data design, database storage technology, database security protection,
ORACLE database or SQL SERVER, WEB data management, etc. Through the study of this course, both
Enable students to master the basic concepts of database systems and understand the basic design methods of database application systems, and be able to
Learn to manage relational databases so that students can acquire the initial ability to develop and manage database systems.
Syllabus:
Page 19
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a compulsory professional basic course for all majors in our college. Major in information management and information systems and electronics
For business majors, it is one of the computer courses that these two majors must offer, and it is directly related to
The basic requirements for the training of these two professionals are that students are required to be proficient in database technology and management
The basic theory and practical knowledge of the database, with the ability to analyze, design, maintain and manage the database. another
On the one hand, it is a follow-up course for students of these two majors, such as "Management Information System", "E-commerce Solution"
The basis of "Case Analysis of Solution". Therefore, the course is in the major of information management and information system and e-commerce
The courses offered by the business major occupies a very important position.
For the rest of the majors, this course is designed to ensure that the computer is continuously online for the first 3 years.
One of the computer courses. Today's human society has entered the information age. Information technology, including database technology
It is more and more widely used in economic activities and social life, and college students in management and business have entered the society
In the future, learning, work, and almost all need to deal with the database. Therefore, the foundation of database technology and management
This knowledge should become the common sense of college students, not a theory shelved. It can be seen that this course is
The needs of the knowledge structure that the graduates of science and business majors should have are the needs of their basic qualities.
The purpose of this course is to enable students to master the basic theories of the database through the study of this course.
Don't be the basic principle of relational databases. Train students to have a certain database foundation through the teaching of this course
Knowledge and practical application ability. Through the teaching, experiment and course design of this course, students can master the data
The basic concept of database system and the basic design method of database application system, and can learn to manage relational data
The database enables students to acquire the initial ability to develop and manage database systems.
In short, this course aims to train students to master the basic theory and practical knowledge of database technology and management
Knowledge, so that it has the ability to design and operate database systems proficiently, in order to improve its comprehensive quality.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the classroom teaching and computer training of this course, students are required to:
(1) Master the basic concepts and theories of database systems, including the characteristics and basics of databases
Concepts, relational algebra, data query methods and relational database theory.
(2) Master basic database technologies and methods, including database design methods and database integrity
Protection technologies such as security control, concurrency mechanism, recovery mechanism, and relational database standard language SQL, etc., and can be used
A popular DBMS design database and query and update operations on the database.
(3) Understand the development and trend of databases, and cultivate students' hands-on ability.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of this course is as follows: Introduction to Database System, Relational Database System, Relational Database
Normative theory, relational database standard language SQL, relational data design, database storage technology, database
Security protection, ORACLE database or SQL SERVER, WEB data management, etc., among which the database
The basic theory and technology of technology and management, such as the normative theory of relational database, SQL language, database
Design, database security management, etc., are the focus and difficulty of this course.
4. Requirements for course practice
On the basis of learning the basic principles of databases, master the analysis, design and related aspects of relational databases
Close operation, train students to analyze and solve problems. The main objectives are as follows:
(1) Enabling students to deepen their understanding of the basic concepts, basic principles and technical principles of database technology and management
And be able to use its theories, techniques and methods to solve practical problems.
Page 20
(2) Cultivate students' hands-on ability. Students can use the knowledge they have learned to build a database and learn to
The database is operated and managed.
(3) The overall quality of students has been improved overall. Through experimental teaching, not only trains students
The ability to analyze and solve problems, but also to cultivate their innovative ability and independent learning ability.
(4) Cultivate a rigorous and scientific work attitude and style. Cultivate students’ innovative ability for learning other
The curriculum and future research in related fields lay a solid foundation. At the same time, induce students to think divergently,
Cultivate students' sense of innovation.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Chapter 1 Introduction to Database System (3 class hours)
Chapter 2 Relational Database System (3 class hours)
Chapter 3 Normative Theory of Relational Database (3 class hours)
Chapter 4 Relational Database Standard Language SQL (8 class hours for teaching, 12 class hours for hands-on experiment)
Chapter 5 Relational Data Design (4 class hours)
Chapter 6 Database Storage Technology (3 class hours)
Chapter 7 Database Security Protection (4 class hours)
Chapter 8 ORACLE (8 class hours of lecture, 8 class hours of hands-on experiment)-optional lecture
Chapter 9 SQL SERVER (8 class hours, 4 class hours for computer experiment)
Chapter 10 WEB Data Management (4 class hours, 4 class hours for computer experiment)-optional lecture
Note: The content of Chapter 8 or Chapter 9 is selected according to the professional characteristics .
6. Course assessment method
Take the assessment method that combines actual operation assessment and experiment report scoring.
Total score scoring: 70% of assessment results, 30% of usual results.
7. Formulation writer: Wang Jianqiang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Data Communication and Computer Network
Course Number : 160207X1
Course Title : Data Communication and Computer Network
English name : Data Communication and Computer Network
Class hours and credits : 56/3.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 8)
Prerequisite course requirements : computer culture foundation, computer practice (two weeks), database technology and application, data
Database technology and application course design (two weeks)
Applicable majors : major in information management and information systems, major in e-commerce (compulsory), major in business administration
Etc. (optional).
Page 21
Textbooks and reference books :
(1) Teaching materials:
Gao Yang, Network Technology and Application, Tsinghua University Press, published in 2008
(2) Reference book:
[1] Gao Yang, Principles and Practical Technology of Computer Networks, Tsinghua University Press, published in 2008
[2] Chen Hui, Data Communication Technology and Application, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications Press, April 2007.
[3] Wang Jian, Network Interconnection and System Integration, Publishing House of Electronics Industry, April 2007.
[4] Xie Xiren, Computer Network, Dalian University of Technology Press, September 2006
[5] Li Qiangwei, Mobile Communication Technology, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications Press, August 2005.
[6] Yao Jianyong, etc., Optical Fiber Principle and Technology, Science Press, May 2005.
[7] Xue Yongyi, Access Network Technology, Machinery Industry Press, January 2005
Course introduction :
This course system introduces the basic knowledge, basic principles, typical network communication technology,
Computer network composition, computer network operating system, Internet, computer network security, network engineering
Contents such as information management and information system, e-commerce and business administration
Professional basic courses.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Data Communication and Computer Network" is the product of the close combination of computer technology and communication technology. This lesson
The program systematically introduced the basic knowledge, basic principles and basic technology of computer
Basic courses for majors in science and information systems, e-commerce, and business administration.
This course aims to enable students to master the basic theories and basic techniques of computer networks and cultivate practical skills
For students majoring in information management and information systems and e-commerce majors should also have analysis, design,
Preliminary ability to maintain the computer network system, for students in other majors such as business administration should also focus on mastering
The basic tools of computer network application, have the ability to operate the Internet proficiently, and improve their comprehensive quality.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the study of this course, master the basic theory of computer network, especially the typical network communication technology
The basic principles of technology and local area networks. Because network communication technology is the basis of computer networks, and local area networks are
The basic unit of an area network, a wide area network is generally formed by interconnecting local area networks. Therefore, for digitization, digital transmission,
Analog transmission, communication media, multiplexing, data exchange, and LAN media access control methods and systems
The basic principles and technologies of structure, networking technology, and high-speed LAN must be clearly understood and mastered. In addition,
The mastery of network management and application should be emphasized according to different majors. For information management and information systems
Professional students should also have the preliminary ability to analyze and design computer network systems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
This course is divided into eight chapters: computer network overview, basic principles of computer network, typical network communication
Technology, computer network composition, computer network operating system, Internet, computer network security, network
Network Engineering and Management.
The focus is on computer network overview, computer network communication principles, typical network communication technologies,
Internet.
Page 22
4. Requirements for course practice
There are 5 experiments in this course: local area network formation, Internet application, Windows network operation system
System configuration and use, Windows 2000 file system and shared resource management, and the realization of Active Directory
And management.
The experiment requirements are as follows:
1. Students prepare before class, familiarize themselves with the experiment content, and consult materials as required.
2. Students should independently complete the experiment content and cultivate the ability to analyze and solve problems.
3. According to the needs of the experiment, students are divided into groups to cultivate students' collaboration ability.
4. After each experiment, students are required to submit a written experiment report.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
48 hours of lectures in class and 8 hours of experiments. The lecture content and class hours are as follows:
chapter
content
Lecture hours
Chapter 1
Introduction to Computer Network
4
chapter 2
Basic principles of computer networks
8
Chapter 3
Typical network communication technology
8
Chapter 4
Computer network composition
6
Chapter 5
Computer network operating system
4
Chapter 6
Internet
6
Chapter 7
Computer network security
8
Chapter 8
Network Engineering and Management
4
total
48
6. Course assessment method
1. 65% of closed book exams.
2. Experimental assessment 20%.
3. 15% of homework, questions and case discussions.
7. Formulation writer: Gao Yang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Accounting report analysis
Course number : 160301X1
Course Name: Accounting Statement Analysis
English name : Analysis of Financial Statements
Class hours and credits : 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Page 23
Prerequisite course requirements : basic accounting
Adapt to majors: industry and commerce, international trade, credit management, accounting, finance, e-commerce, finance
Reference textbook: The first edition of "Enterprise Financial Analysis", edited by Yuan Tianrong, Machinery Industry Press, 2011
Course introduction:
This course is for undergraduates majoring in business, accounting, financial management, international trade, credit management, e-commerce, finance, etc.
Basic courses or elective courses, the purpose of which is to enable students to fully and systematically understand the analysis of accounting statements
The basic principles and basic methods are able to conduct a comprehensive and systematic analysis of the accounting statements of a specific enterprise.
More scientifically evaluate the financial status, operating results and cash flow of the company; be able to find that the company’s financial management,
The problems in operation management make management focus and pertinence. So that students can do financial work in the future
Lay a theoretical foundation to better adapt to and serve the society.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is for undergraduates majoring in business, accounting, financial management, international trade, credit management, e-commerce, finance, etc.
Basic courses or elective courses, the purpose of which is to enable students to fully and systematically understand the analysis of accounting statements
The basic principles and basic methods of, so that students can lay a theoretical foundation for future financial work, so as to better adapt to
Society and service society.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Financial reports are written documents that reflect the financial status, operating results, cash flow and cost levels of the company.
It is a comprehensive reflection of the level of business management. Stakeholders of an enterprise must understand the situation of the enterprise.
Perform financial analysis to meet the needs of business management, investment decision-making, and macro management. Through this course
For learning, students should prepare before class and complete the exercises after class. Familiar with financial ratios and use them to analyze companies
The solvency, operating ability, profitability and development ability of the industry, using the knowledge learned to analyze the income
Income and profit, costs and risks, etc.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
chapter
Fundamental contents
weight
point
difficult
point
Chapter 1 Financial Analysis Theory
whether
chapter 2
Financial analysis method
2.1
Comparative analysis
whether
2.2
Ratio analysis
whether
2.3
Trend analysis
whether
2.4
Factor analysis
whether
2.5
Graphical Analysis
whether
Chapter 3 Analysis of Corporate Profitability
3.1
The purpose of corporate profitability analysis
Yes Yes
3.2
Asset profitability analysis
Yes Yes
3.3
Operating profitability analysis
Yes Yes
3.4
Analysis of Profitability of Listed Companies
Yes Yes
3.5
Analysis of Enterprise Profit Quality
Yes Yes
Chapter 4 Analysis of Enterprise Operational Capability
Page 24
4.1
The purpose of business capability analysis
Yes Yes
4.2
Analysis of current assets operating capability
Yes Yes
4.3
Analysis of non-current assets operating capability
Yes Yes
4.4
Analysis of total asset operating capacity
Yes Yes
Chapter 5 Analysis of Corporate Solvency
5.1
The purpose of corporate solvency analysis
Yes Yes
5.2
Analysis of Enterprise's Short-term Solvency
Yes Yes
5.3
Analysis of Long-term Debt Paying Ability of Enterprises
Yes Yes
Chapter 6 Enterprise Development Capability Analysis
6.1
The purpose of enterprise development capability analysis
Yes Yes
6.2
Analysis of Enterprise Development Ability Index
Yes Yes
6.3
Continuous growth strategy analysis
Yes Yes
Chapter 7 Comprehensive Financial Analysis
7.1
Features of Comprehensive Financial Analysis
Yes Yes
7.2
DuPont analysis
Yes Yes
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Chapter Name
class
1
Financial analysis theory
2
2
Financial analysis method
4
3
Enterprise profitability analysis
6
4
Analysis of Enterprise Operational Capability
6
5
Analysis of corporate solvency
6
6
Analysis of Enterprise Development Ability
6
7
Comprehensive financial analysis
2
6. Course assessment method
1. 70% of the closed book exam.
2. 30% of homework, questions and case discussions.
7. Formulation writer: Xiu Zongfeng
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
fundamental accounting
Page 25
Course Number : 160302X1
Course Title : Basic Accounting
English name: Basic Accounting
Class hours and credits : 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 12)
Prerequisite course requirements : Microeconomics
Adapt to majors : accounting, financial management, finance, e-commerce, information management, international trade and other majors,
marketing
Reference textbook : edited by Li Haibo. Principles of Accounting. Lixin Accounting Press, 2011
Edited by Liu Dongrong and Lu Jiayou. "Basic Accounting". Hunan People's Publishing House, 2011
Course introduction:
As a public basic course, "Basic Accounting" teaches students the basic knowledge, basic
Methods and basic skills, this course fully considers the "three basics", so that students can learn from society
Based on the environment of economy and enterprise operation, we should look at the status and role of the accounting system in it, and how to achieve this
This kind of value, the quality and ability that accountants should have.
Syllabus:
1. The nature, purpose and tasks of the course
"Basic Accounting" is a basic course in the subject system of "Accounting". This course explains "Accounting"
The basic concepts, basic theories and basic skills.
The teaching purpose of the course "Basic Accounting" is to clarify the basic functions and characteristics of accounting;
The importance of work to strengthen the economic management of the enterprise and improve the economic efficiency of the enterprise; understand the accounting method
The basic content: master the basic skills of accounting methods: know how to use accounting to provide information,
For economic management services.
The task of the "Basic Accounting" course is to enable students to master the basic concepts, basic theories and
The basic method of accounting.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Understand the basic knowledge and related knowledge of this course.
2. Understand the basic concepts and basic principles of this course, and deeply understand the important concepts and principles
Rationale.
3. Master the basic methods and basic skills of accounting, and be able to comprehensively use the basic methods and basic skills learned
Skills, according to the given conditions, handle accounting business issues flexibly and freely.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Summary
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the process of accounting generation and development;
(2) Understand the concepts and functions of accounting;
(3) Master the basic premise of accounting and the quality requirements of accounting information;
(4) Proficiency in accounting elements.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: The functions and elements of accounting.
Difficulty: the basic premise of accounting and the quality requirements of accounting information.
Page 26
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability of comprehensive analysis.
(2) Ability to judge
4. Explanation: This chapter is the first time that students are exposed to accounting knowledge, and it is inevitable that there are areas that are not easy to understand. So teach
Teachers should pay special attention to patiently and meticulously explain to students by using analogies and examples.
Chapter II Accounting Subjects and Accounts
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the meaning, principles and classification of setting up accounting subjects;
(2) Understand the basic principles of accounting equations;
(3) Grasp the impact of economic business on accounting equations;
(4) Familiar with the structure and classification of accounts and the relationship between accounting subjects and accounts.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: the structure and classification of accounts.
Difficulty: the relationship between accounting subjects and accounts.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability to analyze problems.
(2) Have the ability to solve problems.
4. Explanation: The content involved in this section has strong applicability in accounting practice and has a wide range of applications.
Learn the basics of the following chapters. Teachers should adopt a step-by-step approach, so that students can grasp on the basis of understanding
Grasp knowledge points.
Chapter III Double Entry Bookkeeping
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the basic meaning and theoretical basis of double-entry bookkeeping;
(2) Understand the basic content of the debit and credit accounting method;
(3) Master the accounting symbols, account structure, accounting rules, accounting entries and trial calculations of the debit and credit accounting method
balance.
2. Key points and difficulties
Key points: the accounting symbols, account structure, accounting rules, accounting entries, and trial balance of the debit and credit accounting method.
Difficulty: The registration and trial balance of the debit and credit accounting method account.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability to analyze problems.
(2) Have the ability to solve problems.
4. Explanation: The content learned in this section is the only way for accounting work and the basis for subsequent chapters. teach
Teachers should adopt a step-by-step approach to enable students to master the basic methods based on understanding.
Chapter 4 Accounting of Main Economic Business
Section 1 Accounting of Fund Raising Business
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the financing channels;
(2) Understand the accounting subjects involved in the accounting treatment of financing;
(3) Master the accounting treatment of fundraising.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: Accounting treatment of financing.
Difficulty: Accounting treatment of financing.
Page 27
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability to analyze problems.
(2) Have the ability to solve problems.
4. Explanation: This chapter is an exercise of the basic methods of the previous chapter, and it is also an introduction to the main economic business of industrial enterprises.
To understanding. The accounting entries in this section should be done step by step according to the procedures, so that students can fully understand. Students should practice more. Make
Do more exercises after class.
Section 2 Business Accounting in the Supply Phase
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the accounting subjects involved in the supply process;
(2) Understand several situations in the supply process of industrial enterprises and the handling of purchase costs;
(3) Master the accounting treatment of the supply process;
(4) Familiar with the use of "material procurement" and "raw material" accounts.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: Accounting treatment of the supply process.
Difficulty: the treatment of value-added tax.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability of comprehensive analysis.
(2) Have the ability to deal with problems.
4. Explanation: Teachers should clarify the content of each subject's accounting. Students should distinguish between different situations and adopt
Take different methods to deal with.
Section 3 Business Accounting at the Production Stage
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the scope of the production process;
(2) Understand the accounting titles used in the production process;
(3) Master the accounting treatment of the production process.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: Accounting treatment of the production process.
Difficulty: Accounting treatment of the production process.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability of comprehensive analysis.
(2) Have the ability to deal with problems.
4. Explanation: This section contains more content and involves more accounting subjects. Teachers should distinguish levels
Explain gradually. In particular, it is necessary to distinguish the difference between "manufacturing expenses" and "production costs". Students should repeat
Study, do more homework.
Section 4 Business Accounting at the Sales Stage
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the important position of the sales process in the production and operation of industrial enterprises;
(2) Understand the accounting subjects used in the sales process;
(3) Master the accounting treatment of the sales process.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: Accounting treatment of the sales process.
Difficulty: the treatment of value-added tax.
3. Ability training requirements
Page 28
(1) Have the ability of comprehensive analysis.
(2) Have the ability to deal with problems.
4. Explanation: The accounting treatment in this section is different from the previous three sections: it is no longer a step-by-step advance but
Start in this session. Teachers should pay attention to their differences. Students should pay attention to the different processing methods of different links,
Practice and write more homework.
Section 5 Business Accounting in the Formation and Distribution of Profits
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the composition of the company's profit during the accounting period;
(2) Understand the accounts that need to be set up for profit formation and distribution business accounting;
(3) Master the accounting treatment of profit formation and distribution process.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: Accounting treatment of profit formation and distribution process.
Difficulty: Accounting treatment of profit formation and distribution process.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability of comprehensive analysis.
(2) Have the ability to deal with problems.
4. Description: The content of this section is relatively comprehensive. When teaching, you should contact the content of the previous sections to achieve integration
Run through.
Chapter 5 Accounting Documents
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the relationship between original vouchers and bookkeeping vouchers, as well as the transfer and custody procedures of accounting vouchers;
(2) Understand the basic content, function and classification of accounting documents;
(3) Master the filling requirements and filling methods of original vouchers and accounting vouchers.
2. Key points and difficulties
Emphasis: the filling of accounting vouchers.
Difficulty: Fill in the accounting vouchers.
3. Ability training requirements
Have the ability to deal with problems.
4. Explanation: The problem learned in this chapter is the first link in economic business encountered in actual work. have to
Ensure that the start is correct, and the future work can be correct. Therefore, we must master the processing methods of this link.
Chapter VI Accounting Books
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the meaning and setting principles of accounting books;
(2) Understand the types and formats of account books and the use of account books;
(3) Master the method of account book registration, the correction of wrong accounts, the method of reconciliation and settlement.
2. Key points and difficulties
Key point: the method of registering account books.
Difficulty: reconciliation and checkout.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability to solve practical problems;
(2) Have the ability to read.
4. Description: This chapter is the next step of the accounting work method's follow-up system and verification vouchers. And actual
Work is closely linked. Pay attention to the connection with practice during the lecture.
Page 29
Chapter 7 Accounting Processing Procedure
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the meaning and requirements of accounting procedures;
(2) Grasp the method steps of the accounting procedure of the bookkeeping vouchers and the accounting procedure of the account summary table;.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: Account summary table of account processing procedures.
Difficulty: Accounting procedures for bookkeeping vouchers.
3. Ability training requirements
Have the ability to analyze problems.
4. Description: The content learned in this chapter is the procedural arrangement of accounting work. Should be mastered on the basis of understanding
Management procedures and methods.
Chapter 8 Property Inventory
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the meaning of property inventory;
(2) Understand the inventory system of property materials;
(3) Master the content and methods of property inventory and the handling of inventory results.
2. Key points and difficulties
Key points: the content and methods of property inventory and the handling of inventory results.
Difficulties: the content and methods of property inventory and the handling of inventory results.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability to analyze problems;
(2) Have the ability to deal with problems.
4. Explanation: This chapter is aimed at the fact that there are often inconsistencies between the actual number of account books and property materials in actual work.
Inconsistent records between the relevant accounts will also appear. Property inventory is used to ensure that the accounts are consistent and the accounts are verified.
Match.
Chapter 9 Financial Accounting Report
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the meaning and types of accounting statements;
(2) Understand the structure and principle of balance sheet and income statement.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: the structure of the balance sheet and income statement.
Difficulty: the structure of the balance sheet and income statement.
3. Ability training requirements
Have the ability to analyze problems.
4. Explanation: Although accounting statements are very important to accounting work, they should not be mastered in accounting principles. because
Too difficult for beginners. If you fail to learn it, it will have side effects. Teachers in this chapter should inform students
Talk: Accounting statements do not need to be mastered.
4. Requirements for course practice
Experiment 1: Accounting voucher filling and review
Basic requirements: Make students master the filling and review of accounting vouchers through experiments.
Main content: 1. Understand the concept and types of original documents;
2. Master the content, items and review of the original certificate;
Page 30
3. Understanding and cognition: the concepts and types of general accounting voucher, receipt voucher, payment voucher and transfer voucher
Class, format;
4. Master the content of accounting vouchers, fill in and review items;
5. Master the compilation of subject summary tables and trial balance sheets;
6. Master the binding of accounting documents.
Experiment 2: Accounting Book Registration
Basic requirements: Make students master accounting book registration through experiments.
Main content: 1. Understand the concepts and types of accounting books;
2. Recognize the items and format of accounting books;
3. Master the registration of accounting books;
4. Master the method and content of reconciliation and settlement;
5. Master the method of correcting wrong accounts.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Class time allocation
chapter
topic
Teach
experiment
Exercise class, discussion class
1 General
2
2 Accounting subjects and accounts
2
3 Double-entry bookkeeping
4
4 Main business processing
10
5 Accounting documents
4
6
6 Accounting books
4
6
7 Accounting procedures
4
8 Property inventory
4
9 Financial Accounting Report
2
total
36
12
Prepare
Note
6. Course assessment method
Normal grades account for 30% of the total grades (including attendance, questioning, homework, etc.), and final grades account for the total grades
70% of it. The final exam is a closed book exam.
7. Formulation Writer: Yu Kai
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 31
fundamental accounting
Course Number : 160302X1
Course Title: Basic Accounting
English name : Basic Accounting
Class hours and credits : 48/3
Prerequisite course requirements : Microeconomics
Adapt to major: business administration
Reference textbook: edited by Li Haibo. Principles of Accounting. Lixin Accounting Press, 2011
Edited by Liu Dongrong and Lu Jiayou. "Basic Accounting". Hunan People's Publishing House, 2011
Course introduction :
As a public basic course, "Basic Accounting" teaches students the basic knowledge, basic
Methods and basic skills, this course fully considers the "three basics", so that students can learn from society
Based on the environment of economy and enterprise operation, we should look at the status and role of the accounting system in it, and how to achieve this
This kind of value, the quality and ability that accountants should have.
Syllabus:
1. The nature, purpose and tasks of the course
"Basic Accounting" is a basic course in the subject system of "Accounting". This course explains "Accounting"
The basic concepts, basic theories and basic skills.
The teaching purpose of the course "Basic Accounting" is to clarify the basic functions and characteristics of accounting;
The importance of work to strengthen the economic management of the enterprise and improve the economic efficiency of the enterprise; understand the accounting method
The basic content: master the basic skills of accounting methods: know how to use accounting to provide information,
For economic management services.
The task of the "Basic Accounting" course is to enable students to master the basic concepts, basic theories and
The basic method of accounting.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Understand the basic knowledge and related knowledge of this course.
2. Understand the basic concepts and basic principles of this course, and deeply understand the important concepts and principles
Rationale.
3. Master the basic methods and basic skills of accounting, and be able to comprehensively use the basic methods and basic skills learned
Skills, according to the given conditions, handle accounting business issues flexibly and freely.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Summary
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the process of accounting generation and development;
(2) Understand the concepts and functions of accounting;
(3) Master the basic premise of accounting and the quality requirements of accounting information;
(4) Proficiency in accounting elements.
Page 32
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: The functions and elements of accounting.
Difficulty: the basic premise of accounting and the quality requirements of accounting information.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability of comprehensive analysis.
(2) Ability to judge
4. Explanation: This chapter is the first time that students are exposed to accounting knowledge, and it is inevitable that there are areas that are not easy to understand. So teach
Teachers should pay special attention to patiently and meticulously explain to students by using analogies and examples.
Chapter II Accounting Subjects and Accounts
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the meaning, principles and classification of setting up accounting subjects;
(2) Understand the basic principles of accounting equations;
(3) Grasp the impact of economic business on accounting equations;
(4) Familiar with the structure and classification of accounts and the relationship between accounting subjects and accounts.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: the structure and classification of accounts.
Difficulty: the relationship between accounting subjects and accounts.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability to analyze problems.
(2) Have the ability to solve problems.
4. Explanation: The content involved in this section has strong applicability in accounting practice and has a wide range of applications.
Learn the basics of the following chapters. Teachers should adopt a step-by-step approach, so that students can grasp on the basis of understanding
Grasp knowledge points.
Chapter III Double Entry Bookkeeping
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the basic meaning and theoretical basis of double-entry bookkeeping;
(2) Understand the basic content of the debit and credit accounting method;
(3) Master the accounting symbols, account structure, accounting rules, accounting entries and trial calculations of the debit and credit accounting method
balance.
2. Key points and difficulties
Key points: the accounting symbols, account structure, accounting rules, accounting entries, and trial balance of the debit and credit accounting method.
Difficulty: The registration and trial balance of the debit and credit accounting method account.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability to analyze problems.
(2) Have the ability to solve problems.
4. Explanation: The content learned in this section is the only way for accounting work and the basis for subsequent chapters. teach
Teachers should adopt a step-by-step approach to enable students to master the basic methods based on understanding.
Chapter 4 Accounting of Main Economic Business
Section 1 Accounting of Fund Raising Business
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the financing channels;
(2) Understand the accounting subjects involved in the accounting treatment of financing;
(3) Master the accounting treatment of fundraising.
Page 33
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: Accounting treatment of financing.
Difficulty: Accounting treatment of financing.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability to analyze problems.
(2) Have the ability to solve problems.
4. Explanation: This chapter is an exercise of the basic methods of the previous chapter, and it is also an introduction to the main economic business of industrial enterprises.
To understanding. The accounting entries in this section should be done step by step according to the procedures, so that students can fully understand. Students should practice more. Make
Do more exercises after class.
Section 2 Business Accounting in the Supply Phase
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the accounting subjects involved in the supply process;
(2) Understand several situations in the supply process of industrial enterprises and the handling of purchase costs;
(3) Master the accounting treatment of the supply process;
(4) Familiar with the use of "material procurement" and "raw material" accounts.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: Accounting treatment of the supply process.
Difficulty: the treatment of value-added tax.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability of comprehensive analysis.
(2) Have the ability to deal with problems.
4. Explanation: Teachers should clarify the content of each subject's accounting. Students should distinguish between different situations and adopt
Take different methods to deal with.
Section 3 Business Accounting at the Production Stage
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the scope of the production process;
(2) Understand the accounting titles used in the production process;
(3) Master the accounting treatment of the production process.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: Accounting treatment of the production process.
Difficulty: Accounting treatment of the production process.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability of comprehensive analysis.
(2) Have the ability to deal with problems.
4. Explanation: This section contains more content and involves more accounting subjects. Teachers should distinguish levels
Explain gradually. In particular, it is necessary to distinguish the difference between "manufacturing expenses" and "production costs". Students should repeat
Study, do more homework.
Section 4 Business Accounting at the Sales Stage
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the important position of the sales process in the production and operation of industrial enterprises;
(2) Understand the accounting subjects used in the sales process;
(3) Master the accounting treatment of the sales process.
2. Key points and difficulties
Page 34
Focus: Accounting treatment of the sales process.
Difficulty: the treatment of value-added tax.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability of comprehensive analysis.
(2) Have the ability to deal with problems.
4. Explanation: The accounting treatment in this section is different from the previous three sections: it is no longer a step-by-step advance but
Start in this session. Teachers should pay attention to their differences. Students should pay attention to the different processing methods of different links,
Practice and write more homework.
Section 5 Business Accounting in the Formation and Distribution of Profits
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the composition of the company's profit during the accounting period;
(2) Understand the accounts that need to be set up for profit formation and distribution business accounting;
(3) Master the accounting treatment of profit formation and distribution process.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: Accounting treatment of profit formation and distribution process.
Difficulty: Accounting treatment of profit formation and distribution process.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability of comprehensive analysis.
(2) Have the ability to deal with problems.
4. Description: The content of this section is relatively comprehensive. When teaching, you should contact the content of the previous sections to achieve integration
Run through.
Chapter 5 Accounting Documents
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the relationship between original vouchers and bookkeeping vouchers, as well as accounting vouchers transfer and storage procedures;
(2) Understand the basic content, function and classification of accounting documents;
(3) Master the filling requirements and filling methods of original vouchers and accounting vouchers.
2. Key points and difficulties
Emphasis: the filling of accounting vouchers.
Difficulty: Fill in the accounting vouchers.
3. Ability training requirements
Have the ability to deal with problems.
4. Explanation: The problem learned in this chapter is the first link in economic business encountered in actual work. have to
Ensure that the start is correct, and the future work can be correct. Therefore, we must master the processing methods of this link.
Chapter VI Accounting Books
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the meaning and setting principles of accounting books;
(2) Understand the types and formats of account books and the use of account books;
(3) Master the method of account book registration, the correction of wrong accounts, the method of reconciliation and settlement.
2. Key points and difficulties
Key point: the method of registering account books.
Difficulty: reconciliation and checkout.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability to solve practical problems;
Page 35
(2) Have the ability to read.
4. Description: This chapter is the next step of the accounting work method's follow-up system and verification vouchers. And actual
Work is closely linked. Pay attention to the connection with practice during the lecture.
Chapter 7 Accounting Processing Procedure
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the meaning and requirements of accounting procedures;
(2) Grasp the method steps of the accounting procedure of the bookkeeping vouchers and the accounting procedure of the account summary table;.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: Account summary table of account processing procedures.
Difficulty: Accounting procedures for bookkeeping vouchers.
3. Ability training requirements
Have the ability to analyze problems.
4. Description: The content learned in this chapter is the procedural arrangement of accounting work. Should be mastered on the basis of understanding
Management procedures and methods.
Chapter 8 Property Inventory
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the meaning of property inventory;
(2) Understand the inventory system of property materials;
(3) Master the content and methods of property inventory and the handling of inventory results.
2. Key points and difficulties
Key points: the content and methods of property inventory and the handling of inventory results.
Difficulties: the content and methods of property inventory and the handling of inventory results.
3. Ability training requirements
(1) Have the ability to analyze problems;
(2) Have the ability to deal with problems.
4. Explanation: This chapter is aimed at the fact that there are often inconsistencies between the actual number of account books and property materials in actual work.
Inconsistent records between the relevant accounts will also appear. Property inventory is used to ensure that the accounts are consistent and the accounts are verified.
Match.
Chapter 9 Financial Accounting Report
1. Knowledge points and basic requirements
(1) Understand the meaning and types of accounting statements;
(2) Understand the structure and principle of balance sheet and income statement.
2. Key points and difficulties
Focus: the structure of the balance sheet and income statement.
Difficulty: the structure of the balance sheet and income statement.
3. Ability training requirements
Have the ability to analyze problems.
4. Explanation: Although accounting statements are very important to accounting work, they should not be mastered in accounting principles. because
Too difficult for beginners. If you fail to learn it, it will have side effects. Teachers in this chapter should inform students
Talk: Accounting statements do not need to be mastered.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
Page 36
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Class time allocation
chapter
topic
Teach
experiment
Exercise class, discussion class
1 General
4
2 Accounting subjects and accounts
4
3 Double-entry bookkeeping
4
4 Main business processing
12
5 Accounting documents
6
6 Accounting books
6
7 Accounting procedures
4
8 Property inventory
4
9 Financial Accounting Report
4
total
48
Prepare
Note
6. Course assessment method
Normal grades account for 30% of the total grades (including attendance, questioning, homework, etc.), and final grades account for the total grades
70% of it. The final exam is a closed book exam.
7. Formulation Writer: Yu Kai
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute) : Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Business statistics
Course number: 160401X1
Course Title: Business Statistics
English name: Commercials Statistics
Class hours and credits: 48 /3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 16)
Prerequisites: Advanced Mathematics
Adaptation majors: various economic management majors in the business school
Reference textbook: Statistics (First Edition), Yang Guozhong, Central South University Press, 2008
Course introduction:
Statistics, as a methodological science that studies the collection, sorting and analysis of statistical data, is currently
Page 37
Subject areas and various industries have a very wide range of applications, becoming one of the most active subjects in contemporary times. Business
Statistics is mainly for students majoring in economics and management. This course is closely integrated with actual research
New problems that have emerged, systematically introduced the basic theories and methods of statistics, and focused on specific applications and cases.
Case analysis, in order to train students to use business statistics theories and methods to analyze and solve practical problems.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
1. This course is the core course of various majors in economics approved by the Ministry of Education. It is a very practical course
The method is scientific. Its task is to enable students to master the basic theories and methods of statistics, and to improve students’ application
Use statistical methods to analyze the ability to solve practical problems.
2. Through the study of this course, students are required to master various statistical methods systematically and understand various statistical methods.
The statistical ideas contained in the calculation method; master the different characteristics, application conditions and application fields of various statistical methods
Integrate; able to use statistical software for statistical calculation and analysis.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Understand the production and development of the course and various statistical software.
2. Understand the population, individuals, samples, statistics, indicators, indices, same-measure factors, degrees of freedom,
Concepts such as development speed and growth rate.
3. Master the methods of statistical data collection and statistical investigation; statistical hypothesis checking in descriptive statistics and inferential statistics
Basic methods in testing and parameter estimation; application of statistical software.
4. Use statistical knowledge and statistical software to solve practical problems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
(1) Basic content
1 Introduction. Including the production and development of statistics, statistical research objects, statistical research methods, statistical
Several basic concepts and application areas of organization and management, statistics.
2. Statistical design. Significance and types of statistical design; principles and content of statistical design; statistical indicators
System design.
3. Collection of statistical data. Types and scales of statistical data; methods of collecting statistical data; statistical surveys
Design of survey plan; design of statistical survey questionnaire; error and control of statistical survey.
4. Arrangement and display of statistical data. Preprocessing of statistical data; grouping of statistical data; statistical data
Summary; statistical graphs.
5. The measurement of statistical data distribution characteristics. Measurement of Central Trend; Measurement of Discrete Trend; Distribution Pattern
The measurement.
6. The basis of probability theory. The basis of probability; probability distribution; the law of large numbers and the central limit theorem.
7. Sampling distribution and parameter estimation. Sampling and sampling distribution; meaning and types of parameter estimation; parameter
Point estimation; interval estimation of parameters; determination of sample size
8. Hypothesis testing. The basic idea of ​​hypothesis testing; hypothesis testing of a single normal population; two normal populations
Hypothesis testing of population; hypothesis testing of population proportion; hypothesis testing of population distribution type.
9. Analysis of variance. Basic idea of ​​analysis of variance; one-way analysis of variance.
10. Correlation and regression analysis. Correlation analysis of variables; unary regression analysis; multiple regression analysis.
11. Statistical index. The concept and type of statistical index; the compilation of statistical index; the body of statistical index;
Element analysis; several commonly used statistical indexes.
Page 38
12. Time series analysis. Level and speed indicators of time series; analysis of long-term trends; seasonal changes
Dynamic analysis; cycle change and irregular change analysis.
13. Statistical decision-making. The concept of statistical decision-making; decision tree method; Markov decision method; Bayesian
Decision method.
14. Statistical software. The characteristics of commonly used statistical software; the application of SPSS in statistics.
(2) Key points and difficulties
Key contents include: several basic concepts of statistics; statistical design; collection of statistical data; statistics
Data sorting and display; measurement of statistical data distribution characteristics; parameter estimation; hypothesis testing; correlation and regression
Analysis; statistical index; the application of SPSS in statistics.
Difficulties include: collation of statistical data; measurement of statistical data distribution characteristics; parameter estimation; false
Set test; correlation and regression analysis.
4. Requirements for course practice
1. Learn the actual operation of SPSS statistical software, master the statistical software’s
Analysis and drawing of statistical charts. Pre-class preparation is required, and the data information obtained from the questionnaire survey is processed in class,
analysis.
2. Master the application of SPSS statistical software in the processing and analysis of actual survey data. Choose a real
Question, formulate statistical survey plan, design corresponding questionnaire and conduct questionnaire survey, use SPSS
The software processes and analyzes the data information obtained by the questionnaire survey, and finally writes a statistical survey report.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Remarks
Chapter One
General
1
Chapter two
Statistical design
2
third chapter
Collection of statistical data
2
Chapter Four
Sorting and display of statistical data
6
chapter Five
Measures of statistical data distribution characteristics
6
Chapter Six
Basics of Probability
1
Chapter VII
Sampling distribution and parameter estimation
3
chapter eight
hypothetical test.
3
Chapter nine
variance analysis
0
Student self
learn
chapter Ten
Correlation and regression analysis
2
Chapter 11 Statistical Index
2
Chapter 12 Time Sequence Analysis
0
Student self
learn
Chapter 13 Statistical Decisions
2
Chapter Fourteen Statistical Software
2
Page 39
Statistical software interface and data input
2
2
Data editing and file management
2
2
Descriptive analysis and charting
2
2
Data testing and multiple reaction analysis
2
2
Time series analysis and correlation analysis
2
2
experiment
Questionnaire survey data statistics
6
6
6. Course assessment method
Normal results account for 30% of the total score; written tests are used at the end of the term, accounting for 70% of the total score.
7. Formulation Author: Yang Guozhong
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yi Jing Zhang
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Technical economics
Course number: 160402X1
Course Name: Technical Economics
English name: Techno-economics
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : public courses
Adapt to majors: economics, management majors
Reference materials:
【1】Technology Economics (Second Edition), edited by Jia Chunlin and Li Chen, Central South University Press, 2004
year
【2】Technology Economy and Project Economic Evaluation (Second Edition), edited by You Daming, Tsinghua University Press
Year 2009
Course introduction:
The basic principles of technical economics are to study the objects of technical economics, the characteristics and steps of technical economic analysis.
Steps, feasibility principles and commonly used cost concepts. Through the teaching of this course, for students’ future investment decisions
Practicing to provide technical economic theory and economic analysis thinking framework, provide technical economic effect calculation, analysis,
The methods of comparison and evaluation are used to cultivate students’ technical and economic viewpoints and to solve common technical and economic problems.
Ability to make investment decisions.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Through the teaching of this course, students will realize the importance of technical and economic analysis for long-term investment decision-making.
Provide technical economic theory and economic analysis thinking framework for students' future investment decision-making practice, and provide technology
Methods of calculation, analysis, comparison and evaluation of economic effects to cultivate students’ technical and economic views and solutions
Page 40
Common technical and economic issues, the ability to make investment decisions.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Establish technical and economic analysis thinking and viewpoints, master technical and economic analysis theories and methods, and possess applied skills
Technical economic theories and methods to solve technical and economic problems, evaluate and select schemes, and make investment decisions.
force. Attention should be paid to the training of students’ basic skills in teaching to meet the training goals of applied talents and improve
The ability to analyze and solve problems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter 1 Basic Principles of Technical Economics Focus on mastering the research objects of technical economics, technical economy
Analysis features, steps, feasibility principles and common cost concepts;
Chapter 2 Description of the investment process focuses on grasping cash flow, time value of funds, compound interest calculation,
Debt repayment analysis and related concepts;
The third chapter static evaluation method focuses on the calculation and application of various static evaluation indicators;
The fourth chapter dynamic evaluation method focuses on the calculation and application of various dynamic evaluation indicators;
Chapter 5 Multi-scheme economic decision-making focuses on mastering independent schemes and mutually exclusive schemes without capital limits
Economic decision-making and economic decision-making of multiple options under capital limits;
Chapter 6 Economic Analysis under Risk and Uncertainty Focuses on mastering the analysis of profit and loss balance, sensitivity analysis,
Application of various methods such as probability analysis and criterion analysis;
Chapter 7 Economic Analysis of Raising Capital Focuses on mastering the ways of raising capital and the cost of capital
Calculation of estimates, liabilities and financial leverage, and capital recovery.
In the above parts, students are required to focus on mastering and understanding the principles and methods of technical and economic analysis
Method, deeply understand the economic meaning and interrelationship of each static and dynamic evaluation index, and correctly grasp different evaluation
The applicable conditions and functions of the method, and the correct use of various methods for technical and economic analysis and decision-making.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter 1 Basic Principles of Technical Economics
4
Chapter 2 Description of Investment Process
8
Chapter III Technical and Economic Static Evaluation Methods
4
Chapter 4 Technical and Economic Dynamic Evaluation Methods
6
Chapter 5 Economic Decisions with Multiple Plans
8
Chapter 6 Economic Analysis under Risk and Uncertainty
8
Chapter 7 Economic Analysis of Raising Capital
8
Course summary
2
6. Course assessment method
Normal results and case discussions (or course design) (30%) + closed-book written examination (70%).
Page 41
7. Formulation writer: You Daming
Reviewer (director of teaching and research section or director of research institute): Yi Jingzhang
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
finance
Course number: 160501X1
Course Name: Finance
English name: Finance
Class hours and credits : 40 /2.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites : Macroeconomics, Microeconomics, Political Economics
Adapt to majors : economics, management, non-financial majors
Reference materials:
[1] "Financial Theory and Practice" edited by Deng Chao, Central South University Press, 2006
[2] "Finance" Niu Jiangao, editor in chief, Southeast University Press, 2010
[3] "Finance" edited by Chen Xuebin, Higher Education Press, 2010
Course introduction :
Finance is a basic course for economic management majors that studies monetary and financial relations. Specifically including gold
The basic concepts and categories of the financial field are the basic preparations necessary to enter the financial academic hall;
Financial part, that is, the basic knowledge, basic theories and related policies of financial markets and financial institutions;
The creation mechanism part; the macro-financial part, that is, the basic knowledge of currency pair internal and external equilibrium and surrounding monetary policy
Knowledge, basic theories and related policy viewpoints.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Finance is a basic course for economic management majors that studies monetary and financial relations. Suitable for large
Schools 4 to 6 are opened. The establishment of the "Finance" course can help students learn and understand the financial
The basic knowledge and basic theories of financial institutions, combined with international and domestic financial practices, are analyzed and applied to deepen the
Understanding and analysis of financial reforms and major financial events, and training students’ ability to analyze and solve problems,
Lay a good foundation for studying other related courses in the future, especially related to finance courses.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course is based on the global economic and financial integration and my country’s financial reform and opening up.
On the basis of basic knowledge and basic theories, focus on introducing new theories and new
Viewpoints and new phenomena. Through this course, students can master currency, banking, financial market and open
The basic laws of finance, understand the basic meaning of a lot of financial information, and focus on the currency and monetary system,
Financial market system, commercial banks, central banks and monetary policy, foreign exchange and foreign exchange markets, and balance of payments
And other aspects of knowledge, and have a basic understanding of monetary theory and financial innovation, and then be able to use the basics of monetary finance
This principle and analysis of various economic and financial phenomena, understand the government’s various macro financial policies, and be able to conduct preliminary financial
Page 42
Physical operation; able to grasp the forefront trend of current monetary and financial development, and the theory, policy and physical object of monetary and financial
Have a more comprehensive and systematic understanding, which can be used as the basis for in-depth study of monetary and financial issues in the future.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of this course includes: currency and monetary system, credit and credit instruments, financial institution system,
Financial market system, financial market interest rates, commercial banks, non-bank financial institutions, central banks and currencies
Policies, monetary equilibrium and deflation, foreign exchange and foreign exchange markets, international payments, international monetary system, etc.
The focus is on currency and monetary system, credit and credit instruments, financial institution system, financial market system,
Interest rates and exchange rates in financial markets, monetary policy and inflation, foreign exchange and foreign exchange markets, etc.
The difficulty lies in the meaning of currency, interest rates in financial markets, foreign exchange and exchange rates, and monetary policy regulating the economy.
Principles of action and delivery mechanism.
The specific content of each chapter is arranged as follows:
Chapter One Currency and Currency System
The meaning of the first section currency
Section 2 The form of currency
Section 3 Functions of Currency
Section 4 Currency System
Section 5 Currency and Economy
Chapter 2 Credit and Credit Tools
Section 1: Credit Overview
Section 2 Main Forms of Credit
Section 3 Credit Tools
Section 4 Credit Fund Movement
Chapter III Interest and Interest Rate
The first section of the nature of interest and interest rate
Section 2 Calculation of Interest Rate
Section 3 Factors that determine and influence changes in interest rates
Section 4 Interest Rate Leverage and Application
Chapter IV Financial Institution System
Section 1 The formation of financial institution system
Section 2 Composition of Western Financial Institutions
Section 3 China's Financial Institution System
Chapter 5 Financial Market System
Section One Financial Market Overview
Section 2 Money Market
Section 3 Capital Market
Section 4 Financial Instruments
Section 5 Financial Instruments and Financial Derivatives
Chapter VI Commercial Bank
Section 1 The emergence and development of commercial banks
Section 2 Nature of Commercial Banks. Functions and Organizational System
Section 3 Business Operations of Commercial Banks
Section 4 Operation and Management of Commercial Banks
Page 43
Chapter 7 Non-bank Financial Institutions
Section 1 Trust and Lease
Section 2 Investment Banking
Section 3 Insurance Company
Section 4 Investment Fund
Chapter 8 Central Bank and Monetary Policy
Section 1 The Nature and Functions of the Central Bank
Section 2 The form and structure of the central bank
Section 3 Central Bank’s Monetary Policy and Its Objectives
Section 4 Monetary Policy Tools of the Central Bank
Section 5 Central Bank Monetary Policy Transmission Mechanism
Chapter 9 Monetary Equilibrium and Inflation
Section 1 Currency Demand
Section 2 Money Supply
Section 3 General Theory of Inflation
Section 4 Causes and Control of Inflation
Chapter 10 Foreign Exchange, Exchange Rate and Foreign Exchange Market
Section 1 The concept of foreign exchange and exchange rate
Section 2 Types of Exchange Rates
Section 3 Overview of the foreign exchange market
Section 4 Basic Transactions in the Foreign Exchange Market
Chapter 11 Balance of Payments and International Reserves
Section 1 The Concept of Balance of Payments
Section 2 Balance of Payments
Section 3 Analysis of the Balance of Payments
4. Balance of Payments Adjustment
5. International reserves
Chapter 12 International Monetary System
Section 1: Overview of the International Monetary System
Section 2 Bretton Woods System
Section 3 Jamaica System
Section 4 European Monetary System
Chapter 13 Financial Development and Financial Reform
Section 1 Financial Repression and Financial Deepening
Section 2 Financial Development Theory
Section 3 China's Financial Reform and Financial Development
4. Requirements for course practice
No experiment arrangement for this course
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Page 44
1
Currency and monetary system
4
2
Credit and Credit Tools
2
3
Financial institution system
2
4
Financial market system
4
5
Financial market interest rate
2
6
commercial Bank
4
7
Non-bank financial institution
4
8
Central Bank and Monetary Policy
4
9
Monetary Equilibrium and Inflation
2
10
Foreign exchange, exchange rate and foreign exchange market
4
11
Balance of Payments and International Reserves
4
12
International Monetary System
2
13
Financial Deepening and Financial Reform
2
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of this course is divided into two parts: regular assessment and final assessment. The former mainly includes attendance, homework, class
Participate in questions, discussion speeches, papers or survey reports (accounting for 40% of the total grade); the latter is the final proposition
Exam (60% of the total score). The combined result of the two combined assessment is the final assessment result.
7. Formulation writer: Tian Meiyu
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Microeconomics A
Course Number : 160601X1
Course Title : Microeconomics A
English name : Microeconomics A
Class hours and credits : 56/3.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites : Political Economy, Advanced Mathematics
Adaptation major : International Economics and Trade, Finance
Reference materials :
[1] Gao Hongye. Western Economics (Fifth Edition) [M]. Beijing: Renmin University of China Press, 2011
[2] Samuelson, Nordhaus. Economics (Eighteenth Edition) [M]. Beijing: People's Posts and Telecommunications Press,
2008
[3] Stiglitz. Economics (Fourth Edition) [M]. Beijing: Renmin University of China Press, 2010
[4] Mankiw. Principles of Economics (Fifth Edition) [M]. Beijing: Peking University Press, 2009
[5] Liang Xiaomin. Basic Course of Western Economics (Second Edition) [M]. Beijing: Peking University Press,
2003
Page 45
[6]Pin Dick, Rubinfeld. Microeconomics (seventh edition) [M]. Beijing: Published by Renmin University of China
Publishing House, 2009
[7] Ping Xinqiao. Eighteen Lectures on Microeconomics [M]. Beijing: Peking University Press, 2001
[8] Fan Li'an, Fei Fangyu. Microeconomics: Modern Perspectives (Eighth Edition) [M]. Gezhi Publishing House, 2011
[9] Li Yiyuan. Microeconomics (Third Edition) [M]. Higher Education Press, 2007
[10] China Academic Journal Network
Course introduction :
Microeconomics analyzes the economic behavior of individual economic units, and on this basis, studies modern western economies
The operation of the social market mechanism and its role in the allocation of economic resources, and proposed microeconomic policies to correct
Market failure. The main contents are: equilibrium price theory, consumer behavior theory, producer behavior theory (including
Including production theory, cost theory and market equilibrium theory), distribution theory, general equilibrium theory and welfare economy
Learning, market failure and microeconomic policies.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Microeconomics is a compulsory course for economic management majors and an important part of the economic management knowledge system
component. Students master the basic theories, basic methods and applications of microeconomics,
The study of professional courses lays a solid theoretical foundation.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Students are required to be proficient in the basic theories and methods of microeconomics, and to understand the frontiers of subject theory and pre-application
Jinghe's development dynamics will cultivate students' ability to analyze and solve economic problems in light of our country’s actual conditions.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 What is Western Economics
1.2 The origin and evolution of modern western economics
1.3 Two problems that Western economics attempts to solve
1.4 Attitudes to Western Economics
1.5 Why study Western economics
Key points and difficulties: the objects of western economics research and the problems to be solved.
Chapter 2 Demand and Supply Curves and Related Basic Concepts
2.1 Features of microeconomics
2.2 The demand curve
2.3 Supply curve
2.4 The combined effect of supply and demand curves
2.5 Economic model, static analysis, comparative static analysis and dynamic analysis
2.6 Elasticity of demand and supply
2.7 Examples of using supply and demand curves
2.8 Cobweb model
Key difficulties: market equilibrium theory and elasticity theory.
Chapter 3 Utility Theory
3.1 Overview of Utility Theory
Page 46
3.2 Indifference curve
3.3 Budget line
3.4 Consumer equilibrium
3.5 The impact of price changes and income changes on consumer equilibrium
3.6 Substitution effect and income effect
3.7 From the demand curve of a single consumer to the market demand curve
3.8 Uncertainty and risk
Key and difficult points: the law of marginal utility change, indifference curve and its application.
Chapter 4 Production Theory
4.1 Manufacturer and production function
4.2 A production function of variable production factors
4.3 Production functions of two variable production factors
4.4 Isocost lines
4.5 Optimal combination of production factors
4.6 The combination of production factors for profit maximization
4.7 Extension cable
4.8 Return to Scale
Key difficulties: the law of diminishing marginal returns, producer equilibrium, and changes in returns to scale.
Chapter 5 Cost Theory
5.1 The concept of cost
5.2 Short-term total output and short-term total cost
5.3 Short-term total cost curve
5.4 The relationship between the short-term production curve and the short-term cost curve
5.5 Long-term total cost
5.6 Long-term average cost and long-term marginal cost
Key difficulty: the relationship between the short-term cost curve and the long-term cost curve.
Chapter 6 Perfectly Competitive Market
6.1 Types of manufacturers and markets
6.2 The Demand Curve and Yield Curve of Perfectly Competitive Firms
6.3 Equilibrium conditions for manufacturers to maximize profits
6.4 The short-term equilibrium and short-term supply curve of perfectly competitive firms
6.5 The short-term supply curve of a perfectly competitive industry
6.6 Long-run equilibrium of perfectly competitive firms
6.7 The long-term supply curve of a perfectly competitive industry
6.8 Short-term equilibrium and long-term equilibrium in a perfectly competitive market
Key difficulty: the equilibrium and long-term supply curve of perfectly competitive firms.
Chapter 7 An imperfectly competitive market
7.1 Monopoly
7.2 Monopolistic competition
7.3 Oligopoly
7.4 Comparison of different markets
Key difficulty: market equilibrium analysis.
Chapter 8 Determination of the price of factors of production
Page 47
8.1 Overview of Distribution Theory
8.2 Inducing demand
8.3 The principle of the use of production factors by perfect competitors
8.4 The demand curve of a perfectly competitive firm for production factors
8.5 From the demand curve of the manufacturer to the demand curve of the market
8.6 Overview of the supply side
8.7 Labor supply curve and wage determination
8.8 The supply curve of land and the determination of land rent
8.9 The supply curve of capital and the determination of interest
8.10 Euler's Theorem
8.11 Lorentz curve and Gini coefficient
Key difficulties: the demand for production factors of manufacturers, analysis of labor, land and capital supply.
Chapter 9 General Equilibrium Theory and Welfare Economics
9.1 General equilibrium
9.2 Economic efficiency
9.3 Pareto Optimal Conditions of Exchange
9.4 Pareto optimal conditions for production
9.5 Pareto Optimal Conditions for Exchange and Production
9.6 Perfect competition and Pareto optimality
Key difficulties: general equilibrium theory, Pareto optimal conditions.
Chapter 10 Game Theory Preliminary
10.1 Game Theory and Strategic Behavior
10.2 Simultaneous games: pure strategic equilibrium
10.3 Simultaneous Game: Mixed Strategy Equilibrium
10.4 Sequential Game
Key difficulties: Nash equilibrium, mixed strategy Nash equilibrium.
Chapter 11 Market Failure and Microeconomic Policy
11.1 Monopoly
11.2 External influence
11.3 Public goods and public resources
11.4 Incomplete information and asymmetric information
11.5 Conclusion of Microeconomics
Key difficulties: understanding of market failures and microeconomic policies.
4. Requirements for course practice
Students can be asked to do some surveys of socio-economic issues based on what they have learned.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hour which experiment (on
Machine hours)
Remarks
Chapter 1 Introduction
2
Chapter 2 Overview of Demand and Supply Curves and Related Concepts
8
Chapter 3 Utility Theory
6
Page 48
Chapter 4 Production Theory
4
Chapter 5 Cost Theory
6
Chapter 6 Perfectly Competitive Market
4
Chapter 7 The imperfectly competitive market
8
Chapter 8 The Price Determination of Factors of Production
6
Chapter 9 General Equilibrium Theory and Welfare Economics
4
Chapter 10 Game Theory Preliminary
4
Chapter 11 Market Failure and Microeconomic Policy
4
total period
56
Six, assessment method
The assessment method is a combination of the final examination paper and the usual scores.
70%, usually 30%. The types of test questions can be: noun explanation, multiple choice, fill-in-the-blank, short answer
Questions, essay questions, calculation questions, analysis questions, etc. The usual results can be based on attendance rate, usual homework, answering questions,
Discussion, essays, etc.
7. Formulation writer: Zhang Ying, Zhu Balance
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Microeconomics B
Course Number : 160602X1
Course name : Microeconomics B
English name: Microeconomics B
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites : Political Economy, Advanced Mathematics
Adapt to majors: business administration, information management and information systems, accounting, financial management, e-commerce, market
Field marketing
Reference materials:
[1] Gao Hongye. Western Economics (Fifth Edition) [M]. Beijing: Renmin University of China Press, 2011
[2] Samuelson, Nordhaus. Economics (Eighteenth Edition) [M]. Beijing: People's Posts and Telecommunications Press,
2008
[3] Stiglitz. Economics (Fourth Edition) [M]. Beijing: Renmin University of China Press, 2010
[4] Mankiw. Principles of Economics (Fifth Edition) [M]. Beijing: Peking University Press, 2009
[5] Liang Xiaomin. Basic Course of Western Economics (Second Edition) [M]. Beijing: Peking University Press,
2003
[6]Pin Dick, Rubinfeld. Microeconomics (seventh edition) [M]. Beijing: Published by Renmin University of China
Publishing House, 2009
Page 49
[7] Ping Xinqiao. Eighteen Lectures on Microeconomics [M]. Beijing: Peking University Press, 2001
[8] Fan Li'an, Fei Fangyu. Microeconomics: Modern Perspectives (Eighth Edition) [M]. Gezhi Publishing House, 2011
[9] Li Yiyuan. Microeconomics (Third Edition) [M]. Higher Education Press, 2007
[10] China Academic Journal Network
Course introduction :
Microeconomics analyzes the economic behavior of individual economic units, and on this basis, studies modern western economies
The operation of the social market mechanism and its role in the allocation of economic resources, and proposed microeconomic policies to correct
Market failure. The main contents are: equilibrium price theory, consumer behavior theory, producer behavior theory (including
Including production theory, cost theory and market equilibrium theory), distribution theory, general equilibrium theory and welfare economy
Learning, market failure and microeconomic policies.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Microeconomics is a compulsory course for economic management majors and an important part of the economic management knowledge system
component. Students master the basic theories, basic methods and applications of microeconomics,
The study of professional courses lays a solid theoretical foundation.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Students are required to be proficient in the basic theories and methods of microeconomics, and to understand the frontiers of subject theory and pre-application
Jinghe's development dynamics will cultivate students' ability to analyze and solve economic problems in light of our country’s actual conditions.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 What is Western Economics
1.2 The origin and evolution of modern western economics
1.3 Two problems that Western economics attempts to solve
1.4 Attitudes to Western Economics
1.5 Why study Western economics
Key points and difficulties: the objects of western economics research and the problems to be solved.
Chapter 2 Demand and Supply Curves and Related Basic Concepts
2.1 Features of microeconomics
2.2 The demand curve
2.3 Supply curve
2.4 The combined effect of supply and demand curves
2.5 Economic model, static analysis, comparative static analysis and dynamic analysis
2.6 Elasticity of demand and supply
2.7 Examples of using supply and demand curves
2.8 Cobweb model
Key difficulties: market equilibrium theory and elasticity theory.
Chapter 3 Utility Theory
3.1 Overview of Utility Theory
3.2 Indifference curve
3.3 Budget line
Page 50
3.4 Consumer equilibrium
3.5 The impact of price changes and income changes on consumer equilibrium
3.6 Substitution effect and income effect
3.7 From the demand curve of a single consumer to the market demand curve
Key and difficult points: the law of marginal utility change, indifference curve and its application.
Chapter 4 Production Theory
4.1 Manufacturer and production function
4.2 A production function of variable production factors
4.3 Production functions of two variable production factors
4.4 Isocost lines
4.5 Optimal combination of production factors
4.6 The combination of production factors for profit maximization
4.7 Extension cable
4.8 Return to Scale
Key difficulties: the law of diminishing marginal returns, producer equilibrium, and changes in returns to scale.
Chapter 5 Cost Theory
5.1 The concept of cost
5.2 Short-term total output and short-term total cost
5.3 Short-term total cost curve
5.4 The relationship between the short-term production curve and the short-term cost curve
5.5 Long-term total cost
5.6 Long-term average cost and long-term marginal cost
Key difficulty: the relationship between the short-term cost curve and the long-term cost curve.
Chapter 6 Perfectly Competitive Market
6.1 Types of manufacturers and markets
6.2 The Demand Curve and Yield Curve of Perfectly Competitive Firms
6.3 Equilibrium conditions for manufacturers to maximize profits
6.4 The short-term equilibrium and short-term supply curve of perfectly competitive firms
6.5 The short-term supply curve of a perfectly competitive industry
6.6 Long-run equilibrium of perfectly competitive firms
6.7 The long-term supply curve of a perfectly competitive industry
6.8 Short-term equilibrium and long-term equilibrium in a perfectly competitive market
Key difficulty: the equilibrium and long-term supply curve of perfectly competitive firms.
Chapter 7 An imperfectly competitive market
7.1 Monopoly
7.2 Monopolistic competition
7.3 Oligopoly
7.4 Comparison of different markets
Key difficulty: market equilibrium analysis.
Chapter 8 The Price Determination of Factors of Production
8.1 Overview of Distribution Theory
8.2 Inducing demand
8.3 The principle of the use of production factors by perfect competitors
Page 51
8.4 The demand curve of a perfectly competitive firm for production factors
8.5 From the demand curve of the manufacturer to the demand curve of the market
8.6 Overview of the supply side
8.7 Labor supply curve and wage determination
8.8 The supply curve of land and the determination of land rent
8.9 The supply curve of capital and the determination of interest
8.10 Euler's Theorem
8.11 Lorentz curve and Gini coefficient
Key difficulties: the demand for production factors of manufacturers, analysis of labor, land and capital supply.
Chapter 9 General Equilibrium Theory and Welfare Economics
9.1 General equilibrium
9.2 Economic efficiency
9.3 Pareto Optimal Conditions of Exchange
9.4 Pareto optimal conditions for production
9.5 Pareto Optimal Conditions for Exchange and Production
9.6 Perfect competition and Pareto optimality
Key difficulties: general equilibrium theory, Pareto optimal conditions.
Chapter 10 Game Theory Preliminary
10.1 Game Theory and Strategic Behavior
10.2 Simultaneous games: pure strategic equilibrium
10.3 Simultaneous Game: Mixed Strategy Equilibrium
10.4 Sequential Game
Key difficulties: Nash equilibrium, mixed strategy Nash equilibrium.
Chapter 11 Market Failure and Microeconomic Policy
11.1 Monopoly
11.2 External influence
11.3 Public goods and public resources
11.4 Incomplete information and asymmetric information
11.5 Conclusion of Microeconomics
Key difficulties: understanding of market failures and microeconomic policies.
4. Requirements for course practice
Students can be asked to do some surveys of socio-economic issues based on what they have learned.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hour which experiment (on
Machine hours)
Remarks
Chapter 1 Introduction
2
Chapter 2 Overview of Demand and Supply Curves and Related Concepts
8
Chapter 3 Utility Theory
6
Chapter 4 Production Theory
4
Chapter 5 Cost Theory
6
Chapter 6 Perfectly Competitive Market
4
Page 52
Chapter 7 The imperfectly competitive market
6
Chapter 8 The Price Determination of Factors of Production
4
Chapter 9 General Equilibrium Theory and Welfare Economics
2
Chapter 10 Game Theory Preliminary
2
Chapter 11 Market Failure and Microeconomic Policy
4
total period
48
6. Course assessment method
The assessment method is a combination of the final examination paper and the usual scores.
70%, usually 30%. The types of test questions can be: noun explanation, multiple choice, fill-in-the-blank, short answer
Questions, essay questions, calculation questions, analysis questions, etc. The usual results can be based on attendance rate, usual homework, answering questions,
Discussion, essays, etc.
7. Formulation writer: Zhang Ying, Zhu Balance
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Macroeconomics A
Course number: 160603X1
Course name : Macroeconomics A
English name : Macroeconomics A
Class hours and credits: 56/3.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : advanced mathematics, microeconomics
Adaptation major : International Economics and Trade, Finance
Reference materials:
[1] Gao Hongye. Western Economics (Fifth Edition). Renmin University of China Press, 2010
[2] (United States) Michael Parkin, Economics (Fifth Edition). People's Posts and Telecommunications Press, 2004
[3] (United States) Dorn Bush, Fisher. macroeconomics. Renmin University of China Press, 1999
year
[4] Hu Zhenhua. macroeconomics. Central South University Press, 2003
[5] (United States) Paul Samuelson, William Nordhaus. Macroeconomics (17th edition). people
China Post and Telecommunications Press, 2004
Course introduction:
Macroeconomics is an important part of modern theoretical economics. It takes the entire national economy as a research target
Like, the method of aggregate analysis is used to study the relationship between various aggregates of social economic activities and their changing laws. by
The study of this course will enable students to comprehensively and systematically understand and master the basic concepts, basic
Theories and basic methods, the overall structure of the macro-economy, the law of macro-economy operation, the principles of macro-economics
Have a basic understanding of the different schools of thought and other issues, and be able to use the knowledge learned to understand the actual macroeconomic
Page 53
Preliminary analysis of operating conditions, basic operating trends and macroeconomic policies. Also understand the government
The theoretical basis for formulating macroeconomic policies will lay the foundation for students' future practice and further research.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
The macroeconomics course is a basic course for undergraduates majoring in economics at the Business School of Central South University;
The training purpose of this course is to help students master the basic theoretical models of macroeconomic analysis and have a preliminary understanding of macroeconomics
Basic tools and methods of regulation. After the students pass the course, they should be able to analyze the real economic life
Macroeconomic phenomena and problems, master the methods and ideas of macroeconomic analysis, and provide a deep understanding of other economic
Lay a good foundation for economic and management courses.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Help students accurately understand the basic concepts, basic principles and theoretical system of macroeconomics.
2. To help students master the basic theoretical models and basic analysis methods of macroeconomics.
3. Instruct students to observe and analyze economic and social macroeconomic issues, and improve students' independent analysis of issues
And the ability to solve problems.
4. Help students grasp the historical origin, main viewpoints and development of the main schools of macroeconomic theory
the trend of.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Basic content: national income accounting theory; simple national income determination model; extended national
Income determination model; AD-AS model; macroeconomic policies and practices; unemployment and inflation; open economy
Short-term economic model under economic conditions; economic growth and business cycle theory; development of macroeconomic theory.
2. Key points: multiplier effect; equilibrium national income determination; IS-LM model; AD-AS model.
3. Difficulties: flow preference trap; crowding out effect; IS-LM-BP model; multiplier-accelerator model.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One Overview of Macroeconomics
2
Chapter II National Income Accounting
6
Chapter 3 Simple Theory of National Income Determination
6
Chapter 4 General Average of Product Market and Currency Market
Weigh
6
Chapter 5 Macroeconomic Policy Analysis
4
Chapter VI Macroeconomic Policy Practice
6
Chapter 7 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Model
8
Chapter 8 Unemployment and Inflation
6
Chapter 9 Short-term economic model under an open economy
6
Chapter 10 Economic Growth and Business Cycle Theory
6
Page 54
total
56
6. Course assessment method
Normal results and case discussion (30%) + closed-book written examination (70%)
7. Formulation Writer: Hu Zhenhua
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Macroeconomics B
Course Number : 160604X1
Course name : Macroeconomics B
English name: Macroeconomics B
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : business administration, information management and information system, accounting, financial management, e-commerce,
marketing
Adapt to major : management major
Reference materials :
[1] Gao Hongye. Western Economics (Fifth Edition). Renmin University of China Press, 2010
[2] (United States) Michael Parkin, Economics (Fifth Edition). People's Posts and Telecommunications Press, 2004
[3] (United States) Dorn Bush, Fisher. macroeconomics. Renmin University of China Press, 1999
year
[4] Hu Zhenhua. macroeconomics. Central South University Press, 2003
[5] (United States) Paul Samuelson, William Nordhaus. Macroeconomics (17th edition). people
China Post and Telecommunications Press, 2004
Course introduction:
Macroeconomics is an important part of modern theoretical economics. It takes the entire national economy as a research target
Like, the method of aggregate analysis is used to study the relationship between various aggregates of social economic activities and their changing laws. by
The study of this course will enable students to comprehensively and systematically understand and master the basic concepts, basic
Theories and basic methods, the overall structure of the macro-economy, the law of macro-economy operation, the principles of macro-economics
Have a basic understanding of the different schools of thought and other issues, and be able to use the knowledge learned to understand the actual macroeconomic
Preliminary analysis of operating conditions, basic operating trends and macroeconomic policies. Also understand the government
The theoretical basis for formulating macroeconomic policies will lay the foundation for students' future practice and further research.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
The macroeconomics course is a basic course for undergraduates majoring in management at the Business School of Central South University;
The training purpose of this course is to help students master the basic theoretical models of macroeconomic analysis and have a preliminary understanding of macroeconomics
Page 55
Basic tools and methods of regulation. After the students pass the course, they should be able to analyze the real economic life
Macroeconomic phenomena and problems, master the methods and ideas of macroeconomic analysis, and provide a deep understanding of other economic
Lay a good foundation for economic and management courses.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Help students accurately understand the basic concepts, basic principles and theoretical system of macroeconomics.
2. To help students master the basic theoretical models and basic analysis methods of macroeconomics.
3. Instruct students to observe and analyze economic and social macroeconomic issues, and improve students' independent analysis of issues
And the ability to solve problems.
4. Help students grasp the historical origins and main points of the main schools of macroeconomic theory.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Basic content: national income accounting theory; simple national income determination model; extended national
Income determination model; AD-AS model; macroeconomic policies and practices; unemployment and inflation; economic growth
Long and economic cycle theory; development of macroeconomic theory.
2. Key points: multiplier effect; equilibrium national income determination; IS-LM model; AD-AS model.
3. Difficulties: flow preference trap; crowding out effect; multiplier-accelerator model.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One Overview of Macroeconomics
2
Chapter II National Income Accounting
6
Chapter 3 Simple Theory of National Income Determination
6
Chapter 4 General Average of Product Market and Currency Market
Weigh
6
Chapter 5 Macroeconomic Policy Analysis
4
Chapter VI Macroeconomic Policy Practice
6
Chapter 7 Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Model
6
Chapter 8 Unemployment and Inflation
6
Chapter 9 Economic Growth and Business Cycle Theory
6
total
48
6. Course assessment method
Normal results and case discussion (30%) + closed-book written examination (70%)
7. Formulation Writer: Hu Zhenhua
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 56
Game theory foundation
Course Number : 160605X1
Course Title : Fundamentals of Game Theory
English name : A Primer in Game Theory
Class hours and credits : 32/2 (including experimental hours: 4 class hours)
Prerequisites : Advanced Mathematics, Microeconomics
Adapt to major : international economics and trade, etc.
Reference textbook : Game Theory and Its Application (1st Edition), Xiao Tiaojun, Shanghai Sanlian Bookstore, 2005.8
Course Description : A more systematic introduction to the main content and research methods of game theory, so that students can master Nash
Equilibrium and game analysis thinking can use the concept of game equilibrium to analyze specific economic and social issues.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
As a basic theoretical course for studying multi-person decision-making problems, the "Basic Game Theory" course is for business schools
An elective basic course offered by the major of International Economics and Trade.
This course adopts the basic theory-based and practical teaching guiding ideology, which requires students to understand
The connotation of the theory and the mastery of the methods; it also requires students to apply what they have learned to solve practical problems.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Grasp the Nash equilibrium and its basic characteristics, understand other concepts of game equilibrium, and establish game models and reality
The combined thinking of the case, the preliminary grasp of the game equilibrium analysis thought.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1 Introduction
(1) Definition of game
(2) The history of game theory
(3) Basic assumptions of game theory
(4) Basic concepts of game theory
2. Complete information static game (emphasis)
(1) Basic concepts
(2) Strategic game
(3) Nash equilibrium
(4) Nash equilibrium application example
3. Complete information dynamic game (emphasis)
(1) Extended game
(2) Commitment, threat and Nashy equilibrium in the extended game
(3) Reverse induction and subgame perfect Nassh equilibrium
(4) Repeated game
Page 57
(5) Application examples
4. Static game with incomplete information (emphasis and difficulty)
(1) Incomplete information and Bayesian equilibrium
(2) Application examples
5. Dynamic game with incomplete information (emphasis and difficulty)
(1) Dynamic game with incomplete information
(2) Signal game
(3) Refining the perfect Bayesian equilibrium
(4) Application examples
6. Cooperative Game (Key Point)
(1) Alliance
(2) Convex game
(3) Core
(4) Stable set
(5) Shapley value
7. Evolutionary game (emphasis)
(1) Small group evolutionary game and optimal response dynamics
(2) Evolutionary game of large groups and replication dynamics
(3) Application examples
8. Experimental game (emphasis)
(1) Ultimatum game experiment
(2) An ultimatum game experiment considering interactive fairness
4. Requirements for course practice
1. A group of three, randomly determine the subject location of the subjects;
2. Pay the testees based on their usual scores and encourage students to show their subject preference;
3. According to the experimental plan, a three-body ultimatum game is played.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
One of the experiments (hours on the computer) Remarks
1
introduction
2
2
Complete information static game
4
3
Complete information dynamic game
6
4
Incomplete information static game
6
5
Dynamic game with incomplete information
6
6
Cooperative game
2
7
Evolutionary game
2
8
Experimental game
4
4
6. Course assessment method
The exam mainly adopts the open-book method. The scope of the exam should cover all the content taught.
Views reflect students’ memory and mastery of the main concepts of this course, and their understanding and mastery of relevant theories
And comprehensive application ability. Exam question types should be as diverse as possible.
Page 58
Overall assessment scores: 30% of homework (including performance in experimental classes) and 70% of open-book exams.
7. Formulation Authors : Hong Kairong, Wu Lianggang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Economic Law
Course Number : 160606X1
Course Title : Economic Law
English name : Economic Law
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites Requirements : Introduction to Law Foundation
Adapt to majors: business administration, marketing management, information management and information systems, accounting, financial management, finance
Finance, International Economics and Trade, E-commerce
Reference materials :
New Introduction to Economic Law, Qi Weiping. Shanghai: Shanghai University of Finance and Economics Press, 2004
Economic Law, Liu Dahong. Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press, 2008
Economic Law, Li Changqi. Beijing: Tsinghua University Press, 2007
Case Study of Economic Law, Li Yanfang, Beijing: Renmin University Press, 2006
Course introduction :
This course adopts the concept of large economic law and introduces basic economic theory, economic organization law, contract law, and knowledge
Contents such as property rights law and competition law. Proceeding from the actual needs of students majoring in illegal sciences to study legal science, appropriate
Choose, focus on practicality. Interpretation of the latest laws and regulations promulgated by the country, reflecting the reality of economic legal system
The latest results of economic law research.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is one of the educational module courses for undergraduates majoring in economics and management. Learn through the course to improve
Legal awareness, familiar with the relevant regulations of my country’s economic law, and improve the use of legal means in economic management
The ability to manage and resolve economic management and economic disputes.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the study of this course, students should meet the following basic requirements:
1. Master the basic concepts and principles of economic law;
2. Understand the rules in the judicial practice of economic law;
3. Familiar with and master the scope of application of economic laws, legal regulations and legal responsibilities;
4. Through practical activities such as discussion, analysis, etc., you are basically able to use the knowledge you have learned to analyze and solve specific problems
Competence for legal issues.
Page 59
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Introduction: Introduction to the basic theories of law and economic law;
The key and difficult points of this chapter: the nature of law, the meaning of economic law and the scope of adjustment;
Chapter One Corporate Law
Section 1 Overview of Corporate Law
Section 2 Individual Investment Enterprise Law
Section 3 Partnership Enterprise Law
Section 4 Company Law
The key difficulty of this chapter: company law
Chapter II Securities Law
Section 1: Overview of Securities Law
Section 2 Securities Issuance System
Section 3 Securities Trading System
Key points and difficulties: securities issuance conditions and securities trading system.
Chapter III Bankruptcy Law
Section 1: Overview of Bankruptcy Law
Section 2 Bankruptcy Entity and Procedure
Key points and difficulties: bankruptcy boundary, bankruptcy claims, bankruptcy property, bankruptcy administrator, reconciliation and reorganization
Chapter IV Contract Law
Section 1: Overview of Contract Law
Section 2 Conclusion of Contract
Section 3 Validity of Contract
Section 4 Performance of Contract
Section 5 Liability for Breach of Contract
Key points and difficulties: conclusion of the contract, liability for breach of contract
Chapter 5 Intellectual Property Law
Section 1: Overview of Intellectual Property Law
Section 2 Copyright Law
Section 3 Trademark Law
Section 4 Patent Law
Key difficulties: trademark law, patent law
Chapter VI Competition Law
Section 1: Overview of Competition Law
Section 2 Antitrust Law
Section 3 Anti-Unfair Competition Law
Section 4 Consumer Rights Protection Law
Section 5 Product Quality Law
Key difficulties: anti-monopoly law, consumer rights protection law
Chapter VII Bill Law
Section 1: Overview of Negotiable Instruments Law
Section 2 Money Orders, Promissory Notes, Cheques
Section 3 Bill Liability
Key difficulties: nature of bills, use of bills
Page 60
Chapter 8 Labor Law
Section 1: Overview of Labor Law
Section 2 Employment Agreement and Labor Contract
Key difficulties: employment agreement, labor contract
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
introduction
2
Chapter One
Corporate Law
6
Chapter two
Securities Law
2
third chapter
Corporate Bankruptcy Law
2
Chapter Four
contract law
8
chapter Five
Intellectual Property Law
4
Chapter Six
Competition law
4
Chapter VII
Bill law
2
chapter eight
Labor Law
2
6. Course assessment method
1. Normal results: including active participation in class discussions and preliminary extracurricular research and papers, case reports
The writing of report reading notes accounts for (30-50)% of the total evaluation score;
2. Examination results: mainly written examinations at the end of the term, accounting for about 50-70% of the total evaluation results.
7. Formulation Writer: Zhang Can
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
English listening and speaking (1)～(2)
Course number : 160607X1, 160607X2
Course Name : English Listening and Speaking (1)～(2)
English name : English Listening and Speaking (1) ～(2)
Class hours and credits: 64/4 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : none
Adaptation major : International Economics and Trade, Finance
Reference textbook: Zhang Jianjun, College English Spoken, Hunan Normal University Press, 2001
Wang Yongmei, New Business English Oral Course, Tsinghua University Press, 2008
Page 61
Course description : It is for undergraduate and postgraduate class study in colleges and universities, as well as for international business work or
A book written by people who will be engaged in international business work to practice business English conversations in actual work
Cheng. This book combines professional knowledge of international business with English dialogue, and guides students to study
The whole process of international commerce. Through individual practice, pair practice and group activities, students’ practice
The ability to use English language internationally provides students with opportunities to practice English listening and speaking skills.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Through the study of this course, train and help students to master, understand and speak English, especially business English
English methods, skills and techniques, so as to be able to use English to engage in international economics and trade and finance professional work
Lay a solid foundation in English.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Students in each English mutual aid group will report the extracurricular English in the past week in English every time.
The content of learning activities;
2. Read an economic and trade newspaper article every month and dictate your feelings after reading;
3. The classroom is mainly interactive, taking the form of discussion, debate, role performance, etc., requiring all students to learn
Students must participate.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The dialogue part of each lesson includes one or two specialized topics. The first and second units are about the 21st Century International
The business environment is outlined. The focus of the conversation was that the company’s managers were planning to enter international business.
The third and fourth units allow students to familiarize themselves with the practice of conducting business overseas. The dialogue part is between the buyer and the seller
The progress of the business agreement between Commonly used business English related to the topic through live dialogue
Introduced during the dialogue.
Each lesson has a brief background to introduce the topic of the conversation in this lesson. These introductory paragraphs help
Help students initially understand the theme of the dialogue in this lesson.
The training of substitution exercises enables students to understand how to use professional terminology correctly in actual business English conversations.
Improve students' business English conversation skills, so that students become more confident, speak more fluently and accurately.
The focus is on cultivating students' habit of thinking in English, and greatly improving students' English conversation ability.
Improve students’ self-confidence in English speech.
4. Requirements for course practice
This course requires some English skits and rehearsal of the annual Christmas party program outside of class.
Practice.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
1-2
GREETINGS, Debate: Classmate Relationship
3-4
DISLIKES, Debate: Reputation
5-6
REJECT, debate: death penalty
7-8
PERSUATION, Debate: Happiness
9-10 SUGGESTION, Debate: Exam
Page 62
11-12 AGREEMENT, Debate: Quarrel
13-14 ATTACK, Debate: Lifespan
15-16 ADVICE, Debate: Criticism
6. Course assessment method
This course adopts an oral examination and a comprehensive assessment based on the usual results. The exam accounts for 60%, usually
Grades account for 40% (normal grades refer to class conditions, class performance and participation in English Christmas party).
7. Formulation writer: Wang Yongmei
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
(3) Professional education module courses
Production and professional knowledge internship
Course ID : 160006Z1
Course Title : Production and Professional Understanding Practice
Class hours and credits : 4 weeks/4
English name: Production and Professional cognition practice
Prerequisite course requirements : Principles of Management, Basic Accounting, Financial Management, Intermediate Financial Accounting, Accounting Report
Table analysis, technical economics, business statistics, investment project feasibility studies, financial analysis, investment studies, certification
Voucher Investment
Adapt to major : financial management major
Reference materials : none
Course introduction :
The production and professional knowledge internship course is a practical teaching course. Financial management students have gone through nearly three
Years of basic courses and professional courses have initially acquired the necessary financial
In order to realize the conversion of knowledge to skills and improve students’ financial management skills. in order to
To achieve the financial management professional training goals, the financial management professional production practice focuses on going deep into actual enterprises and strengthening learning
Students’ understanding of actual enterprise production and operation, strengthen students’ understanding of the enterprise’s production and operation management system, and promote
Students combine the theoretical knowledge they have learned with management practices to further enhance their financial management capabilities.
Syllabus:
1. The nature, purpose and tasks of the course
Production and professional knowledge internship is a very important practical teaching in the undergraduate teaching of financial management.
The purpose of the learning link is to enable students to understand the basic production knowledge of related industries and enterprises, to confirm, consolidate and enrich
Fu has studied the basic theories and methods of financial management professional technical basic courses and professional basic courses.
Page 63
Students integrate theory with practice, conduct investigation and research, observe problems, analyze problems and solve problems in production practice.
The ability to test questions will lay a good foundation for subsequent professional courses.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Intern students must strictly abide by the internship discipline established by the internship base (internship company) and the school;
2. During the internship, students should humbly learn from the leaders, corporate instructors and staff of the intern company
Learn
3. Intern students should be diligent in thinking, and actively seek advice from the instructor of the intern company to ensure the best internship effect
In order to achieve the goal of improving its own management capabilities;
4. Students should have strict organization, strict discipline, a high degree of self-consciousness, and resolutely achieve safety,
Complete internship tasks efficiently and on time, maintain school and collective honors, and reflect the demeanor of college students in the new era.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Basic content of the course:
(1) Understand the organization and management organization and production organization management of the internship unit, including the nature of the company,
Business scope and related laws, regulations, and policies used;
(2) Understand the financial department structure, staffing and division of labor of the internship unit;
(3) Master the financial management model, financial management system and characteristics of the internship unit;
(4) Master the accounting process of the internship unit, including the auditing of accounting vouchers, account books, statements, etc.
The process of adding, recording, transferring, keeping and submitting;
(5) Master various financial management systems and financial control methods implemented by the internship unit;
(6) Analyze the problems existing in the financial management of the internship unit and the causes.
2. The key and difficult points of the course:
The focus is to apply the knowledge learned in the practice of corporate financial management, improve practical ability and solve financial problems.
The practical ability of practical management.
Difficulty: Due to the confidentiality of corporate financial information, there is a problem of internal control and financial management of the enterprise
The problem analysis is difficult to in-depth, and countermeasure analysis is difficult to effectively solve corporate problems.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
According to the professional training plan, the internship lasts for 4 weeks and a total of 26 days. The specific time schedule is as follows:
Internship Content
Schedule
1. In-factory education
1 day
2. Listen to the report
1 day
3. Corporate visit
1 day
4. Internship
21 days
5. Writing internship report, defense and assessment
2 days
6. Course assessment method
Attendance (30%) + internship log (30%) + internship report (40%), using a five-level scoring system (excellent,
Good, Medium, Pass, Fail) to determine the total score.
Page 64
7. The author: The Book of Changes
Reviewer (director of teaching and research section or director of research institute): Yi Jingzhang
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Production and professional knowledge internship
Course number: 160006Z1
Course Title: Production and Professional Understanding Practice
English name: Production practice and Professional practice
Class hours and credits: 4 weeks/4 (including experimental hours: 4 weeks, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: Basic courses and core professional courses in finance
Adapt to major: Finance
Reference materials: none
Course introduction:
Production and professional understanding internships are an important part of undergraduate teaching.
Financial institutions or enterprises, understand their basic production, operation and management status, and obtain a special
Experience and skills, consolidate and deepen the understanding of theoretical knowledge, improve practical ability and innovation ability
Important practical teaching links. The purpose of practice teaching is to consolidate students’ theoretical knowledge and cultivate students’ practical ability
Strength, innovation ability and professionalism, entrepreneurial spirit, broaden students’ horizons and enhance labor concepts.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Production and professional understanding internships are an important part of undergraduate teaching.
Financial institutions or enterprises, understand their basic production and operation status, and obtain a specific aspect in a specific position
The experience and skills are important to consolidate and deepen the understanding of theoretical knowledge and improve practical ability and innovation ability
Practice teaching links. Students must obtain the internship credits specified in the teaching plan of the major to be allowed to graduate.
The purpose of internship teaching is to consolidate students’ theoretical knowledge and cultivate students’ practical ability, innovation ability and dedication,
Entrepreneurship, broaden students' horizons, and enhance labor concepts.
The purpose and tasks are as follows:
(1) Comprehensively understand the various businesses and internal organization settings of the intern unit, and grasp these businesses and opportunities
Familiar with the specific operation process of each business, understand the role of each link in the process and
significance.
(2) Understand the various interactions between the internship unit and the outside world and the status and role of the internship unit in society.
(3) Combining the socio-political and economic situation and development trends, using existing theoretical knowledge,
Preliminary analysis of each business of the company, find its reasonableness and shortcomings, and seek feasible ways to solve the problem.
In order to improve the ability of analysis and problem-solving, we should combine theory with practice.
(4) Strengthen the communication and communication with the cadres and employees of the internship unit, and learn their outstanding products during the internship
Quality, improve social interaction and adaptability.
Page 65
(5) Understand the various rules and regulations of the internship unit, enhance organizational discipline and consciousness, and make students recognize
Recognize your own shortcomings and gradually improve them.
(6) Raise ideological and political consciousness, and strengthen the sense of responsibility and mission for building the motherland.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through professional internships, understand the specific operation mode of financial institutions’ business, and master how to behave in the world at work
Some basic principles.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of the course includes:
The first stage:
1. Get a preliminary understanding of the nature and characteristics of financial institutions or enterprises;
2. Understand the institution setting of the internship unit;
3. Understand the position and distribution of the staff (employees) of the internship unit;
4. Understand the type of business and process of the internship unit;
second stage:
1. Master the business and management operation process of financial institutions or enterprises.
The third phase:
1. Analyze the problems existing in the business and management operation process of financial institutions or corporate institutions.
The fourth stage:
1. Evaluate the innovation capability of financial institutions or enterprises;
2. Analyze the financial statements of financial institutions or enterprises to understand their capital adequacy and profitability
And asset quality status, asset liquidity status;
3. Analyze the difficulties in the operation of my country's financial institutions or enterprises;
4. Analyze the management level of my country's financial institutions or enterprises;
5. Analyze the internal operation mechanism of my country's financial institutions or enterprises;
6. Put forward countermeasures to reform my country's financial institutions or enterprises;
7. Analyze and evaluate the risk control system of financial institutions or enterprises.
The internship focuses on the third and fourth stages.
4. Requirements for course practice
Full post practice.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
According to the specific arrangements of the internship unit.
6. Course assessment method
1. The assessment results are composed of three parts: internship diary, labor assessment and internship report.
2. The internship diary accounted for 30% of the total score, the labor assessment accounted for 30% of the total score, and the internship report accounted for the total score
40% of it.
7. Formulation Author: Sheng Hu
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Page 66
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Business simulation
Course number: 160102Z1
Course Title: Business Management Simulation
English name: Simulation of Corporation Operating
Class hours and credits: 16/1
Prerequisite course requirements: Economics, Management
Adapt to majors : economics and management majors
Reference textbook: Enterprise Management ERP Sand Table Simulation Course, edited by Xia Yuanqiang and Ye Jianming, Electronic Industry Press,
2007.07
Course introduction:
Business management simulation is a professional course of economics and management, which is for students to have a basic understanding of business management
On the basis of simulating the specific business environment of manufacturing enterprises, practice business decision-making. Business model
It is intended to train the trainees to correctly formulate corporate decisions in the face of multiple competitors in a changing business environment
Strategy to achieve the company’s strategic goals. It requires participants to use management knowledge comprehensively and flexibly, and
Have a deep sense of the professional knowledge and skills required to operate a business, so as to provide professional knowledge in the later stage
Learn to lay the foundation.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Business management simulation is a compulsory practical course for all sophomore students of the business school.
On the basis of certain economics and management knowledge, use the physical sand table to simulate the business environment of the enterprise to conduct business
Decision-making exercises.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course requires students to work together and be able to use basic professional knowledge in economics and management to conduct quick investigations,
Analyze the market environment of the sand table deduction, get familiar with and master the business rules as soon as possible, and achieve understanding of the company
The main business and basic process of business operation. And through the simulation of business activities, let students experience and feel the city
Why does the field need applied and compound economic management talents?
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
In the business simulation, students are divided into six groups, each group represents a company. Each student is assigned
Different positions in the industry perform their own duties.
Students need to personally participate in the formulation of business decisions for the simulated company for 3-4 years, and the main business management
Business activities, basic economic business and its processes, and simulation business activities involve the overall corporate strategy, product development,
The main content of production scheduling, marketing and sales, finance, team communication and construction, etc.
In the course of the operation, the operation management strategy and various decision-making plans are implemented to preliminarily test the scientificity and
Page 67
Correctness.
The main content of the course and the simulation operation steps :
1. Familiar with the rules of sand table deduction;
2. Analyze and study business news and forecast market demand in a certain year;
3. Hold a market order meeting to compete for sales orders;
4. Handle the business at the beginning of the year and make an annual plan and budget;
5. Handle quarterly business: handle the four quarterly businesses according to the following sequence.
(1) Renew short-term loans
(2) Payment of short-term loan interest
(3) Obtain new short-term loans
(4) Accept order goods
(5) Place an order for raw materials
(6) Update production
(7) Production line adjustment
(8) Invest in new production lines
(9) Start producing new orders
(10) Payment of processing fees
(11) Invest in the development of new products
(12) Update accounts receivable
(13) Transactions between enterprises
(14) Delivery to customers
(15) Obtain sales payment
(16) Pay management fees
6. Handling year-end business: Handling year-end business in the following order.
(1) Renew long-term loans
(2) Pay long-term loan interest
(3) Obtain new long-term loans
(4) Pay equipment maintenance fee
(5) Pay for equipment overhaul
(6) Payment of rent
(7) Purchase workshop
(8) Rented workshop
(9) Calculate depreciation of fixed assets
(10) New market investment
(11) ISO investment
(12) Year-end accounts
(13) Preparation of financial report
7. Fill out various statistical tables during the simulation operation process, and submit the annual balance sheet and profit statement.
8. Analyze and summarize simulated business activities.
4. Requirements for course practice
Physical sand table exercises throughout the course .
Page 68
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Generally, it takes 3-4 hours to make a decision. The software will rank each company according to multiple business indicators
sequence. This course will arrange four rounds of complete simulation operations.
6. Course assessment method
After the entire business simulation is over, the winners of the business simulation are evaluated according to the weighted average of multiple indicators
By.
7. Formulation Author: Chen Mingshu
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Selected Readings of Classics of Management
Course number: 160103Z1
Course Title: Selected Readings of Classics of Management
English name: The classical readings in management
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : management, microeconomics, etc.
Adapt to major:　 business administration, marketing
Reference materials :
1. One Hundred Years of Management, Kleiner, Hainan Publishing House, 2007
2. History of Management Thought, Rehn, Renmin University Press, 2009
3. Selected Readings of Basic Management Literature, Zhang Gang, Zhejiang University Press, 2008
Course introduction:
Selected Readings of Classics of Management is a professional basic course for undergraduates majoring in business administration. The courses cover
The main classic theory since the birth of the management discipline. Through the study of this course, students can fully understand
The basic knowledge of management, as well as the context of the changes and development of management thinking, for the future in-depth study of management
Lay the foundation for professional knowledge.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Selected readings of classic works of management are not only the basic introductory course of business administration, but also the main course of management.
Do class. This course aims to broaden students’ view of management knowledge, and to be able to appropriately connect with current management practices,
In order to improve the ability to analyze and solve problems; by introducing the success of management experts, guide,
Stimulate and strengthen students' scientific spirit, innovation spirit and enterprising spirit, so that students can establish a correct worldview,
Outlook on life and values.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Page 69
1. Understand the system and structure of the course;
2. Understand the basic theories and cutting-edge trends in the field of management;
3. Use classical management theory to analyze and solve practical problems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of this course includes Chinese classical management theory, the development and evolution of western management thought, western
Five aspects: classical management theory, behavioral science theory and contemporary management theory. Chinese classical management theory
It mainly includes the management theories contained in classic works such as "The Art of War" and "Book of Changes". Western management thinking
The development and evolution mainly include Rehn’s "Evolution of Management Thoughts", Kleiner’s "A Hundred Years of Management", and Kontz’s "Management
General introductions such as "On the Jungle" and "On the Jungle of Management Theory". Classical management theories mainly include Thai
Luo's "Principles of Scientific Management", Fayol's "Industrial Management and General Management" and other classic works. Behavioral Science
The theories mainly include Mayo’s "Social Issues of Industrial Civilization", Maslow’s Theory of Human Motivation, and Herzberg’s
On How to Motivate Workers" etc. Contemporary management theories mainly include Drucker's "Management Practice", Penrose "Enterprise
"Business Growth Theory", Coase "The Nature of the Enterprise", Porter "Competitive Strategy", etc.
The focus of the course is on the mastery of the classic theories of management. The difficulty is that due to the cultural background and one's own
Due to the limitations of professionalism, it is difficult for students to deeply understand and grasp certain classic documents. While teaching, we must
Arrange the corresponding discussion sessions, and students will exchange their reading experience of certain classics.
4. Requirements for course practice
During the course of teaching, a special literature reading discussion was arranged for part of the class hours.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
The first lecture "The Art of War"
2
Lecture 2 "Book of Changes"
2
Lecture 3 Rehn's "Evolution of Management Thought"
2
Lecture 4 Krener "A Hundred Years of Management"
2
Lecture 5 "The Jungle of Management Theory" by Kongtz
2
Sixth Lecture
Kongtz's "Rediscussion on Management Theory
forest"
2
Lecture Seven Taylor "Principles of Scientific Management"
2
Eighth lecture
Fayol "Industrial Management and General
management"
2
Lecture 9
Mayo "Social Issues of Industrial Civilization
question"
2
Lecture 10 Maslow's "Theory of Human Motivation"
2
Lecture 11
Herzberg "Revisiting How to Motivate
staff"
2
Lecture 12 Drucker "Management Practice"
2
Thirteenth Lecture "The Theory of Enterprise Growth" by Penrose
2
Lecture 14 "The Nature of Enterprises" by Coase
2
Lecture 15 Porter "Competitive Strategy"
2
Page 70
Lecture 16 Summary of Full Course Study
2
6. Course assessment method
Course assessment is based on open-book exams, 70% of the test scores come from the course exams, and 30% from the usual attendance
And case exercises.
7. Formulation Author: Li Dayuan
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
ERP application practice
Course number: 160104Z1
Course name: ERP application practice
English name: Practice Of ERP
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (three weeks) (including experimental hours: 28, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : production operation management, computer culture foundation, management information system
Adapt to majors: information management and information systems, business management, e-commerce
Reference materials:
Kingdee, Kingdee K/3 Supply Chain Management Case Course, 2005
Kingdee, Kingdee K/3 Manufacturing Case Tutorial, 2005
Kingdee, Kingdee K/3 Human Resource Management Case Course, 2005
Course introduction:
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) embodies the current world
The most advanced enterprise management theory in the world, and provides the best solution for enterprise information integration. It will
Logistics, capital flow and information flow are unified for management, and the manpower, capital, materials,
Equipment, methods (production technology), information and time and other resources are comprehensively balanced and fully considered, and the most
Maximize the use of the company’s existing resources to achieve greater economic benefits, scientifically and effectively manage corporate personnel,
Various specific tasks such as finance, property, production, supply and sales.
This course is mainly based on machine training above, and at the same time about 20 class hours of ERP principles and operating methods are explained.
Through the study of this course, students will understand the basic principles of ERP and basically master the application of ERP.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a professional elective course for business administration majors in business school.
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) embodies the current world
The most advanced enterprise management theory in the world, and provides the best solution for enterprise information integration. It will
Logistics, capital flow and information flow are unified for management, and the manpower, capital, materials,
Equipment, methods (production technology), information and time and other resources are comprehensively balanced and fully considered, and the most
Page 71
Maximize the use of the company’s existing resources to achieve greater economic benefits, scientifically and effectively manage corporate personnel,
Various specific tasks such as finance, property, production, supply and sales.
This course requires students to master the entire process of ERP principles, design and application. In-depth understanding of ERP
Management ideas and informatization solutions, master the business processing and informatization realization of each mainstream module of ERP
principle. Master the design and implementation of ERP software, implement ERP management ideas and how to implement and apply ERP
Integrated information system.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the study of this course, students can fully understand ERP management ideas and ERP
The important role of the system in the enterprise; in terms of knowledge, master the basic concepts, basic principles and basic framework of ERP
And core business processes, through ERP case discussions and experience the process of ERP software system operation, to understand the letter
The relationship between information system and enterprise management, grasp the key decision-making factors and organization implementation methods of ERP project implementation
Method; in terms of ability, through the process of simulating business operations, students can integrate the knowledge they have learned,
Improve students’ ability to analyze and solve problems; in terms of overall quality, strengthen students’ practical ability and improve
The comprehensive quality of students to meet the needs of society
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The first part of ERP principle and case analysis
Chapter 1 The formation of ERP theory
1.1 Basic MRP
1.2 Closed-loop MRP
1.3 Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP-II)
1.4 Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
1.5 Research on the application of enterprise resource management theory
Chapter 2 Basic Concepts
2.1 Material coding
2.2 Bill of Materials (BOM)
2.3 Work Center (WC)
2.4 Lead time and planned outlook
2.5 Process route
Chapter 3 Sales Management
3.1 Sales environment and production types
3.2 Overview of Sales Management Business
3.3 Sales system functions
Chapter 4 Master Production Plan (MPS)
4.1 Definition and function of master production plan
4.2 Rough Capacity Planning (RCCP)
4.3 Master Production Planning Theory
Chapter 5 Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
5.1 Definition and role
5.2 Calculation model
5.3 MRP report
Chapter 6 Capacity Requirements Planning
Page 72
6.1 Overview of capacity requirement plan
6.2 Classification of capacity requirement plans
6.3 Calculation method of capacity requirement plan
6.4 Balance and output of capacity demand plan
Chapter 7 Procurement Management
7.1 The role of procurement
7.2 Overview of the procurement business
7.3 Operation of the procurement subsystem
7.4 The relationship between the procurement subsystem and other business subsystems
Chapter 8 Inventory Management
8.1 Classification of inventory
8.2 Functions and disadvantages of inventory
8.3 Control of inventory
8.4 Inventory management strategy
8.5 Inventory operations and information processing
Chapter 9 Workshop Management
9.1 Overview of workshop management
9.2 Workshop tasks
9.3 Work Order
9.4 Dispatch work orders and job sequencing
9.5 Input-output control
9.6 Group technology
Chapter 10 Production Management
10.1 JIT work characteristics
10.2 Implementation of JIT System
10.3 JIT system operation and use process
Chapter 11 Financial Management
11.1 Overview of Financial Management Business
11.2 Realization of standard financial computerization
11.3 Realization of Integrated Finance
Chapter 12 ERP and Supply Chain Management
The second part of ERP application (practice on the computer)
4. Requirements for the course practice : Students are required to be proficient in operating and applying Kingdee K3 ERP software.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One
The formation of ERP theory
1
Chapter two
basic concept
1
third chapter
Sales management
1
Chapter Four
Master Production Plan (MPS)
1
chapter Five
Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
2
Page 73
Chapter Six
Capacity requirement plan
2
Chapter VII
Procurement management
2
chapter eight
Inventory management
2
Chapter nine
Workshop management
2
chapter Ten
Production management
2
Chapter Eleven
Financial Management
2
Chapter Twelve
ERP and supply chain management
2
the second part
Hands-on practice
Two weeks
6. Course assessment method
The usual score is 50%, and the test is 50%.
7. Drafting Author: Xu Minli
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Business plan simulation
Course number: 160105Z1
Course Name: Business Plan Simulation
English name : Entrepreneurship Plan Simulation (practice)
Class hours and credits: 2.5 weeks/2.5
Prerequisite course requirements:
Management, Macroeconomics, Microeconomics, Organizational Behavior, Marketing, Human Resource Management
Management, marketing management, financial management, company strategic management
Adapt to major: business administration
Reference materials:
1. Entrepreneurship Course for College Students-Theory and Practice (First Edition)/Edited by Liu Ping/2009-08-01/Qing
Hua University Press
2. Innovation and Entrepreneurship Training Course (First Edition)/Editor Xi Guoquan/Tsinghua University Press/2012-03-01
Course introduction:
This course is guided by changing educational thinking and updating educational concepts to enhance students’ sense of social responsibility,
Innovative spirit, entrepreneurial awareness and entrepreneurial ability are the core, focusing on reforming the talent training model and curriculum system,
Continuously improve the quality of talent training.
The core of this course is to combine theory with practice. Based on the theoretical knowledge of previous students
Foundation, a more complex simulation of the real business environment, enabling students to discover and solve problems in practice. this
The courses cover a wide range, starting from preparations before starting a business, discovering and identifying entrepreneurial opportunities, and turning entrepreneurial opportunities into commercial prices.
Value, entrepreneurial marketing, to entrepreneurial financing and so on.
Page 74
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course responds to the country’s demand for innovation and entrepreneurship for college students, and provides a
A platform for innovation and entrepreneurial practice activities to increase students’ entrepreneurial awareness and grasp relevant knowledge and experience as early as possible
Be good at entrepreneurial thinking, cultivate team spirit, and vividly interpret and examine learning by simulating actual combat and team activities
The comprehensive quality and ability of entrepreneurship that students should have.
Encourage college students to use their own characteristics through observation of the society and the market, plan and formulate a certain degree of reality
Valuable entrepreneurial plans (the way of presentation is not limited), and conduct practical entrepreneurship simulation. In the process of entrepreneurial design,
Stimulate and cultivate the innovative practical ability, initiative spirit, business spirit and market economy thinking of our school students. with
Time to lay the foundation for the annual "Challenge Cup" entrepreneurial plan competition for college students and pre-select potential teams
In the next year's competition recommended by the plan, it will provide team members with a platform for exercise and simulation.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course is suitable for undergraduates above the second year of business administration and related majors, and management is required
Basic theoretical knowledge related to economics.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. From what aspects do entrepreneurship look at topic selection
(1) Analysis of entrepreneurial environment: ○1 natural environment ○2 political environment ○3 economic environment ○4 social environment ○5 technology
Environment ○6 Legal environment
(2) Regional environmental analysis: ○1 Economic development situation ○2 Environmental conditions analysis of entrepreneurship (financial support; government
Policies; government projects; R&D and development transfer; business and professional infrastructure; market openness; tangible
Infrastructure status)
(3) Industry environment analysis: ○1 Competitive competition among competing manufacturers ○2 Competitive pressure from substitutes ○3
Buyer's rights ○4 Supplier's rights ○5 Potential entrants
2. Startup team formation and opportunity discovery
(1) Decided to become an entrepreneur
(2) Establishment of entrepreneurial team: ○1 Construction of core team members ○2 Formation of entrepreneurial team ○3 Entrepreneurship team
Performance evaluation and incentives
(3) Discovery of entrepreneurial opportunities: ○1 Analysis of entrepreneurial environment ○2 Discovery of market demand ○3 Preliminary construction of entrepreneurial projects
Thinking ○4 Evaluation of Entrepreneurship Project
3. Preparation of business plan
(1) Market research: ○1 establish goals ○2 design plans ○3 collect data ○4 analyze data ○5 draw conclusions
(2) Improvement of business plan: ○1 Executive summary ○2 Project background ○3 Market opportunities ○4 Company strategy ○5 Camp
Sales management ○6 Production management ○7 Investment analysis ○8 Financial analysis ○9 Management system ○10 Risks and opportunities ○11 Others
4. Defense and evaluation of entrepreneurial competition
(1) Product/service introduction and market analysis
(2) Company strategy and marketing strategy
(3) Enterprise economic/financial status
(4) Venture financing: ○1 financing channels ○2 capital sources and use ○3 investment income and risk analysis
(5) Entrepreneurship management: ○1 human resource management ○2 marketing management ○3 financial management ○4 production management ○5 enterprise
Business culture management 6 Entrepreneurship risk management
(6) Analysis of key risks and problems
Page 75
(7) Entrepreneurship opportunity evaluation framework: ○1 industry and market ○2 economic factors ○3 harvest conditions ○4 competitive advantage ○5
Management team ○6 Personal standards ○7 Strategic gap between reality and ideal ○8Return evaluation ○9Market evaluation
4. Requirements for course practice
Curriculum experiment is based on entrepreneurial related theories, using a combination of classroom teaching and extracurricular practice
Fully simulate the entire environmental and strategic decision-making process of the company’s creation, so that business administration students can simulate
In the business environment, practice the theories and skills they have learned, and experience the preparation, discovery and
The whole process from identifying entrepreneurial opportunities, turning entrepreneurial opportunities into commercial value, entrepreneurial marketing, and entrepreneurial financing,
Strengthen the understanding and application of abstract theoretical knowledge, improve practical skills, analyze problems and solve problems
Power and creative ability, urge it to integrate theory and practice.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Course Title
Class time allocation
Entrepreneurship topic
5 hours
Entrepreneurship team formation and opportunity discovery
10 hours
Business plan preparation
15 hours
Entrepreneurship contest defense and evaluation
5 hours
total
40 hours
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of the entrepreneurial competition simulation course is based on the usual performance of the group members, the quality of the business plan and the
Evaluation of the response.
The assessment standards are:
Attendance
5%
Usual grades
Homework completion
5%
Product/service introduction and market analysis
10%
Company strategy and marketing strategy
15%
Team ability and management
15%
Business Economic/Financial Status
10%
Financing options and returns
10%
Business plan
Analysis of key risks and problems
10%
Correctly understand the judges’ questions
5%
Answer questions promptly and smoothly
5%
The answer is accurate and credible
5%
Defense
The overall defense logic is rigorous and clear thinking
5%
7. Formulation writer: Ren Shenggang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 76
Frontiers of Management Theory
Course ID : 160106Z1
Course Title : Frontiers of Management Theory
English name: Management theoretical frontiers
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: basic courses and professional courses in business administration
Adapt to major: business administration
Reference materials : related academic monographs and academic journals of business administration
Course introduction:
The topic of business management is an advanced professional course for business administration majors.
On the basis of all professional courses, help students to recognize and understand the hot issues of business management
And research trends, the course will organize a number of teachers to discuss the enterprises under the background of economic globalization in the form of special topics.
The hot issues of business management, the frontier issues of domestic and foreign research in this discipline enter the relevant introduction, theoretical analysis and
case study.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course explores cutting-edge issues in the field of business management from multiple perspectives in the form of a topic, aiming to help students
To understand the hot issues and research trends of business management disciplines, and cultivate divergent and comprehensive discipline research
Ideas.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Students have a comprehensive understanding of the frontier research issues of business administration majors and the hot spots in practice
Questions, have a certain understanding of the key issues, development directions, and research ideas of the subject, and put forward their own ideas
Test and enlightenment.
3. The basic content, key points and difficulties of course teaching
This course is organized and coordinated by the head of the Department of Business Management, and arranges for those who have obtained a doctorate in management
A number of teachers combined their own research directions to conduct special topics on business management under the background of economic globalization.
Related topics, theoretical analysis, and case analysis.
Analysis. The focus is to let students understand how to use the basic courses and professional courses they have learned in the major
Analyze and solve the actual problems faced by enterprises in their operation and management. The specific content of different years can be based on specific
The teacher's research direction is adjusted accordingly.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Prepare
Note
Page 77
First lecture
Frontiers of Management Theory Development (Part 1)
3
Second lecture
Frontiers of Management Theory Development (Part 2)
3
Third lecture
Frontiers of Strategic Management Theory (Part 1)
3
Fourth lecture
Frontiers of Strategic Management Theory (Part 2)
3
Fifth Lecture
Frontiers of Marketing Management Theory (Part 1)
3
Sixth Lecture
Frontiers of Marketing Management Theory (Part 2)
3
Seventh lecture
Frontiers of Entrepreneurship Management Theory (Part 1)
3
Eighth lecture
Frontiers of Entrepreneurship Management Theory (Part 2)
3
Lecture 9 Frontiers of Organizational Behavior and Human Resource Management Theory
3
Lecture 10 Frontiers of Organizational Behavior and Human Resource Management Theory
3
Comprehensive review and assessment
2
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (30%) + open book (70%)
The usual results include class attendance rate, performance of raising hands and answering questions in class;
The final exam is an open-book exam, which analyzes and elaborates the basic questions of related topics
7. Formulation writer: Ren Shenggang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Management ethics
Course number: 160107Z1
Course Title: Management Ethics
English name: Management Ethic
Class hours and credits: 16/1 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: none
Adapt to majors: majors in business school
Reference textbook: "Business Ethics" (Second Edition), Xu Dajian, Peking University Press, 2009.
Course introduction:
Management ethics is an elective course designated by the enterprise and public service management major. Its basic content is composed of three groups
Cheng: Basic Theory, Core Issues, Ethics Construction. "Basic Theory" includes basic concepts, management
The origin and development of ethics, the relationship between management ethics and related disciplines, the function and ethics of management ethics
Analysis tools and the principles of economic efficiency and economic fairness in the socialist period; the purpose and characteristics of the market economy system
Page 78
The ethical foundation and moral evaluation of the market economy system; the characteristics of enterprise organization, enterprise purpose and society
The content of responsibility; unethical behavior in business activities and its harm and causes. "Core Issues"
Then it systematically analyzes the ethical issues in business management: marketing ethics, product safety and factory
The moral responsibility of business, the basic rights of employees and the quality of professional life, knowledge, information and the ethics of fair competition
Guidelines etc. Grasp the content and process of ethical construction of the enterprise. "Ethics Construction" starts from "Law Abiding Strategy"
And “reputation strategy” discusses how to build corporate ethics culture.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Management ethics is an elective course designated by the major of enterprise and public service management. Its task is based on general ethics.
The moral principles of Neo-Confucianism make moral evaluation and ethical criticism of various economic systems or economic management activities, thereby
Draw up ethics or policy recommendations in the economic field in order to improve and maintain economic order and make economic
Management activities are more efficient and fair. Through theoretical study, case discussion and research
Grasp the tools of economic management ethics evaluation, establish ethical values, consciously abide by ethics, and improve students
The inherent moral quality of enterprises and public management in order to train students to use ethical tools for social or enterprise economic
The ability to analyze economic systems and policies.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Understand the basic concepts and content of management ethics, the origin and development of management ethics, and management ethics
The relationship between learning and related disciplines, and the function of management ethics. When mastering ethical analysis tools and socialism
Periodic economic efficiency and economic fairness principles.
2. Grasp the purpose and characteristics of the market economy system, the ethical foundation and moral evaluation of the market economy system
price. Grasp the characteristics of corporate organization, corporate purpose and content of social responsibility. Understand the evil in business activities
Virtue behavior and its harm and reasons.
3. Understand the ethical issues in business management, master the ethical principles of marketing and product safety
And manufacturers’ ethical responsibilities, employees’ basic rights and quality of professional life, knowledge, information and fair competition
Code of ethics. Grasp the content and process of ethical construction of the enterprise.
4. Students should read through one monograph and ten related papers in addition to classroom study;
5. Cultivate and apply basic theories of management ethics in the discussion of foreign classic cases and local realistic cases
The ability to analyze and evaluate actual problems;
3.
Choose a local company for research and try to design a plan for corporate ethical culture construction,
Cultivate students' practical ability.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. The basic content of the course: the content of management ethics consists of three parts: basic theory, core questions
Title chapter, ethics construction chapter. The basic theory chapter includes basic concepts, the origin and development of management ethics, management
The relationship between ethics and related disciplines, the function of management ethics, and ethical analysis tools and the socialist period
Principles of economic efficiency and economic fairness; the purpose and characteristics of the market economy system, the ethical foundation of the market economy system
Foundation and its ethical evaluation; the characteristics of corporate organization, corporate objectives and the content of social responsibility;
Unethical behavior and its harm and causes. The core issue is a systematic analysis of ethics in business management
Questions: Ethical guidelines for marketing, product safety and manufacturers’ moral responsibilities, basic rights of employees
And the ethics of professional life quality, knowledge, information and fair competition. Preliminary grasp of the ethical construction of enterprises
Set content and process. The ethics construction chapter discusses such things as "law-abiding strategy" and "reputation strategy".
Page 79
How to build corporate ethical culture.
2. The focus of the course: the focus of the course is to help understand and master management ethics analysis tools,
Self-discipline and self-consciousness of moral evaluation; implement moral decision-making; build corporate ethical culture.
3. The difficulty of the course: the difficulty of the course is the analysis tool of management ethics and the economics in the socialist period
Understanding the principles of efficiency and economic fairness; understanding the purpose and characteristics of the market economy system, and the ethics of the market economy system
Basic understanding; and the analysis of unethical behaviors in business activities and their harm and causes.
4. Requirements for course practice
Create conditions to visit 1-2 companies, select a local company for research, and try to make corporate ethical culture
Schematic design of construction.
5. Course teaching hours allocation (including examination)
Table of Contents
learn
Time
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One Introduction
2
Chapter Two Ethical Analysis Tools
2
Chapter 3 The Ethical Foundation and Moral Evaluation of Market Economy 2
Chapter 4 The purpose and moral evaluation of the enterprise
2
Chapter 5 Ethical Code of Marketing
2
Chapter 6 Product Safety and Manufacturer's Moral Responsibility 2
Chapter 7 Ethical Code in the Relationship between Enterprises and Employees
2
Chapter 8 Ethics-related factors of management decision-making
2
6. Course assessment method
1. Class discussion, research and usual performance account for 20%
2. Homework accounts for 20%
3. Final exam: 60%
7. Formulation Author: Li Ningqi
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute) : Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school) : Gong Yanping
Business competition simulation
Course number: 160108Z1
Course Title : Corporate Competition Simulation
English name: The enterprise competition simulation
Class hours and credits: 2 weeks/2
Prerequisite course requirements: management, corporate strategy, marketing, financial management, human resource management, production
Page 80
Operation Management
Adapt to major: business administration
Reference textbook: Application of Enterprise Competition Simulation Software
Course introduction:
Corporate competition simulation is an advanced professional course for business administration majors.
On the basis of all professional courses of the major, use computer technology to simulate the competitive environment of the enterprise and conduct business operations
Decision-making exercise. Corporate competition simulation can train students to face multiple competitions in a changing business environment
Opponents correctly make corporate decisions and achieve corporate strategic goals. It requires participants to be comprehensive and flexible
Use management knowledge.
Syllabus:
1. The nature, purpose and tasks of the course
Corporate competition simulation is an advanced professional course for business administration majors.
On the basis of all the professional courses of this major, use computer technology to simulate the competitive environment of the enterprise and carry out
Practice of business decision-making.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The course requires students to use management knowledge comprehensively and flexibly, in a changing business environment,
Facing multiple competitors, make correct decisions of the enterprise and achieve the strategic goals of the enterprise.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
In the competition simulation, the trainees should be divided into multiple groups, each representing a company. The simulation is on schedule.
At the beginning of the period, each company must make decisions for the current period, including production, transportation, marketing, financial management, and human resources.
Resource management, research and development, strategic development, etc., and enter the computer as required within the specified time. soft
According to the decision of each company, the sales volume of each company is determined according to the simulated market demand, and a series of
Indicators related to company operations. Companies can see the simulation results in time. Then, according to the company’s location
And observe and analyze the opponent’s situation and make the next decision until the end of the simulation.
4. Requirements for course practice
Computer experiments on the whole course.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Generally, it takes two hours to make a decision, and a relatively complete simulation process generally takes 8 periods. soft
Each company will be sorted according to multiple business indicators. This course will arrange two complete simulation competitions.
6. Course assessment method
After the entire enterprise competition simulation is over, the winners of the competition simulation will be evaluated according to the weighted average of multiple indicators
By.
7. Maker: Ren Shenggang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 81
Corporate Culture Theory and Practice
Course Number : 160109Z1
Course Title: Theory and Practice of Corporate Culture
English name: The Theory and Practice of Enterprise Culture
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: Management, Organizational Behavior, Human Resource Management, etc.
Adapt to majors: business administration, accounting, finance and financial management, international economics and trade, e-commerce and
Public administration, etc.
Reference materials:
Textbook: Compiled by Lin Jian. Corporate Culture Practice. Blue Sky Publishing House, 2005
Reference books: 1. [America] Michael. Zwell, translated by Huang Shenying and others, creating a corporate culture based on competence,
China Publishing House 2002
2. Editor-in-Chief Shi Wei, Organizational Culture, Fudan University Press, 2004
3. Zhang De, Wu Jianping, Corporate Culture and CI Planning, 2002
Course introduction:
This course introduces students to the hot spots of corporate culture construction and the content system of corporate culture. package
Including corporate culture, function and role. The material culture, behavioral culture, institutional culture and spiritual culture of the company:
The core of corporate culture: including the business values ​​and philosophy of the company, the management values ​​and management of the company
Mode, the way of management of Chinese enterprises; inheritance and absorption of corporate culture: including Chinese excellent management
The inheritance of management culture, the absorption of the essence of western corporate culture, technical exploration of cross-cultural management; and corporate culture
Evolution law of corporate culture: including the formation law of corporate culture, the evolution of corporate culture in the early, middle, and late stages
Changing trends and the challenges of corporate culture evolution to management and leadership skills, the overall construction and innovation of corporate culture
new.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is an elective course of business administration in the training program. Its purpose and mission are: requirements
The macro background of the development of the world management discipline for students since the 20th century (scientific management theory—behavioral science—
System management and contingency management ideas—corporate culture) and theoretical heights, deep understanding of culture as the promotion of production
The great role of developing powerful elements and the importance of building contemporary excellent corporate culture; students are required to fully grasp
The basic concepts, theoretical categories and theoretical systems in "Corporate Culture Theory and Practice"
Discuss the ability to analyze and evaluate thinking and practical problems; through theoretical study, case discussion and research and practice, preliminary
Cultivate and form corporate culture construction, operation and management capabilities.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Students should read through one monograph and ten related papers in addition to classroom study;
2. Cultivate and apply basic cultural theoretical analysis and analysis in the discussion of foreign classic cases and local realistic cases
The ability to evaluate actual problems;
Page 82
3. Choose a local company for research, try to plan for corporate culture construction, and train students from it
Actual operation ability.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Basic content of the course: This course introduces students to the hotspots of corporate culture construction and corporate culture
An integrated content system. Including corporate cultural connotation and its functional role. The company’s material culture, behavioral culture,
Institutional culture and spiritual culture: the core of corporate culture: including the business values ​​and philosophy of the company,
The management values ​​and management modes of the industry, the management methods of Chinese enterprises; the inheritance and absorption of corporate culture:
Including the inheritance of Chinese excellent business management culture, the absorption of the essence of Western corporate culture, and cross-cultural management techniques
Technology exploration; and the evolution law of corporate culture: including the formation law of corporate culture, the early years of corporate culture,
The evolution trend of middle age and late stage, and the challenge of corporate culture evolution to management and leadership skills, corporate
Comprehensive construction and innovation of culture.
Focus of the course:
The first section: the basic theories of corporate culture, including:
Culture, national culture, corporate culture, the connotation and function of corporate culture, corporate values, corporate essence
God
The second section: the construction, operation and management of corporate culture, including:
Corporate image and CIS strategy, corporate culture operation and management, corporate culture dissemination and communication
The third section: Inheritance, innovation and cross-cultural management of corporate culture, including:
Cross-cultural management of corporate culture, comparison and innovation of corporate culture, corporate culture construction and Chinese tradition
Cultural inheritance and innovation
The difficulty of the course: the evaluation, construction and innovation of corporate culture.
4. Requirements for course practice
Create conditions to visit 1-2 companies, select a local company for research, and try to build corporate culture
The scheme design.
5. Course teaching hours allocation (including examination)
Table of contents
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One
Introduction: Culture. National Culture. Enterprise
culture
2
Chapter two
The rise and development of corporate culture
2
third chapter
Enterprise's material culture and its construction
2
Chapter Four
Corporate Behavioral Culture and Its Cultivation
2
chapter Five
Enterprise's system culture and its construction
4
Chapter Six
Enterprise's spiritual culture and its refinement
4
Chapter VII
Corporate Culture and CIS Strategy
4
chapter eight
Corporate culture and advertising and marketing
2
Chapter nine
Entrepreneur and corporate culture
2
chapter Ten
Measurement and evaluation of corporate culture
4
Chapter 11 Adjustment and Optimization of Corporate Culture
2
Chapter 12 The Change and Development of Corporate Culture
2
Page 83
Six, assessment method
1. Class discussion, research and usual performance account for 20%
2. Homework accounts for 20%
3. Final exam: 60%
7. Outline system writer: Li Ningqi
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Corporate Strategic Management
Course number: 160110Z1
Course Title: Corporate Strategic Management
English name: Strategic Management
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: management, marketing, financial management, production management, etc.
Adapt to majors: business administration, marketing, international economics and trade, finance, e-commerce, financial management
Rationale
Reference textbooks: [1] Strategic Management. Wang Fanghua. Machinery Industry Press, 2005
[2] Strategic Management-Concepts and Cases (Tenth Edition). Arthur. A. Tompson. Beijing: North
Beijing University Press, 1999
[3] Strategic Management-Competition and Globalization. Michael A. Hitt. Beijing: Machinery Industry Press,
2002
[4] Corporate Strategic Management. Xu Erming. China Economic Publishing House. 2002
Course introduction:
Enterprise strategic management is a subject with strong theory, application and practicality. It is corporate high
For the long-term survival and development of the enterprise, the management personnel at all levels are fully analyzing the external environment and internal conditions of the enterprise.
Based on the dynamic management process of determining and selecting effective strategies to achieve goals, and putting them into practice. through
After this course, students can use strategic thinking and strategic tools to solve practical problems. Through case analysis,
Help students understand the concept of strategic management and the application of strategic analysis tools in different organizations to make strategic decisions
Methods.
Syllabus:
1. The nature, purpose and tasks of the course
This course is a subject with strong theoretical, practical and practicality. It is based on management, economics
Based on knowledge, and aims to provide comprehensive development for undergraduates majoring in business management and related management majors.
The core concepts, knowledge system, thinking framework, methods and skills necessary for the development of corporate strategy. through learning,
Enable students to use strategic thinking and strategic tools to solve practical problems. Through case analysis, help students manage
Page 84
Understand the concept of strategic management and the methods of applying strategic analysis tools to make strategic decisions in different organizations.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Understand the curriculum system, structure, development history, status quo and trend of strategic management;
2. Understand the basic concepts, basic principles and basic knowledge of the strategic management system;
3. Master the basic methods of strategic analysis and use strategic management theory to analyze practical problems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of this course includes introduction, strategic management process introduction, and analysis of the internal and external environment of the enterprise.
There are six major parts including basic competitive strategy and diversified company strategy.
The introduction part introduces the research objects, basic concepts and development history of strategic management of strategic management courses. war
The strategic management process describes a series of activities such as the formation, implementation and control of strategic management in an enterprise. Outside the company
Environmental analysis introduces the tools and tools of strategic analysis from the three levels of corporate macro environment, industry environment and competitive environment.
method. The analysis of the internal environment of the enterprise will introduce the internal resource evaluation and integration system based on the enterprise resource theory.
And the identification and establishment of core competence. The company’s competitive strategy will start from the company’s basic competitive strategy and dynamic competition
The two parts of strategy introduce the basic content, main characteristics and scope of application of the business-level strategy of the enterprise. Diversification
The strategy will introduce the types, main content, implementation principles and methods of diversification strategy from the perspective of company-level strategy.
The strategy and organization section will introduce organizational structures that match different corporate strategies.
The focus of the course lies in the evaluation of the internal and external environment of the enterprise, basic competitive strategy and diversified strategic content
grasp. The difficulty lies in the application and summary of various analytical tools in internal and external environmental assessment; basic competitive strategies and
The choice and application of strategy in diversification strategy. At the same time of teaching, the corresponding case work and case should be arranged
discuss. At the same time, students can also be introduced to the latest frontier issues of strategic management research and new developments in practice, so that students can
Students broaden their horizons and ideas.
4. Requirements for course practice
In the course of course teaching, case discussions should be arranged for key chapters. If conditions permit, 2-6
Competitive simulation activities for class hours.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One
introduction
4
Chapter two
Strategic management process
6
third chapter
Analysis of the external environment of the enterprise
10
Chapter Four
Enterprise internal environment analysis
6
chapter Five
Enterprise's competitive strategy
6
Chapter Six
Enterprise's diversification strategy
6
Chapter VII
Strategy and organization
4
chapter eight
Strategic control
2
Summary of Full Course Study
2
Maneuver
2
Page 85
6. Course assessment method
Course assessment is based on closed-book examinations, 70% of test scores come from course examinations, and 30% come from usual attendance
And case exercises
7. Author: Guan Jian
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
human resource Management
Course number: 160111Z1
Course Name: Human Resource Management
English name: Human Resource Management
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: Economics, Management, Organizational Behavior
Adapt to majors: business administration, marketing, financial management, accounting, information management and information systems, electronics
Sub-business, international economy and trade, etc.
Reference materials: [1] Human Resource Management (Second Edition). Yan Aimin. Peking University Press, 2010;
[2] Theory and Practice of Human Resource Management (Revised Edition). Yan Aimin. Central South University Press, 2005
year;
[3] Introduction to Human Resource Management (Second Edition). Zheng Xiaoming. Machinery Industry Press, 2005
Course introduction:
This course is a compulsory course for business administration majors and majors in financial management, information management and information systems
Elective Courses. It is based on the perspective of the manager (Operation Manager), mainly learning the human resources of the enterprise
Source management principles and application technologies, while taking into account the cutting-edge research methods and trends of related human resources. Train students
As a human resource theoretical foundation and main application tool necessary for managers, train students to master the team
Ability and strong career viability, which lays solid human resources for students to grow into a senior manager
Source management ideological foundation and learning ability.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a compulsory course for business administration majors and majors in financial management, information management and information systems
Elective Courses. It is based on the perspective of the manager (Operation Manager), mainly learning the human resources of the enterprise
Source management principles and application technologies, while taking into account the cutting-edge research methods and trends of related human resources. Train students
As a human resource theoretical foundation and main application tool necessary for managers, train students to master the team
Ability and strong career viability, which lays solid human resources for students to grow into a senior manager
Source management ideological foundation and learning ability.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Page 86
1. Understand the development process, current situation and trend of human resource management, and master the research thinking of human resource management
Road and frame system.
2. Master the necessary personal qualities and team control methods for enterprise managers' human resource management.
3. Master the basic theories and applied technology of human resource management, and be able to use the theory of human resource management
Analyze and solve practical problems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Human Resource Management Overview
Main contents: (1) Origin and evolution of human resource management
(2) Characteristics and connotation of human resource management
(3) Development trend of human resource management research
(4) The main characteristics and trends of China's human resource management
Key points: master the origins, definitions, characteristics and trends of human resource management; understand Chinese human resources
Trends in source management.
Difficulty: Master the characteristics of China's human resource management
Chapter Two Economic Theories Related to Human Resources
Main content: (1) Labor economics theory
(2) Human capital theory;
(3) Principal-agent theory
Focus: Human capital theory and principal-agent theory and their influence on human resource management.
Difficulty: human capital pricing.
Chapter III Organization and Human Resources Management
Main content: (1) Human nature theory and human resource management
(2) Individual and human resource management
(3) Group and human resource management
(4) Organizational model and human resource management
Focus: The main human nature theory, the influence of ability and psychological contract on human resource management, team harmony and
Effectiveness building.
Difficulty: capable person management and high-performance team building.
Chapter 4 Culture and Human Resources Management
Main content: (1) The impact of culture on human resource management
(2) The influence of Chinese traditional culture on human resource management
(3) Analysis of the background of China's economic model and its cultural characteristics
Key points: cultural connotation, main characteristics and its relationship with human resource management, in traditional Chinese culture
The main human resource management thoughts contained therein are the basic characteristics of China's human resource management under the background of the transitional economy.
Difficulties: the essence of human resource management thoughts in traditional culture, analysis of the characteristics of the transitional economy background.
Chapter 5 Human Resources Planning
Main content: (1) Overview of human resource planning
(2) Human resource demand forecast
(3) Human resource supply forecast
(4) Balance of human resources supply and demand
(5) Preparation of human resource planning
(6) Control and evaluation of human resource planning
Page 87
(7) Human Resource Management Information System
Focus: Analysis framework of human resource planning; factor analysis of human resource planning and human resource supply
The main method of seeking prediction.
Difficulty: Human resource supply and demand forecast method and application
Chapter VI Work Analysis
Main content: (1) Overview of job analysis
(2) Work analysis method
(3) Work instructions
(4) Work design
(5) Work evaluation
Key points: the steps and common methods of job analysis; the content, structure and production method of the job description;
The main method of job design; the process and method of job evaluation.
Difficulty: Job evaluation techniques and methods
Chapter 7 Staff Recruitment
Main content: (1) Staff recruitment overview
(2) The main operation links of employee recruitment
(3) Recruitment matters needing attention
(4) Selection and recruitment
(5) Staff welfare system
Key points: The main operational aspects of employee recruitment: the formulation of employee recruitment plans and recruitment evaluation; personnel selection
Recruitment procedures and methods.
Difficulty: Recruitment test method
Chapter 8 Performance Management
Main content: (1) Overview of performance management
(2) Process of performance management
(3) Performance evaluation system
Focus: The connotation, definition and process of performance management evaluation; the main methods of performance evaluation
Difficulty: system performance evaluation method
Chapter 9 Salary
Main content: (1) Salary overview
(2) Strategic compensation
(3) Salary design
(4) Variable salary design
(5) Welfare
Focus: Strategic salary system construction; post salary design; variable salary design
Difficulty: post salary design method
Chapter 10 Human Resources Development and Training
Main content: (1) Human resource development
(2) Human resource training
Focus: the main technologies and methods of human resource development; career and career planning; training evaluation
Estimate method.
Difficulty: Human resource development technology
Chapter 11 Motivation
Page 88
Main content: (1) Overview of incentives
(2) Motivation theory
(3) Incentive system
(4) Equity incentives
(5) Incentive pressure-motivation mechanism
Focus: Representative incentive theory; the composition and design of incentive system; equity incentive method.
Difficulty: incentive plan design
Chapter 12 Labor Relations
Main content: (1) Overview of labor relations
(2) Western labor relations related theories
(3) Adjustment of labor relations
(4) Development trend of China's labor relations
Emphasis: the basic theory of labor relations; common methods for labor relations adjustment and labor dispute settlement.
Difficulties: the characteristics of labor relations in China and the handling of labor disputes
Chapter 13 Strategic Human Resource Management (Selected Lectures)
Main content: (1) Overview of strategic human resource management
(2) Corporate strategy and strategic human resource management
(3) Human resource strategy
(4) Application of strategic human resource management ideas
Focus: The main theories of strategic human resource management and strategic human resource management under different theoretical frameworks
Ideas; the relationship between strategic human resources and human resource strategy; the matching of corporate strategy and human resource strategy.
Difficulty: Application of Strategic Human Resource Management Thought
Chapter 14 Human Resources Market (optional)
Main content: (1) Overview of the human resources market
(2) Equilibrium of the human resources market
(3) Internal human resources market
(4) Discrimination in the human resources market
(5) Government behavior and human resources market
(6) Professional manager market
Focus: the balance of the human resource market; discrimination in the human resource market; government actions on the human resource market
Impact of the field.
Difficulty: China's human resources market issues
Chapter 15 International Human Resources Management (Selected Lectures)
Main content: (1) Overview of international human resource management
(2) International Human Resources Selection
(3) International human resources training and development
(4) Performance appraisal of international human resources
(5) Salary and incentives for international human resources
Focus: The characteristics of human resource management models in European, American, Japanese, Korean and Chinese enterprises; international human resource recruitment,
The characteristics and development trends of training, performance, salary management, etc.
Difficulty: The enlightenment of international human resource management to our country.
Chapter 16 A Preliminary Discussion on Human Resources Ecosystem (Selected Lectures)
Main content: (1) Ecology-related theories and their applications in the field of social sciences
Page 89
(2) Construction of human resources ecosystem
(3) Evolutionary law of human resources ecosystem
(4) The dynamics of the human resources ecosystem
(5) Niche and Niche of Human Resources
Focus: Systematic research methods; construction of human resources ecosystem; niche theory and human resources ecology
Bit.
Difficulty: the construction and application of human resources niche.
4. Requirements for course practice
No experiment requirements.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One
Human Resource Management Overview
2
Chapter two
Human Resources Related Economic Theories
2
third chapter
Organization and Human Resource Management
4
Chapter Four
Culture and Human Resource Management
6
Case discussion included 2 class hours
chapter Five
human resource planing
4
Chapter Six
Work analysis
4
Chapter VII
Hiring
4
chapter eight
Performance management
6
Case discussion included 2 class hours
Chapter nine
Salary
4
chapter Ten
Human resource development and training
4
Chapter 11 Motivation
4
Chapter 12 Labor Relations
2
Chapter 13 Strategic Human Resource Management
Selected talks
Chapter 14 Human Resources Market
Selected talks
Chapter 15 International Human Resource Management
Selected talks
Chapter XVI Human Resources Ecosystem Initial Discussion
Selected talks
Six, assessment method
1. Course assessment methods: final exam, written exam, open book.
2. The composition of the overall evaluation score: usual score: 40% (case discussion + extracurricular practice)
Test score: 60%
7. Drafting Author: Yan Aimin
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 90
Human Resource Management Practice in China
Course number: 160112Z1
Course Title : Human Resource Management Practice in Chinese Context
English name : Human resource management practices in the Chinese context
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 6, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: "Organizational Behavior", "Principles of Economics", "Principles of Human Resource Management/Introduction", "Management
Science
Adapt to major: economic management major
Reference materials :
1. Textbook "Human Resource Management" (2nd Edition), Yan Aimin, Peking University Press, 2011
2. Reference book "Human Resource Management Theory and Practice" (2nd Edition), Yan Aimin, published by Central South University
Society, 2005
3. Reference book "Diagnosis and Optimization of Human Resource Management in Chinese Enterprises-A Real Case Analysis", Yan Aimin,
Hunan Science and Technology Press, 2010
4. Reference book "Analysis of Typical Cases of Human Resource Management in Chinese Local Enterprises", Yan Aimin, Fudan University
Publishing House, 2011
5. Reference book "Economic Analysis of Human Resource Management", Yan Aimin, Peking University Press, 2010
Course introduction:
From the dimensions of China’s economic background, cultural background, and system
At a high level of understanding, the frontier dynamics and trends of human resource management research and the background of China’s transitional economy
The characteristics and trends of human resource management, the enlightenment of traditional culture to human resource management and how to improve the team
Elaboration on efficiency and other aspects, emphasis on the teaching of research and operating methods, highlighting China’s human resource management
Situational characteristics.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Status: This course is an elective major for undergraduates majoring in business administration and management science and engineering
class.
Purpose and mission:
Make students: 1. Be able to compare the characteristics of human resource management in different economic and cultural contexts;
2. Be able to analyze the characteristics of human resource management under the Chinese economic and cultural context; 3. Master the transitional economy of China
Under the cultural context, the special laws of human resource management in enterprises of different natures are skillfully applied to management practices.
Medium; 4. Master the relevant principles of team building, proficiently master and apply team communication, coordination and control techniques,
And can be effectively used in management practice.
2. Basic requirements of course teaching
no
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Introduction-Origin and Development Context of Human Resource Management
Teaching points:
Page 91
1. Introduction case "What is human resource management"
2. The origin of human resource management
3. Proposal and formation of human resources and human resource management
Teaching focus: the origin of human resource management
Teaching difficulties: situational differences and influence of management;
Chapter 2 Human Resource Management Research Logic and Main Features in the Chinese Context
Teaching points:
1. Research logic of human resource management in the Chinese context
2. The main characteristics of human resources and human resource management
3. Curriculum positioning and grasp of basic characteristics
Teaching focus: the research logic of human resource management in the Chinese context
Teaching difficulties: important artistic features of human resource management.
Chapter III Human Resource Management under the "System Transformation" of China's Economy
Teaching points:
1. The mechanism of production status on human resource management
2. my country is in a period of dual economic transition
3. Transformation from plan to market human resource management
Fourth, from the plan-the market's human resource management experience, problems and development ideas
Teaching focus: the contextual characteristics of China's economic "system transformation"; human resource management in this economic context
The special laws and applications of
Teaching difficulties: the characteristics of human resource management in China's specific economic situation;
Chapter 4 Human Resource Management under the "Development and Transformation" of China's Economy
Teaching points:
1. The typical characteristics and influence of human resource management of agricultural economic precipitation
2. Typical characteristics of human resource management that match the industrial economy
3. Typical characteristics of human resource management in the era of knowledge economy
4. Typical characteristics and countermeasures of human resource management in the transitional economy
Teaching focus: characteristics of the situation of China's economic "development and transformation"; human resource management in this economic situation
The special laws and applications of
Teaching difficulties: the characteristics of human resource management in China's specific economic situation;
Chapter 5: The Mechanism of the Role of Culture on Human Resource Management
Teaching points:
1. The relationship between culture, organizational culture and management
2. Cultural connotation and structure
3. The influence mechanism of culture on human behavior
4. Human resource management is rooted in cultural soil
Teaching focus: the influence function of culture on human behavior; the special rules of human resource management in this cultural context
law.
Teaching difficulties: the influence function of culture on human behavior.
Chapter VI "Benevolence" Modern Human Resource Management Function
Teaching points:
1. "Benevolence" is the core value standard of Confucianism
2. The origin and connotation of "benevolence"
Page 92
3. "Benevolence" cultural gene analysis
4. The mechanism of "benevolence" in human resource management
5. The practical application of "benevolence" in enterprise human resource management
Teaching focus: "Benevolence" cultural gene analysis and its mechanism of human resource management.
Teaching difficulties: the characteristics of human resource management in a specific cultural context.
Chapter 7 The application of human resource management in the balance of "righteousness and profit"
Teaching points:
1. The specific operating rules of "righteousness" as "benevolence"
2. The connotation of "righteousness" and "profit"
3. The main points of Confucian "righteousness and benefit" view
4. Modern analysis of "righteousness" and "profit"
5. Application of "righteousness and profit" in human resource management
Teaching focus: the connotation and modern analysis of "righteousness and benefit".
Teaching difficulties: the practical application of "righteousness" and "profit" balance in human resource management.
Chapter 8: From "doing nothing but ruling" to "nothing but ruling"
Teaching points:
1. The connotation of "doing nothing"
2. The Implication of Human Resource Management of "Governing by Doing Nothing"
2. Modern human resource management application of "doing nothing"
Teaching focus: the connotation and modern analysis of "ruling by doing nothing".
Teaching Difficulties: The application of "doing nothing" in modern human resource management.
Chapter 9 Breakthrough of the "bottleneck" of human resource management in growing enterprises
Teaching points:
1. Connotation and characteristics of growth-oriented enterprises
2. Development bottlenecks faced by growing companies
Third, the bottleneck breakthrough strategy of growth enterprises
Teaching focus: Human resource management bottlenecks and breakthroughs in the development of growing enterprises.
Teaching difficulties: situational characteristics of human resource management in growing enterprises;
Key features.
Chapter 10 How to Improve Team Cohesion
Teaching points:
1. Connotation and dimensions of team and team cohesion
2. Analysis of influence factors of team cohesion
3. Leadership improvement
Teaching focus: Analysis of factors affecting team cohesion
Teaching Difficulties: Case Analysis of Influencing Factors of Team Cohesion
Chapter Eleven Management of Talents and Management of Talents
Teaching points:
1. The characteristics of capable people and their importance in the organization
2. Conflicts between capable people and managers
3. Effective management of capable people
Teaching focus: Analysis of the causes of conflicts between capable people and managers
Teaching difficulties: Use cases to analyze the effective management of capable people
Page 93
Chapter 12 The Core Team's Way of Domination
Teaching points:
1. The importance of the core team
2. How to control the core team
Teaching focus: How to control the core team
Teaching Difficulties: Use cases to analyze the core team's dominance
Chapter Thirteen "Mind Studies" of Zen Buddhism-General Essentials of Human Resource Management in China
Teaching points:
1. The mechanism of Zen "Mindology" in human resource management
2. The practical application of Zen "Mindology" in human resource management
Teaching focus: The practical application of Zen "Mind" in human resource management
Teaching Difficulties: The Mechanism of the Effect of Zen "Mind Studies" on Human Resource Management
4. Requirements for course practice : 6 class hours
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Each chapter is 2 class hours, and the in-class experiment is 6 class hours.
6. Course assessment method
Course scores accounted for 60% of the final exam scores, and 40% of the usual scores. The final exam is an open-book written exam.
7. Drafting Author: Yan Aimin
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Production operation management
Course number: 160113Z1
Course Name: Production Operation Management
English name: Production and Operations Management
Class hours and credits: 48/3
(Experimental hours: 0, computer hours in class: 0)
Prerequisites: Management, Operations Research, Business Statistics
Adapt to major : business administration, marketing, information management, e-commerce, financial management
Reference materials: [1] Operations Management.Heizer Render. Pearson Prentice
Hall, 2005
[2] Production and Operation Management. Chen Rongqiu, Ma Shihua. Higher Education Press
[3] Production and Operation Management. William J. Stevenson. Machinery Industry Press
Course introduction:
In the past, Western scholars called the manufacture of tangible products linked to factories "Production"
(Production), and the activities of providing labor services are called "Operations".
Page 94
The success of an enterprise is that customers recognize the value of its products or services. This course highlights operational strategy,
Supply chain management, process design, service operation, quality control, information technology and e-commerce in operation management
New hotspots of modern operation management, such as the application in the Internet and global operations. At the same time pay attention to the combination of theory and application, using
A large number of examples, cases, and enterprise application examples to illustrate the use of these theories and methods, including many examples
New approaches and successful practices adopted by enterprises in recent years in the face of environmental changes. Some large international companies
Successful experience shows that successful operation management is the key to the survival of an enterprise.
This course helps students become effective managers in today's competitive global market. Press not
To locate the needs of managers, so that students understand what managers can do in the process, and master the reform
Tools and methods to advance operational decision-making. They need to understand the various interconnected processes in the enterprise and how to
Design and manage processes to deal with issues of quality, technology and staffing.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a professional core course , the purpose is to enable students to have a comprehensive understanding of the content of production operation management
Understand and master basic operation management techniques and methods, and lay a good foundation for future production or service management
basis.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Requirements: (1) Fully grasp the basic concepts of operation management, understand operation functions and marketing roles
The relationship between performance, financial management functions and other functions, and grasp the status and role of operation management as a whole; (2)
Familiar with the basic content of operation management; (3) Able to combine the actual conditions of manufacturing and service
Basic models and methods of management; (4) Able to use common operation management software.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Production operation is the process of transforming production factors (inputs) into tangible products and intangible services (outputs).
It is the process of creating the value required by customers. Operation management is the calculation of material production activities and labor activities.
Planning, organization and control, including the management of the design, operation and maintenance process of the operating system.
The design of the production and operation system includes the selection and design of products or services, the fixed-point selection of operating facilities,
Operational facility layout, service delivery system design and work design. The operation of the operating system is mainly about
In the operating system of the industry, how to adapt to market changes, produce qualified products and provide full
Italian service. The operation of the operating system mainly involves three aspects: production planning, organization and control.
This course introduces the basic concepts of production and operation management and its new development trends; strengthens production and operation
Strategy, new concepts and new methods of modern production management; from the perspective of quantitative analysis, analyze and discuss various
The planning and optimal control problems of a typical production and operation management system.
This course focuses on operational strategy, supply chain management, process design, service operation, quality control,
The application of information technology in operation management. The difficulty lies in the application of quantitative analysis methods in this course.
Solving these quantitative methods is the difficulty of this course. In addition, because the course is very practical, and students did not participate
It is difficult to establish a complete production operation system without perceptual knowledge.
4. Requirements for course practice
During the course of teaching, arrange case discussions 2-3 times
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Page 95
Chapter1 Introduction (Introduction, 4 class hours)
Chapter2 Operations Strategy (operation strategy, 2 class hours)
Chapter3 Project management (project management, 6 class hours)
Chapter4 Design of goods and service (Product and service design 2 class hours)
Chapter 5 Managing quality and statistical process control (quality management
理，4 class hours)
Chapter6 Process strategy (Process management, 4 class hours)
Chapter7 Location strategy (Facilities location, 2 class hours)
Chapter8 Layout strategy (Facilities layout, 2 class hours)
Chapter9 Supply chain management (supply chain management, 6 class hours)
Chapter10 Inventory management (Inventory management, 4 class hours)
Chapter11 Material Requirements Planning (MRP) & ERP (6 class hours)
Chapter12 Short term scheduling (homework sorting, 2 class hours)
Chapter13 Just-in-Time and Lean Production Systems (advanced production methods, 4
Class hours)
6. Course assessment method
1. Course assessment methods: final exam, written exam.
2. The composition of the overall evaluation score: 30% of case analysis, homework, answering questions and attendance, examination scores
70%.
7. Drafting Author : Xu Minli
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute) : Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school) : Gong Yanping
Logistics and supply chain management
Course number: 160114Z1
Course Name: Logistics and Supply Chain Management
English name: Logistics and supply chain management
Class hours and credits: 40/2.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: management, production and operation management, mathematical statistics, operations research, computer information processing
Wait
Adapt to majors: business administration, information management and information systems, e-commerce, international economics and trade, etc.
Reference materials:
Logistics Management (Third Edition), Wang Huailin, Liu Mingfei, Wuhan University Press, March 2010
Supply Chain Management (Third Edition), Ma Shihua et al., Lin Yong, Higher Education Press, February 2011
Course introduction:
This course is divided into three parts: upper, middle and lower. The first part includes chapters 1 to 3, mainly discussing logistics management
Page 96
The overall picture, development process and basic concepts, basic theories, including introduction, systems and systems engineering, logistics and
Logistics system. The middle part includes chapters 4 to eleven, mainly discussing distribution logistics, that is, the 80s of the 20th century
The logistics theory and methods before the mid-1980s focused on the various functions of logistics, including warehousing, inventory,
Transportation, distribution, packaging, loading and unloading, circulation processing, logistics network layout, enterprise production logistics and purchase and sales management.
The second part includes Chapter 12 to Chapter 16, mainly discussing supply chain logistics management.
The basic concepts and theories of chain management, the coordinated operation and incentive mechanism among supply chain enterprises, and the supply chain construction model
Type and method, selection of supply chain partners, supply chain logistics management and other core content.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Status: This course belongs to the training program for undergraduates majoring in management and is an optional course;
Prerequisites: Management, Production and Operation Management, Mathematical Statistics, Operations Research, Computer Information Processing
Wait;
Purpose and task: It is to enable students to establish a sense of global competition and combine the company’s supply chain management practices
Practicing creatively use these basic principles and methods to rationally and effectively organize logistics and capital in the supply chain
Flow and information flow activities, through the effective use of information technology to form a supplier, manufacturer and distributor
A virtual whole, through information sharing, implement horizontally integrated management, thereby improving enterprise supply chain management
Performance and ultimately enhance the company’s core competitiveness.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through systematic analysis of theories, ideas and methods of logistics and supply chain management, and combining production and circulation development
Development trends, enabling students to grasp new developments, new views and new ideas in modern logistics and supply chain management and related fields
Technology, reveal the law, characteristics and mode of the in-depth development of contemporary logistics and supply chain management, so as to further
Learn and study logistics and supply chain management to lay a solid foundation.
After completing this course, the following basic requirements should be met:
1. Through the study of this course, students are required to have knowledge of logistics, supply chain, logistics management, and supply chain management
Have a systematic understanding of concepts, theories and methods, and have a clear understanding of the current status of domestic and foreign logistics and supply chain management
knowledge;
2. Through case teaching, students can understand the business process of logistics management and supply chain management, which can be combined with enterprises
Of supply chain management practices creatively use these basic principles and methods to improve enterprise supply chain management
Performance and ultimately enhance the company’s core competitiveness.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Introduction to Logistics
Basic content: Explains the production and development process, definition, classification and utility of logistics concept,
It discusses the role of logistics in economic and social organizations, and finally introduces logistics in the United States, Germany, Japan, and
The development history and current situation of our country.
Focus: Classification of logistics
Difficulty: the role of logistics in the economy and organization
Chapter 2 Basic Theory
Basic content: This chapter introduces the subject nature of logistics which belongs to economics, management, engineering and science.
And other emerging disciplines that intersect with each other, put forward four levels of the basic theoretical framework of logistics, and point out that the
Investigate the purpose and methods of logistics, and finally introduce the separation of business and material, the black continent, the iceberg theory of logistics,
Page 97
The third profit source theory, the benefit contradiction theory and the overall concept of logistics, cost center theory, profit center theory, service
Doctrines and concepts such as central theory and strategic theory.
Focus: The basic theoretical framework of logistics
Difficulty: the basic theory of logistics management
Chapter 3 Principles of Systematic Management of Logistics
Basic content: This chapter analyzes the structure, elements, functions and basic principles of the logistics system.
In terms of structure, the flow structure, functional structure, governance structure, network structure and industrial structure of the logistics system are analyzed.
In terms of elements, it analyzes the general elements, functional elements, supporting elements and material basic elements of the logistics system;
In terms of functions, the basic functions and value-added service functions of the logistics system are introduced; the target system of the logistics system is introduced
The principle of unification, the principle of element integration, the principle of organization networking, the principle of seamless interface, the principle of rapid response
Principles of management, information digitization, operation standardization, operation marketization, and service serialization principles.
Focus: The components and structural characteristics of the logistics system
Difficulty: the basic principles of logistics systems
Chapter 4 Warehouse Management
Basic content: This chapter starts with the types and basic functions of warehouses, and introduces the basic principles of warehouse operations.
It introduces in detail from warehouse selection criteria, quantity decision, warehouse layout and warehouse scale decision, etc.
The main content of the warehouse management decision, and finally discussed the warehouse management system technology and the basic operation process of the warehouse
And storage rationalization methods.
Focus: Warehouse management decisions
Difficulty: Methods of rationalizing storage management
Chapter 5 Inventory Management
Basic content: Firstly, it introduces the definition and types of inventory, the importance of inventory to enterprises, and modern
Why companies should reduce inventories, and the evolution of inventory management history; secondly, it introduces push-type inventory management and
Pull-type inventory management model, which focuses on the model body of inventory control and management under pull-type conditions
System, the basic economic order batch model; again, the main methods of inventory management are introduced; logistics management involves
And various expenses, especially the issue of inventory costs, and finally proposed the use of zero inventory method to effectively reduce inventory
Save costs to reduce logistics costs.
Key points: the model system of inventory control and management under the pull condition and the basic economic order batch model
type
Difficulty: reduction of inventory costs
Chapter VI Transportation Management
Basic content: This chapter first examines the important functions of transportation management, and introduces the scale and economics of transportation management.
The principles of economy, distance economy, customer service and operating cost compare the characteristics of my country’s five basic modes of transportation.
The emerging container transportation and multimodal transportation methods are introduced. Secondly, the issue of rationalization of transportation was discussed, including
Including the phenomenon of irrational transportation, the factors affecting rationalization of transportation, and the ways of rationalization of transportation. Then, yes
Systematic introduction of the entire transportation management activities in logistics management, focusing on the entire industry of transportation management
Business procedures and cost management issues. Finally, the issue of transportation planning was briefly discussed, and the transportation plan was mainly discussed.
An overview of planning, related models and calculation methods for direct dispatch and transit dispatch.
Focus: The entire business process and cost management issues of transportation management
Difficulty: related models and calculations for transportation planning
Chapter 7 Procurement and Supply Management
Basic content: This chapter discusses the procurement process and sales process, first introduces the procurement process system
And the basic principles of procurement management, and then the JIT procurement process, supply chain procurement management and other scientific procurement
Page 98
Management theory was introduced.
Focus: Basic principles of procurement management
Difficulty: Supply chain procurement management
Chapter 8 Packaging, Loading, Unloading, Transportation, and Distribution Processing
Basic content: This chapter introduces the various functions of packaging, loading, unloading, handling, and distribution processing during the logistics process.
Basic concepts, characteristics, classifications, related technologies, methods, supporting equipment and their use, and various functions
The rationality and significance of the performance; at the end, it also introduces the advanced container unitization technology.
Focus: The features of packaging, loading, unloading, handling and distribution processing functions
Difficulty: Containerized unitization technology
Chapter 9 Layout of Logistics Networks
Basic content: this chapter introduces the basic concepts of logistics network
The layout of outlets, and finally a brief introduction to several special outlet layout methods.
Focus: the basic concept of logistics network layout, one-dimensional network layout and multiple network layout
Difficulty: Several special outlet layout methods
Chapter 10 Production Logistics Management
Basic content: describes the content, characteristics, functions and functions of the logistics system, and introduces MRP in detail
The development, principle and application of technology and JIT technology.
Focus: the content, characteristics, functions and functions of the logistics system
Difficulty: the development, principle and application of MRP technology and JIT technology
Chapter 11 Logistics Information Management
Basic content: This chapter comprehensively introduces information, logistics information, logistics information system, logistics information system
Application technology and logistics management information system, etc. And involved e-commerce, discussed e-commerce and
Logistics relationship.
Focus: Information, logistics information, logistics information system, logistics information system application technology and logistics management
The relationship between management information system, e-commerce and logistics
Difficulty: the model and development steps of logistics management information system
Chapter 12 Supply Chain Management Strategy
Basic content: This chapter introduces in detail the main elements of supply chain and supply chain management, corporate competitiveness and
Supply chain strategy, method of formulating supply chain strategy and supply chain operation mode
Focus: Supply chain management elements and formulation methods
Difficulty: Supply chain operation mode
Chapter 13 Supply Chain Partners and Evaluation
Basic content: This chapter explains the strategic partnership of supply chain, the value analysis of cooperation between supply chain enterprises,
The formation of supply chain cooperation relations and its restrictive factors and the selection method of supply chain partners
Focus: Value analysis and formation of supply chain partnership
Difficulty: the selection method of supply chain partnership
Chapter 14 Supply Chain Operation Reference Model (SCOR)
Basic content: This chapter introduces the overview, application evaluation, implementation strategy of the Supply Chain Operation Reference Model (SCOR)
Omit and explain the latest supply chain management process standard of CSCMP
Focus: SCOR concept and implementation strategy
Difficulty: CSCMP's latest supply chain management process standard
Chapter 15 Supply Chain Operation Coordination and Incentive
Basic content: This chapter first introduces the coordination of supply chain operation management, and secondly explains the supply contract
Page 99
Background, the characteristics of traditional supply contracts and several common supply contracts. Finally, the research
The meaning of contract
Focus: Coordination of supply chain operation management
Difficulty: Supply contract model
Chapter 16 Supply Chain Logistics Management
Basic content: This chapter clarifies the concept, principle and characteristics of supply chain logistics management, and then focuses on the discussion
Analyzed the strategy of supply chain logistics management, and briefly explained the new development of modern supply chain logistics management
trend.
Focus: The concept, principle and characteristics of supply chain and supply chain logistics management, modern supply chain logistics management
New trends in management
Difficulty: Strategy of Supply Chain Logistics Management
4. Requirements for course practice
Case discussion on PPT
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Chapter One Introduction to Logistics
2 class hours
Chapter 2 Basic Theory
2 class hours
Chapter 3 Principles of Systematic Management of Logistics
2 class hours
Chapter 4 Warehouse Management
2 class hours
Chapter 5 Inventory Management
2 class hours
Chapter VI Transportation Management
2 class hours
Chapter 7 Procurement and Supply Management
2 class hours
Chapter 8 Packaging, Loading, Unloading, Transportation, and Distribution Processing
2 class hours
Chapter 9 Layout of Logistics Networks
2 class hours
Chapter 10 Production Logistics Management
2 class hours
Chapter 11 Logistics Information Management
2 class hours
Chapter 12 Supply Chain Management Strategy
2 class hours
Chapter 13 Supply Chain Cooperation and Evaluation
2 class hours
Chapter 14 Reference Model of Supply Chain Operation
2 class hours
Chapter 15 Synchronous Production Organization under Supply Chain Management
2 class hours
Chapter 16 Supply Chain Operation Coordination and Incentive
2 class hours
Chapter 17 Supply Chain Logistics Management
2 class hours
40 hours in total
6. Course assessment method
Normal attendance 30%
70% of the exam, full 100 points, 120 minutes of exam time
7. The author: Yu Zhitan
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 100
Organizational Behavior
Course number: 160115Z1
Course Title: Organizational Behavior
English name : Organizational Behavior
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : none
Adapt to majors : majors in economic management
Reference textbook: Organizational Behavior, Stephen Robbins, Tsinghua University Press, 9th edition
Organizational Behavior, Stephen Robbins, Renmin University Press, 10th edition
Course introduction:
Organizational behavior is a body of knowledge that explores the impact of individual, group, and structure on the internal behavior of an organization.
It provides a theoretical basis for managers to make decisions, formulate plans, and improve organizational performance.
The knowledge of organizational behavior is based on the organization and its members as the research object, through cases, investigations, and experiments
And other empirical research methods, it has absorbed a large number of studies in psychology, anthropology, sociology and other disciplines
Results, with high reliability and validity, and satisfaction with an organization’s productivity, turnover rate, absentee rate, and job
Degree and organizational citizenship behavior have a high predictive power, which is the theoretical basis of each specific management course.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks:
Organizational behavior comprehensively uses the knowledge and research results of psychology, sociology, anthropology and other disciplines,
It is a fundamental subject with strong application.
Organizational behavior is a discipline that studies the behavior and laws of people in organizations. By elaborating about the organization
The research results and case analysis of behavior, enable students to master the basic concepts and basic knowledge of organizational behavior;
Understand the basic theories of organizational behavior and the laws of human behavior in organizations; enable students to apply what they have learned
Work practice is used to improve the success rate of management activities and improve the efficiency of organizational operations.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1) The teaching of this course is based on designated teaching materials and auxiliary reference materials.
2) The main content and systematic content of the course are taught in the classroom, allowing students to understand the organizational behavior
Have a more comprehensive understanding and mastery of basic skills and methods.
3) Introduce cases in the course of teaching, organize students to discuss in the form of groups and classes,
Use case studies to enhance students' practical ability to analyze and solve a certain type of organizational management problems.
3. The basic content, key points and difficulties of course teaching
Teaching chapter
Fundamental contents
main difficulty
Chapter One Introduction to Organizational Behavior
● Understand organizational behavior
● Contribute to organizational behavior
Subject
● Challenges faced by organizational behavior
War and opportunity
Page 101
● There is no absolute in organizational behavior
The truth
● Challenges faced by organizational behavior
And opportunity
● Become attractive: development team
Organizational behavior model
Chapter 2 The History of Organizational Behavior
leather
● Historical evolution of organizational behavior ● Historical evolution
Chapter III Research Methods of Organizational Behavior
law
● Research methods
● Research methods
Chapter 4 The Foundation and Victory of Individual Behavior
Force model
● Ability
● Study
● Ability
● Study
Chapter 5 Perception and Individual Decision
● What is perception and why
important
● Factors that affect perception
● Perception of others: make to others
judgment
● The relationship between perception and individual decision-making
contact
● How to make decisions
● How to make actual
Decision
● Questions in decision making
● Between perception and individual decision
'S connection
● How to make reality in the organization
Decision making
Chapter 6 Basic Motivation Concepts
● Define motivation
● Early motivation theory
● Contemporary theory of motivation
● Integration of contemporary motivational theories
● Revelation: Motivation
Restriction
● Define motivation
● Integration of contemporary motivational theories
Chapter 7 Understanding the work team
● Why is the team so popular
● Team and group: what is the difference between the two
different
● Type of team
● Be vigilant: the team does not always ask
Answer
● Building an efficient work team
● Turn individuals into team members
● Team management is currently facing
The problem
● Team and group: both have
How different
● Turn individuals into teams
member
Chapter 8 Communication
● Communication function
● Communication process
● Direction of communication
● Interpersonal communication
● Choice of communication channel
● Barriers to effective communication
Page 102
● Organize communication
● Choice of communication channel
● Barriers to effective communication
● Current issues related to communication
Chapter 9 Basic Views of Leadership
● What is leadership
● Trait Theory
● Behavior Theory
● Contingency theory
● Trait Theory
● Behavior Theory
● Contingency theory
Chapter 10 Organizational Structure Design
● What is an organization
● Some plans designed by the organization
● Why is there a poor organizational structure
different
● Organizational design and employee behavior
● Organizational design and employee behavior
Chapter 11 Organizational Culture
● Institutionalization: a prelude to culture
● What is organizational culture
● What does the organizational culture do
● Creation and maintenance of organizational culture
● How do employees learn organizational culture
● Create an ethical organizational culture
● Establish an organizational structure that responds to customers
Transform
● Spiritual practice and organizational culture
● What does the organizational culture do
● Creation and maintenance of organizational culture
system
● Create an ethical organizational culture
● Build an organization that responds to customers
culture
Chapter 12 Organizational Change
● Motivation for change
● Implement planned changes
● Resistance to change
● Implementation of organizational changes
● The key to contemporary managers
Change problem
● Resistance to change
● Implementation of organizational changes
4. Course practice requirements: None
5. Course teaching hours allocation:
Order of instruction
Course Contents
Class hours allocation
1
Introduction to Organizational Behavior
4
2
Historical evolution of organizational behavior
4
3
Research Methods of Organizational Behavior
4
4
The basis of individual behavior and competency model
4
5
Perception and individual decision
4
6
Basic motivation concepts
4
7
Understand the work team
4
8
communication
2
9
Basic views of leadership
4
Page 103
10
Organizational structure design
6
11
group Culture
4
12
Organizational change
4
6. Course assessment method
Combination of written test and case analysis
7. Formulation writer: Shen Chaohong
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Mingshu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Information system development methods and tools
Course Number : 160208Z1
Course Title : Information System Development Methods and Tools
English name : The Method and Tools of Information System Development
Class hours and credits : 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 12)
Prerequisite course requirements : basic database application, computer programming
Adaptation major : major in information management and information systems
Textbooks and reference books :
[1] Craig Larman. UML and pattern applications (3rd edition, English edition). Published by Machinery Industry
Publishing House, 2006.5
[2] Chen Xiaohong. Management Information System. Higher Education Press, 2006.12.
Course introduction :
The course of "Information System Development Environment and Tools" is in information science, system science, management science, computing
A discipline gradually formed and developed on the basis of disciplines such as computer technology and network interconnection.
In continuous development. This course focuses on the development of information system software that meets the needs of users.
Environment, methods, principles, techniques and tools, combined with the actual management work, have developed information system software
Process planning, organization, coordination and control.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
The course of "Information System Development Environment and Tools" is in information science, system science, management science, computing
A discipline gradually formed and developed on the basis of disciplines such as computer technology and network interconnection.
In continuous development. This course focuses on the development of information system software that meets the needs of users.
Environment, methods, principles, techniques and tools, combined with the actual management work, have developed information system software
Process planning, organization, coordination and control.
Course purpose: "Information System Development Environment and Tools" course is for undergraduates of Information Management and Information System
Professional required courses. Through the study of this course, students will master the mainstream methods and tools of information system development,
Page 104
Learn the basic ideas and basic methods of using computer knowledge to establish management information systems for practical problems, and be proficient in
Master the software development process of management information system, analyze problems, solve problems and practical skills. Through this
The study of the course enhances students’ overall awareness and team awareness, and pays attention to the continuous improvement of professionalism.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
During the teaching process of "Information System Development Environment and Tools", specific teaching should be conducted according to the following requirements
Learning:
1. In the teaching process, teachers pay attention to the explanation of the basic ideas, principles and methods of this course, and their
The connection and difference between.
2. In the teaching process, the teaching method pays attention to the heuristic teaching method, while paying attention to the use of classroom
The way of asking questions and class discussions.
3. Teachers should pay attention to the combination of theory and practice in the teaching process, and use examples and case teaching as much as possible.
4. Organize information management and information system majors to develop actual systems; supplement several special lectures;
Consciously divide students into several groups to conduct literature review and information system software development for specific issues.
Send discussion.
5. Students understand and master this lesson in the process of learning (preparatory study, lecture, computer practice and review)
The basic concepts, principles, methods and basic ideas, tools and use of the process.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The first chapter object-oriented theoretical basis (emphasis)
1 Object-oriented concept
2 Basic characteristics of object-oriented (difficulty)
Encapsulation
Inheritance
Polymorphism
3 Object-oriented programming
Chapter 2 UML Basics
1 UML class diagram
2 Interactive diagram
Chapter 3 Iterative Development Method
1 Introduction to UP
2 Agile method
Chapter 4 System Requirements Analysis and Use Case (Key)
1 Process and method of demand analysis
2 Content and style of Use case
3 Process Sales case
Chapter 5 System Concept Model (Key Points)
1 Elements of Domail Model (difficulty)
2 System sequence diagram (SSD)
3 Operation Contracts (Operations Contracts)
Chapter VI Object Design (Key Points)
1 Principles of object design
2 Responsibility-driven design method (difficulty)
Page 105
3 Domain Model and Object Model
Chapter 7 Object Code Mapping
1 C# basics
2 Object-oriented C# program
Chapter 8 Design Patterns and Applications (emphasis, difficulty)
1 GRASP mode
2 Application of GRASP Mode-Process Sales
3 Gof mode
4 Component-based development
4. Requirements for course practice
Familiar with object-oriented programming methods, familiar with C# compilation environment, familiar with SQL Server2005
Use of, master the drawing method and meaning of various UML diagrams.
Familiar with the whole process of analysis, design and realization of a typical MIS system.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One
Object-oriented concepts and theories
basis
2
Chapter 2 Basic Knowledge of UML
2
Chapter 3 Iterative Development Method
2
Chapter Four
System requirement analysis and User
Case
4
Chapter 5 System Conceptual Model
2
Chapter VI Object Design
8
Chapter 7 Object Code Mapping
2
Chapter 8 Design Patterns and Their Applications
8
Chapter 9 Computer Practice (Combined Cases)
10
10
Total class hours
40
6. Course assessment method
The assessment method adopts a combination of written examination and hands-on practice.
Total score = written test*60% + computer*20% + homework*20%
The written test is a closed-book form and is randomly formed from a set of test questions. Questions are completed within 120 minutes and points are allocated
For: 20 points for multiple-choice questions, 10 points for true or false questions, 10 points for short-answer questions, 10 points for short-answer questions
5 30 points for small questions, 20 points for essay questions, and 10 points for analysis questions.
The practical results on the computer consist of tasks completed and attendance.
7. The author: Lai Bangchuan
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 106
Information Economics
Course ID : 160209Z1
Course Name : Information Economics
English name: Information Economics
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : none
Adapt to majors: major in information management and information systems, major in e-commerce
Reference materials:
Information Economics (First Edition), Chen Ruihua, Nankai University Press, October 2003
Course introduction:
This course defines information economics as the study of transaction relations and contractual arrangements under asymmetric information conditions.
Theory, and take how market information affects people’s economic behavior and its results as the basic conception.
Ji Xue made a comprehensive and detailed introduction as possible. This course assumes that students have mastered microeconomics and economics
Basic course knowledge such as mathematics, using relatively simple economics and mathematics language, narrates the information economics
Basic concepts, principles, analysis methods and classic models; a large number of examples are also cited to facilitate students’ entry
One step to understand.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
The subject of this course is the information management and information system major of the Business School of Central South University, the e-commerce major
Elective courses for undergraduates are basic professional courses. Through the study of this course, students are required to master the uncertainty
Three basic concepts of information economics, sex, risk and information, master the theory and modeling of adverse selection and moral hazard
Method, signal transmission and information screening theory and modeling method, principal-agent theory and incentive theory and modeling method
Law, economic mechanism design theory and methods, grasp the concepts of price dispersion, search cost, etc., search and information
System selection theory enables students to initially have the ability to use relevant knowledge to analyze and solve practical problems.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course is mainly to apply the principles and methods of management, economics, game theory, optimization theory and other disciplines.
The frontier subject of economic analysis of information factors and their effects in economic activities. The course is taught in class
In the lecture, according to the content of the course, a number of practical cases are introduced for students to discuss in groups.
After learning relevant knowledge, students can analyze and research actual problems and put forward their own opinions and opinions.
Deepen the understanding and mastery of knowledge.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
(1) Basic content of the course:
1. Introduction to Information Economics
Understand and grasp the context of the emergence and development of information economics; understand the research objects and research of information economics
Scope; have a preliminary understanding of the unique research perspectives, research fields and research methods of information economics; understand
The content arrangement framework and system of this course.
2. Uncertainty, risk and information
Page 107
Understand the basic concepts of uncertainty and risk, be able to distinguish the types of uncertainty, and clarify uncertainty
Difference from risk; the performance of uncertainty in the market and the general model of risk preference; master risk transfer
Understand the concepts of full insurance and partial insurance, and understand what non-insurable risks are;
The concept of market information can distinguish between public information and private information, homogeneous information and heterogeneous information, and complete information.
Four basic forms: information and incomplete information, symmetric information and asymmetric information; students are required to be able to
The principles of certainty and risk are used flexibly in real life and have the ability to explain related problems in life.
3. Adverse selection and moral hazard
Grasp the concepts of adverse selection and moral hazard; take the insurance market as an example to explain adverse selection and moral hazard
The reason and process of formation; introduce the assumptions and derivation process of the adverse selection model, and the condition of complete information
A comparative analysis of the equilibrium and efficiency of the second-hand car market under the condition of incomplete information and the second-hand car market under the condition of incomplete information;
Introduce the problem of adverse selection in the credit market, and give the mechanism of credit rationing; take the doctor-patient transaction as an example
The reason and process of moral hazard is applied to the analysis of labor market and capital market.
4. Signal transmission and information screening
Signal transmission theory and its applications, including modeling and methods; analysis of the market signal effect of advertising; information
Screening theory and its applications, including modeling and methods; introducing the Milgrom-Roberts monopoly price limit model,
Roth’s capital structure signaling model, Spence’s labor market signaling model; Rothschild and
Stiglitz's insurance market information screening model; comprehensive case analysis of state-owned commercial bank student loans;
The development of signal transmission theory.
5. Principal-agent and incentives
The basic concept of principal-agent; the basic analysis framework of principal-agent model, including its relationship assumptions, trust
The characteristics of information structure, the conditions for the formation of a balanced contract, and the method of solving; introduce several extended principal-agent moral styles
Risk model: multi-stage principal-agent model with reputation effect and ratchet effect, design of incentive wage contract
Model, Homestrom team theory model, Zhang Weiying’s team optimal delegation right arrangement model; principal-agent
The specific application examples of the theory enable students to have the ability to establish a simple principal-agent model.
6. Economic mechanism design theory
Introduce the basic concepts of mechanism design, the goals and methods of incentive mechanism design; understand four typical incentives
Encouragement mechanism: rent, labor wages, target output contracting and sharing system; introduce the Myerson machine
System design, display principle and bargaining model; introduce Vickrey and Morris (Mirrlees)
The idea of ​​the optimal tax rate design, as well as the difference and connection between the two; explain the value of auction items subject to even distribution
The first-level sealed price auction model and the two-party bidding auction model in the simple case of deployment.
7. Information search theory and information system selection
Grasp the principle of price dispersion and market price dispersion rate measurement model; understand the construction of market information search model
Model method, master how to determine the best search times for market information; master the rules for selecting the best information system
And basis, understand information system cost and value determination methods, information system pros and cons
The current research status of "information resource allocation" in pre-theoretical circles, involving information structure, information efficiency, and price system
The four areas of information content and function, Grossman-Stiglitz paradox, and market failure.
(2) Key points and difficulties of the course
The focus of this course is: the causes and processes of adverse selection and moral hazard; signal transmission theory and
Its applications include modeling and methods; information screening theory and its applications, including modeling and methods; Spencer’s
Labor market signal transmission model; labor market information screening model; principal-agent theory basic model;
Meyerson (Myerson) Mechanism Design Show Principle; Vickrey and Morris (Mirrlees)
Design model for optimal tax rate; first-level sealed price auction model and two-party bidding auction auction model.
Page 108
The difficulties of this course are: the basic model of principal-agent theory; the design of Myerson mechanism is obvious
Show principle; Vickrey and Morris (Mirrlees)’s optimal tax rate design model;
The closed price auction model and the two-party bid auction model.
4. Requirements for course practice
no.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Chapter number
Course content
lecture
experiment
Maneuver
1
Introduction to Information Economics
2
2
Uncertainty, risk and information
2
3
Adverse selection and moral hazard
4
4
Signal transmission and information screening
4
5
Principal-agent and incentives
6
6
Economic Mechanism Design Theory
8
7
Information Search Theory and Information System
select
4
8
Review, maneuver
2
2
total
32
6. Course assessment method
Written exam (closed book) is used as an exam class, written exam (closed or open book) or
Report form.
7. Formulation writer: Ma Benjiang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (Associate Dean of Teaching): Gong Yanping
ERP principle and implementation
Course ID : 160210Z1
Course Name : ERP Principles and Implementation
English name : ERP Principle and Implementation
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 32)
Prerequisite course requirements: production operation management, university computer foundation, management information system
Adapt to majors: information management and information systems, business administration, management engineering
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbook:
Page 109
Zhou Yanju, Wang Jianqiang, ERP Principle·Design·Implementation·Case, Tsinghua University Press, 2009
year
reference book:
Edited by Luo Hong, "ERP Principles, Design, and Implementation (3rd Edition)", Electronic Industry Press, 2005
Edited by Ye Hongmo, "Enterprise Resource Planning ERP-Integrated Resource Management", Electronic Industry Press, 2005
ERP Center, School of Management, CUHK, Taiwan, ERP Enterprise Resource Planning Basic Course, China Railway Press,
2003
Course introduction:
Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) embodies the current world
The most advanced enterprise management theory in the world, and provides the best solution for enterprise information integration. It will
Logistics, capital flow and information flow are unified for management, and the manpower, capital, materials,
Equipment, methods (production technology), information and time and other resources are comprehensively balanced and fully considered, and the most
Maximize the use of the company’s existing resources to achieve greater economic benefits, scientifically and effectively manage corporate personnel,
Various specific tasks such as finance, property, production, supply and sales.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is an elective course for the major of Information Management and Information System in Business School.
This course requires students to master the entire process of ERP principles, design and application. In-depth understanding of ERP
Management ideas and informatization solutions, master the business processing and informatization realization of each mainstream module of ERP
principle. Master the design and implementation of ERP software, implement ERP management ideas and how to implement and apply ERP
Integrated information system.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the study of this course, students can fully understand ERP management ideas and ERP
The important role of the system in the enterprise; in terms of knowledge, master the basic concepts, basic principles and basic framework of ERP
And core business processes, through ERP case discussions and experience the process of ERP software system operation, to understand the letter
The relationship between information system and enterprise management, grasp the key decision-making factors and organization implementation methods of ERP project implementation
Method; in terms of ability, through the process of simulating business operations, students can integrate the knowledge they have learned,
Improve students’ ability to analyze and solve problems; in terms of overall quality, strengthen students’ practical ability and improve
The comprehensive quality of students to meet the needs of society
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The first part of ERP principles
Chapter 1 The formation of ERP theory
1.1 Basic MRP
1.2 Closed-loop MRP
1.3 Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP-II)
1.4 Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)
1.5 Research on the application of enterprise resource management theory
Chapter 2 Basic Concepts
2.1 Material coding
2.2 Bill of Materials (BOM)
Page 110
2.3 Work Center (WC)
2.4 Lead time and planned outlook
2.5 Process route
Chapter 3 Sales Management
3.1 Sales environment and production types
3.2 Overview of Sales Management Business
3.3 Sales system functions
Chapter 4 Master Production Plan (MPS)
4.1 Definition and function of master production plan
4.2 Rough Capacity Planning (RCCP)
4.3 Master Production Planning Theory
Chapter 5 Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
5.1 Definition and role
5.2 Calculation model
5.3 MRP report
Chapter 6 Capacity Requirements Planning
6.1 Overview of capacity requirement plan
6.2 Classification of capacity requirement plans
6.3 Calculation method of capacity requirement plan
6.4 Balance and output of capacity demand plan
Chapter 7 Procurement Management
7.1 The role of procurement
7.2 Overview of the procurement business
7.3 Operation of the procurement subsystem
7.4 The relationship between the procurement subsystem and other business subsystems
Chapter 8 Inventory Management
8.1 Classification of inventory
8.2 Functions and disadvantages of inventory
8.3 Control of inventory
8.4 Inventory management strategy
8.5 Inventory operations and information processing
Chapter 9 Workshop Management
9.1 Overview of workshop management
9.2 Workshop tasks
9.3 Work Order
9.4 Dispatch work orders and job sequencing
9.5 Input-output control
9.6 Group technology
Chapter 10 Production Management
10.1 JIT work characteristics
10.2 Implementation of JIT System
10.3 JIT system operation and use process
Chapter 11 Financial Management
Page 111
11.1 Overview of Financial Management Business
11.2 Realization of standard financial computerization
11.3 Realization of Integrated Finance
Chapter 12 E-commerce in ERP
Chapter 13 Customer Relationship Management in ERP
Chapter 14 ERP and Supply Chain Management
Chapter 15 Basic Application of an ERP Software
Part II ERP Implementation
Chapter 16 ERP Implementation Management
Chapter 17 ERP Implementation Evaluation
Chapter 18 The Future Development of ERP
Part III ERP case analysis
4. Requirements for course practice
Students are required to be proficient in operating and applying UFIDA’s ERP software.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One
The formation of ERP theory
2
Chapter two
basic concept
2
third chapter
Sales management
2
Chapter Four
Master Production Plan (MPS)
2
chapter Five
Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
2
Chapter Six
Capacity requirement plan
2
Chapter VII
Procurement management
2
chapter eight
Inventory management
2
Chapter nine
Workshop management
2
chapter Ten
Production management
4
Chapter Eleven
Financial Management
4
Chapter Twelve
E-commerce in ERP
1
Chapter Thirteen
Customer Relationship Management in ERP
1
Chapter Fourteen
ERP and supply chain management
1
Chapter 15 Basic Application of an ERP Software
10
10
Chapter Sixteen
ERP implementation management
2
Chapter Seventeen
ERP implementation evaluation
2
Chapter Eighteen
The future development of ERP
1
Chapter Nineteen
ERP case analysis
4
6. Course assessment method
The usual score is 30% and the final written test is 70%.
Page 112
7. Formulation Author: Wang Jianqiang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Oracle database system
Course Number : 160211Z1
Course Name : Oracle Database System
English name : Oracle Database technology
Class hours and credits: 32 /2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 10)
Prerequisite course requirements: C language programming, database technology, computer network
Adapt to major: credit management, e-commerce
Textbooks and reference books:
[1] Cai Lijun, Qu Liang. Oracle9i Relational Database Practical Course. China Water Resources and Hydropower Press,
2004 edition;
[2] Chen Zhigang. Large-scale database technology-Oracle9i advanced programming tutorial. South China University of Technology
Xue Publishing House, 2003 edition.
Course introduction:
"Oracle Database" is a collection of computer language, database technology and computer network
The discipline of knowledge. The course aims to improve the application level of management information system and conducts
Planning, design and application system development. Its main content includes: Oracle database overview, basic concepts,
SQL language, procedural SQL language—PL/SQL and ORACLE database management, etc.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Oracle Database" is a professional course for undergraduates majoring in management information management and e-commerce
Cheng.
The course aims at improving the application level of management information system, planning and designing large-scale network databases.
Design and application system development.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the teaching of this course, we focus on cultivating students’ ability to use Oracle database, and require students to
Understand the basic concepts and architecture of Oracle database, and be proficient in database standard language SQL language,
Familiar with the extended SQL language—PL/SQL language and its design methods, and master the management of Oracle database
Methods and management techniques to improve the design and application level of large-scale distributed network databases.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
(1) Basic content of the course
Chapter 1: Overview of Oracle Database
Page 113
1.1 The development and current situation of Oracle database
1.2 Oracle database system technology and its outlook
1.3 Introduction to Oracle Database Product Family
Chapter 2: Basic Concepts
2.1 Database system and file system
2.2 Table
2.3 View
2.4 Index
2.5 Synonym
2.6 Data Dictionary (Data Dictionary)
2.7 Transaction (Transaction)
Chapter 3: SQL Language
3.1 Introduction to SQL Language (Structure Query Language): Structured Query Language
3.2 Basic concepts of SQL language
3.3 Data query command select
3.4 Data manipulation commands
3.5 Transaction (data) control commands
3.6 Data definition commands
Chapter 4 Procedural SQL Language—PL/SQL
4.1 Introduction to PL/SQL (Procedural Language)
4.2 Simple PL/SQL block
4.3 SQL commands that can be used in PL/SQL
4.4 Flow control statements can be used in PL/SQL 4.5 Cursors can be used in PL/SQL
4.6 Exception handling in PL/SQL
4.7 Database trigger (DataBase trigger)
4.8 Store Procedure
4.9 Store Function
Chapter 5 ORACLE Database Management
5.1 ORACLE database system structure
5.2 ORACLE storage management
5.3 ORACLE storage management
5.4 Security Mechanism of ORACLE Database
(2) Key points and difficulties of the course
Focus: The meaning of SQL language commands and how to use them, the use of flow control statements in PL/SQL blocks
method.
Difficulties: ORACLE database structure, security management mechanism, database management.
4. Requirements for course practice
Familiar with and master the usage of SQL*PLUS and simple query, group query and connection in SQL language are required
Use of queries, sub-query statements and functions, understand data manipulation, transaction control and data in SQL language
Define statements, master the use of SQL commands in SQL/PL blocks, learn flow control statements in SQL/PL blocks,
Cursor, exception handling , can create and use database triggers, stored procedures and stored functions.
Page 114
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One Oracle Database Overview
2
Chapter 2 Basic Concepts
2
Chapter 3 SQL Language
12
4
Chapter 4 Procedural SQL Language—PL/SQL
12
6
Chapter 5 ORACLE Database Management
4
2
total
32
12
6. Course assessment method
1. Course assessment method: final exam, written exam.
2. The composition of the overall assessment scores: 30% of homework and attendance, and 70% of test scores.
7. Drafting writer: Xu Xuanhua, Lai Bangchuan
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Management system simulation
Course number: 160212Z1
Course Title: Management System Simulation
English name: Management System Simulation
Class hours and credits : 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 16)
Prerequisites: Probability and Statistics
Adapt to majors : information management and information systems, e-commerce, business administration, financial management, finance
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbook: "Management System Simulation", authored by Cai Jianfeng, Machinery Industry Press
Reference book: "Discrete Mathematics", edited by Li Yizhi, Central South University of Technology Press
"Management System Simulation and GPSS Language", edited by Jiang Linqi, Tsinghua University Press
Course introduction:
Management system simulation is a professional course. This course mainly introduces the art of management system modeling, based on Excel
The simulation method, as well as the strategy and method of simulation using special simulation software. The course content is divided into four parts:
The first chapter is an introduction, which introduces the basic concepts of system simulation; the second preparatory chapter, Excel
The use of skills and modeling art, common probability distribution and random number generation in simulation; the third simulation chapter,
Including Excel for system simulation, special language for system simulation, discrete system simulation output
Data analysis; and the fourth chapter of progress, introducing new developments in system simulation technology. Through learning, students can
Master the basic methods of systematic modeling and simulation analysis of management decision-making problems, in order to learn the subsequent lessons and
To lay a solid theoretical and technical foundation for future work.
Page 115
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Management System Simulation" is a professional course for management science and engineering disciplines, as well as management science and engineering
Professional elective courses. It embodies management science and engineering, modern mathematics, computer science and engineering, etc.
The cross and integration of the theory and technology of the department. This course mainly introduces the art of management system modeling, based on
Excel simulation method, as well as the strategy and method of simulation using special simulation software.
The following objectives are achieved through the teaching of this course:
1. Master the basic principles, basic concepts and basic methods of management system simulation;
2. Enable students to build and analyze quantitative simulation models, design computer simulation programs, and analyze input
Data and output structure capabilities;
3. To enable students to use a simulation language (GPSSWorld) to computer simulation of the management system
ability;
4. Understand the latest technological development and research frontiers in the field of management system simulation.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Grasp the basic concepts and principles of management system analysis and simulation; be familiar with the basic operations of Excel;
Master the common methods of using Excel to establish quantitative analysis and simulation models of management problems; be familiar with the basics of GPSS
This programming sentence, master the basic method of using GPSSWorld to simulate discrete systems; understand how to use
Vensim is the basic method of simulating continuous systems and using Arena to simulate hybrid systems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Basic concepts of management system analysis and simulation
Model and simulation
Application of computer simulation
2. Excel skills and modeling art (emphasis)
Basic functions of Excel
Excel skills
Excel-based modeling art
3. Common concept distribution and random number generation in simulation (difficulty)
Probability Distribution of Random Variables Common in Simulation
Basic parameters of probability distribution
Probability distribution fitting
Method for obtaining random numbers that conform to specific probability distribution
4. Use Excel for system simulation (emphasis)
Deterministic static problem simulation
Deterministic dynamic problem simulation
Stochastic static problem simulation
Stochastic dynamic problem simulation
System simulation using Excel add-in
5. System simulation using special language (difficulty)
Discrete system simulation, GPSS language and GPSSWorld
Continuous system simulation and Vensim system
Hybrid system simulation and Arena system
Page 116
6. Discrete system analog output analysis
Terminated analog output data analysis
Terminated analog output data analysis
The basic method to reduce the random deviation of the output result
Methods of using simulation results to assist decision making
7. New Development of System Simulation Technology
Business competition simulation
virtual reality technology
New simulation technology that has emerged in recent years
4. Requirements for course practice
This course is both theoretical and practical courses. In addition to appropriate thinking exercises, each section also
Equipped with basic hands-on experiments, using Excel and GPSSWorld as simulation tools. The content of the experiment and
Requirements are as follows:
1. The use of Excel and modeling analysis: master the use of Excel skills and basic modeling ideas.
2. Input data analysis: master the basic process and common methods of probability distribution fitting.
3. Use Excel for simulation analysis: master the use of Excel to analyze static and dynamic, confirm and random
Model management decision-making methods.
4. Discrete system simulation and GPSSWorld simulation system: master the basic programming sentences of GPSS, learn
Use GPSSWorld to simulate a typical discrete system.
5. Output data analysis: master the output results of the Excel model and GPSSWorld program simulation
The main method of analysis, and the basic method of using the results to make management decisions.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
One of the experiments (hours on the computer) Remarks
1
The basics of management system analysis and simulation
concept
2
0
2
Excel skills and modeling art
4
0
3
Common concept distribution and randomness in simulation
Number of machines
6
2
4
System simulation using Excel
6
2
5
System simulation using dedicated language
6
2
6
Discrete system analog output analysis
4
0
7
New Development of System Simulation Technology
2
0
review
2
6. Course assessment method
The examination mainly adopts the closed-book method on the computer. The scope of the examination should cover all the content taught, and the content of the examination should be
Can objectively reflect students’ memory and mastery of the main concepts of this course, understanding of relevant theories,
Master and comprehensive application ability and hands-on operation ability.
Overall evaluation scores: 40% of homework and experiments, and 60% of computer tests.
7. Formulation writer: Hu Dongbin
Page 117
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Management Information System Development Practice
Course number: 160213Z1
Course Title: Management Information System Development Practice
English name: Management Information System Development Practice
Class hours and credits: 4 weeks/4
Prerequisite course requirements: information system development environment and tools
Adapt to majors: information management and information systems, e-commerce
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbook:
1. "Database Application System Development Cases and Practice Courses", edited by Pan Wenlin, Tsinghua University Press,
2007, 2nd edition.
reference book:
1. "Information System Development Method Course", edited by Chen Jia, Tsinghua University Press, 2005, No. 2
Version
2. "Essence of Information System Development Examples", edited by Wang Xiaoyi, Electronic Industry Press, 2006, No. 1
Version
3. "ASP.NET Office Automation System Development Example Navigation", edited by Ji Jiufeng and others, published by People's Post
Press, 2004, first edition
Course introduction:
It is a compulsory professional practice course for students majoring in information management and information systems.
Comprehensive application of knowledge. The course guides students to achieve specific information management through learning information system development examples
System to enhance the development ability of students.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Management Information System Development Practice" is one of the compulsory professional courses for students majoring in information management and information systems
One is the comprehensive application of relevant information management knowledge.
The course guides students to use software development tools and database technology by learning information system development examples
As well as information system development and design methods to implement specific information management systems to enhance students’ development capabilities
force.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course is mainly systematic and practical. Ask students:
1. Familiar with and master the theories, methods, normative techniques and tools of information management system development, understand and
National standards related to information system development.
2. Able to choose development tools reasonably according to specific conditions and use them proficiently.
Page 118
3. Be able to comprehensively use the knowledge learned to independently develop a small information management system.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Design and Implementation of Information Management System for Experiment One
[Experimental purpose and requirements]
This experiment requires students to design and implement a small student management system under the guidance of teachers.
Students are familiar with the development process of information systems.
[Experimental principle]
The development of an information system is a complex process. The system is planned, analyzed, designed, implemented, and tested from the beginning.
The whole process from trial, operation, maintenance to system retirement is called the system lifetime. The whole project mainly includes
The next steps or development phase:
1. Planning stage. This stage mainly analyzes the system investigation and feasibility analysis of the business involved in the application system
Analysis and brief requirements analysis, and finally compile the project view and scope specification document, and clarify the need for development
Which business functions and performance define the project development boundary.
2. demand analysis. Detailed analysis of business processes, rules and related data to obtain business content and processing
Requirements, and finally compile requirements analysis specifications, clarify the detailed functional requirements and performance requirements of users
Requirements and other non-critical requirements, mark the priority of requirements, and perform strict requirements analysis specifications
Verification in order to finally obtain a complete and clear definition of requirements. Started to write user operation manual for use
To verify the user's functional requirements.
3. Outline design. According to the requirements analysis specification, design the application architecture and related
The database structure.
4. detailed design. Design the application and database implementation details in detail, and verify the detailed design results
As a result, write detailed design specifications.
5. Encoding implementation. Implement the system according to the detailed design specification, and according to the project organization form
At the same time, sometimes the detailed design and coding implementation may be mixed together.
6. System test. Strictly test the function and performance of the system.
7. Make system installation program, complete user technical manual and operation manual.
8. After the system is put into operation, a routine maintenance plan for the system is worked out.
[Experimental equipment and supplies]
computer
[Experimental content and steps]
1. Problem definition:
As the management of student information in colleges and universities tends to become more complex and diversified, with the widespread use of computers
Application, more and more colleges and universities have adopted the computerized management mode. Query, modify, enter, delete
Basic operations such as using computer database technology. Compared to the previous method of using cards
Progress, easy management, easy to update, greatly facilitate the management of student information. Therefore, to improve
Work efficiency, reduce the burden of staff, decided to develop student information management system software.
2. Refer to the steps in the experimental principle and develop the system under the guidance of the teacher. The experiment focuses on demand
Take the analysis and design of the system. Implementation, testing, installation and maintenance are optional.
[Experiment report requirements]
Students should carefully complete the experiment report.
Experiment 2 Design and Implementation of Invoicing Management Information System (emphasis, difficulty)
[Experimental purpose and requirements]
Page 119
This experiment requires students to complete the system independently to train students' development and design capabilities.
[Experimental principle]
The development of an information system is a complex process. The system is planned, analyzed, designed, implemented, and tested from the beginning.
The whole process from trial, operation, maintenance to system retirement is called the system lifetime. The whole project mainly includes
The next steps or development phase:
1. Planning stage. This stage mainly analyzes the system investigation and feasibility analysis of the business involved in the application system
Analysis and brief requirements analysis, and finally compile the project view and scope specification document, and clarify the need for development
Which business functions and performance define the project development boundary.
2. demand analysis. Detailed analysis of business processes, rules and related data to obtain business content and processing
Requirements, and finally compile requirements analysis specifications, clarify the detailed functional requirements and performance requirements of users
Requirements and other non-critical requirements, mark the priority of requirements, and perform strict requirements analysis specifications
Verification in order to finally obtain a complete and clear definition of requirements. Started to write user operation manual for use
To verify the user's functional requirements.
3. Outline design. According to the requirements analysis specification, design the application architecture and related
The database structure.
4. detailed design. Design the application and database implementation details in detail, and verify the detailed design results
As a result, write detailed design specifications.
5. Encoding implementation. Implement the system according to the detailed design specification, and according to the project organization form
At the same time, sometimes the detailed design and coding implementation may be mixed together.
6. System test. Strictly test the function and performance of the system.
7. Make system installation program, complete user technical manual and operation manual.
8. After the system is put into operation, a routine maintenance plan for the system is worked out.
[Experimental equipment and supplies]
computer
[Experimental content and steps]
1. Problem definition
Design the three components of purchase, inventory, and sales of a company's purchase, sales and inventory management information system. Purchase
The system performs drug acceptance processing and generates purchase voucher (purchase voucher code, product code, product name, specification,
Manufacturer, validity period, purchase price, purchase quantity). The purchase voucher will be printed to the supplier as a receipt voucher.
A purchase can have multiple drugs, which are uniquely identified by the purchase voucher code; a drug is uniquely identified by the product code
knowledge. The system has a product catalog (product code, product name, specification, manufacturer, validity period, sales price).
When the purchased drug is a new drug (a drug not in the product catalog), the purchase subsystem automatically
Write the product catalog. The inventory subsystem handles and maintains inventory accounts (product code,
Product name, specification, manufacturer, expiry date, purchase quantity, purchase price, outbound quantity, sales price, inventory quantity, inventory
Lower limit, upper limit of inventory), the inventory account cannot be modified. When the goods are put into the warehouse, it will be based on the purchase voucher
A new record is generated, the inventory quantity plus the purchase quantity; when the sales are out of the warehouse, a new record is generated according to the sales voucher
In the new record, the inventory quantity minus the outbound quantity; the commodity code is the unique identifier of each medicine. Inventory subsystem design
Inventory automatic alarm, when the inventory quantity is greater than the upper limit of the inventory or less than the lower limit of the inventory, a warning letter will be given
interest. The sales subsystem has pricing processing and sales processing. The pricing process has a commodity price list (commodity code,
Product name, specification, manufacturer, validity period, suggested price, sales price, approved person) are first managed by sales
The manager recommends the price, the sales price is determined after the manager’s approval, and the sales price of the product catalog is automatically updated;
Sales are handled at the company’s sales window. The salesperson searches the product catalog and inventory account according to customer requirements.
Goods (the inventory quantity meets customer requirements), a sale is established, a record of sales voucher is generated, once
Page 120
Sales can have multiple records, which are uniquely identified by the sales voucher. The data structure of sales voucher is (sale voucher code
Code, product code, product name, specification, manufacturer, validity period, sales price, sales quantity). The sales voucher is
The basis for the inventory subsystem to record inventory accounts. The sales voucher will be printed to the customer as a proof of delivery.
2. Refer to the steps in the experimental principle to complete the development of the system.
[Experiment report requirements]
Students should carefully complete the experiment report.
4. Requirements for course practice
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Edit
number
Experiment title
Specific requirements
real
Test
learn
Time
real
Test
class
do not
teach
learn
shape
formula
1
Student Information Management System
Design and implementation
This experiment requires students to set up
Plan and implement a small student management system,
The purpose is to familiarize students with the development of information systems
Sending process.
Two weeks
Comprehensive
Combine
open
put
2
Invoicing Management Information System
System design and implementation
This experiment requires students to complete the department independently
System to train students’ development and design capabilities
force.
Two weeks
Comprehensive
Combine
open
put
6. Course assessment method
1. Evaluation method and form
Assessment method: examination; assessment method: large-scale operation.
2. The composition and evaluation criteria of comprehensive scores
This course has a total score of 100 points. In principle, it accounts for 30% in normal times and 70% at the end of the semester. Due to the needs of teaching reform,
Other assessment methods can be used.
Seven, formulation writer: Bi Wenjie
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
discrete mathematics
Course number: 160214Z1
Course Title: Discrete Mathematics
English name : Discrete Mathematics
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: Linear Algebra
Page 121
Adapt to majors: information management and information systems, e-commerce, finance
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbook: "Discrete Mathematics", edited by Zuo Xiaoling and others, Shanghai Science and Technology Literature Press
Reference book: "Discrete Mathematics", edited by Shao Xuecai and others, Tsinghua University Press
Course introduction:
Discrete mathematics is a professional basic course. There are four main topics discussed in this course: the first one is mathematical logic,
It includes two chapters: propositional logic and predicate logic; the second set theory includes the preliminary basis of sets, binary relations,
Functions; the third algebraic structure, including algebraic systems, lattice and Boolean algebra; and the fourth graph theory. Through learning
In addition to learning these basic concepts, basic theories and basic methods, students can also cultivate abstract logical thinking and
Strict logical reasoning ability lays a solid theoretical foundation for studying subsequent courses and future work.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Discrete mathematics is one of the basic professional courses. Through the study of this course, students’ abstract thinking and strict
Confidential logical reasoning ability lays a solid foundation for further study of professional courses, and for students to deal with discrete information in the future,
To improve the professional theoretical level, and to provide necessary mathematical tools for further scientific research in the future.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This class belongs to the category of mathematics and the content is relatively abstract. Through the teacher’s explanation, taking exercises and completing one
The teaching links such as fixed homework will enable students to firmly grasp the theory they have learned. The basic concepts must be clear,
Basic calculations must be proficient and accurate, logical reasoning and theorem proof methods are correct, logical, and well-reasoned,
The proof process is described in an orderly manner. Learn to use different analysis and problem solving methods for different problems
method.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Propositional Logic
Understand propositions, truth values ​​of propositions, simple propositions, compound propositions, proposition formulas, truth tables, equivalence
Concepts such as form, tautology, contradiction, implication, (main) disjunctive paradigm, (main) conjunctive paradigm, etc.; profound theory
Solution six kinds of connective (negative ,
,
,
,
,
¬
∧
∨
→
⇔
∨
Conjunctive disjunction condition
Double condition
XOR　) definition; skilled palm
Grasp the translation of propositional formulas, distinguish the types of propositional formulas, proposition laws, prove that two propositional formulas are equivalent
The (primary) disjunctive paradigm and (primary) conjunctive paradigm of the truth table method and equivalent algorithm of the proposition formula;
Master the direct and indirect methods of proof by reasoning.
Emphasis: Five types of logical connectives (negative ,
,
,
,
¬
∧
∨
→
⇔
Conjunctive disjunction condition
Double condition
); proposition
The main-disjunctive paradigm and main-conjunctive paradigm of formulas; the direct and indirect methods of proof by reasoning.
Difficulties: the main disjunctive paradigm and the main conjunctive paradigm of the proposition formula; the indirect method of proof by reasoning.
Chapter Two Predicate Logic
Understand predicates, propositional functions, compound propositional functions, universal quantifiers, existential quantifiers, predicate formulas, approximations
Concepts such as bundle variable, free variable, equivalence and implication of predicate calculus, predicate paradigm, etc.; master the predicate
Formula translation, the method of finding the predicate paradigm of the predicate formula, the method to prove the equivalence of two predicate formulas, the predicate calculus
The inference rules and the method of inference proof of predicate calculus.
Emphasis: the method to prove the equivalence of two predicate formulas; the method of inference proof of predicate calculus.
Difficulty: the method of inference proof of predicate calculus.
Chapter III Collections and Relations
Page 122
Deep understanding of ordered pairs, Cartesian products, relations, division and coverage of sets, equivalence relations, equivalence classes,
Quotient set, compatibility relation, (maximum) compatibility class, partial order relation, maximal element, minimal element, upper (lower) bound,
Concepts such as supreme (lower) supremacy, maximum (small) element, total order relationship, well-ordered relationship; master the intersection, union,
Operation of difference, complement, and symmetric difference and its operation rules; master the intersection, union, inverse, compound operation and closure of relations
Operation and its properties; master the matrix representation and diagram of relations; deeply understand the reflexivity and anti-reflexivity of relations
To master the method of discrimination of gender, symmetry, antisymmetry and transitivity; master the combination of set coverage and division
Department and distinction; master the discrimination of partial order relations and the drawing method of Hass diagram; be able to find the extremes of a given set in the partial order set
Great Yuan, Minimal Yuan, Upper (Lower) Boundary, Upper (Lower) True Bound, and Largest (Minor) Yuan.
Key points: the nature of the relationship and its discrimination; the compound operation of the relationship and its nature; equivalence relations and equivalence classes,
The relationship between equivalence relations and the division of sets; the discrimination of partial order relations and the drawing method of Hass diagrams, and the particularity of partial order sets
Understanding of location elements.
Difficulty: the transitivity of the relationship and its discrimination; the connection between the equivalence relationship and the division of the set; the partial order relationship
The drawing method of the Hass diagram; the method of finding the elements in the special position in the partial order set.
Chapter 4 Functions
Master the function (mapping), the front domain of the function, the range of the function, the equality of the function, the incidence, the surjection,
Concepts of bijection, identity mapping, inverse function, compound function; master the properties of function compound operations; master function
The difference between the number and the general relationship, the inverse function and the inverse relationship; the proof that the master function is incident, surjective, and bijective;
Grasp the cardinality of sets, the concepts of countable sets and uncountable sets, and the comparison of set cardinality.
Key points: the nature of compound operations; the difference between functions and general relations, inverse functions and inverse relations; functions are
Proof of incident, surjective, and bijective.
Difficulty: The function is the proof of incident, surjective, and bijective.
Chapter 5 Algebraic Structure, Lattice and Boolean Algebra
Master the generations induced by algebraic systems, operations, semigroups, groups, homomorphic mapping, isomorphic mapping, lattice, and lattice
Number system, Boolean algebra, Boolean expressions and other concepts; master the properties of operations and their proofs; be able to prove given
The algebraic system of is a semigroup (or group); master the proof of the isomorphism of two algebraic systems; master the basics of lattice
The principle of nature and lattice duality; master the method of analyzing (conjunct) Boolean expressions in normal form.
Key point: Prove that a given algebraic system is a semigroup (or group); proof that two algebraic systems are isomorphic;
The basic properties of lattices; the analysis (conjunction) of Boolean expressions takes the normal form.
Difficulties: the proof of the isomorphism of two algebraic systems; the analysis (conjunction) of Boolean expressions takes normal form.
Chapter VI Graph Theory
Grasp the degree of graphs, subgraphs, nodes, directed graphs, undirected graphs, multiple graphs, complete graphs, complementary graphs, and raw graphs
To form subgraphs, graph isomorphisms, paths, loops, connected graphs and other concepts and their properties; master the matrix representation of graphs. Palm
Grip trees, directed trees, undirected trees, spanning trees, minimum spanning trees, root trees, roots, leaves, branch points, have
Ordered tree, complete m-ary tree, regular m-ary tree, optimal tree and other concepts; proficient in Kruscal of minimum spanning tree
Algorithm and construction method of optimal binary tree.
Key points: the matrix representation of the graph; the degree of the node and its related properties; tree, directed tree, undirected tree, raw
Tree, minimum spanning tree, root tree, root, leaf, branch point, ordered tree, complete m-ary tree, regular m
Concepts such as fork tree and optimal tree and related properties; several equivalent propositions and proofs about trees; minimum generation
The Kruscal algorithm of the tree and the construction method of the optimal binary tree.
Difficulties: degree of nodes and related properties; Kruscal algorithm of minimum spanning tree and optimal binary tree
The construction method.
4. Requirements for course practice
Page 123
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Zhangji
Course content
Teaching hours
1
Propositional logic
10
2
Predicate logic
10
3
Collection and relationship
14
4
function
6
5
Algebraic structure, lattice and Boolean algebra
4
6
Graph Theory
4
6. Course assessment method
Closed-book exams, the usual results account for 30%, and final exams account for 70%.
7. Formulation Author: Hu Junhua
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Software testing and quality control
Course number: 160215Z1
Course Title : Software Testing and Quality Control
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 8)
English name: Software Testing & Quality Control
Prerequisite course requirements : management information system, programming language, software development tools and environment
Adapt to majors: information management and information systems, e-commerce
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbook: "Software Testing", Ron Patton, Machinery Industry Press
Reference book: "Effective Methods of Software Testing", William E. Perry, China Machinery Industry Press
"Process Management of Software Testing", Rex Black, Mechanical Industry Press
Course introduction:
Software testing and quality control are professional courses. This course mainly introduces the basic concepts and principles of software testing
And technology, as well as the concept of software quality and software quality control methods based on software testing. Course content pack
Including: software engineering and software testing, the content is the concept of software engineering, software quality and software testing, and
The basic qualities of software testers; the basic knowledge of software testing, the content introduces software testing and software development
Life cycle, classification, principles, strategies and procedures of software testing, etc.; software testing methods and techniques, internal
The content includes an overview of software testing methods, white box testing, black box testing, test case design; software testing process,
Page 124
Content introduction software testing process overview, unit testing, system testing, integration testing, etc.; software testing report
And test evaluation, the content is the concept and type of software defect, software defect report, test summary report, etc.;
Software testing automation and software testing tools, including the basis of software automation testing, several commonly used software
Testing tools, etc.; software quality assurance and testing project management, the content is mainly software quality assurance, test documents
File, software testing plan, testing organization and personnel management, software testing process management; software testing examples.
Through learning, students can basically have the theoretical foundation of a software testing engineer and be familiar with software testing
Based on the basic theory, it can complete the testing of general software programs. Some students can even serve as middle and low level
The person in charge of testing and quality control assists software R&D engineers to improve the testability and maintainability of the software.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Software Testing and Quality Control" is an elective course for the majors of information management, information systems and e-commerce
Cheng. It is an important part of software engineering, and it is the software development and management technology required by students majoring in information management.
Indispensable expertise. This course mainly introduces the basic concepts and principles of software testing and software quality management
And technology.
The following objectives are achieved through the teaching of this course:
1. Enable students to master the basic concepts and basic theories of software testing;
2. Learn the methods of software testing, the use of software testing tools, and the management of software testing processes;
3. Make students basically have the theoretical foundation of a software testing engineer and be familiar with the basic theories of software testing,
Able to complete the testing of general software programs.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Master the basic concepts and principles of software testing and software quality control; master the basics of software testing
Method; familiar with the process of software testing; master the content of software testing reports and writing procedures; understand software testing
Contents and methods of test project management; familiar with some tools of automatic software testing.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Software Engineering and Software Testing
Software engineering
Software quality and software testing
Basic qualities of software testers
2. Basic knowledge of software testing (emphasis)
Software testing and software development life cycle
Test model
Classification of software testing
Principles of software testing
Software testing strategy
Software testing process
Successful test experience
3. Software testing methods and techniques (emphasis, difficulty)
Overview of software testing methods
White box testing
Black box testing
Page 125
Test case design
4. Software testing process (emphasis)
Overview of the software testing process
unit test
Integration Testing
System test
Acceptance Test
Regression Testing
System troubleshooting
5. Software test report and test evaluation
Concepts and types of software defects
Software defect life cycle
Severity and priority of software defects
Report software defects
Isolate and reproduce software defects
Test summary report
Tested evaluation
6. Software test automation and software test tools
Fundamentals of Software Automated Testing
The role and advantages of automated testing
Software testing tool classification
Several commonly used software testing tools
7. Software quality assurance and test project management (focus)
Software quality assurance
Test document
Software test plan
Test organization and personnel management
Software testing process management
8. Software test examples
4. Requirements for course practice
The experiment of this course is mainly to understand the mainstream automated testing tools, master the IBM Rational testing products
Use of products.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours of which experiment (on computer time) Remarks
1
Software Engineering and Software Testing
2
2
Basic knowledge of software testing
4
3
Software testing methods and techniques
6
4
Software testing process
4
5
Software test report and test evaluation
4
6
Software test automation and software test
tool
6
4
Page 126
7
Software quality assurance and test project management
Reason
4
8
Software test examples
2
6. Course assessment method
The examination mainly adopts the closed-book method. The scope of the examination should cover all the content taught, and the content of the examination should be able to
Views reflect students’ memory and mastery of the main concepts of this course, and their understanding and mastery of relevant theories
And comprehensive application ability.
Overall assessment scores: 30% of attendance and experiments are usually taken, and 70% are closed-book exams.
7. Formulation writer: Hu Dongbin
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
data structure
Course number: 160216Z1
Course Name: Data Structure
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 16)
English name: Data Structure
Prerequisite course requirements : computer programming
Adaptation major: Business School Information Management and Information System Major, E-commerce Major
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbook:
Chen Songqiao, etc., "Algorithm and Data Structure (C and C++ Description)", Tsinghua University Press, 2002
reference book:
Yan Weimin, etc., "Data Structure (C Language Edition)", Tsinghua University Press
Course introduction:
Data structure is a compulsory course for business school credit management major and elective for e-commerce major. This lesson
Cheng masters the logic of various basic data structures by familiarizing with the definition, nature and characteristics of various basic data structures
Structure and storage structure and corresponding algorithms, and initially grasp the basic skills of algorithm analysis and how to
Design an effective algorithm, and initially have the ability to combine professional applications and apply data structure knowledge to practical
MIS system programming ability.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Data structure is how information is organized. For the same algorithm, use different data structures to represent
The abstract data type will cause different execution efficiency. It is necessary to study the use of various abstract data types
The efficiency difference represented by the same data structure, and its applicable occasions.
This course is a professional foundation set up specifically for the professional characteristics of information management and information systems.
Page 127
Basic course is a must-have for students of this major to engage in MIS system design and development work in the future
Basic knowledge.
The following objectives are achieved through the teaching of this course:
1. Familiar with the definition, nature and characteristics of various basic data structures;
2. Master the logical structure and storage structure of various basic data structures and corresponding algorithms;
3. Grasp the basic skills of algorithm analysis and how to design an effective algorithm based on actual problems
law;
4. Initially have the ability to combine professional applications to apply data structure knowledge to actual MIS system programming
Ability.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Master the basic knowledge of data structure and algorithm design and analysis, the definition of various basic data structures, save
Storage structure, corresponding algorithm and application, understand the relationship between basic data structure and algorithm. Cultivate MIS
Professional students have the ability to design effective algorithms and data structures in combination with practical applications.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Basic concepts of data structure and algorithm
Data structure concepts and terminology
Basic data type
Algorithm description and analysis
2. Linear table
Features of linear data structure
The logical structure of the linear table
Sequential storage structure of linear table
Linear linked list
Application examples
3. Stacks and queues (emphasis)
Representation and implementation of the stack
Stack application-expression evaluation (difficulty)
Chain queue and circular queue
Queue application
4. Find (emphasis)
Sequential search
Index search, binary search
Hash table
B tree and B+ tree (difficulty)
Application examples
5. Sort (emphasis)
Insert sort, quick sort, select sort
Merge sort, radix sort
Comparison of various internal sorting methods
Application examples
6. Tree and binary tree (emphasis)
Page 128
Tree definition and basic operations
Definition, basic operation, storage structure and properties of binary tree;
Traversal of binary tree (difficulty)
Tree storage structure, tree traversal
Optimal Binary Tree and Huffman Coding
Examples of tree applications
7. Figure (difficulty)
Graph definition and terminology
Graph storage structure, graph traversal
Graph connectivity, shortest path
Application examples
4. Requirements for course practice
This course is both theoretical and practical courses. In addition to appropriate thinking exercises, each section also
Equipped with basic hands-on experiments, using Turbo C (or other C language tools) as a development tool. experiment
The content and requirements are as follows:
1. Linear table and its application experiment;
2. Stack and stack application experiment: programming to achieve stack establishment, stack push, pop operation and expression evaluation
value;
3. Binary tree experiment: realize the establishment of binary tree, pre-order, middle-order and post-order traversal, etc.;
4. Search experiment: programming to realize the creation and search of Hash table;
5. Simple and complex sorting experiments: realize programming of sorting methods such as bubbling, hill and quick sorting.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
One of the experiments (hours on the computer) Remarks
1
Introduction (basic concepts and terminology,
Algorithm description and analysis)
2
0
2
Linear table and its application
8
4
3
Stack and its applications
8
4
4
Queue and its application
2
0
5
Tree and binary tree
10
4
6
Graph and its application
4
0
7
Find
4
2
8
Internal sorting
8
2
review
2
0
6. Course assessment method
The examination mainly adopts the closed-book method. The scope of the examination should cover all the content taught, and the content of the examination should be able to
Views reflect students’ memory and mastery of the main concepts of this course, and their understanding and mastery of relevant theories
And comprehensive application ability. Exam question types should be as diverse as possible.
Overall assessment results: 30% of the usual homework, 70% of the closed-book examination.
7. Formulation Author: Chen Ke
Page 129
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
System analysis and design
Course number: 160217Z1
Course Title: System Analysis and Design
English name: The Information System Analysis and Design
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 12)
Prerequisite course requirements: management, database technology and application, data communication and computer network, management information
system
Adapt to major: information management and information system
Textbooks and reference books:
1. Chen Xiaohong, Luo Xinxing, "Information System Tutorial", Beijing: Tsinghua University Press, 2003
2. Editor-in-chief such as Chen Yu, "Information System Analysis and Design", Beijing: Higher Education Press, 2005
3. "Information System Development Method Course" edited by Chen Jia, Beijing: Tsinghua University Press, 1999
Course introduction:
Information system analysis and design is the core professional course of information management and information system major. Its teaching goals
Yes: on the basis of the previous course study, enable students to master the analysis and design guiding ideology of the management information system,
Basic methods and basic techniques enable students to be competent in the analysis and design of information systems in enterprises and institutions.
This course focuses on the analysis and design phase of the information system in the life cycle of the information system. Teach this two
The basic ideas, techniques and methods of each stage. Mainly include an introduction to information system development, demand analysis, and logic
Model design, overall design, detailed design and other chapters.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is the core professional course for the undergraduate major of Information Management and Information System. The teaching of this course is learning
Students have mastered the basic knowledge and skills of management science and modern information technology, systematically teach
Information system analysis and design methods, so that students have the ability to undertake the information department of enterprises and institutions
Ability in information development, especially in system analysis and design.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the teaching of this course, students should master the basic concepts and development trends of information systems, and
And use the concepts and methods of the life cycle method, specifically apply the relevant principles, follow the scientific steps, use
Relevant tools, so as to have the knowledge and ability to participate in information system construction projects and become key members,
Able to master the basic ideas related to the construction of information systems, understand the factors of people (especially leaders), social factors
Elements, organization and management models, etc. play an important role in the realization of information systems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Page 130
Chapter One Information System and Management
Key points and difficulties: the concept of information, the connection and difference between information and data; the structure of information systems;
Understand that an information system is not only a technical system, but also a social system; information system and decision support
System connection and difference
The first section of the basic concepts of information
Section 2 Basic Concepts of Information System
Chapter II Introduction to Information System Development
Key points and difficulties: the workflow of the life cycle method; the main tasks of each stage;
The first section of the life cycle of the information system
Section 2 Work content and tasks at each stage of the life cycle
1. Information system planning work content and tasks
2. The work content and tasks of information system analysis
3. The work content and tasks of information system design
4. The work content and tasks of the implementation and management of information system projects
Chapter 3 Demand Analysis
Key points and difficulties: target analysis; information requirements for management and decision-making; management feasibility; technical feasibility
Performance; economic feasibility, business process analysis; data process analysis; data dictionary
Section 1: Analysis of Strategic Goals, System Goals and Project Goals
1. Organizational strategy and information construction
2. System goals and project goals
Section 2 Information Requirements for Management and Decision-making
1. Informatization requirements at the production level
2. Informatization needs of office management
3. Informatization needs of strategic decision-making level
4. Information requirements of the collaborative business layer
Section 3 Analysis, weighing and quantification of objectives
1. Target analysis
2. Goal weighing
3. Quantification of goals
Section 4 Feasibility Analysis
1. Technical feasibility study
2. Economic feasibility study
3. Social feasibility study
4. Feasibility analysis report writing
5. Review of the feasibility analysis report
Section 5 Organization and Steps of Investigation and Research
1. Research organization
2. Steps of investigation
3. Contents and methods of investigation
Section VI Business Process Analysis
1. The content of business process analysis
2. Business flowchart
3. Business process modeling and analysis tools
Page 131
Section 7 Data Flow Analysis (DFD)
1. The content of data flow analysis
2. Data flow chart
3. Data Dictionary
Section 8 Interactive Analysis of Functions and Data
1. U/C matrix
2. Solving U/C Matrix
3. System logic function division and data resource distribution
Section 9 Analysis and Evaluation of Information Management Status in the Organization
1. Analysis and evaluation of the status quo of information management
2. Analysis and evaluation indicators
3. Analysis and evaluation methods
4. Analysis and evaluation steps
Chapter 4 Logic Design
Key points and difficulties: business process reengineering; overall data planning; interactive testing methods; system analysis
report
The first section logic design goals and principles
1. Proposal of the new system logic model
2. The goal of logic design
3. Principles of Logic Design
The second section business process transformation and design
1. Business Process Reengineering (BPR)
2. Types of process reorganization
3. Steps and methods of process transformation and design
4. Examples of process reorganization
The third section data processing and data storage design
1. Data Processing
2. Description tool for processing logic
3. Data storage design
4. Immediate data access and analysis
Section 4 Interactive Inspection of Design Scheme
1. Interactive verification of design solutions
2. Structure preview
3. Software process evaluation
Section 5 Writing and Review of System Analysis Report
1. System analysis report writing
2. Review of system analysis report
Chapter 5 Overall Design
Key points and difficulties: structured system design; methods and principles of module division; overall database design
Design; overall system layout; network design.
Section 1: Tasks and Principles of System Design
1. The task of system design
2. Principles of System Design
Page 132
Section 2 System Structure Design
1. Principles of structural design
2. Method of module division
The third section overall database design
1. General database design principles
2. Overall database design
Section 4 Planning and Design of Communication Structure
1. Overall system layout
2. Network design
Chapter 6 Detailed Design
Key points and difficulties: process design; code design; user demand analysis; friendliness
Design of user interface; review of implementation plan.
The first section is the connection between overall design and modular design
The second section module function and performance design
1. Process design
2. Process design principles
Section III Code Design
1. The purpose of coding
2. Code design principles
3. Types of codes
4. Code verification
Section 4 Human-Machine Interface Design
1. Analysis of user needs
2. Design principles of man-machine interface
3. Graphical user interface
4. Steps to design the user interface
Section 5 Input and Output Design
1. Output design
2. Enter the design
Section 6 Organization of Module Design
Section VII Drafting and deliberation of the implementation plan
1. System Design Report
2. Implementation plan
Chapter 7 New Development of Information System Analysis and Design Technology
Key points and difficulties: Information system architecture; Web Services technology.
Section One Information System Analysis and Construction Development Trend
1. Information system architecture under the Internet environment
2. Web Services Technology and Application
Section 2 Software Components and Distributed Component Object Standards
1. Software reuse and software components
2. Three mainstream distributed software component object standards
Section 3 Unified Modeling Language UML
1. Overview of the Unified Modeling Language UML
Page 133
2. Unified modeling language UML conceptual model and content
4. Requirements for course practice
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Chapter content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
One information system and management
2
.
2. Introduction to Information System Development
4
.
Three needs analysis
10
.
Four logic design
8
.
Five overall design
8
.
Six detailed design
10
.
7. New development of information system analysis and design technology 4
.
review
2
.
6. Course assessment method
Normal homework accounts for 30%, and closed-book exams account for 70%.
7. Formulation writer: Luo Xinxing
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Modern programming (Java)
Course ID : 160218Z1
Course Name: Modern Programming (Java)
English name: Modern Programming Language -Java
Class hours and credits : 40/2.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 12)
Prerequisite course requirements: computer programming
Adapt to majors: information management and information systems, e-commerce
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbook:
1. (United States) Sharon Zakhour; Scott Hommel, The Java Tutorial: A Short Course
on the Basics, 4th Edition, People’s Posts and Telecommunications Press
reference book:
1 . "Java Programming Thought", English original book title: Thinking in JAVA
[America] Bruce Eckel has a translated version by Machinery Industry Press
2. "Java 2 Core Technology" Volume I: Basic Knowledge [America] Cay S. Horstmann, Gary Cornell
Translation version available
Page 134
3. "Java Language Guide" English original book title: The Java Tutorial, Third Edition
[America] Mary Campione, Kathy Walrath, Alison Huml have translated
Translation
4. "Understanding Object-Oriented Programming With Java"
[美] By Timothy Budd
5. "Learning Java" [America] Patrick Niemeyer, Jonatban Knudseno'reilly
Course introduction:
This course trains students to use a new generation of programming ideas and logical thinking in computer programming research
Research, to inspire students’ sense of innovation, and to improve students’ practice of analyzing and solving problems in the software design process
Interpersonal skills, so that students' theoretical knowledge and practical skills can be developed together.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Nature: Basic course for the major of information management and information system.
Task: Through the teaching of this course, help students understand the latest international computer programming design ideas,
And can initially use Java technology and basic development tools for computer software code design.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Students should master the basic concepts of Java language and basic principles of programming design according to the specific requirements of the syllabus.
Theory and methods, and can correctly use these theories and methods to analyze and judge general computer projects, complete
Into programming design, to solve practical problems in the application.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Basic Java language (planned hours: 15 hours)
Teaching content: Introduction to Java technology; basic composition of source program; file structure and organization form; Java
The operating principle and system environment configuration; object-oriented basic concepts, basic theories and programming design ideas.
Teaching requirements: focus on introducing the basic concepts and basic theories of object-oriented programming, combined with Java
The grammatical rules of the language, programming features and design ideas, emphasizing the prone to errors and programming should pay attention to,
To enable students to have an overall understanding of Java technology, and to cooperate with some computer experiments to help students lay a good foundation
foundation.
2. Graphical interface design and event interface processing (planned hours: 15 hours)
Teaching content: program graphic interface design; interface usage method; event processing technology; graphic processing
Technology; mouse and keyboard processing technology
Teaching requirements: focus on introducing practical techniques such as program interface design methods and event interface processing, and conclude
Integrate object-oriented design theory, dissect some practical examples for analysis, so that students can understand the modern programming
Have a basic understanding of some requirements and standards, and cooperate with some computer experiments to help students compile a friendly interface
program.
3. Application design and programming (planned hours: 18 hours, key points and difficulties)
Teaching content: multithreading mechanism, input and output stream mechanism, exception handling mechanism, network programming method,
Database connection method, multimedia processing method
Teaching requirements: to introduce multi-threading mechanism, input and output streams, network programming, database connection methods, etc.
Focus on advanced technology. Combining object-oriented design theory, through explaining some practical examples, combining reality
Discuss some of the application issues. To enable students to have general application problems raised through study and discussion
Page 135
Some basic ideas and solutions of programming design, coupled with some computer experiments, help students to have basic skills
The ability to complete general application development and programming design.
4. Requirements for course practice
1. Learn to install Java programming environment
2. Computer debugging through data access, graphical interface, object-oriented program
3. Master the use of Java common class libraries
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Class schedule:
Chapter 1. Getting Started with the Java Language
3 class hours
Chapter 2 Identifiers, Keywords, and Data Types
1 class hour
Chapter 3 Operators, Expressions and Statements
2 class hours
Chapter 4. Classes, Objects, and Interfaces
6 class hours
Chapter 5 Arrays and Strings
3 class hours
Chapter 6 Introduction to AWT Toolset
1 class hour
Chapter 7 Java Applet Basics
1 class hour
Chapter 8 Text Box and Text Area
1 class hour
Chapter 9 Button
1 class hour
Chapter 10 Labels
1 class hour
Chapter 11 Panels and Canvas
1 class hour
Chapter 12 Layout Design
1 class hour
Chapter 13 Select Box
1 class hour
Chapter 14 Selecting Controls and Scrolling Lists
1 class hour
Chapter 15 Building Windows and Menus
1 class hour
Chapter 16 Creating Dialog
1 class hour
Chapter 17. Java and Graphics
2 class hours
Chapter 18 Mouse events and keyboard events in Java 2 class hours
Chapter 19. Java Multithreading Mechanism
3 class hours
Chapter 20 Input and Output Streams
3 class hours
Chapter 21 Basic knowledge of Java network.
2 class hours
Chapter 22 Java and Images
1 class hour
Chapter 23 Java Database Connection (JDBC)
2 class hours
Chapter 24 Java and Multimedia
1 class hour
Chapter 25 Java Swing Basics
3 class hours
Chapter 26 Java Implementation of Common Data Structures 3 class hours
6. Course assessment method
Closed-book exam, final exam results account for 70%, laboratory and usual results account for 30%
Seven, formulation writer: Bi Wenjie
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 136
Professional English for Information Management and Information System
Course number: 160219Z1
Course Name: Professional English for Information Management and Information System
English name: I nformation Management & Information Systems Professional
English
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: basic English for university, basic computer for university, management information system, management
Adaptation major: major in information management and information systems
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbook:
Editor-in-Chief Li Min. Professional English for Information Management and Information Systems. Harbin Institute of Technology Press, 2006
reference book:
Zhao Xuan, Chief Editor Zheng Yangcheng. "Science and Technology English Translation". Foreign Language Teaching and Research Press, 2006
Course introduction:
Professional English for Information Management and Information System is an elective course for the major of Information Management and Information System
Professional Courses. This course takes into account the study of English language, English is in the information management and information system major
The study of three aspects of professional knowledge of application and information management aims to train students to apply in the practice of information management
The ability of English, and at the same time strengthen students' mastery of the terminology, basic concepts and theories of information management. Make learning
Students can consciously use English as a tool to acquire cutting-edge professional knowledge for further professional study and work
Lay a solid foundation.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Information management and information system major foreign language is an elective course for information management and information system major
Professional courses, courses are offered in the 6th semester. It is a continuation of students after two and a half years of public English.
The aim is to help students complete the transition from basic English to professional English.
This course takes into account the study of English language, the application of English in information management and information system
The study of three aspects of professional knowledge aims to cultivate students' ability to apply English in the practice of information management, and at the same time
Strengthen students' mastery of the terminology, basic concepts and theories of information management and information systems. Enable students to
Consciously use English as a tool to acquire cutting-edge professional knowledge and lay a foundation for further professional study and work
Solid foundation.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Master the unique language features, professional vocabulary usage, translation skills and writing skills of professional English. to cultivate
Students are proficient in reading and translating various information management and information system English documents and the ability to write English abstracts.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Page 137
1. Text study (emphasis)
·Chapter One Introduction to MIS
·Chapter 2 Information System Analysis and Design
· Chapter Three Electronic Commerce
2. Discrimination of word formation, memory method and word meaning of professional vocabulary (emphasis)
·Word Formation
·Memory method
·Analysis of the meaning of words
3. Translation skills (difficulty)
·Selection method
·Extension Law,
·Add wording,
·Subtraction,
4. Writing an English abstract (difficulty)
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Prepare
Note
Chapter 1 Introduction to MIS
6
Chapter two
Information System
Analysis and
Design
18
Chapter Three Electronic Commerce
7
Course learning summary
1
6. Course assessment method
The examination mainly adopts the closed-book method. The scope of the examination should cover all the content taught, and the content of the examination should be able to
Views reflect students’ memory and mastery of the main concepts of this course, and their understanding and mastery of relevant theories
And comprehensive application ability. Exam question types should be as diverse as possible.
Overall assessment results: 30% of the usual homework, 70% of the closed-book examination.
7. Formulation writer: Bianli
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 138
Finance and Accounting Case
Course Number : 160303Z1
Course Name : Cases of Finance and Accounting
English name : Finance ﹠ accounting case
Class hours and credits: 32/2
(Experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : basic accounting, intermediate financial accounting, financial management
Adapt to major: accounting, financial management
Reference textbook: "Company Finance Case", Hu Yiming, Tsinghua University Press, 2007
reference book:
［1］Accounting Courses and Cases (Eleventh Edition), Anthony (United States), Machinery Industry Press, 2004
[2] Financial case of Chinese companies, Li Kemu, Peking University Press, 2006
[3] Cases of Financial Management (Second Edition). Tang Guliang, Peking University Press, 2012
Course introduction:
This course focuses on major practical issues in finance and accounting in the form of a topic, based on case materials, and learns
Students’ situational analysis and speculation of real events are the focus, in order to improve students’ application of the theoretical knowledge they have learned to solve practical problems
Questions are the purpose, with inspiration, discussion, and interaction as the main forms, bringing practical issues of finance and accounting into the classroom,
Transform individual thinking into collective wisdom and then transform basic principles into practical exercises as the main learning of this course
Want results.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
The financial and accounting case course is an important way to enhance the practicality of financial management and accounting teaching.
The bridge between theory and practice. This course focuses on major issues in financial and accounting practice, and collects typical materials
And organize, simulate the real financial management scene and decision-making environment, and improve students’ use of multidisciplinary knowledge to solve actual financial
Ability in business and accounting issues, while expanding students’ professional vision through special lectures.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Understand major theoretical and practical issues in the field of corporate finance and accounting;
2. Master the core knowledge points involved in the topic;
3. Actually participate in case analysis and discussion to improve the ability to solve practical financial and accounting problems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
This course arranges the basic teaching content in the form of a topic around the important practical issues of corporate finance and accounting.
Including: basic methods of case analysis, core issues of corporate finance and accounting, financial constraints on corporate sustainable growth,
Financial statement analysis logical framework and entry point, company financial strategy and investment policy, strategic equity financing,
Group company financial management and control model design, fund centralized management model and selection, budget management practice focus and difficulty
Point problems, whitewash and identification of financial statements.
The focus of the course is financial policy, financial planning, financial control case analysis to compensate for the theoretical teaching
Of inadequacy. The difficulty of the course lies in the practical problems faced by corporate finance and accounting involving systems, psychology, etc.
It is difficult to directly use theoretical models and single subject knowledge to solve the impact of natural factors. Students are required to have a broad knowledge
Face.
Page 139
4. Requirements for course practice
A group of 3 to 5 people will discuss each case material, write a case analysis report, and
Demonstrate with PPT.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Prepare
Note
Topic One Basic Method of Case Analysis
2
Topic 2 Core Issues of Corporate Finance and Accounting
4
Topic 3 Financial Constraints for Sustainable Growth of Enterprises
2
Topic Four
Financial Statement Analysis Logic Framework and Cut-in
point
4
Topic 5 Corporate Financial Strategy and Investment Policy
4
Topic 6 Strategic Equity Financing
2
Topic Seven: Design of Financial Management and Control Model of Group Companies
2
Topic 8 Centralized Fund Management Mode and Choice
4
Topic 9: Key and Difficult Issues in Budget Management Practice
2
Topic 10 Financial Statement Whitewashing and Identification
2
Maneuver
4
6. Course assessment method
The course assessment is mainly based on the performance of classroom discussion, accounting for 70% of the weight, and the process of case discussion after the end of the course
A closed-book test involving core knowledge points is taken, which accounts for 30% of the weight.
7. Formulation Author: Zhou Langbo
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
cost accounting
Course number: 160304Z1
Course Title: Cost Accounting
English name: Cost Accounting
Class hours and credits: 48/3
(Experimental hours: 0, computer hours in class: 16)
Prerequisite course requirements: management, basic accounting
Adapt to major: accounting, financial management
Reference materials:
(1) "Cost Accounting", Yu Fusheng, Renmin University Press, December 2012 6th edition
Page 140
(2) "Cost Accounting" study guide, Yu Fusheng, Renmin University Press, 2010 1
5th edition of the month
(3) "Cost Management Accounting", Liu Xianshi, Economic Management Press, April 2011
(4) "Cost Accounting", Le Yanfen, Shanghai University of Finance and Economics Press, January 2012
(5) "Cost Accounting: Management Control as the Core", Wang Liyan, Fudan University Press, June 2011
Month 2nd edition
(6) "Cost Accounting", Chen Yun, Lixin Accounting Press, October 2011 3rd edition
Course introduction:
Cost accounting is one of the important branches of corporate accounting. It mainly involves how to
The relevant knowledge of the relevant parties of the Ministry, especially the management authority, to provide cost information helpful for decision-making, and the content covers how to
Predict, make decisions, plan, control, and calculate various costs incurred in the production and operation of the enterprise
Assessment and analysis, etc. Among them, cost accounting provides true and useful accounting information is the basis of cost accounting.
This task and the central link, therefore, the main content of this course includes: a comprehensive and systematic explanation of cost accounting
The basic principles and various cost calculation methods as well as the compilation and analysis of cost reports.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Cost accounting is one of the important branches of corporate accounting. It mainly involves how to
Ministry stakeholders, especially management authorities, provide relevant knowledge of cost information that helps decision-making. Through this course
Study to enable students to understand the basic framework, functions and tasks of cost accounting, master the basic theories,
Basic methods and basic procedures of cost accounting, understand and proficiently use various basic methods and auxiliary cost calculation
Help students to master the preparation and analysis methods of cost reports, and help students to form awareness of cost control and
Possess a certain knowledge and ability in cost forecasting, cost decision-making, cost planning and cost assessment, thus
Lay a good foundation for further study of subsequent accounting professional courses.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Help students accurately understand the basic concepts, functions and tasks of cost accounting;
2. Help students master the requirements and general procedures of corporate cost accounting;
3. Instruct students to proficiently use various basic methods and auxiliary methods of cost calculation;
4. Help students familiarize and understand the compilation and analysis methods of cost reports;
5. Help students form the awareness of cost control and have certain cost forecasts, cost decisions, and costs
Knowledge and ability in planning and cost assessment to improve students’ independent analysis of cost issues and cost resolution
Problem capacity.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Cost accounting courses mainly involve how to deal with various costs incurred in the production and operation of enterprises
Carrying out related content such as forecasting, decision-making, planning, control, accounting, assessment and analysis, among which the cost
Accounting, providing true and useful accounting information is the basic task and central link of cost accounting. For this reason, this
The main content of the course includes: a comprehensive and systematic explanation of the basic principles of cost accounting and various cost calculation methods
Method and preparation and analysis of cost reports. Specifically include the following basic content:
(1) General remarks. Including the economic substance and function of cost, the object of cost accounting, the role of cost accounting
Competent and task, the principle of cost accounting work organization;
(2) Requirements and general procedures for enterprise cost accounting. Including cost accounting requirements, expense classification,
Page 141
General procedures and main accounting subjects of cost accounting;
(3) The allocation and collection of expenses among various products and period expenses. Including the cost of various elements
Distribution, collection and distribution of prepaid expenses and accrued expenses, collection and distribution of auxiliary production expenses, manufacturing
The collection and distribution of expenses, the calculation of waste loss and shutdown losses, and the calculation of period expenses;
(4) The distribution and collection of production costs between finished products and products in progress. Included in the product quantity
Methods of accounting, finished products and allocating expenses among products, and carry-forward of finished product costs;
(5) Overview of product cost calculation methods. Including production characteristics and management requirements for product cost calculation
The basic method and auxiliary method of impact and product cost calculation.
(6) The basic method of product cost calculation. Including product cost calculation method, product cost calculation
The batch method of calculation, the step method of product cost calculation.
(7) Auxiliary method for product cost calculation. Including the classification of product cost calculation, product cost calculation
The practical application of the fixed quota method and various cost calculation methods.
(8) Cost accounting for other industries. Including agricultural enterprise cost accounting, construction enterprise cost accounting
Wait.
(9) The frontier of cost accounting. Including activity-based costing, etc.
(10) Preparation and analysis of cost reports. Including the functions, types and characteristics of cost reports, cost reports
The procedures and methods of table analysis, the preparation and analysis of all product production cost reports, the compilation of various expense reports
System and analysis, compilation of analysis table of impact of changes in technical and economic indicators on product cost, mid-term cost forecast;
The key and difficult points of this course: This course focuses on the basic principles of cost accounting, cost calculation methods,
Preparation and analysis of cost reports. The difficulty is the collection and distribution of auxiliary production costs, and the analysis of product cost calculations.
Footwork, quota method for product cost calculation, analysis of cost reports, etc.
4. Requirements for course practice
The cost accounting course simulation experiment requires students to strictly follow the requirements of the instructor to complete the quality and quantity
Experimental task, closely integrate cost accounting theory and practice to improve the practical operation of cost accounting
Ability to work, analyze and solve problems.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Remarks
Chapter One Summary
4
Chapter II Requirements and General Procedures of Enterprise Cost Accounting
2
third chapter
The distribution of expenses among various products and period expenses and
Collection
6
2
Chapter Four
The distribution of production costs between the finished product and the product
Collection
4
2
Chapter 5 Overview of Product Cost Calculation Methods
2
Chapter VI Basic Methods of Product Cost Calculation
8
4
Chapter 7 Auxiliary Methods of Product Cost Calculation
6
Chapter 8 Cost Accounting for Other Industries
2
Chapter 9 Frontiers of Cost Accounting
2
Chapter 10 Compilation and Analysis of Cost Report
2
2
Page 142
total
38
10
6. Course assessment method
The usual grades account for 30% of the total grades. The usual grades mainly include the preview situation, class attendance, class mention
Questions, homework, course simulation experiments, etc.; final exam scores account for 70% of the total score, and the final exam
Written closed book test.
7. Formulation Author: Wang Dongqing
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Advanced Financial Accounting
Course number : 160305Z1
Course Title : Advanced Financial Accounting
English name: Advanced Financial Accounting
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : basic accounting, intermediate financial accounting
Adapt to majors : accounting, financial management, finance
Reference materials :
"Advanced Financial Accounting" Chief Editor Liang Laixin, Tsinghua University Press, 2007
"Advanced Financial Accounting" Du Xingqiang, editor in chief, Xiamen University Press, 2007
Course introduction :
The "Advanced Financial Accounting" course is based on basic accounting assumptions and accounting principles, and is based on financial accounting
Conceptual framework is the theoretical basis, systematically expounding the relevant theories and methods of various complex economic operations and special matters.
This course systematically introduces income tax accounting, corporate merger accounting, foreign currency business accounting, price change accounting,
Financial instrument accounting, lease accounting, corporate bankruptcy, liquidation and reorganization accounting, etc. Through the teaching of this course
Study, aims to train students to master financial accounting theories and methods related to complex economic activities, so that students have
The ability to analyze complex economic operations and perform accounting processing.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Advanced Financial Accounting" is based on the two accounting courses "Basic Accounting" and "Intermediate Financial Accounting".
Based on the extension of theories and methods. With the development of society and economy, this course is an important part of the original financial accounting content
An accounting that supplements and develops, that is, using the inherent methods of financial accounting to
Complicated business and accounting that reflect some special business arising from changes in the objective economic environment.
It is an important professional course for accounting majors and financial management majors.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Page 143
Through the teaching of this course, students can master basic financial accounting theories and methods on the basis of
Special economic business and complex economic business accounting treatment methods and related theoretical knowledge, and enable students to
Solve the new and the frontier issues in the field of accounting research.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Advanced financial accounting is a further development and in-depth study of accounting content based on intermediate financial accounting.
The main contents include: income tax accounting, business combination accounting (including business combination method, consolidated report
Statement theory, acquisition of control rights and subsequent consolidated statements, handling of group internal business, etc.), foreign currency business
Accounting and foreign currency report conversion, price change accounting, segment report and interim report, lease accounting, financial engineering
With accounting, corporate restructuring and bankruptcy liquidation accounting, etc. Among them, business combination accounting, foreign currency business accounting
And financial instrument accounting is the key point; business merger accounting, financial instrument accounting are difficult points.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Remarks
Chapter 1
Income tax accounting
4
chapter 2
lease
6
Chapter 3
Company liquidation and reorganization
4
Chapter 4
Price change accounting
6
Chapter 5
Foreign currency transaction accounting
4
Chapter 6
Conversion of foreign currency statements
2
Chapter 7
Confirmation, measurement and disclosure of financial instruments
4
Chapter 8
Derivatives and hedging
2
Chapter 9
Business combination and its accounting treatment
4
Chapter 10
Preparation of consolidated statements on the date of equity acquisition
4
Chapter 11
Compilation of consolidated statements after the date of equity acquisition
system
2
Chapter 12
Intercompany transactions
4
Chapter 13
Segment report
2
6. Course assessment method
1. 70% of the closed book exam.
2. 30% of homework, questions and case discussions.
7. Formulation writer: Xiu Zongfeng
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 144
Management accounting
Course number: 160306Z1
Course Name: Management Accounting
English name: Management Accounting
Class hours and credits: 48/3
(Experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: Intermediate financial accounting, management, statistics, operations research, etc.
Adapt to majors : accounting, financial management, business management, business management, etc.
Reference materials:
1. Modern Management Accounting (First Edition), edited by Liu Aidong, Central South University Press, January 2011.
2. Management Accounting (1st Edition), Song Xianzhong, Hu Yuming, Peking University Press, December 2006.
3. Management Accounting (14th Edition), Charles T. Horngre, North
Beijing University Press, October 2009. (Chinese translation)
Course introduction:
The management accounting course is based on "planning and decision accounting" and "control and performance evaluation accounting".
In addition to thinking questions and exercises at the end of each chapter, there is also a supporting "Management Accounting Learning Guide", which is in the course of teaching
Adhere to the concept of "research management accounting teaching and the cultivation of innovative accounting talents" and implement the teaching plan
Externalized, participatory, and simulated innovative teaching methods to activate students’ learning potential and cultivate student discovery
Comprehensive ability to analyze problems, analyze problems, and solve problems.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a compulsory course for accounting majors, and is optional for majors such as financial management, business management, and business administration.
Take courses. Management accounting is an important branch of modern accounting. It is a highly technical, practical and comprehensive subject
Emerging edge disciplines. As a subsystem of the enterprise management information system, management accounting has been
Transform into business decision-making, strategic decision-making, value creation, incentives and evaluation of business performance, and optimization of resource allocation
Provide important information support to assist business managers in organizing, planning and controlling the business activities of the enterprise,
Provide enterprises with new ideas and methods in production innovation, market innovation and organizational innovation.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
In the late 1970s and early 1980s, management accounting followed my country’s reform and opening up from the western developed countries.
Home introduced to our country. Since management accounting is formed and developed on the basis of western capitalist economy,
It also has the dual attributes of nature and society. Therefore, learning management accounting must be combined with my country’s national conditions and have choices
To be digested, absorbed and applied. The basic requirements are as follows:
(1) Study the formation and development of management accounting, and master the basics of western management accounting that are useful to our country
This theory, technical methods and new ideas for analysis and evaluation of problems, combined with contemporary technology, economics and management development
The new trend of the establishment of a new modern management accounting system with Chinese characteristics and in line with international practices.
(2) Learn to use financial accounting and other related information to predict the economic prospects of enterprises and participate in decision-making
Policy and plan for the future, scientifically make various economic decisions for business managers, rationally allocate economic resources, and effectively
Control economic activities, correctly evaluate and assess business performance, and provide timely and reliable information support.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Page 145
Chapter One Introduction
(1) Study the purpose and requirements of this chapter (the study object and demand)
"Introduction" is the introduction of the book. Through the study of this chapter, students will have a general overview of management accounting.
Reading, lay the foundation for the study of the following chapters.
Studying this chapter requires focusing on the following:
1. Understand the relationship between accounting and management, management accounting and modern management from the evolution of management and accounting
The relationship between science, and the formation and development of management accounting.
2. Grasp the characteristics of management accounting from the difference and connection between financial accounting and management accounting.
3. From the connection between the business management cycle and the management accounting cycle, clarify the basic content of management accounting.
4. From the organizational system of accounting and financial institutions, clarify how management accounting works in practice.
5. From the historical review, it is clear that it is to give full play to the management function of accounting and improve the economic efficiency of the enterprise.
To meet the needs of reform and opening up, we must learn and learn from the useful content of management accounting for our country.
(2) The organization of learning content (the arrangement on study range)
The first section learns the purpose and requirements of management accounting
Section 2 The Formation and Development of Management Accounting
Section 3 Differences and Connections between Management Accounting and Financial Accounting
Section 4 Basic Contents of Management Accounting
Section 5 Organizational Leadership of Accounting Institutions and Financial Institutions
Chapter 2 Cost Habits and Variable Cost Method
(1) The study object and demand
In order to plan and control the economic activities of an enterprise, the entire cost of the enterprise must first be divided according to cost habits.
Divided into two major categories: variable cost and fixed cost, and calculate product cost and inventory cost according to variable cost method,
This is a prerequisite for management accounting to carry out its work. Through the study of this chapter, students will have an in-depth understanding of cost-based habits
The theories and methods of classification and variable cost method will be used to further study "planning and decision accounting" and "controlling
System and performance evaluation accounting" to lay the foundation.
This chapter requires focusing on the following:
1. Costs are classified according to their functions and their advantages and disadvantages.
2. What are cost habits? How are costs classified according to their habits? Variable costs and fixed costs
What is the meaning, nature and habit model of Ben?
3. The concept, type and decomposition method of mixed cost.
4. The profit and loss calculation formula of the function method and the contribution method.
5. What is the variable cost calculation method? What is the difference and connection with the full costing method?
What are the advantages and limitations of the variable cost method? How to correctly apply variable cost in my country's concrete practice
law?
(2) The organization of learning content (the arrangement on study range)
Section 1 Cost and its classification by function
The second section cost classification according to their habits
Section 3 Mixed Cost and Its Decomposition]
Section 4 Variable Cost Method
Section 5 Combined Application of Two Cost Calculation Methods
Chapter 3 Analysis of the book, volume and profit
(1) The study object and demand
Cost habit analysis and variable cost calculation method are for further research on the relationship between cost, business volume and profit.
Page 146
The interdependence relationship laid the theoretical foundation. The purpose of studying this chapter is to master the basic, quantitative and profitable analysis method
The basic principle is to use the cost, volume, and profit analysis method to find the limits of corporate profit (or loss),
The measures for profitability of the industry provide a scientific basis for enterprises to control the present, plan for the future, optimize management, and make correct decisions.
Cost, quantity, and profit analysis is one of the main contents of management accounting "planning and decision accounting". Pass this chapter
The learning focus is to master the following:
1. The basic principles of cost, quantity and profit analysis
2. Calculation method of critical point of profit and loss
3. Calculation of relevant indicators and economic implications
4. Methods of cost, volume and profit analysis
(2) The organization of learning content (the arrangement on study range)
The first section of the summary of the cost, volume and profit analysis
Section 2 Calculation of the critical point of profit and loss
Section 3 Calculation and Application of Related Indicators
Section 4 Cost, Volume and Profit Analysis Case
Chapter 4 Predictive Analysis
(1) The study object and demand
In order to make decisions on major issues in the production, operation and investment of the enterprise, as well as the daily economic
Comprehensive planning of activities must be based on scientific economic forecasts. Through the study of this chapter, students have
Understand the basic principles of predictive analysis, and master the technical methods for predictive analysis of various important economic indicators
law.
To study this chapter, it is required to master the following contents:
1. What are the concepts, basic steps, and basic principles of predictive analysis?
2. The principle and application of commonly used forecasting methods.
3. How to forecast the market, cost and capital demand?
(2) The organization of learning content (the arrangement on study range)
Section 1: Overview of Predictive Analysis
Section 2 Sales (Market) Forecast Analysis
Section 3 Cost Forecast Analysis
Section 4 Forecast and Analysis of Capital Demand
Chapter 5 Short-term Decision Analysis
(1) The study object and demand
Since “the focus of management lies in operation, and the focus of operation lies in decision-making”, whether the decision is correct or not depends on
To the rise and fall of an enterprise. Therefore, the use of accounting and other relevant information for decision-making analysis is
One of the core contents of accounting. Through the study of this chapter, students will understand the basic principles of decision analysis and be familiar with short
Three specialized methods commonly used in periodical decision analysis, and combined with cases to fully grasp product production and product optimal selling prices
Decision analysis process.
To study this chapter, it is required to master the following contents:
1. The concept, classification and basic procedures of decision-making
2. Some "cost" concepts used for decision analysis in management accounting
3. What are the principles of the three specialized methods? What situation does each apply to? What are the decision-making principles?
4. How to make a decision analysis of what to produce, how much to produce and how to produce?
5. How to determine the best selling price of a product?
(2) The organization of learning content (the arrangement on study range)
Page 147
Section 1: Overview of Decision Analysis
Section 2 Some "cost" concepts that need to be considered in decision analysis
Section 3 Analysis and Evaluation of the Most Common Special Methods and Examples of Short-term Decision Analysis
Chapter 6 Long-term Decision Analysis
(1) The study object and demand
Since long-term decision-making is a strategic decision of an enterprise, its correctness is of great importance to the enterprise and the country.
Impact. Therefore, analysis and evaluation must be done carefully. Through the study of this chapter, students will learn
On the basis of the meaning, content and classification of the long-term decision-making, the important factors that should be considered in the long-term decision-making are clarified and combined
The case is familiar with the basic methods commonly used in long-term decision-making.
Study this chapter, focusing on the following:
1. What is a long-term decision? What does the long-term decision include? What are the categories?
2. What is the time value of money, investment risk value, capital cost, cash flow? why
These factors must be considered in long-term decision-making?
3. What are the most commonly used methods for long-term decision-making?
4. How to analyze and evaluate long-term decision-making?
(2) The organization of learning content (the arrangement on study range)
Section 1 The meaning and content of long-term decision-making
Section 2 Several important factors (problems) to be considered for long-term decision-making
Section 3 Analysis and evaluation of basic methods and examples commonly used in long-term decision analysis
Chapter 7 Comprehensive Budget
(1) The study object and demand
In order to achieve and complete the main goals determined by predictive analysis and decision analysis, it is necessary to use
The special method of comprehensive budgeting is used to plan and control all future economic activities of the enterprise, and implement comprehensive budget management.
Rationale. Through the study of this chapter, students can grasp the meaning and function of compiling a comprehensive budget.
Grasp the main content, preparation methods, preparation period and procedures of the comprehensive budget.
To study this chapter, you need to master:
1. What is a comprehensive budget? Why prepare a comprehensive budget?
2. What are the main contents of the comprehensive budget? What are the functions and preparation methods of various budgets?
3. What are flexible budgets and zero-based budgets? What are the characteristics of each? what is the function?
(2) The organization of learning content (the arrangement on study range)
Section 1 Significance and Function of Compiling a Comprehensive Budget
Section 2 The content and preparation method of the comprehensive budget
Section 3 Principles and Application of Flexible Budget and Zero-based Budget
Chapter 8 Responsibility Accounting
(1) The study object and demand
In order for the company’s daily economic activities to follow the goals set by the decision
Use accounting information to strictly control them. The primary problem of control is to establish and implement economic responsibility
System and implement a responsible accounting system. Through the study of this chapter, students will be able to understand the basic concepts of economic responsibility
On the basis, clarify the basic content of responsible accounting, clarify the basic principles of establishing a responsible accounting system, and
The specific methods of performance evaluation and assessment of various responsibility centers.
To study this chapter, it is required to master the following contents:
1. What are the basic contents of the economic responsibility system and responsible accounting? What principles should be followed to establish responsible accounting
then?
Page 148
2. The division of responsibility center, application scope and precautions.
3. What are the key points of evaluation and assessment of various responsibility centers? How to conduct the assessment?
4. Why must the establishment of a responsible accounting system adapt to the organization of the enterprise?
5. What is the internal transfer price? How to make it?
(2) The organization of learning content (the arrangement on study range)
Section 1 Economic Responsibility System and Responsible Accounting
Section 2 Division, Evaluation and Assessment of Responsibility Center
Section 3 Internal Transfer Price
Chapter 9 Cost Control
(1) The study object and demand
Cost control is the core content of control and performance evaluation accounting. In order to improve the economic
The implementation of the accounting system for certificate liability, except for the need to control the daily economic activities of the enterprise according to the responsibility budget
In addition, it is necessary to control the design and trial cost of the product before production. Learn through this chapter to make
On the basis of general understanding of the basic theories of cost control, students can master the ex-ante cost control and daily cost control
The specific methods and techniques of the system.
To study this chapter, it is required to master the following contents:
1. What are the concepts and differences between narrow cost control and general cost control? Which cost control should be followed
These principles?
2. How to control the cost in advance by formulating a cost control system?
3. How to carry out value engineering activities to control the cost in advance?
4. How to carry out daily cost control through the calculation and analysis of cost differences?
5. How should cost differences be handled in accounting?
(2) The organization of learning content (the arrangement on study range)
Section 1: Overview of Cost Control——Formulation of Cost Control System
Section 2 Pre-control of Cost-Carrying out Value Engineering
Section 4 Daily Cost Control-Calculation and Analysis of Cost Differences
Section 5 Accounting Treatment of Cost Differences
4. Requirements for course practice links : none
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Remarks
Chapter One Introduction
4
Extracurricular 6
Chapter 2 Cost Habits and Variable Cost Calculation Method
8
Extracurricular 4
Chapter 3 Analysis of the book, volume and profit
4
Extracurricular 6
Chapter 4 Predictive Analysis
4
Extracurricular 6
Chapter 5 Short-term Decision Analysis
6
Extracurricular 4
Chapter 6 Long-term Decision Analysis
8
Extracurricular 6
Page 149
Chapter 7 Comprehensive Budget
4
Extracurricular 8
Chapter 8 Responsibility Accounting
4
Extracurricular 6
Chapter 9 Cost Control
6
Extracurricular 6
6. Course assessment method
A hundred-point system is adopted, 70% of the exams and 30% of the usual.
7. Formulation Author: Liu Aidong
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Environmental Accounting
Course Number : 160308Z1
Course Title : Environmental Accounting
English name : Environmental Accounting
Class hours and credits : 32/2
(Experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : basic accounting, cost accounting, intermediate financial accounting, financial management, management accounting, etc.
Adapt to major : accounting, financial management
Reference textbook : Research on Environmental Accounting Theory and Practice (First Edition), Xiao Xu, China Financial and Economic Publishing House,
2007
Course introduction :
One of the severe challenges facing the 21st century is the need to undertake the social responsibility of protecting the environment and maintaining ecological balance.
Will be responsible. Environmental accounting takes currency as the main unit of measurement and is based on relevant environmental laws and regulations.
Study the relationship between economic development and the environment, measure and record environmental pollution, environmental prevention, development, and utilization
Cost and expense, an emerging discipline that evaluates environmental performance and the impact of environmental activities on corporate financial results.
It plays an important role in the disclosure of corporate financial accounting information and the construction of environmental management information systems.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
(1) Course nature
It belongs to the basic course of accounting major and is one of the basic qualities that an accountant should possess. Meanwhile also
It is the basis for learning other environmental accounting management and circular economy accounting knowledge and cost management.
(2) Purpose
This course mainly introduces the latest research results in the field of environmental accounting, and expands accounting and management
To the environmental management field closely related to the implementation of sustainable development strategies, so that students can adapt to the future environment
Master the necessary knowledge of accounting.
(3) Task
Through the introduction of current environmental accounting research topics, students’
Page 150
Diqi's research ideas provide a better foundation for the undergraduate thesis.
2. Basic requirements of the course
Understand the background and development process of environmental accounting
Master the basic theoretical structure of environmental accounting
Master the confirmation, measurement and reporting of environmental accounting elements
Master the environmental accounting account system settings
Master environmental accounting information disclosure and analysis
3. The basic content, key points and difficulties of the course
(1) Basic content of the course
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Research background and intention
1.2 Literature review
1.3 Research ideas and framework
Chapter 2 The Basic Framework of Environmental Accounting Theory
1.1 Positioning of environmental accounting
1.2 Definition and functions of environmental accounting
1.3 Basic assumptions and principles of environmental accounting
1.4 Confirmation and measurement of environmental accounting
1.5 The components of environmental accounting
Chapter 3 Accounting of Environmental Costs
1.1 Definition and content of environmental cost
1.2 Confirmation and measurement of environmental costs
1.3 Collection and distribution of environmental costs
Chapter 4 Accounting of Environmental Liabilities
1.1 Definition and content of environmental liabilities
1.2 Recognition and measurement of environmental liabilities
Chapter 5 Accounting of Environmental Assets
1.1 Definition and content of environmental assets
1.2 Confirmation and measurement of environmental assets
1.3 Pollution Discharge Permit Asset Accounting
Chapter 6 Environmental Accounting Account System Setting
1.1 The significance of setting up an environmental accounting account system
1.2 Set up a single environmental accounting accounting mode
1.3 "Center-Satellite" account accounting model
1.4 Enterprise group environmental accounting classification accounting model
Chapter 7 Environmental Accounting Information Disclosure
1.1 The basic content of environmental accounting information disclosure
1.2 Forms of environmental accounting information disclosure
Chapter 8 Case Studies
1.1 ×The basic situation of the enterprise group limited liability company
1.2 ×Analysis and evaluation of current environmental protection business accounting of enterprise groups
Page 151
1.3 According to the environmental accounting theory studied in this subject, make suggestions for improvement to the × enterprise group
(2) Key points and difficulties of the course
1. Key points:
(1) The theoretical structure of environmental accounting, including the conceptual structure, basic content and rationale of environmental accounting
On the framework, etc. Especially in terms of the profound meaning of the concept of environmental accounting and comparative analysis and research with the current situation, requirements
The students focus on mastering.
(2) The basic principles, confirmation and measurement, information disclosure and reporting of corporate environmental accounting. its
In this, students are required to master the confirmation and measurement basis of environmental accounting elements, and in-depth analysis of them and general accounting elements
Confirm the difference with the measurement, and conduct research through the company's green final account report to improve its accounting skills.
(3) The setting of environmental accounting account system, including account system, single set model, "center-satellite" model
Formula and other content. Students are required to master the management ideas, management methods and related cost-benefit analysis.
(4) Disclosure and analysis of environmental accounting information, including the basic content of the disclosure, the form of disclosure, and × company
Analysis and evaluation of the current environmental business accounting of the group. Students are required to focus on mastering.
2. Difficulties:
(1) The compositional principles of environmental accounting theory. It is built on the basis of multidisciplinary research.
Master the basic research premises of the subject.
(2) Confirmation and measurement of environmental accounting. It involves confirmation and measurement in accounting theory and extends to
The multiple measurement of environmental accounting elements requires students to improve accounting recognition and
Application level of measurement theory.
(3) Environmental accounting information disclosure and analysis. It involves the necessary basic knowledge of the environment, and
Management activity process is the main line, integrating environmental management and accounting related parts in management, extending environmental management
The connotation of reasoning.
4. Requirements for course practice
1. If conditions permit, hire experts from environmental protection departments and cleaner production companies to do certain aspects of content
Lectures outside class, or visit related units.
2. Read and discuss the environmental accounting information disclosure reports of relevant companies.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter 1
preface
2
chapter 2
The basic framework of environmental accounting theory
6
Chapter 3
Environmental cost accounting
4
Chapter 4
Accounting of environmental liabilities
4
Chapter 5
Accounting of environmental assets
4
Chapter 6
Environmental accounting account system setting
4
Chapter 7
Environmental accounting information disclosure
4
Chapter 8
case study
4
total
32
6. Course assessment method
closed book test.
Page 152
7. Formulation Author: Xiao Xu
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Asset Evaluation
Course number: 160312Z1
Course Title : Asset Evaluation
English name: Assets Valuation
Class hours and credits : 32 /2 or 48/3
Prerequisite course requirements : Intermediate financial accounting, financial management (or technical economics)
Adapt to majors : Accounting (undergraduate), financial management (undergraduate), finance (undergraduate)
Reference materials:
1. "A Course in Asset Appraisal" (Third Edition). Qiao Zhimin, Song Bin. Renmin University of China Press. 2010
2. "Asset Evaluation Course" (Second Edition). Zhao Lun. Capital University of Economics and Business Press. 2006
3. "A Course in Asset Evaluation" (Second Edition). Zhu Ping, Shanghai University of Finance and Economics Press. 2004
Course introduction :
This course mainly elaborates the theory and ideas of asset evaluation, focusing on the three basic methods of asset evaluation
Law: market method, income method and cost method. And according to the different characteristics of the assets, explore the machinery and equipment, real estate,
The asset evaluation of projects such as intangible assets, current assets, and the entire enterprise is a rigorous theory and clear logic.
And it is a curriculum that is very suitable for the reality of our country.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a professional basic course or elective course for accounting, financial management, finance and other majors. Pass this course
Process learning, so that students can master the basic skills of asset evaluation, and have the flexibility to use resources according to different economic environments.
The ability of the basic theories and methods of production evaluation will lay a good professional foundation for future entrepreneurship and work.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Asset appraisal is the product of social and economic development to a certain stage. Specifically, it refers to a dedicated evaluation machine
Organization and personnel, in accordance with national regulations and relevant materials, according to specific purposes, following applicable principles, and selecting
Appropriate value types, in accordance with legal procedures, use scientific methods to assess and estimate the value of assets
The process of calculation. This course is a practical operation-based course, requiring students to master the skills of asset evaluation
Basic principles and calculation formulas. For this reason, students are required to prepare before class and carefully complete the related chapters after class.
Exercises.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
chapter
Fundamental contents
weight
point
difficult
point
Page 153
Chapter One Introduction
Section 1 Asset Evaluation and Its Characteristics
whether
Section 2 Objects of Asset Evaluation
No no
Section 3 Purpose and Value Type of Asset Appraisal
Yes Yes
Section 4 Assumptions and Principles of Asset Evaluation
whether
Chapter II Basic Methods of Asset Evaluation
Section 1 Market Law
whether
Section 2 Cost Method
Yes Yes
Section Three
Income Approach
whether
Section 4 Comparison and Selection of Asset Evaluation Methods
No no
Chapter III Project Organization and Management
Section One
Project negotiation and business acceptance requirements
no
no
Preliminary preparation for the second section evaluation
No no
The third section of the assessment site organization and management
No no
Fourth quarter
Evaluate estimates and write asset evaluation reports
No no
Chapter 4 Evaluation of Machinery and Equipment
The first section of the basic procedures of machine equipment evaluation
whether
Section 2 Cost Method of Equipment Evaluation
Yes Yes
Section 3 Other Methods of Equipment Evaluation
No no
Chapter 5 Building Evaluation
Section 1 Overview of Building Evaluation
No no
Section 2 Building Evaluation
Yes Yes
Section 3 Evaluation of Construction in Progress
whether
Chapter VI Evaluation of Land Use Rights
Section 1 Land and land price characteristics and evaluation principles
whether
Section 2 Types of Land Price
whether
Section Three
The Income Method of Land Use Right Evaluation
Yes Yes
Section 4 Market Law of Land Use Right Evaluation
whether
Section 5 Cost Method of Land Use Right Evaluation
Yes Yes
Section 6 Residual Method of Land Use Right Evaluation
Yes Yes
Section 7 Route Price Method and Standard Land Price Modification Coefficient Method
Yes Yes
Chapter 7 Evaluation of Intangible Assets
Section One
Intangible assets and their types
No no
Section Two
Influencing factors affecting the appraised value of intangible assets
whether
Section Three
Evaluation procedures for intangible assets
No no
Fourth quarter
Income Method of Intangible Asset Evaluation
Yes Yes
Section 5 Cost Method of Intangible Asset Evaluation
No no
Section VI Patent Right and Non-Patent Technology Evaluation
whether
Section 7 Evaluation of Trademark Rights
whether
Section 8 Evaluation of Goodwill
no Yes
Chapter 8 Current Asset Evaluation
Section One
Characteristics of current asset valuation
No no
Page 154
Section Two
Liquid Assets Evaluation Procedure
No no
Section Three
Evaluation of physical current assets
whether
Fourth quarter
Evaluation of debt and currency liquid assets
whether
Chapter 9 Long-term Investment and Deferred Asset Evaluation
Section One
Features and procedures of long-term investment evaluation
No no
Section 2 Evaluation of Bond Investment
whether
Section 3 Evaluation of Stock Investment
Yes Yes
Section 4 Evaluation of other investments
No no
Section 5 Evaluation of Deferred Assets
No no
Chapter 10 Corporate Value Evaluation
Section 1 Corporate Value Evaluation and Its Characteristics
No no
Section 2 Definition of Enterprise Value Evaluation Scope
No no
Section 3 Income Method of Enterprise Value Evaluation
Yes Yes
Section 4 The Additive Method in Enterprise Value Evaluation
whether
Section 5 Price-to-earnings multiple method in corporate valuation
whether
Section VI Assessment and Review of Liabilities
No no
eleventh
chapter
wealth assessment report
Section 1 Basic Content of Asset Appraisal Report
Yes Yes
Section 2 Asset Evaluation Report System
No no
Section 3 Analysis and Utilization of Asset Appraisal Report
No no
4. Requirements for course practice links: (none)
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
One of the experiments (hours on the computer) Remarks
1
introduction
2
2
Basic methods of asset valuation
4
3
Project organization management
2
4
Evaluation of machinery and equipment
6
5
Building assessment
4
6
Land use right assessment
4
7
Intangible asset evaluation
2
8
Current assets assessment
2
9
Long-term investment and deferred asset evaluation
2
10
Business Valuation
2
11
wealth assessment report
2
6. Curriculum assessment method: adopt centralized examination papers
7. Formulation writer: Si Yong
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Page 155
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Accounting system design
Course ID : 160313Z1
Course Title : Accounting System Design
English name : Design of Accounting System
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : management, basic accounting, intermediate financial accounting, cost accounting
Adaptation major : Accounting major
Reference textbook : (1) Editor-in-Chief Li Fengming. Accounting System Design (Third Edition). Fudan University Press, 2010
⑵ Editor-in-Chief Li Duansheng. Accounting System Design (Fourth Edition). Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press, 2011
Course introduction:
Accounting system is the norm and standard of accounting work, and designing accounting system is a foundation of accounting management
jobs. The scientific design of accounting systems for enterprises and institutions is a requirement for strengthening economic management. Accounting system design as
The sub-discipline of accounting is the comprehensive application and practice of the basic theories and methods of accounting. This lesson
The process helps accounting students to fully understand the basic theories and skills of accounting system design,
In practice, creatively design unique accounting systems.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course mainly describes the general principles and methods of accounting system design. The purpose of teaching is to train students to be able to
Design a set of enterprises and institutions that meets the requirements of the unified accounting system, adapts to their own operating characteristics, and can meet internal requirements.
The ability of the department to manage and control the required accounting system. Therefore, students are required not only to understand the design of the accounting system
Basic theories and basic principles, and must master and be able to use the basic methods and basics of accounting system design
This skill.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the teaching of this course, students should understand the environment of corporate accounting system design (including legal environment
And economic system environment), master the basic principles of corporate accounting system design, and design various corporate accounting
The basic method of the system.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Overview of Accounting System Design
[Key] Theoretical basis of accounting control
[Difficulty] The basic content, principles and procedures of accounting control
1.1 Theoretical basis of accounting control
1.2 Accounting system design
Chapter II Design of General Principles of Accounting System
Page 156
[Key Points] Design of the General Principles of Accounting System
【Difficulty】Accounting system basis and design of accounting rules
2.1 Design of accounting system basis
2.2 Design of accounting organization
2.3 Design of accounting rules
2.4 Design of accounting file management
Chapter III Design of Accounting Subjects
[Key] The basic content of accounting subject design
[Difficulty] Design of accounting subjects
3.1 Accounting subjects and design requirements
3.2 General ledger account design
3.2.1 The design of asset accounting subjects
3.3 Detailed subject design
3.4 Chart of accounts and instructions for use
3.5 Meeting and subject design cases
Chapter 4 Accounting Document Design
[Key] Basic content of accounting document design
[Difficulty] Design of accounting documents
4.1 Accounting documents and design requirements
4.2 Design of original documents
4.3 Design of accounting vouchers
Chapter 5 Accounting Book Design
[Key] The basic content of accounting book design
[Difficulty] The design of journals and ledger books
5.1 Accounting book design
5.2 Design of Journal Book
5.3 Design of ledger
5.4 Design of Reference Book
Chapter VI Design of Financial Accounting Report
[Key points] Financial accounting report preparation procedures and the design of internal and external reports
[Difficulty] Design of external reports and internal management reports
6.1 Overview of Financial Accounting Report
6.2 The design of financial accounting report preparation procedure
6.3 Design of external reports
6.4 Design of internal management report
Chapter Seven Accounting Program Design
[Key] Accounting program design
[Difficulty] The design of accounting program and summary accounting program
7.1 Design of accounting procedures
7.2 Design of the accounting program for each note
7.3 Design of summary bookkeeping accounting program
Chapter 8 Accounting Transaction Processing Program Design
[Key points] Sales and accounts receivable operation design, production and cost accounting system operation design, financing
Page 157
Operation design, investment operation design
[Difficulty] Sales and accounts receivable operation design, financing operation design
8.1 Accounting standards
8.2 Design of sales and accounts receivable
8.3 Design of procurement and accounts payable operations
8.4 Operation design of production and cost accounting system
8.5 Salary assignment design
8.6 Financing operation design
8.7 Fixed asset operation design
8.8 Investment operation design
8.9 Computerized Information Operation Design
Chapter 9 Cost Accounting System Design
[Key] The design of the cost calculation system
[Difficulty] The design of element expenses and cost items, and the distribution of production expenses
9.1 Cost accounting system
9.2 Design of costing basis
9.3 Design of cost calculation system
Chapter Ten Accounting Supervision and Internal Audit Design
[Key points] Internal accounting supervision and internal audit
[Difficulty] Internal audit design
10.1 Internal accounting supervision design
10.2 Design of external accounting supervision
10.3 Internal audit responsibility and scope
10.4 Accounting errors and audit methods
4. Requirements for course practice
This course can set the situation of specific enterprises and institutions, and requires students to combine relevant national financial regulations, accounting
Standards and internal control regulations, design accounting systems that meet the actual needs of enterprises and institutions.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which test
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One Overview of Accounting System Design
2
Chapter II Design of General Principles of Accounting System
2
Chapter III Design of Accounting Subjects
2
Chapter 4 Accounting Document Design
4
Chapter 5 Accounting Book Design
2
Chapter VI Design of Financial Accounting Report
3
Chapter Seven Accounting Program Design
2
Chapter 8 Accounting Transaction Processing Program Design
6
Chapter 9 Cost Accounting System Design
3
chapter Ten
Accounting supervision and internal auditing
meter
2
Page 158
total
32
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of this course is divided into two parts: usual assessment and final assessment. The former is mainly the usual results, including
Attendance, homework, classroom questions, discussion speeches, essays or survey reports; the latter is the final exam. Two
Those who combine the assessment of comprehensive results.
7. Formulation Author: Liu Aiming
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yu Kai
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Accounting Professional English
Course number : 160314Z1
Course Name: Professional English for Accounting
English name : English for Accounting
Class hours and credits: 32/2
(Experimental hours: 0, computer hours in class: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : none
Adaptation major : Accounting major
Reference materials:
Harold
Averkamp,
Financial
Accounting,
http://www.accountingcoach.com
Carl S. Warren, James M. Reeve, Philip E. Fess, Accounting, Twentieth
Edition.
Course introduction :
Professional English is an elective course for senior students majoring in accounting. The teaching materials used in the course are beautiful
Online free original e-books in China, providing basic knowledge, terminology explanations, and a variety of training, fun
Taste exercises, exam questions. Through the study of this course, students are required to master the general English vocabulary and
Basic knowledge of western financial accounting. The course teaches the basic knowledge of American financial accounting in the form of case teaching.
Standard English description of knowledge, basic accounting terminology; complete according to the basic knowledge and terminology learned in each topic
Provide training exercises to consolidate the knowledge learned.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Professional English is an elective course for senior students majoring in accounting. This course is in college English
And on the basis of the basic accounting courses, further training students in financial accounting English listening, speaking, reading
Writing ability, focusing on the professional vocabulary learning of financial accounting English, training students to read the original textbook and reading English
The ability of professional journals, the ability of translating professional documents between English and Chinese.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Page 159
The textbooks used in the course are free original e-books on AOL, which provide basic knowledge, terminology explanations and
And a variety of training, fun exercises, and exam questions. Through the study of this course, students are required to master financial
Proficient general English vocabulary and basic knowledge of western financial accounting, master fast reading and understanding of western financial accounting
The method of calculating professional English literature is effective for the reading, translation, writing of future academic papers and after graduation
Apply English as a tool to lay the foundation for their professional work services.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of this course: standard English explanations, basic basic knowledge of American financial accounting
This accounting terminology; the course is taught in the form of case teaching to reflect realistic operating practices; according to each subject
The basic knowledge and terminology learned in the questions, complete the training exercises provided to consolidate the knowledge learned. Focus of the course
It is the learning of accounting English professional terms. The difficulty is the specific usage and written writing of professional English.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Introduction to Accounting Basics (4 class hours)
Debits and Credits (4 credit hours)
Chart of Accounts and Bookkeeping (4 class hours)
Accounting Equation (4 credit hours)
Accounting Principles and their impact (4 class hours)
Adjusting Entries (4 hours)
Balance Sheet (2 class hours)
Income Statement (2 credit hours)
Cash Flow Statement (2 class hours)
Financial Ratios (2 credit hours)
6. Course assessment method
1. 70% of the closed book exam.
2. 30% of homework, questions and case discussions.
7. Formulation writer: Xiu Zongfeng
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute):　 Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Finance Business Accounting
Course ID : 160315Z1
Course Name : Financial Enterprise Accounting
Page 160
English name : Financial Enterprise Accounting
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : basic accounting, intermediate financial accounting, financial enterprise practice
Applicable majors : accounting majors, finance majors and other economics and management majors
Reference materials:
[1] Li Haibo, Editor-in-Chief Liu Xuehua. Financial Enterprise Accounting-Bank Accounting. Lixin Accounting Press,
2004;
[2] Hu Meiqin, Yu Lihui. Newly compiled financial enterprise accounting practice. East China University of Science and Technology Press,
2002
Course introduction:
Financial corporate accountant is an important accounting professional course, and it is a complete system and continues
It is a developing discipline, and it has a wide range of applications in the music industry. Main content includes banking accounting
Theory and accounting, securities industry accounting theory and accounting, insurance industry accounting theory and accounting, combined with school’s studies
The employment characteristics of students are the focus of the teaching of this course on the accounting theory and accounting of the banking industry.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks:
This course is an elective course for accounting majors and related economics majors. Through learning, students can understand
The composition of financial companies and their respective characteristics, master the banking industry’s payment and settlement business, interbank transactions, foreign currency
Related processing of financial accounting statements, understand the basic business of insurance industry accounting and securities industry accounting
And have a certain understanding of business processes and accounting processes of other companies in the financial industry.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Within 32 hours, learn to complete the basic business process of the banking industry, accounting treatment and basic insurance business
Complete the necessary practical exercises.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
(1) Course content
1 General Accounting of Financial Enterprises
1.1 Financial institution system and financial enterprise accounting
1.2 The characteristics of financial enterprise accounting
1.3 Accounting information quality requirements of financial enterprises
1.4 Accounting elements of financial enterprises and their confirmation and measurement principles
1.5 Financial reports and types of financial companies
2 Basic accounting method
2.1 Accounting subjects
2.2 Accounting method
2.3 Accounting documents
2.4 Accounting books and accounting organization
3 Accounting for deposit and loan business
3.1 Overview of deposit and loan business
3.2 Accounting for deposit business
3.3 Accounting of loan business
Page 161
4 Accounting for payment and settlement business
4.1 Overview of Payment and Settlement Business
4.2 Accounting of bill settlement
4.3 Accounting of various settlement methods
4.4 Accounting of various settlement methods
5 Accounting of transactions between financial institutions
5.1 Overview of transactions with financial institutions
5.2 Accounting for transactions with the central bank
5.3 Accounting of inter-bank transactions
6 Accounting for foreign exchange business
6.1 Overview of foreign exchange business
6.2 Accounting for foreign exchange transactions
6.3 Accounting of international trade settlement business
6.4 Accounting for foreign exchange deposit business
6.5 Accounting for foreign exchange loan business
7 Accounting for securities business
7.1 Overview of Securities Business
7.2 Accounting for securities brokerage business
7.3 Accounting for proprietary securities business
7.5 Accounting for other securities business
8 Accounting for other financial industry businesses
9 Accounting of owners' equity and financial gains and losses
9.1 Accounting of owners' equity
9.2 Accounting of financial gains and losses
9.3 Accounting of profit and profit distribution
10 annual accounts
11.1 Significance and content of annual accounts
11.2 Preparation of annual accounts
11.3 The carry-forward of profit and loss and the compilation and review of final accounts
(2) Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Financial accounting is a branch of accounting. It studies the application of accounting principles to various financial institutions.
A professional accounting for economic activities. This course is mainly based on the "Financial Enterprise
Accounting System", combined with the latest industry management measures and accounting methods of financial enterprises, introduces banks, securities
Business processing and accounting practices of financial enterprises such as securities, insurance and futures. The focus and difficulty lies in the banking industry and
Accounting treatment in the insurance industry.
4. Requirements for course practice links : none
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Remarks
Chapter One
my country's financial enterprise management system and financial enterprises 2
Page 162
Financial Enterprise Accounting Overview
Principles and norms of business accounting
Chapter two
Basic business accounting of the financial industry
Bank accounting documents, financial organization, bookkeeping
Rules and accounting checks, commercial bank accounting
Accounts and accounting statements
2
third chapter
Accounting for deposit and loan business
Opening and cancellation of deposit accounts, deposits and loans
Business accounting, deposit and loan interest accounting and loan
Provision for bad debts
2
Chapter Four
Payment and settlement business accounting
Bank draft, cashier's check, cheque, bank card,
Foreign exchange, collection and acceptance in other places, entrusted collection,
Accounting of commercial drafts
6
chapter Five
Commercial Banking
Inter-bank transactions and national electronic inter-bank transactions,
Inter-city bill exchange, inter-bank exchanges, commercial
Bank and central bank transactions
4
Chapter Six
Foreign currency business accounting
Foreign currency trading, foreign currency settlement, foreign currency deposit and loan
Business accounting
4
Chapter VII
Securities Company Accounting Overview
Special principles of the securities industry, securities companies
The characteristics of accounting
2
chapter eight
Business accounting for other financial industries
Other financial services such as trust investment 3
Chapter nine
Owners' equity and financial gains and losses
Accounting
Owners’ equity, financial gains and losses, and profit
Accounting
2
chapter Ten
Annual accounts
The meaning and content of annual accounts, annual accounts
Preparation work, carry forward and decision of profit and loss
Summary of compilation and review of accounting statements
2
review
3
6. Course assessment method: closed book examination
7. Formulation Author: Li Hongmei
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Human Resource Accounting and Management
Course Number : 160316Z1
Course Name : Human Resources Accounting and Management
English name : Human Resource Accounting and Management
Total credit hours　 : 32 /2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Page 163
Prerequisite course requirements : basic accounting, cost accounting, financial accounting, microeconomics, macroeconomics
learn
Adapt to majors : accounting, financial management, business management
Reference materials :
[1] Human Resource Accounting (2nd Edition). Liu Zhongwen. Capital University of Economics and Business Press, 2006
year
[2] Human Resource Management (3rd Edition). Dong Keyong, edited by Renmin University Press, 2011
Year Edition
Course introduction:
This course comprehensively introduces the basic principles, principles and methods of human resource accounting and management, and systematically explains people
Various functions of human resource accounting and management, and introduce the frontier issues and latest trends of human resource accounting
Shao. Specifically, it mainly includes an overview of human resource accounting and management, basic work of human resource management,
Human resource performance appraisal and evaluation, human resource cost accounting and human resource value accounting, etc.
Content.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is an elective course for accounting majors. The main purpose is to introduce the basic theories of human resource accounting,
Basic methods and basic procedures; and the core content and management methods of human resource management. Task is to pass
The study of this course enables students to understand the importance of human resources and its management in the new economic era;
The necessity and feasibility of human resource accounting, the construction of human resource cost accounting, human resource cost accounting,
The basic framework and calculation methods of human resource value accounting, human resource supply and demand forecasting, and human resources
Basic theories and methods such as resource investment and income analysis. Through this course, master human resource accounting and
The concept of management, the basic theoretical framework of human resource accounting and management; students who master human resource accounting information
Success and disclosure and their specific application in economic decision-making.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Learn the requirements of human resource accounting and management, master the basic theories and human resources of human resource accounting and management
The basic content and management methods of source management; human resource cost accounting, value accounting and human resource investment
The basic methods and skills of benefit analysis, and the ability to use the knowledge learned to solve practical problems, engage in practical work
Made.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
(1) Basic content
Chapter 1 Human Resources Accounting and Management Overview
1.1 The historical development of human resource accounting
1.2 The meaning of human resources
1.3 The basic content of human resource management
Chapter 2 Basic Theory of Human Resource Management
2.1 The importance of human resource management
2.2 The basic modules of human resource management
Page 164
Chapter 3 Human Resource Planning
3.1 The meaning of human resource planning
3.2 The basic content of human resource planning
3.2 Basic method
Chapter 4 Performance Evaluation and Salary Design
4.1 The importance of performance evaluation
4.2 Methods of performance evaluation
4.3 Principles and Methods of Salary Design
Chapter 5 The basic structure of human resource accounting
5.1 Accounting Elements
5.2 Accounting assumptions
5.3 The content of human resource accounting
Chapter 6 Human Resource Cost Accounting System
6.1 The meaning and composition of human resource cost
6.2 The accounting framework of human resource cost accounting
Chapter 7 Human Resource Value Accounting System
7.1 The meaning and composition of human resource value
7.2 Human Resource Value Accounting
Chapter 8 Application of Balanced Scorecard in Human Resources Accounting Management
8.1 Balanced score card and its development
8.2 Basic principles
8.3 Application introduction and case analysis
(2) Key points and difficulties
(1) The basic theories and basic methods of human resource management, among which performance appraisal and salary design are difficult
point;
(2) Confirmation standards and measurement modes of human resource accounting, among which human resource measurement is the difficult point;
(3) Classification and accounting of human resource costs, among which human resource cost accounting is difficult;
(4) Human resource value accounting, in which human resource value measurement model and application are difficult points
(5) The basic principle and specific application of the balanced score card
Four, experimental requirements
no
5. Course hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Remarks
Chapter One Human Resources Accounting and Management Overview
2
no
Chapter Two The Basic Theory of Human Resource Management
2
no
Page 165
Chapter III Human Resources Planning
4
no
Chapter 4 Performance Evaluation and Salary Design
4
no
Chapter V Basic Constitution of Human Resources Accounting
2
no
Chapter VI Human Resource Cost Accounting System
6
no
Chapter 7 Human Resources Value Accounting System
6
no
chapter eight
Balanced score card in human resource accounting management
Application
4
no
examination
2
no
Six, assessment method
Closed book exam (70%) and usual assessment (30%)
7. Formulation Author: Yi Xuan
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Syllabus:
Course ID : 160317Z1
Course Name : Auditing
English name : Auditing
Class hours and credits : 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : basic accounting, financial accounting, cost accounting, advanced accounting, financial management,
Economic Law
Adapt to majors : accounting, financial management, finance
Textbooks and reference books : Editor-in-Chief Liu Minghui, Audit, Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press, 2005
Course description : The course content of "Auditing" includes the basic theories, basic methods and auditing practices of auditing.
This course is a professional core course for accounting majors. In the teaching of this course, focus on auditing theory and give consideration to auditing
Accounting practice, through the teaching of this course, so that students understand the status and role of audit in the market economy conditions,
Understand the nature of auditing, master the basic theories and methods of auditing, and be familiar with auditing procedures.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Auditing" is an important professional course for accounting majors and financial management majors. Through this course,
Understand the basic theoretical knowledge of auditing such as auditing concepts, principles and methods, and master the basic procedures and
Methods to provide theoretical and methodological guidance for audit practice.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the teaching of this course, students are required to master the basic principles, methods and audit procedures of auditing.
Understand the transaction cycle audit process, and be able to apply audit procedures and methods proficiently in audit practice.
Page 166
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of this course includes the basic concepts of auditing, audit organization system, implementation norm system and legal responsibility
Responsibility, audit objectives and scope, audit evidence and audit work papers, audit plans and audit risks, internal
Ministry control, audit sampling technology, transaction cycle audit, audit report, etc. According to the audit objectives, determine
Auditing procedures and collecting sufficient and appropriate audit evidence are the focus of this course.
4. Requirements for course practice links: none
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Remarks
Chapter One Introduction to Audit
4
Chapter II Audit Organization System
2
third chapter
Audit practice standard system and legal responsibility
Ren
6
Chapter 4 Audit Objectives and Audit Scope
4
Chapter 5 Audit Evidence and Audit Work Paper
4
Chapter Six
Audit plan, importance and audit style
risk
4
Chapter 7 Internal Control and Its Testing and Evaluation
6
Chapter 8 Sampling Techniques in Audit Testing
4
Chapter 9 Transaction Cycle Audit
8
Chapter X Audit Report
6
6. Course assessment method
1. 70% of the closed book exam.
2. 30% of homework, questions and case discussions.
7. Formulation Author: Li Shihui
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Tax accounting and practice
Course number: 160318Z1
Course Title: Tax Accounting and Practice
English name: Tax Accounting and Practice
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: This course should be completed before students have completed "Basic Accounting", "Intermediate Financial Accounting", "Cost
After courses such as Accounting, study this course.
Page 167
Adaptation Major: Accounting
Reference textbook: Edited by Gai Di. Tax Accounting. Lixin Accounting Publishing House, 2011
Course introduction:
This course is based on the basic principles of corporate accounting standards, tax law and tax accounting, and is closely related to tax accounting.
Learn the concepts and calculations of value-added tax, consumption tax, business tax, customs duty and income tax
And payment, as well as accounting treatment methods, on this basis, further understand and master the principles and principles of tax planning
Methods and techniques.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
For accounting, if there are no tax issues, the complexity of accounting will be reduced, which shows that tax accounting
Necessary. Therefore, on the premise of mastering the basic theories of taxation, students can master the basics of my country’s main tax categories.
This content, the calculation of tax payable and its accounting treatment methods, and on the basis of financial accounting,
Implement tax laws, perform tax calculations and adjustments, and integrate the accounting treatment results into financial accounting. At the same time, through
Learn the basic principles, techniques and methods of tax planning, and master the methods and skills of tax planning.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Learn the concepts, objects, goals, basic premises, basic principles, characteristics, and taxation systems of tax accounting
Component elements, master the calculation of value-added tax, consumption tax, business tax, tariff, income tax, tax declaration, tax
The payment of tax payment and the corresponding accounting treatment methods, theoretically define the basic meaning, basic principles,
Basic techniques and basic methods, and master tax planning methods and skills from practical operations.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
(1) Basic content of the course
Chapter 1 General
1.1 Overview of Tax Accounting
1.2 Elements of the tax system
Chapter 2 Value Added Tax Accounting
2.1 Overview of VAT
2.2 Calculation and payment of VAT
2.3 Accounting treatment of value-added tax
Chapter 3 Consumption Tax Accounting
3.1 Overview of consumption tax
3.2 Calculation of consumption tax
3.3 Accounting treatment of consumption tax
Chapter 4 Business Tax Accounting
4.1 Overview of business tax
4.2 Calculation of business tax
4.3 Accounting treatment of business tax
Chapter 5 Tariff Accounting
5.1 Overview of tariffs
5.2 Calculation of tariffs
5.3 Accounting treatment of tariffs
Page 168
Chapter 6 Income Tax Accounting
6.1 Corporate Income Tax Accounting
6.2 Personal income tax accounting
Chapter 7 Tax Planning
7.1 Overview of tax planning
7.2 Principles and methods of tax planning
7.3 Tax planning practice
(2) Key points and difficulties of the course
1. Key points: master the contents of value-added tax, consumption tax, business tax, customs duty and income tax, and pay taxes
Calculation and accounting treatment; master the principles and techniques of tax planning and the application of tax planning in practice.
2. Difficulty: calculation of output tax and input tax of general value-added tax-paying enterprises, increase in special business
The accounting treatment of value tax, the accounting treatment of consumption tax, business tax, customs, and the tax impact of income tax accounting
Accounting method and tax payable method, the specific application of tax planning in practice.
4. Requirements for course practice
If conditions permit, hire tax experts to give lectures on tariff reform and tax development trends,
Or go to relevant departments for internships and investigations, and be familiar with taxation knowledge of various businesses.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment (on computer science
Time)
Remarks
Chapter 1 General
4
Chapter 2 Value Added Tax Accounting
12
Chapter 3 Consumption Tax Accounting
2
Chapter 4 Business Tax Accounting
2
Chapter 5 Tariff Accounting
4
Chapter 6 Income Tax Accounting
4
Chapter 7 Tax Planning
4
total
32
6. Course assessment method
closed book test
7. Formulation Author : Jin Youliang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Network accounting
Page 169
Course number: 160319Z1
Course Name : Network Accounting
English name : network accounting
Class hours and credits: 32 /2 (including 8 hours for experiments and 0 for computer hours in class)
Prerequisite course requirements : database technology, financial accounting, accounting management information system
Adapt to major:　 accounting, financial management
Textbooks and reference books : Handouts compiled by Han Qinglan
Course introduction:
With the support of the network environment, the coordination of finance and business is realized. It divides all departments and various businesses
Link effectively so that the financial resources and business activities of the enterprise can be directly linked to maximize savings
Resources. Realize the online management of the enterprise. It enables decision makers to accurately grasp the enterprise no matter where they are
Financial pulse and business activities, which transforms the accounting information provision method into web page data, and enhances
The timeliness of accounting information. Realize the mobile and online office of accounting work. This change is huge in nature
It extends the ability and quality of accounting work, and greatly improves the efficiency and competitiveness of accounting work. Realization meeting
Integration of design work.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Status: "Network Accounting" is an elective course for accounting majors.
Purpose and task: to enable students to understand the future of accounting development, understand the characteristics of network accounting, processing models,
Based on the principle of dynamic accounting under the network environment, the process of collaborative business processing.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The purpose of this course is to enable students to understand the future development of accounting, combine the frontiers of subject development, and grasp
Application dynamics, the system explains the principles of collaborative business, dynamic accounting, remote locations and software configuration. Pass on the machine
Experiments and case analysis deepen students' cognitive ability and problem-solving ability.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The main content of the course includes: accounting mode under the network environment, network computing, collaborative business, remote
Processing, dynamic accounting, online management, centralized management and internal control.
Focus: the overall structure, function and realization of network accounting.
Difficulty: Realize accounting and management in a collaborative business environment.
4. Requirements for course practice
Combining the experimental software and the specific requirements of each experiment (see the experimental instructions), complete the experiment within the specified time
Inspection task.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Remarks
Chapter One The Concept of Network Accounting
2
Chapter 2 The Framework of Network Accounting
2
Page 170
third chapter
Logistics management and verification in a collaborative business environment
Calculate
16
6
Chapter 4 Remote Processing
2
1
Chapter 5 Dynamic Accounting
2
1
6. Course assessment method
The final exam results account for 70%, and the computer lab results account for 30%.
7. Formulation Author: Han Qinglan
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Logistics accounting
Course number: 160320Z1
Course Name: Logistics Accounting
English name: Logistics Accounting
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: This course should be offered after students have completed the main accounting courses, that is, students should first
After completing the courses of "Basic Accounting", "Intermediate Financial Accounting", "Cost Accounting" and other courses, study this course
Cheng.
Adaptation Major: Accounting
Reference textbook: Ding Yuanlin. "Logistics Enterprise Accounting". Lixin Accounting Press, 2009
Course introduction:
This course is guided by corporate accounting standards, closely integrated with the business characteristics of logistics companies,
The sequence of the gold movement, learning the accounting methods of logistics companies, including monetary funds, receivables and prepayments
Payments, inventories, fixed assets, liabilities, income, expenses, profits and transportation, warehousing, handling and distribution industries
And master the preparation of financial reports for logistics enterprises.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Because logistics companies have strong industry characteristics, their accounting has its particularity. Therefore, students are
Under the premise of learning the basic theory, you can understand the accounting characteristics of an industry accounting and have a deeper grasp of these
theory. Students are required to understand the characteristics of the logistics industry and the peculiarities of accounting after completing this course.
Can better integrate theory with practice.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
According to the particularity of logistics enterprise accounting, master the accounting treatment method of logistics enterprise economic business,
And according to the characteristics of the logistics industry, further grasp the specific application of logistics network accounting in other industries.
Page 171
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
(1) Basic content of the course
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Overview of logistics enterprise accounting
1.2 The basic premise and general principles of accounting
1.3 Accounting elements and general principles of logistics companies
Chapter 2 Monetary Funds and Receivable Items
2.1 Accounting of currency funds in transit for logistics companies
2.2 Internal fund settlement business of logistics enterprises
2.3 Provision for bad debts of accounts receivable
Chapter 3 Inventory
3.1 Accounting of raw materials for logistics enterprises
3.2 Accounting of special materials for logistics enterprises
3.3 Valuation at the end of the inventory period
Chapter 4 Accounting for the allocated investment and fixed assets
4.1 Accounting of allocated investment
4.2 Accounting of fixed assets
4.3 Accounting of special reserve materials
Chapter 5 Current Liabilities
5.1 Accounting of payable welfare expenses
5.2 Accounting for construction funds payable
5.3 Accounting of internal transactions
5.4 Accounting of income payment settlement of logistics enterprises
5.5 Accounting of authorized reserve funds
Chapter 6 Income Payment
6.1 Overview of income
6.2 Accounting treatment of income
Chapter 7 Revenue, Costs and Profits
7.1 Accounting for the income of logistics enterprises
7.2 Accounting for storage costs, loading and unloading costs, and distribution costs of logistics companies
7.3 Accounting of period expenses and non-operating expenses
7.4 Formation of profit
7.5 Accounting of other business income and expenditure of logistics enterprises
Chapter 8 Accounting Statements
8.1 Preparation of balance sheet
8.2 Preparation of profit and profit distribution statement
8.3 Preparation of cash flow statement
(2) Key points and difficulties of the course
1. Key points: master the content and characteristics of logistics accounting, account for logistics enterprise accounting, material supply
Accounting for departments, grassroots, special materials, fuels and other materials, accounting for fixed assets, internal transactions
Accounting, revenue accounting, logistics cost accounting and the preparation of financial reports for logistics enterprises.
2. Difficulties: accounting method of logistics enterprise materials, accounting of internal transactions, accounting of income,
Page 172
Cost accounting content and accounting methods, preparation of accounting statements for logistics enterprises.
4. Requirements for course practice
Subject to conditions permitting, hire logistics department experts to carry out accounting reforms and accounting issues related to the logistics department
Seminars on development trends, or go to relevant logistics departments for internships and surveys, familiarize yourself with logistics business and understand its business
The cross-checking relationship between.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Hour of experiment (on computer
Time)
Remarks
Chapter 1 Introduction
4
Chapter 2 Monetary Funds and Receivable Items
4
Chapter 3 Inventory
8
Chapter 4 Appropriation of investment and fixed assets verification
Calculate
4
Chapter 5 Current Liabilities
2
Chapter 6 Income Payment
4
Chapter 7
Revenue, costs and profits
4
Chapter 8 Accounting Statements
2
total
32
6. Course assessment method
closed book test
7. Formulation Author: Jin Youliang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Circular economy and accounting
Course ID : 160321Z1
Course Title: Circular Economy and Accounting
English name : Circular Economy and Accounting
Class hours and credits: 32/2
(Experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : Intermediate financial accounting, management, statistics, operations research, cost accounting, financial management
Management, management accounting, etc.
Adapt to majors : accounting, financial management, business management, business management, etc.
Reference textbook : Environmental Cost Management Theory (First Edition), Lin Wanxiang, Xiao Xu, China Financial and Economic Publishing House,
2006;
Page 173
Environmental Cost Theory (First Edition), Xiao Xu, China Financial and Economic Publishing House, 2002.
Course introduction :
The development of circular economy by enterprises not only requires the support of policies and technical systems, but also a kind of establishment
On the basis of capital flow, and effectively integrate material, energy, time, space, capital and other elements in
A comprehensive economic problem. From a capital perspective, it will be accompanied by the circulation of materials within the enterprise.
The cyclical changes in the value of health, the result of which will have a significant impact on the financial status and operating performance of the enterprise. therefore,
From the perspective of accounting theory, guide students to calculate and analyze the value flow of resources based on the circulation of value,
The implementation of the optimization evaluation of the material flow route of the circular economy has important theoretical and practical significance.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
(1) Course nature
Professional Education Course
(2) Course purpose
To make up for the shortcomings of accounting discipline that did not involve the disclosure of circular economy value stream information in the past
The latest research results in the field of economic value flow introduce the fields closely related to accounting and circular economy.
(3) Course tasks
To enable students to expand the use of accounting theories and methods to provide services to adapt to the development of circular economy, but also
Through the introduction of current accounting research topics to the implementation of sustainable development strategies, students are inspired to ask questions
The research interest of the topic inspires his research ideas and provides a better foundation for the undergraduate thesis.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Understand the background and development history of circular economy
Master the basic theories and methods of material flow and value flow of circular economy
Master material flow cost accounting and analysis
Master the calculation and evaluation of resource flow cost
Master the performance evaluation of circular economy
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
(1) Basic content of the course
Chapter 1 Introduction
The origin of the first section circular economy
Section 2 International Development Trend of Circular Economy
Section 3 Initial Practice of China's Circular Economy
Chapter 2 Material Flow and Value Flow of Circular Economy
Section 1 Material Flow of Circular Economy
Section 2 Value Flow of Circular Economy
Chapter 3 Material Flow Cost Accounting and Analysis
The first section material flow cost accounting principle
A second information data streams the base material costing
The third section of the process of material flow cost accounting
Section 4 Information Disclosure and Utilization of Material Flow Cost
Chapter 4 Calculation and Evaluation of Resource Flow Cost
Page 174
First basic method of calculation cost resource stream
The second section of resource flow cost in the application of small and medium-sized enterprises
The third section of resource flow cost in the application of large enterprises
Chapter V Performance Evaluation of Circular Economy
Section 1 Introduction to Performance Evaluation
Section 2 Effectiveness Evaluation of Environmental Protection Cost
Section 3 Corporate Environmental Performance Evaluation Index System
Section 4 Ecological Efficiency and Environmental Efficiency Evaluation
(2) Key points and difficulties of the course
1. Focus:
(1) The theoretical structure of circular economy, including the conceptual structure, basic content and rationale of circular economy
On the framework, etc. Especially the profound meaning of the concept of circular economy and the comparative analysis and research with the status quo, require
The students focus on mastering.
(2) The basic principles, confirmation and measurement, information disclosure and reporting of corporate circular economy value flow.
Among them, students are required to master the confirmation and measurement basis of accounting elements in circular economy, and in-depth analysis of their differences with general
The difference between accounting elements confirmation and measurement, and research through the company’s sustainability report to improve its accounting
Skills.
(3) Circular economy performance evaluation, including performance evaluation introduction, environmental preservation cost effectiveness evaluation,
Enterprise environmental performance evaluation index system, ecological efficiency and environmental efficiency evaluation, etc. Require students to master its
Management thoughts, management methods and related cost-benefit analysis in
2. difficulty:
(1) The constitutional principles of the circular economy theory. It is built on the basis of multidisciplinary research.
Master the basic research premises of the subject.
(2) Accounting confirmation and measurement of corporate circular economy value flow. It involves confirmation in accounting theory
And measurement, extended to multiple measurement of accounting elements in circular economy, requiring students to understand the theory of circular economy
On the basis of improving the application level of accounting confirmation and measurement theory.
(3) Performance evaluation of circular economy. It involves the necessary basic knowledge of circular economy, and uses material flow,
Value stream is the main line, integrating management and accounting related parts in the performance evaluation of circular economy, extending the cycle
The connotation of environmental economic management.
4. Requirements for course practice
1. Subject to conditions permitting, hire experts from environmental protection departments and cleaner production companies to do certain aspects of content
Lectures outside class, or visit related units.
2. Read and discuss the environmental accounting information disclosure reports of relevant companies.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter 1 Introduction
2
Chapter 2 Material Flow and Value Flow of Circular Economy
6
Chapter 3 Material Flow Cost Accounting and Analysis
4
Chapter 4 Calculation and Evaluation of Resource Flow Cost
4
Chapter V Performance Evaluation of Circular Economy
4
Page 175
6. Course assessment method
You can choose one of the following methods:
1. closed book test.
2. Course paper or survey report.
7. Formulation Author: Xiao Xu
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Government and non-profit organization accounting
Course ID : 160322Z1
Course Title : Government and Non-profit Organization Accounting
English name : Governmental & NGO Accounting
Class hours and credits : 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Adaptation major : Accounting major
Prerequisite courses : basic accounting, finance and taxation, etc.
Reference textbook : Edited by Xu Guomin. Government and Non-profit Organization Accounting (Second Edition). Economic Science Press,
2012
Course introduction :
"Government and Non-Profit Organization Accounting" is conducted by the financial departments, administrative units, and institutions of governments at all levels.
An important tool for economic business management is a professional course for various financial and accounting majors. Pass the course
Teaching can enable students to master the scientific theoretical system of government and non-profit organization accounting and the main internal aspects of accounting practice.
Content, understand the similarities and differences between it and corporate accounting, and improve students’ ability to apply the knowledge they have learned to solve practical problems.
After graduating, engage in relevant practical work to lay a solid foundation.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Government and Non-Profit Organization Accounting" is conducted by the financial departments, administrative units, and institutions of governments at all levels.
An important tool for business management is a professional course for various finance and accounting majors. It is in the hands of students
After mastering basic accounting and financial accounting. Through the teaching of this course, students can master government and non-profit
The scientific theoretical system and the main content of accounting practice of profit organization accounting, understand the similarities and differences between it and corporate accounting,
Improve students' ability to apply the budget accounting knowledge they have learned to solve practical problems. Engage in practical work after graduation
Lay a solid foundation.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
"Government and Non-profit Organization Accounting" includes total fiscal budget accounting, administrative unit accounting and business list
The content of three aspects of position accounting is specifically aimed at the budget implementation process of financial departments and administrative institutions at all levels.
Page 176
The capital income, expenditure, balance and the resulting assets, liabilities and net assets in Study pre
Accounting requires a mastery of the basic theories, basic methods, basic skills, and ability of government and non-profit organization accounting
Use the knowledge learned to solve practical problems and engage in practical work. To this end, students are required to focus on mastering this course and
The similarities and differences of corporate accounting related knowledge.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One The basic concepts of government and non-profit organization accounting
Content: Accounting definition, characteristics and composition system of government and non-profit organizations.
Focus: Accounting characteristics of government and non-profit organizations
Difficulty: the government and non-profit organization accounting system.
Chapter 2 Accounting Standards for Governments and Non-profit Organizations
Content: The basic premise and general principles of government and non-profit organization accounting; government and non-profit organization
Accounting objects and accounting elements of organizational accounting; accounting departments applicable to public institutions, administrative units, and general fiscal accounting
Item.
Focus: Accounting subjects applicable to public institutions, administrative units, and general fiscal accounting
Difficulty: the basic premise and general principles of government and non-profit organization accounting
Chapter III Accounting of Assets
Content: the concept and composition of assets; fiscal monetary funds, temporary payments and receivables, budget allocations
And the concept, management principles and accounting of various assets of financial paid funds.
Focus: Fiscal currency funds, provisional payments and accounts receivable accounting
Difficulty: the concept, management principles and accounting of various assets of budgetary appropriations and financial paid funds
Chapter 4 Accounting of Liabilities
Content: the concept and composition of fiscal liabilities; temporary deposits, dealings with superiors, borrowing money, borrowing money
The concept and accounting of political working capital.
Key points: accounting for temporary deposits, dealings with superiors, borrowing money, and borrowing financial working capital
Difficulty: Accounting with superiors
Chapter 5 Revenue Accounting
Content: Financial revenue is collected from budget revenue, fund allocation revenue, special fund revenue, and financial working capital
It consists of four parts, the classification and content of budget revenue, the division of budget revenue, reporting and storage, each
Accounting procedures and methods of item income.
Focus: Accounting methods of various incomes
Difficulty: accounting procedures for various income
Chapter VI Accounting of Expenses
Content: Financial expenditure consists of budgetary expenditure, fund allocation expenditure, special fund expenditure, and financial working capital
Expenditure consists of four parts, the concept, content and accounting methods of various fiscal expenditures, the classification of budget expenditures,
The accounting basis of budget expenditure and the management of budget expenditure.
Focus: Accounting methods of various fiscal expenditures
Difficulty: accounting methods of various fiscal expenditures
Chapter VII Accounting of Net Assets
Content: Financial net assets include three parts: various balances, budget working capital, and financial working capital fund.
The concept, composition and accounting method of the net assets.
Focus: Accounting methods of various net assets
Difficulty: the composition content and accounting methods of various net assets
Page 177
Chapter 8 General Budget Accounting Statement
Content: The meaning, types, compilation principles and procedures of the general fiscal budget accounting statements, the general budget at all levels
Accounting should do a good job in year-end cleaning, year-end accounting, and year-end accounting to ensure the quality of the annual report.
Method of preparing accounting statements
Focus: The method of compiling and reporting financial statements
Difficulty: the method of compiling and reporting financial statements
Chapter IX Accounting of Administrative Unit Assets
Content: current assets and fixed assets of administrative units.
Focus: The method of asset accounting for administrative units
Difficulty: the similarities and differences between administrative units and corporate asset accounting
Chapter X Accounting of Administrative Unit Liabilities
Contents: the concept and content of the liabilities of the administrative unit, budget payable, temporary deposits, special fiscal accounts payable
The accounting content of the payment.
Key points: the accounting content of the payable budget and temporary deposits
Difficulty: the accounting content of the special financial account payable
Chapter XI Accounting of Administrative Units’ Net Output
Content: the concept, basic nature, content and accounting of net assets of administrative units
method.
Focus: Administrative unit net assets accounting method
Difficulty: Accounting method of net assets of administrative units
Chapter XII Accounting of Administrative Unit Income
Content: The income of administrative units includes three items: allocated funds, income from extra-budgetary funds, and other income.
The concept and content of income, the principles of application and appropriation of funds, management of extra-budgetary income, various income
Accounting method.
Focus: Accounting methods of various incomes
Difficulty: accounting methods of various income
Chapter 13 Accounting of Administrative Unit Expenditure
Content: Administrative unit expenditure includes three items: expenditures, allocated funds, and self-raised capital construction.
The concept, content, management of expenditures, and accounting methods of various expenditures.
Focus: Accounting methods of various expenditures
Difficulty: Expenditure items of administrative units
Chapter 14 Accounting Statements of Administrative Units
Content: The structure and compilation method of the balance sheet, income and expenditure summary and expenditure and expenditure schedule.
Focus: Method of preparing balance sheet
Difficulty: How to compile the summary table of income and expenditure and the detailed table of expenditure and expenditure
Chapter XV Accounting of Institutional Assets
Contents: basic concepts, basic content, basic accounting methods of inventory, concepts, classification, and
Management regulations and accounting content, the concept, classification, pricing method of fixed assets, increase and decrease accounting, none
The concept, characteristics, types, and amortization methods of tangible assets, and the accounting of acquisition, amortization, and transfer of intangible assets.
Focus: the concept, classification, valuation method of fixed assets, accounting for increase and decrease
Difficulty: Accounting for acquisition, amortization, and transfer of intangible assets
Chapter 16 Accounting of Liabilities of Institutions
Content: borrowed money, accounts payable, accounts received in advance, other payables, etc., the basics of various liabilities
Page 178
Concept, basic content and basic accounting method.
Focus: Accounting of accounts payable and receipts in advance
Difficulty: accounting of various payables
Chapter 17 Accounting Time of the Income of Public Institutions
Content: Confirmation and classification of the income of public institutions, financial subsidy income of public institutions, and higher-level subsidy income
Significance, content, and special features of various incomes, income from special funds, business income, operating income,
Levy and accounting methods.
Focus: Accounting for the income of public institutions
Difficulty: Recognition of the income of public institutions
Chapter XVIII Accounting of Public Institution Expenditure
Content: Characteristics of expenditure accounting of public institutions, expenditure classification, expenditure management requirements, various expenditures
Concept, content and accounting method.
Focus: Accounting methods of various expenditures
Difficulty: accounting methods of various expenditures
Chapter XIX Accounting of the Net Assets of Institutions
Content: the concept and content of net assets, the source and classification of net assets, business funds, fixed funds
Content and accounting methods, the concept, content, characteristics, management principles, management methods and accounting methods of dedicated funds,
Accounting for the formation of business balances and operating balances, and the order and accounting of balance distribution.
Focus: Accounting methods for business funds, fixed funds, and special funds
Difficulty: Accounting for business balance, operating balance, and balance distribution
Chapter 20 Accounting Statements of Institutions
Content: The meaning and classification of accounting statements of public institutions, the basic principles of balance sheets and income and expenditure statements
On the basis, basic structure and compilation method.
Focus: The method of preparing accounting statements for institutions
Difficulty: the method of preparing accounting statements for public institutions
4. Requirements for course practice
This course may require students to collect and download historical budgets and final accounts from the websites of the Ministry of Finance and other relevant government agencies.
To understand the income, expenditure and balance of the general fiscal budget accounting, and analyze the accounting statements.
Students can also be required to submit research reports on the relevant content of government and non-profit organization accounting reforms.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Remarks
Chapter One
Accounting for government and non-profit organizations
Narrate
2
Chapter two
General fiscal budget accounting standards
2
third chapter
Accounting of assets
2
Chapter Four
Accounting of liabilities
1
chapter Five
Accounting of income
2
Chapter Six
Accounting of expenditure
2
Chapter VII
Accounting of net assets
1
Page 179
chapter eight
Total budget accounting report
2
Chapter nine
Accounting of administrative unit assets
2
chapter Ten
Accounting for the liabilities of administrative units
1
Chapter XI Accounting of Administrative Units’ Net Assets
1
Chapter XII Accounting of Administrative Unit Income
2
Chapter 13 Accounting of Administrative Unit Expenditure
2
Chapter 14 Accounting Statements of Administrative Units
1
Chapter XV Accounting of Institutional Assets
2
Chapter 16 Accounting of Liabilities of Institutions
1
Chapter 17 Accounting of Net Assets of Institutions
1
Chapter 18 Accounting of the Income of Public Institutions
2
Chapter XIX Accounting of Public Institution Expenditure
2
Chapter 20 Accounting Statements of Institutions
1
total
32
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of this course is divided into two parts: usual assessment and final assessment. The former is mainly the usual results, including
Attendance, homework, classroom questions, discussion speeches, essays or survey reports; the latter is the final exam. Two
Those who combine the assessment of comprehensive results.
7. Formulation Author: Liu Aiming
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yu Kai
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Intermediate Financial Accounting
Course ID : 160323Z1
Course Name : Intermediate Financial Accounting
English name : Intermediate Financial Accounting
Class hours and credits : 64/4 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 16)
Prerequisite course requirements : basic accounting
Adaptation Major: Accounting; Financial Management
Textbooks and reference books :
1. Intermediate Financial Accounting (Second Edition) Liu Dongrong, Lu Jiayou, and Editor-in-Chief Yi Xuan, Tsinghua University Press,
2012
2. Intermediate Financial Accounting (Second Edition), edited by Tang Xiangxi, China Finance and Economic Press, 2010
3. "Intermediate Financial Accounting" (2nd Edition), edited by Wang Hua and Shi Benren, Renmin University of China Press,
year 2010
Course introduction :
Page 180
This course is based on accounting principles and comprehensively explains the basis of accounting confirmation, measurement, recording and reporting.
This theory and method systematically explain the main transactions and events that cause changes in accounting elements under the conditions of continuous business operations
Item’s accounting processing procedures, and strive to unify theoretical and practical aspects, and integrate with other related professional courses
Complement each other and coordinate with each other.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
The Intermediate Financial Accounting Course is a compulsory course for accounting and financial management majors.
It is the main part of the professional knowledge structure and has strong operational skills. The task of this course is to introduce finance
The basic theory and practice of accounting, to train students to have the basic knowledge and basic skills for financial accounting
Ability and operational ability. The purpose of this course is to enable students to master the basic principles and basics of daily accounting
On the basis of this skill, you can be competent for accounting work of enterprise units. Study intermediate financial accounting, especially
We must focus on mastering the basic methods and basic skills of accounting. At the same time, this course is also for further study
This course lays the foundation for accounting, financial management and auditing.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Understand the content of accounting standards and their specific application in financial accounting, and master the basics of financial accounting
This concept, basic principles, basic assumptions and other accounting theoretical structures, using basic methods of financial accounting
Handle general financial accounting issues;
2. Familiar with the accounting regulations related to economic business involved in this course;
3. Master each of the six accounting elements of assets, liabilities, owner's equity, income, expenses, and profits
Confirmation, measurement and accounting of physical content;
4. Proficiency in the six accounting elements of assets, liabilities, owner's equity, income, expenses, and profits
Accounting treatment methods for each specific content;
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of this course: according to the basic characteristics of financial accounting, the purpose of financial accounting is oriented,
Accounting elements are the main line to organize and arrange the content of the course. After explaining the purpose and basic premise of financial accounting,
Based on the accounting elements and general principles, the six accounting elements (assets, liabilities, owners’ equity, income
The specific components of income, expenses and profits) are described separately.
The key and difficult points of this course: This course focuses on enabling students to master the outline of the specific content of the six accounting elements
Concept, characteristics and accounting treatment. The difficulty lies in the daily accounting treatment and period-end valuation of each project, some special economic
Accounting treatment of financial business, etc.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Remarks
Chapter One
General
The objectives and characteristics of financial accounting; accounting basis
This assumption and accounting basis; accounting elements and their determination
4
Page 181
Recognition and measurement attributes; accounting information quality requirements;
Financial accounting standards
Chapter two
monetary assets
(on)
Financial assets and their definition; monetary funds; receivable
Accounts; notes receivable; prepaid accounts and other accounts
Receive items
6
third chapter
monetary assets
(under)
Transactional financial assets; held-to-maturity investment;
Available for sale financial assets
4
Chapter Four
stock
Inventory and its classification; initial measurement of inventory; distribution
Valuation of outgoing inventory; end-of-period valuation of inventory;
Planning cost method and inventory valuation method
6
chapter Five
Long-term equity investment
Capital
Overview of long-term equity investment; long-term equity investment
This law; long-term equity investment equity method; long-term shares
Conversion and disposal of the accounting method of the right investment
6
Chapter Six
Fixed assets
Overview of fixed assets; acquisition and calculation of fixed assets
Price; depreciation of fixed assets; subsequent expenditures of fixed assets
Out; fixed asset disposal
6
Chapter VII
Intangible assets
And other assets
Overview of intangible assets; acquisition and calculation of intangible assets
Price; follow-up expenditure of intangible assets;
Home; other assets
4
chapter eight
Non-monetary
Asset exchange
Determination of non-monetary asset exchange; non-monetary
Recognition and measurement of asset exchange; non-monetary assets
Accounting for property exchange
4
Chapter nine
Asset impairment
Overview of asset impairment; calculation of the recoverable amount of assets
Amount; recognition and measurement of asset impairment losses; capital
Identification and impairment treatment of production group
4
chapter Ten
Liabilities
Liabilities and their classification; current liabilities; non-current negative
Debt; borrowing costs; debt restructuring
6
Chapter Eleven
Owners' equity
Overview of owner’s equity; invested capital and capital
Accumulation
2
Chapter Twelve
income
The definition and characteristics of income; the recognition and calculation of income
Amount; accounting treatment of income
2
Chapter Thirteen
cost
Definition and characteristics of expenses; confirmation and calculation of expenses
Quantity; production cost; period expense
2
Chapter Fourteen
profit
Profit formation; non-operating income and non-operating expenses
Accounting; accounting for income tax expenses
4
each
chapter
do
One
set
the amount
of
class
outer
Learn
question
Chapter 15
Contingencies
Overview of contingent matters; confirmation and calculation of contingent matters
Amount; the specific application of contingent accounting; contingent
Presentation of matters
4
extracurricular
Self-study
4 studies
Time
Page 182
6. Course assessment method
closed book test
7. Formulation writer: Lu Jiayou
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yu Kai
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
CPA system and practice
Course Number : 160324Z1
Course Title: CPA System and Practice
English name : The CPA audit of financial statements
Class hours and credits: 32/2
(Experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: Auditing, Intermediate Financial Accounting
Adaptation major: Accounting (undergraduate), financial management (undergraduate)
Reference materials :
1. Teaching material: "CPA Financial Statement Audit Practice" (Wang Min, Central South University Press, 2010
August)
2. Reference book
(1) Chinese Institute of Certified Public Accountants. Chinese Certified Public Accountant Practice Manual. Dongbei University of Finance and Economics
Publishing House, 2000;
(2) Office of the CPA Examination Committee of the Ministry of Finance. Auditing
Set textbooks). Economic Science Press, 2007;
(3) Geng Jianxin. Auditing (Accounting Series Textbook of Renmin University of China). Published by Renmin University of China
Society, 2000;
(4) Li Ruoshan, editor in chief. Auditing (Accounting Textbook of Xiamen University). Liaoning People’s Publishing House,
1995.
Course introduction:
"The Theory and Practice of Certified Public Accountants" is a special course of accounting in our college, the main content involves preliminary
Business activity stage, risk assessment stage, implementation of further audit procedure stage, business completion stage and other audits
The preparation method and case of the working paper of the procedure, the systematic introduction of the risk-oriented audit method in the financial statement review
The application in the plan. Studying this course is conducive to cultivating students’ perceptual understanding of auditing
Combine audit theory with audit practice.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is an elective course for undergraduate accounting majors and financial management majors. Its learning purpose is to enhance students
The perceptual knowledge of the students can fully and systematically understand the preparation of audit work papers in the practice of certified public accountants
Basic methods, familiar with audit procedures and using audit procedures to obtain audit evidence, and integrate auditing standards and accounting standards
Page 183
The theory is integrated into audit practice to improve students’ practical ability, so as to better adapt to and serve the society.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Problems in audit practice need to be guided by audit theory, and audit theory also needs to be enriched by audit practice.
This course can serve as a bridge and link. Through the study of this course, students should meet the following requirements:
1. Understand the basic concepts and basic content of audit work papers
2. Master the preparation skills of audit work papers in the audit planning stage
3. Master the preparation skills of working papers in the audit practice stage
4. Master the preparation skills of the audit report stage work paper
5. Understand the methods of review and storage of audit work papers
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
chapter
Fundamental contents
main difficulty
Chapter One
General
Section One
The Origin and Development of CPA Audit
no
no
Section Two
Concepts related to the audit practice of CPA financial statements
Yes
no
Section Three
Audit evidence and audit work papers
Yes
Yes
Chapter two
Audit work during preliminary business activities and risk assessment stage
Section One
Initial business activities
Yes
no
Section Two
Understand the audited entity and its environment
Yes
Yes
Section Three
Understand the internal control system
Yes
no
Fourth quarter
Assess the risk of material misstatement
Yes
no
Section Five
Audit plan
Yes
Yes
third chapter
Audit of sales and collection cycles
Section One
Business cycle
Yes
no
Section Two
Control test of sales and collection cycle
Yes
Yes
Section Three
Operating income audit
Yes
Yes
Fourth quarter
Accounts receivable audit
Yes
Yes
Section Five
Audit of notes receivable
Yes
no
Section VI
Audit of advance receipts
Yes
no
Section Seven
Audit of taxes payable
Yes
Yes
Section 8
Business tax and additional audit
Yes
no
Section 9
Sales expense audit
Yes
no
Chapter Four
Procurement and payment cycle audit
Section One
Control test of procurement and payment cycle audit
Yes
Yes
Section Two
Audit of accounts payable and bills payable
Yes
no
Section Three
Fixed asset audit
Yes
no
Fourth quarter
Construction in progress and construction materials audit
Yes
Yes
Section Five
Intangible assets audit
no
no
Section VI
Administrative expense audit
Yes
no
Section Seven
Other account audit
no
no
chapter Five
Production and inventory cycle audit
Page 184
Section One
Control test of production and inventory cycle
Yes
no
Section Two
Inventory audit
Yes
Yes
Section Three
Operating cost audit
Yes
Yes
Chapter Six
Salary and personnel cycle audit
Section One
Control test of salary and personnel cycle
Yes
Yes
Section Two
Audit of employee compensation payable
Yes
no
Chapter VII
Fundraising and investment cycle audit
Section One
Control test of financing and investment cycle
Yes
no
Section Two
Long-term equity investment audit
Yes
no
Section Three
Financial instrument audit
Yes
Yes
Fourth quarter
Investment income audit
Yes
no
Section Five
Short-term loan/long-term loan audit
Yes
no
Section VI
Audit of interest payable and dividend payable
no
no
Section Seven
Other accounts receivable and other accounts payable audit
Yes
no
Section 8
Non-operating income and expenditure audit
no
no
Section 9
Audit of financial expenses and income tax expenses
no
no
Section X
Owner's equity related project audit
no
no
Section 11 Other related project audits
no
no
chapter eight
Monetary fund audit
Section One
Money control test
Yes
no
Section Two
Substantive test of monetary funds
Yes
no
Chapter nine
Audit of other special projects
Section One
Consideration of the violation of laws and regulations by the audited entity
Yes
no
Section Two
Communication between former and previous CPAs
Yes
no
Section Three
Related party and related party transaction audit
no
no
Fourth quarter
Consideration of going concern assumptions
Yes
no
Section Five
Comparative data audit and the first acceptance of the commission to audit the opening balance
meter
Yes
no
Section VI
Audit of contingencies and future events
no
no
Section Seven
Cash flow statement audit
Yes
Yes
chapter Ten
Audit work at the completion stage of the business
Section One
Business completion stage and its work content
no
no
Section Two
Initially determine and summarize the audit
Yes
Yes
Section Three
Preparation of trial balance and audited accounting statements
Yes
no
Fourth quarter
Exchange opinions with customers
Yes
no
Section Five
Review audit work papers
Yes
Yes
Section VI
Statement of Management Authority and Summary of Audit Work
no
no
Section Seven
Audit Report
Yes
Yes
4. Requirements for course practice
no
Page 185
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One Summary
2
Chapter II Initial Business Activities and Risk Assessment Phase Audit
jobs
2
Chapter III Auditing of Sales and Collection Cycle
4
Chapter 4 Audit of Purchase and Payment Cycle
4
Chapter 5 Audit of Production and Inventory Cycle
4
Chapter VI Audit of Salary and Staff Cycle
4
Chapter VII Fundraising and Investment Cycle Audit
2
Chapter 8 Monetary Fund Audit
2
Chapter 9 Audit of Other Special Projects
4
Chapter 10 Audit Work at the Completion Stage
4
6. Course assessment method
Centralized examination using test papers
7. Formulation Writer: Wang Min
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Topics in Accounting
Course Number : 160325Z1
Course Name: Topics in Accounting
English name : Accounting Topics
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: basic accounting, intermediate and advanced financial accounting, cost accounting, management accounting, auditing,
Financial management, etc.
Adaptation Major : Accounting
Reference materials : lecture notes
Course introduction:
The accounting topic is a professional elective course for senior undergraduate students majoring in accounting. The class
The course is based on the completion of other major professional courses of accounting major, through the study of accounting discipline
Study on topics such as new fields and new development trends, broaden students’ professional knowledge and understanding of subject vision, from
And deepen the understanding of the courses learned.
Syllabus:
Page 186
1. The nature, purpose and tasks of the course
"Special Topics in Accounting" is a comprehensive professional course for accounting majors, which aims to guide students to fully understand accounting
The research and development trend of the subject, improve the students’ accounting professional theory and practice awareness level, and establish a high level of accounting
Level knowledge system and advanced thinking methods, train students to comprehensively use the basic knowledge of economic management to analyze and solve
Ability to deal with related accounting issues in business economic activities.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The course is taught in the form of special topics, combined with cases, and deeply discussed theoretical research and application in the field of accounting from multiple angles.
Use problems or frontier issues, focusing on students’ comprehensive quality, self-learning ability, innovation ability and flexible adaptability
to cultivate.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The content of this course mainly includes new trends in the development of accounting theory, research on earnings management of listed companies, management
Frontiers of Accounting Development, Research Progress in Anti-dumping Accounting, Research on Internet Accounting Development, Research on Corporate Strategic Cost Management
Research, fair value accounting research, environmental accounting research topics, etc. The focus of this course is to introduce the frontiers of each topic
Analyze and solve problems along the lines of problems, as well as using accounting theories and methods.
4. Requirements for course practice links: (none)
5. Course teaching hours allocation
speak
content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Remarks
First lecture
Topics on New Trends in the Development of Accounting Theory
4
Second lecture
Research Topics on Earnings Management of Listed Companies
4
Third lecture
Topics on Frontier Development of Management Accounting
4
Fourth lecture
Special topics on anti-dumping accounting research progress
4
Fifth Lecture
Research Topics on Internet Accounting Development
4
Sixth Lecture
Research Topics on Corporate Strategic Cost Management
4
Seventh lecture
Fair value accounting research topics
4
Eighth lecture
Environmental Accounting Research Topics
4
6. Course assessment method
Usually scores account for 30% of the total score (including attendance, questioning, etc.), and the final course paper scores account for the total
70% of performance.
7. Formulation Author: Yu Kai
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Accounting simulation practice outline
(Internship guide included)
Page 187
1. Purpose of internship:
This internship is conducted after completing "Basic Accounting", "Intermediate Financial Accounting" and "Cost Accounting"
An accounting simulation internship. It uses the economic business of a company in December as the internship data, allowing students to
As an enterprise accountant, from the preparation and review of the original vouchers of the enterprise to the preparation and analysis of accounting statements, all
The department operates on the computer to improve students’ accounting level and further consolidate their accounting knowledge.
Enhance perceptual awareness, cultivate students’ hands-on ability and the ability to solve accounting practice problems, and improve computer
Level of operation.
2. Practice location : Accounting Comprehensive Simulation Laboratory.
3. Internship time: two weeks
4. Internship Major: Accounting
5. Internship content and organization:
Internship content: the entire process of accounting. Including the filling and review of original documents to accounting statements
Compilation, all operations are performed on the computer.
Internship Organization:
(1) Classroom explanation: teach students the establishment of user name, the use of function construction and the notes in operation
Matters.
(2) Carrying out simulated internship: the instructor will answer the questions in time when students encounter in the operation,
And according to the students' operation progress, explain the relevant content.
6. Internship process:
The system is divided into seven positions for accounting. Namely monetary funds and receivables, materials, external
Investment and long-term assets, liabilities, product costs, income and profits, and owners’ equity accounting positions. Each post
Every bit has a certain amount of economic business, and the specific operating procedures are as follows:
Students connect to the network → each establish their own user name → initialize the system → register general ledger, subsidiary ledger, daily
Beginning balance of bookkeeping → Accounting treatment of economic business of each accounting post (including filling of original vouchers
And review, preparation of accounting vouchers, registration of journals and subsidiary ledgers) → account remittance for each accounting post
General → Compile the summary table of the entire enterprise account (that is, to add the accounts of each post) → Compile the general ledger → Test
Calculate the balance (including the balance of the beginning balance, current period, and ending balance) → prepare accounting statements (including
Preparation of balance sheet, income statement, profit distribution statement, and cash flow statement).
7. Internship requirements:
Make correct accounting entries for economic transactions
Familiar with the account registration method
Master the preparation method of accounting statements
8. Internship report: (more than 2000 words)
Through this simulation internship, what knowledge has been consolidated? What knowledge has been mastered that has not been mastered? Among them
What is the biggest gain?
What is your evaluation of this simulation internship software? Any suggestions?
Page 188
Nine, practice steps
(1) Create a user name
1. Login: When starting the workstation, enter the specified K1 to the user name in the dialog box that appears
Kn registered name, and the registered name cannot be repeated. Do not enter the password for it, click the OK button to enter the network.
2. Start the accounting simulation system. That is, double-click the "Accounting Simulation Practice" icon. Enter your own use
Account name, password, and "OK" to practice.
It’s worth noting that due to the limited number of computers, some need two people to share a computer, so the other
When students board the computer, they should enter their own board number (Kn)
3. System initialization.
(1) The system must be initialized the first time on the computer, click the "system maintenance" button to enter the initial
Change the interface, press Enter, enter the name, do not enter the password and password, and then press OK (Note: only do it once),
After the initialization is complete, click "Return".
(2) Use the mouse to click the "Simulation Teaching" menu item, enter the name again, and then perform the actual operation after "OK".
Learn. (In this way, you do not need to enter your name again for this internship)
Note: If the number used has already been used by the previous classmates, the original name must be cancelled. The operation is as follows: select "System
System maintenance",
Enter the original name, initialize it, and after returning, click the "Simulation Teaching" menu item to delete the original last name
First name, enter your own name (if the original student has entered the password, you can press CTRL+F11 to query).
(2) Precautions in operation
1. For operations on the page frame, first click the page title.
2. When browsing the original voucher, you can use the scroll bar and the mouse to align the page header, left and right when it is in a "cross" shape
You can also turn the page by opening and so on.
3. Use the mouse to browse the buttons on each page and follow the instructions on the operation steps.
4. When performing operations, be sure, otherwise the computer will not give points.
5. If the same business transaction involves two or more similar certificates, when entering the next certificate,
The voucher number must be modified.
6. If there are more than two vouchers in one voucher number, you should modify the page number when registering the detailed account.
It should be noted that each one needs to be registered.
7. When registering the subsidiary accounts, the subheadings should be matched properly.
10. Matters needing attention for internship:
1. After students enter the network, each person should create their own user name, which must not be the same as other students.
In order to avoid conflicts.
2. Students must initialize the system before the simulation practice.
3. The computer of this system will give automatic scoring, so each student must operate and complete independently
Internship Content.
4. Because the system is online, students are not allowed to bring floppy disks to the computer without authorization, nor do they need to bring floppy disks.
Illegal operations can cause global paralysis.
5. Students must log out of the system before logging off the Internet to avoid destroying the data they have operated on
11. Assessment method
Computer automatically calculates grades and students write internship reports
Page 189
12. Drafting Author: Jin Youliang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Li Shihui
Approver (dean of teaching school) : Gong Yanping
Insurance company operation and management
Course number: 160501Z1
Course Name: Insurance Company Operation and Management
English name: Insurance Companies Management
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: Macroeconomics, Microeconomics, Management, Insurance
Adapt to major: Finance major
Reference materials:
Textbook:
"Insurance Company Management" (Second Edition), Wei Qiaoqin, Shanghai University of Finance and Economics Press, 2007.8
reference book:
"Insurance Enterprise Management" (Third Edition), D. Farny (Dieter Farny), Economic Science Press,
2002.11
Course introduction:
This course starts from the perspective of management, using the combination of theory and practice, quantitative and qualitative
Method, comprehensively and systematically analyze and study the whole process of insurance company operation and management, including marketing, underwriting,
Theoretical knowledge and practical operation experience in claims settlement, investment, financial accounting, and solvency calculation. Simultaneously
Draw lessons from the advanced management technology of developed countries in the insurance industry, explore the laws of the management of insurance companies in my country,
Principles and methods.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Insurance Company Operation and Management" as a professional elective course for finance majors, mainly in professional
The second half of the training starts, so that students can understand the whole process of the operation of insurance companies, and for the future
The work of the Secretary lays the foundation.
The teaching purpose and task of this course is to enable students to master the insurance management and management comprehensively and systematically.
The entire system, specifically the business management of insurance companies, the investment management of insurance companies, and the risks of insurance companies
Management, etc., in order to have a certain theoretical understanding of the work of the insurance industry.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the teaching of this course, students are required to master the following basic theories and knowledge:
1. Understand the basic development of my country's insurance market;
2. Understand the overall process of insurance company business management;
Page 190
3. Understand the investment management process of an insurance company.
4. Understand the risk management process of an insurance company.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
This course consists of four parts:
Part 1: The basic development of my country's insurance market, including market size, market entities and supervision
Mode etc.
The second part: the business management of the insurance company. Including marketing, underwriting, claims and other processes.
The third part: the investment management of insurance companies. Including sources of insurance funds, investment principles and risk control,
And the country’s regulatory policies.
Part Four: Risk Management of Insurance Company. Including the financial management and solvency management of insurance companies,
And use the data disclosed by listed companies to analyze their management status.
The focus of the course is to understand and grasp the business management, investment management and risk management of insurance companies
Wait. The difficulty of the course lies in the understanding and calculation of insurance solvency management.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
Teaching content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
1
The development of China's insurance market
2
2
Introduction to Insurance Company Management
2
3
Insurance market management
2
Case discussion included
4
Insurance marketing management
2
Case discussion included
5
Insurance underwriting management
2
Case discussion included
6
Insurance claims management
2
Case discussion included
7
Insurance investment management
2
Case discussion included
8
Insurance company financial management
4
9
Insurance company solvency management
4
10
Listed insurance company finance and reimbursement
Capability analysis
4
Exercises and discussion
11
Insurance company reinsurance management
2
12
Evaluation of the operating performance of insurance companies
2
Review and answer questions
2
6. Course assessment method
Closed-book examination, usually 30% of the score, 70% of the test paper.
7. Formulation Author: Sheng Hu
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 191
Insurance practice
Course number: 160502Z1
Course Name: Insurance Practice
English name: Insurance
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: Macroeconomics, Microeconomics, Management
Adapt to major: financial management, international economics and trade, business administration
Reference materials:
Textbook:
"Finance" (Second Edition), Wei Hualin, Lin Baoqing, Higher Education Press, 2007.12
Reference materials:
"Insurance Operation Management" Jiang Shengzhong, Zhu Xiangjun, China Finance Press, 2006
Course introduction:
This course mainly introduces the rights and obligations of the subjects of insurance contracts, the basic principles to be followed, and the
Cognizance of the main insurance products in the market, including property loss insurance, life insurance, liability insurance and credit insurance
Etc.; and analyze the structural characteristics of the insurance market and factors affecting supply and demand to lay a theoretical foundation for insurance marketing;
Finally, it introduces the operating mechanism of social insurance and the current status of social insurance in my country. This course focuses on insurance knowledge
The popularity of insurance products and understanding of the significance of insurance products for business operations and life risk management.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a course that combines the theoretical knowledge learned by the students with the practice of business management.
Professional elective courses in international economics and trade, business administration and financial management, so that students can
He has a certain understanding of insurance in his work and study.
The teaching purpose and task of the course are students’ understanding of the basic theories of insurance and insurance contracts
The definition of the rights and obligations of related parties is based on the understanding of insurance products and the effective use of insurance,
Manage the risks in work and life.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the teaching of this course, students are required to master the following basic theories and knowledge:
1. Master the basic theories and knowledge of insurance, including the relationship between insurance and risk, the nature of insurance and
Functions, related rights and obligations in insurance contracts, basic principles of insurance, etc.
2. Based on product categories, understand the types of insurance business, including property insurance, liability insurance,
Life insurance and reinsurance, and the operating model of insurance products.
3. Understand the structure and operation of the insurance market and the characteristics of the insurance market.
4. Understand the operating rules of the social insurance system and the specific operating mode of my country's social insurance.
Page 192
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
This course consists of four parts:
The first part: the basic theory and basic knowledge of insurance. This part includes risk theory, insurance and
The relationship between risks, the nature, functions and functions of insurance, the rights and obligations of insurance contracts and related parties, and insurance
The basic principles of insurance and its application in insurance business practices.
Part Two: Insurance Practice. Including the nature and characteristics of property insurance, personal insurance and liability insurance,
The main terms of the contract, underwriting and operation, etc.
The third part: insurance market. This part includes the structure and operation of the insurance market,
Market demand and supply factors, insurance marketing, etc.
Part 4: The operation of the social insurance system. Including the operating rules of the social insurance system, and my country’s
The specific operating mode of social insurance.
The focus of the course lies in the mastery of the rights and obligations of the subjects of insurance contracts,
The meaning of work risk management, etc.
The difficulty of the course lies in the understanding of the four principles of insurance and their application in practice.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
Teaching content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
1
Risk management and insurance
2
2
insurance contract
6
Case discussion included
3
Insurance principle
6
Case discussion included
4
Property damage insurance
4
Case discussion included
5
Credit insurance, liability insurance
2
Case discussion included
6
Life Insurance
4
Case discussion included
7
Insurance market
2
8
Social insurance
4
Case discussion included
Review and answer questions
2
6. Course assessment method
Closed-book examination, usually 30% of the score, 70% of the test paper.
7. Formulation Author: Sheng Hu
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Insurance
Page 193
Course number: 160503Z1
Course Name: Insurance
English name: Insurance
Class hours and credits: 40/2.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: Macroeconomics, Microeconomics
Adapt to major: Finance major
Reference materials:
Textbook:
"Finance" (Second Edition), Wei Hualin, Lin Baoqing, Higher Education Press, 2007.12
reference book:
"Principles of Risk Management and Insurance", George E. Ruida, Renmin University Press, 2010.12
Course introduction:
This course mainly introduces the basic theories and basic knowledge of insurance; the basic knowledge of actuarial insurance;
Products are classified as standards to introduce the specific operation mode of insurance; and to supervise the operation of the insurance market and the insurance industry.
Manage to discuss; finally introduce the operating mechanism of social insurance and the current status of social insurance in my country. It is a
A course that combines basic insurance theory with insurance practice.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Insurance" is one of the six main courses in the financial disciplines of colleges and universities.
In the backbone position. It is not only the majors of finance (including finance, insurance, financial engineering)
The major compulsory courses are also optional courses for business management, trade economics, finance, and taxation. This course is in
Based on the systematic introduction of basic insurance theory and basic knowledge, a comprehensive introduction to insurance practice is also made.
This course is not only a professional basic theoretical course, but also an applied course.
The teaching purpose and task of this course is to enable students to grasp the theoretical aspects of insurance more comprehensively and systematically.
System and have a general understanding of insurance products. At the same time, the composition of the insurance market and the methods of insurance supervision
There is also a certain understanding of the formula, for the follow-up study of financial professional courses, as well as future careers in finance, insurance, investment
A good theoretical foundation has been laid for capital, trade economy and business management.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the teaching of this course, students are required to master the following basic theories and knowledge:
1. Master the basic theories and knowledge of insurance, including the relationship between insurance and risk, the nature of insurance and
Functions, related rights and obligations in insurance contracts, basic principles of insurance, etc.
2. Understand the basic actuarial knowledge of property insurance and life insurance.
3. Based on product categories, understand the types of insurance business, including property insurance, liability insurance,
Life insurance and reinsurance, and the operating model of insurance products.
4. Understand the structure and operation of the insurance market and the characteristics of the insurance market.
5. Master insurance supervision theory, understand different insurance supervision models, and the functions and functions of insurance supervision
effect.
6. Understand the operating rules of the social insurance system and the specific operating mode of my country's social insurance.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
This course consists of six parts:
Page 194
The first part: the basic theory and basic knowledge of insurance. This part includes risk theory, insurance and
The relationship between risks, the nature, functions and functions of insurance, the rights and obligations of insurance contracts and related parties, and insurance
The basic principles of insurance and its application in insurance business practices.
The second part: insurance actuarial. Understand the product price setting and liability preparation of property insurance and life insurance
Basic methods such as gold calculation.
Part Three: Insurance Practice. Including property insurance, personal insurance, liability insurance and reinsurance business
Nature, characteristics, main terms of the contract, underwriting and operation, etc.
Part Four: Insurance Market. This part includes the structure and operation of the insurance market,
Market demand and supply factors, insurance marketing, etc.
Part Five: Insurance Supervision. This part includes insurance supervision theory, comparison of different supervision methods,
Insurance supervision system, content and role of insurance supervision.
Part VI: The operation of the social insurance system. Including the operating rules of the social insurance system, and my country’s
The specific operating mode of social insurance.
The focus of the course is on the mastery of the rights and obligations of insurance contract subjects, and the four basic principles of insurance
Use of insurance products, and understanding of insurance products.
The difficulty of the course lies in the understanding and application of insurance actuarial knowledge.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
Teaching content
Class hours
on board
Class hours
Remarks
1
Risk management and insurance, the nature and function of insurance
4
2
insurance contract
6
Case discussion included
3
Insurance principle
7
Case discussion included
4
Basic knowledge of actuarial insurance
3
With exercises
5
Property damage insurance
4
Case discussion included
6
Credit insurance, liability insurance
2
Case discussion included
7
Life Insurance
4
Case discussion included
8
Reinsurance
2
9
Insurance market
2
10
Insurance supervision
2
11
Social insurance
2
Case discussion included
Review and answer questions
2
6. Course assessment method
Closed-book examination, usually 30% of the score, 70% of the test paper.
7. Formulation Author: Sheng Hu
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 195
Comparative financial system
Course ID : 160504Z1
Course Title : Comparative Financial System
English name: Comparing Financial Systems
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : Money and Banking, Finance
Adaptation major : finance, public finance, economics and other economic related majors
Reference materials:
[1], Comparing Financial Systems, Allen, Franklin and Gale,
Douglas, The MIT press, 2000.
[2], "Comparison of Financial Systems in Various Countries", edited by Bai Qinxian and others, China Finance Press, second edition, 2008
[3], "Comparative Research on Banking Supervision", edited by Shi Jiliang, China Finance Press, 2005
[4], "Basel Comparative Financial System in the Financial Crisis", edited by Yang Shenggang, Peking University Press,
2005
[5], "Challenges and Improvements of the New Capital Accord", Ba Shusong, etc., 2010
Course introduction:
This course is to use comparative methods to systemize the financial systems of different countries and different types of country groups
Intensive, multi-angle and multi-level research, revealing that under different social and historical conditions, different economic and financial environments
The operating mechanism in the environment and the general and special laws of evolution and development. Make students understand the financial system
More analytically related theoretical foundations and basic analytical frameworks, understand the development of different theoretical schools, and be familiar with the world
The emergence and evolution of the financial system of countries (including developed countries, developing countries and emerging market countries),
Understand the main content and basic characteristics of the financial systems of various countries in the world, and master the operating methods of the financial systems of various countries in the world
law. This course implements bilingual teaching.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is an elective course for undergraduate majors in finance, and can also be used as undergraduate majors in other economics majors
Elective courses for students.
The task of this course is to enable students to understand the relevant theoretical foundations and basics of comparative analysis of financial systems
Analyze the framework, understand the development of different theoretical schools, and be familiar with countries in the world (including developed countries and developing countries)
Countries and emerging market countries) the emergence and evolution of financial systems, and understand the main
Contents and basic characteristics, master the operating methods of financial systems in countries around the world.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course implements bilingual teaching. Students are required to learn about the financial system through the course
Analysis of the relevant theoretical basis and basic analysis framework, understand the development of different theoretical schools; understand the financial
The formation and development of the financial system and the main content of the financial system; familiar with the central bank systems of various countries (regions);
Page 196
Grasp the commercial banking system of various countries (regions); understand the non-bank financial institutions and countries (regions)
District) policy-oriented financial institutions; master the operation methods of the financial markets of various countries (regions); be familiar with each country (region)
Financial supervision system.
This course is highly theoretical and requires students to actively think based on the relevant knowledge previously learned
And analysis, it is necessary to learn the content of the textbook, but also actively participate in class discussions and essay writing.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of this course includes: the formation and development of the world financial system; the finance of major developed countries
Institutional system; financial system of newly industrialized countries; financial system of transitional countries; developed and developing countries
The country’s central bank system and commercial bank system; summary and comparison of policies between developed and developing countries
Financial institutions and non-bank financial institutions; compare the financial regulatory systems of developed and developing countries
Degree; the topic of financial crisis; the topic of financial reform and financial liberalization.
Key points and difficulties: the relevant theoretical basis and basic analysis framework for comparative analysis of financial systems; the world
The formation and development of financial systems in various countries and the main content of their financial systems; the development direction of financial reforms.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
This course has a total of 32 hours. The specific hours are allocated as follows:
6. Course assessment method
chapter
content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Prepare
Note
1
The history of the financial system
4
2
Financial institutions in major developed countries (Britain, US, Japan, France,
Germany)
4
3
Financial systems of newly industrialized countries (regions) (South Korea, Taiwan
Regions, Singapore, Hong Kong); financial systems in transitional countries (Russia
Russia, Eastern European countries)
4
4
Financial crisis topics
4
5
Central banking systems and commercial banks in developed and developing countries
Line system
4
6
Policy financial institutions and non-banks in developed and developing countries
Banking financial institution system
4
7
Financial supervision system in developed and developing countries
4
8
Topics on Financial Reform and Financial Liberalization
4
Page 197
The assessment of this course is divided into two parts: usual assessment (50%) and final assessment (50%). The former is mainly
Normal grades, including attendance, homework, classroom questions, discussion and speech, and essay writing; the latter is the final proposition
examination. Combine the two to assess the comprehensive performance.
7. Author: Wei Ping
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
finance
Course number: 160505Z1
Course Title: Finance
English name: Public Finance
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: Macroeconomics
Adapt to major: Finance
Reference materials:
[1] "Finance" (7th edition), Chen Gong, Renmin University Press, 2012.2
[2] "Finance" (US) by Harvey S. Rosen, translated by Guo Qingwang and Zhao Zhiyun, Renmin University of China
Publishing House, 2009.9
Course introduction:
This course starts from the relationship between the government and the market, demonstrates the fiscal concept and fiscal functions; explains fiscal expenditures
Basic theory, analyze the scale and structure of fiscal expenditure, and divide fiscal expenditure items into purchase expenditure and transfer
The classification of sexual expenditure is analyzed separately; the scale and structure of fiscal revenue are analyzed, and the tax
Principles, taxation system, taxation reform and taxation management; explain the principle of national debt, the scale of national debt and the national debt market;
Explain the national budget related issues, focusing on the budget management system; explain the fiscal balance, fiscal deficit, and
Fiscal policy; analyze fiscal issues in an open economy, including international taxes, tariffs, export tax rebates, and foreign debt
And fiscal and monetary policies under an open economy.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Finance is one of the core courses and degree courses of the finance major. Students who pass this course are required
Grasp the basic theories and viewpoints of finance, have a deep understanding of the essence of finance, and grasp the one that reflects the operation of finance
General laws, comprehensively understand the basic issues of finance, understand the adjustment mechanism of fiscal
The development trend of contemporary finance, so as to scientifically use finance to serve my country's market economy.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course is theoretically strong, and it also has a certain quantitative analysis and practicality. It requires students to be related to what they have learned before
On the basis of knowledge, understand the relationship between public product theory and finance, understand fiscal expenditure and fiscal revenue
Page 198
Basic theories, learn to analyze the scale and structure of fiscal revenue and expenditure, and systematically learn and master the financial
The mechanism and methods of macroeconomic adjustment by political means, actively participate in class discussions and paper writing.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Introduction to Finance
Section 1 Government and Market
Market: Market efficiency and market failure. Government intervention and government failure. Public goods and public needs.
Section 2 Financial Concept
Finance and its basic characteristics. Reform and construction of my country's fiscal system. About Finance and "Public Finance"
Section 3 Financial Functions
Study the thinking and significance of fiscal functions. Resource allocation function. Income distribution function. Economic stability and development
Development functions.
Chapter II Basic Theory of Financial Expenditure
Section 1 Provision of Public Goods
Public production, public pricing, provision, production and pricing of public goods.
Section 2 Analysis and Evaluation of the Benefits of Financial Expenditure
The efficiency of fiscal expenditures. Analysis of financial expenditure benefits. Evaluation method and evaluation system of financial expenditure benefit.
Section 3 Legalization, Democratization and Financial Supervision of Finance
Introduction to Public Choice Theory. Democratization and legalization of my country's fiscal decision-making. Financial supervision.
Chapter III Financial Expenditure Scale and Structure Analysis
Section 1 Classification of Financial Expenditure
Classified by financial function. Classified by object of expenditure. Classified by economic nature—purchasing expenditure and transferability
expenditure. Classified according to the time when the expenditure produces benefits-current expenditure and capital expenditure. International classification method.
Section 2 Analysis of Financial Expenditure Scale
A measure of the scale of fiscal activity. The general trend of the development and change of the scale of fiscal expenditure. my country's fiscal expenditure
The particularity of scale development and change. Analysis of factors affecting the scale of fiscal expenditure.
Section 3 Analysis of Financial Expenditure Structure
Government functions and fiscal expenditure structure. The economic nature of fiscal expenditure and the structure of fiscal expenditure. Adjustment and optimization
The basic idea of ​​optimizing the structure of fiscal expenditure.
Chapter 4 Social Consumption Expenditure—One of Purchase Expenditure
Section 1 The Nature of Social Consumption Expenditure
The attributes of social consumer expenditure. Social consumption expenditure items.
Section 2 Administrative Management Expenses and National Defense Expenses
The attributes of administrative expenses and defense expenses. Administrative fees. Defense expenses.
Section Three Expenditures
The economic nature of expenditure on liberal arts, sciences and health. Education expenditure. Scientific research expenses. Health expenditure.
Chapter V Financial Investment Expenditure-Purchasing Expenditure Part 2
Section 1 General Analysis of Financial Investment Expenditure
Investment and economic development. The characteristics, scope and standards of government (financial) investment.
Section 2 Infrastructure Investment
The nature of infrastructure investment. Provision of infrastructure investment.
The third section of the fiscal expenditure for the "three"
Promote the construction of a new socialist countryside and coordinate urban and rural social and economic development. Financial investment in "agriculture, rural areas and farmers"
Page 199
Features. The state's investment policy for "agriculture, rural areas and farmers" has increased financial investment.
Section 4 Financial Investment and Financing System
The concept, significance and characteristics of fiscal investment and financing. my country's policy banks. my country's policy banking system
Issues to be further improved.
Chapter VI Transferable Expenditure
Section 1 Social Security Expenditure
Social security expenditure and social security system. Social security systems in countries around the world. my country's social security
system. Goals and problems for the further improvement of my country's social security system.
Section 2 Financial Subsidies
The nature and classification of financial subsidies. The mechanism of the economic impact of fiscal subsidies and the effect of fiscal subsidies. Financial supplement
Post further improvement measures.
Section Three Tax Expenditure
The concept and classification of tax expenditures. The form of tax expenditure. Budget control of tax expenditures.
Chapter VII Financial Revenue Scale and Composition Analysis
Section 1 Financial Revenue Classification
Classified by fiscal revenue. Classified by source of fiscal revenue. Classified according to the management method of fiscal funds.
Section 2 Financial Revenue (Within Budget) Scale Analysis
The main economic factors that affect the scale of fiscal revenue. An Empirical Study on the Change Trend of my country's Financial Revenue
analysis. Analysis and judgment of the current level of fiscal revenue in my country.
Section 3 The composition of fiscal revenue and analysis of extra-budgetary funds
The composition of my country's fiscal revenue. Taxes and fees. Analysis of extra-budgetary funds.
Chapter 8 Principles of Taxation
The first section what is tax
The basic attributes of taxation. The "three characteristics" characteristics of taxation.
Section 2 Tax Terms and Tax Classification
Tax term. Tax classification.
Section 3 Principles of Taxation
Fairness and efficiency in taxation. Fair tax principles and efficiency tax principles. Tax neutral issues.
Section 4 The Transfer and Destination of Tax Burden
Overview of tax burden shifting and fate. The general law of tax burden shifting and fate. The tax burden of our country is passed on.
Chapter 9 Economic Effects of Taxation
The first section of the mechanism of taxation economic effect
The income effect of taxation. The substitution effect of taxation.
Section 2 Economic Impact of Taxation
The impact of taxes on labor supply. The impact of taxes on household savings. The impact of taxes on personal income distribution
ring.
Section 3 Taxation and Economic Development
The theoretical view of the relationship between taxation and economic development. The tax perspective of the supply school. Evaluation of tax reduction policies.
Chapter 10 Taxation System
Section 1 The historical evolution of my country's taxation system
Overview of the tax system. The historical evolution of my country's tax system.
Section 2 Commodity Taxation
Features and functions of commodity taxation. The main types of taxes currently levied on commodities in my country.
Page 200
Section 3 Income Taxation
Features and functions of income taxation. The main types of income tax in my country.
Section 4 Resource Taxation and Property Taxation
The general characteristics of resource taxation and property taxation. Tax types for resource taxation and property taxation.
Chapter 11 Taxation System and Taxation Management System Reform
Section 1 Industrial and Commercial Tax System Reform
The main theory of industrial and commercial tax reform. The practice of tax system reform in various countries in the world. The current situation of my country's industrial and commercial tax system
And the direction of further reforms.
Section 2 Rural Tax Reform
The content of rural tax and fee reform. Abolish agricultural taxes nationwide. Promote comprehensive rural reforms and maintain
The results of rural tax and fee reform.
Section 3 Taxation Management System and Its Reform
The concept, classification and function of tax administration. The multi-angle is the theory of tax management. China's tax management system
Practice.
Chapter 12 Treasury Bonds and the Treasury Bond Market
Section 1 Principles of National Debt
National debt and its type, structure and burden. Elements of the national debt system.
Section 2 Economic Effect and Policy Function of National Debt
Ricardo's equivalence theorem and its empirical research. The economic effect of national debt. The policy function of national debt.
Section 3 Analysis of my country's debt burden rate and debt dependence
Analysis of national debt burden rate. Analysis of national debt dependence.
Section 4 Treasury Bond Market and Its Functions
Treasury bond market. The function of the national debt market. The current situation and further improvement of my country's national debt market.
Section 5 Direct hidden debts and contingent debts of the government
An overview of direct hidden debt and contingent debt. We must attach great importance to it and actively adopt preventive and defusing measures.
Chapter 13 National Budget and Budget Management System
Section One State Budget Overview
The meaning of the national budget and its categories. National budget level and budget management authority. National budget principles.
Section 2 Reform and Construction of my country's Budget Management System
Promote financial management in accordance with the law and strengthen budget management and supervision. Prepare departmental budgets. Government procurement system. Treasury
Centralized collection and payment system. "Two lines of revenue and expenditure" management. Reform of government revenue and expenditure classification.
Section 3 Overview of Budget Management System
Budget management system and its types. Introduction to the hierarchical tax-sharing budget management system.
Section 4 Reform of China's Tax Sharing System
The guiding ideology of the tax sharing system reform. The main content of the tax-sharing system reform. The transfer payment system of the tax-sharing system.
The operation of the tax-sharing system and its further improvement.
Chapter 14 Fiscal Balance and Fiscal Deficit
Section 1: Overview of Fiscal Balance and Fiscal Deficit
How to understand fiscal balance. The measurement caliber and classification of fiscal deficit (or fiscal balance).
Section 2 The fiscal deficit and the balance of total supply and demand in society
The relationship between fiscal deficit and social balance. The way of making up the fiscal deficit and its economic effect.
The third section uses the IS-LM model to analyze the economic effects of fiscal deficits
Use the IS-LM model to analyze the general principles of the economic effects of fiscal deficits. Different financing mechanisms
Page 201
Analysis of economic effects. Analysis of the "crowding out" effect of fiscal deficits. Analysis of the long-term effects of fiscal deficits.
Chapter 15 Fiscal Policy
Section 1: Overview of Fiscal Policy
What is fiscal policy. The main body of fiscal policy. Fiscal policy goals. Fiscal policy tools. Fiscal policy
type.
Section 2 The Transmission and Effect of Fiscal Policy
Transmission mechanism of fiscal policy. The effect of fiscal policy. Fiscal policy multiplier.
Section 3 Coordination of Fiscal Policy and Monetary Policy
Introduction to monetary policy. The necessity of coordination between fiscal policy and monetary policy. Different policy combinations.
The relative effectiveness of fiscal policy and monetary policy. The time lag between fiscal policy and monetary policy.
Section 4 my country's fiscal policy practice and experience
Fiscal policy before 1997. Active fiscal policy. Prudent fiscal policy. my country’s fiscal policy
The basic experience of implementation and policy transformation.
Chapter 16 Financial Issues in an Open Economy
5. International taxation
The connotation of international taxation. Tax jurisdiction and its overlap or conflict. International double taxation and its deduction. tax
Spare. International tax treaties.
6. Tariff
The concept of tariffs. Protect the tariff. Preferential trade arrangements. The World Trade Organization (WTO) and my country's Tariff
Policy coordination.
7. Export tax rebate
What is the export tax rebate system. my country’s export tax rebate system.
8. External debt
The function of foreign debt. Types and structure of foreign debt. The burden and limit of foreign debt. External debt management.
9. Fiscal-monetary policy coordination under an open economy
The relative effectiveness of fiscal-monetary policies under a floating exchange rate system. Fiscal-currency under fixed exchange rate system
Relative effectiveness of policies. Internal and external balance is coordinated with fiscal-monetary policy.
The focus of the course is on the scale and structure of fiscal expenditure and revenue, fiscal budget management system, fiscal
The impact of policies on the macro economy, and the coordinated use of fiscal and monetary policies.
The difficulty lies in using the macroeconomic IS-LM model to analyze the impact of fiscal policy on the macroeconomic
mechanism.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
Teaching content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Prepare
Note
1
Introduction to Finance
3
2, 3
Basic theory, scale and structure of fiscal expenditure
5
4, 5
Purchase expenditure
8
6
Transfer expenditure
2
Classwork and discussion
2
Page 202
7
Financial revenue scale and structure
2
8, 9
Taxation Principles and Economic Effects of Taxation
6
10, 11
Taxation system and its reform
2
12
Treasury bonds and the Treasury bond market
2
Classwork and discussion
2
13
National budget and international budget management system
2
Classwork and discussion
2
14, 15
Fiscal balance and fiscal policy
4
16
Financial problems in an open economy
2
Classwork and discussion
2
review
2
6. Course assessment method
The overall assessment score of this course is composed of two parts:
First: Normal grades account for 30%, of which class attendance accounts for 10%, and homework and answering class questions account for 10%.
Class discussion accounts for 10%.
Second: The final closed-book exam accounts for 70%.
7. Formulation Author: Wu Qingtian
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Introduction to Finance
Course number: 160506Z1
Course Title: Introduction to Finance
English name: Introduction of Public Finance
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: Western Economics
Adapt to major: financial management, accounting, etc.
Reference materials:
[1] "Finance" (7th edition), Chen Gong, Renmin University Press, 2012.2
[2] "Finance" (US) by Harvey S. Rosen, translated by Guo Qingwang and Zhao Zhiyun, Renmin University of China
Publishing House 2009.9
Course introduction:
This course mainly explains the basic theories and basic knowledge of finance, and absorbs the most
The new results reflect the latest policies and practices of fiscal and taxation reforms. Taking social public needs as the theoretical basis to be effective
The main line of meeting the public needs of the society, with the background of my country’s socialist market economy, teaching the basic principles of finance
Page 203
Theories, fiscal functions, fiscal expenditure, fiscal revenue, fiscal management system and fiscal macro-control theory, etc.
The teaching content of the module.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Introduction to Finance" is a professional basic course for economic management majors. Through the teaching and learning of this course,
Students master the basic concepts, basic knowledge and basic methods of finance, and deeply understand the role of finance in the national economy
Important position and role, grasp the regularity of fiscal distribution; understand and grasp the basic category of fiscal distribution and its
Basic policy measures related to it; familiar with fiscal system such as finance, taxation, budget, national debt, investment, subsidy, etc.
Degree of basic business knowledge and skills. On this basis, pay attention to integrating theory with practice, analyze and summarize relevant actual financial
In particular, we must pay close attention to the changes in my country's fiscal and taxation reform and development policies.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course is theoretically strong, and it also has a certain quantitative analysis and practicality. It requires students to be related to what they have learned before
On the basis of knowledge, understand the relationship between public product theory and finance, understand fiscal expenditure and fiscal revenue
Basic theories, learn to analyze the scale and structure of fiscal revenue and expenditure, and systematically learn and master the financial
The mechanism and methods of macroeconomic adjustment by political means, actively participate in class discussions and paper writing.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Introduction to Finance
Section 1 Government and Market
Market: Market efficiency and market failure. Government intervention and government failure. Public goods and public needs.
Section 2 Financial Concept
Finance and its basic characteristics. Reform and construction of my country's fiscal system. Regarding finance and "public finance".
Section 3 Financial Functions
Study the thinking and significance of fiscal functions. Resource allocation function. Income distribution function. Economic stability and development
Development functions.
Chapter 2 Financial Expenditure Scale and Structure Analysis
Section 1 Classification of Financial Expenditure
Classified by financial function. Classified by object of expenditure. Classified by economic nature—purchasing expenditure and transferability
expenditure. Classified according to the time when the expenditure produces benefits-current expenditure and capital expenditure. International classification method.
Section 2 Analysis of Financial Expenditure Scale
A measure of the scale of fiscal activity. The general trend of the development and change of the scale of fiscal expenditure. my country's fiscal expenditure
The particularity of scale development and change. Analysis of factors affecting the scale of fiscal expenditure.
Section 3 Analysis of Financial Expenditure Structure
Government functions and fiscal expenditure structure. The economic nature of fiscal expenditure and the structure of fiscal expenditure. Adjustment and optimization
The basic idea of ​​optimizing the structure of fiscal expenditure.
Chapter Three Social Consumption Expenditure—One of the Purchasing Expenditure
Section 1 The Nature of Social Consumption Expenditure
The attributes of social consumer expenditure. Social consumption expenditure items.
Section 2 Administrative Management Expenses and National Defense Expenses
The attributes of administrative expenses and defense expenses. Administrative fees. Defense expenses.
Section Three Expenditures on Arts, Science and Health
Page 204
The economic nature of expenditure on liberal arts, sciences and health. Education expenditure. Scientific research expenses. Health expenditure.
Chapter IV Financial Investment Expenditure-Purchasing Expenditure Part 2
Section 1 General Analysis of Financial Investment Expenditure
Investment and economic development. The characteristics, scope and standards of government (financial) investment.
Section 2 Infrastructure Investment
The nature of infrastructure investment. Provision of infrastructure investment.
The third section of the fiscal expenditure for the "three"
Promote the construction of a new socialist countryside and coordinate urban and rural social and economic development. Financial investment in "agriculture, rural areas and farmers"
Features. The state's investment policy for "agriculture, rural areas and farmers" has increased financial investment.
Section 4 Financial Investment and Financing System
The concept, significance and characteristics of fiscal investment and financing. my country's policy banks. my country's policy banking system
Issues to be further improved.
Chapter V Transfer Expenses
Section 1 Social Security Expenditure
Social security expenditure and social security system. Social security systems in countries around the world. my country's social security
system. Goals and problems for the further improvement of my country's social security system.
Section 2 Financial Subsidies
The nature and classification of financial subsidies. The mechanism of the economic impact of fiscal subsidies and the effect of fiscal subsidies. Financial supplement
Post further improvement measures.
Section Three Tax Expenditure
The concept and classification of tax expenditures. The form of tax expenditure. Budget control of tax expenditures.
Chapter VI Financial Revenue Scale and Composition Analysis
Section 1 Financial Revenue Classification
Classified by fiscal revenue. Classified by source of fiscal revenue. Classified according to the management method of fiscal funds.
Section 2 Financial Revenue (Within Budget) Scale Analysis
The main economic factors that affect the scale of fiscal revenue. An Empirical Study on the Change Trend of my country's Financial Revenue
analysis. Analysis and judgment of the current level of fiscal revenue in my country.
Section 3 The composition of fiscal revenue and analysis of extra-budgetary funds
The composition of my country's fiscal revenue. Taxes and fees. Analysis of extra-budgetary funds.
Chapter 7 Tax Principles
The first section what is tax
The basic attributes of taxation. The "three characteristics" characteristics of taxation.
Section 2 Tax Terms and Tax Classification
Tax term. Tax classification.
Section 3 Principles of Taxation
Fairness and efficiency in taxation. Fair tax principles and efficiency tax principles. Tax neutral issues.
Section 4 The Transfer and Destination of Tax Burden
Overview of tax burden shifting and fate. The general law of tax burden shifting and fate. The tax burden of our country is passed on.
Chapter 8 Taxation System
Section 1 The historical evolution of my country's taxation system
Overview of the tax system. The historical evolution of my country's tax system.
Section 2 Commodity Taxation
Features and functions of commodity taxation. The main types of taxes currently levied on commodities in my country.
Page 205
Section 3 Income Taxation
Features and functions of income taxation. The main types of income tax in my country.
Section 4 Resource Taxation and Property Taxation
The general characteristics of resource taxation and property taxation. Tax types for resource taxation and property taxation.
Chapter 9 National Debt and the National Debt System
Section 1 Principles of National Debt
National debt and its type, structure and burden. Elements of the national debt system.
Section 2 Economic Effect and Policy Function of National Debt
Ricardo's equivalence theorem and its empirical research. The economic effect of national debt. The policy function of national debt.
Section 3 Burden and Limits of National Debt
Analysis of national debt burden rate. Analysis of national debt dependence.
Section 4 National Debt System
National debt issuance and circulation. The function of the national debt market. The current situation and further improvement of my country's national debt market.
Chapter X State Budget and Budget Management System
Section One State Budget Overview
The meaning of the national budget and its categories. National budget level and budget management authority. National budget principles.
Section 2 Reform and Construction of my country's Budget Management System
Promote financial management in accordance with the law and strengthen budget management and supervision. Prepare departmental budgets. Government procurement system. Treasury
Centralized collection and payment system. "Two lines of revenue and expenditure" management. Reform of government revenue and expenditure classification.
Section 3 Overview of Budget Management System
Budget management system and its types. Introduction to the hierarchical tax-sharing budget management system.
Section 4 Reform of China's Tax Sharing System
The guiding ideology of the tax sharing system reform. The main content of the tax-sharing system reform. The transfer payment system of the tax-sharing system.
The operation of the tax-sharing system and its further improvement.
Chapter 11 Fiscal Balance and Fiscal Policy
Section 1: Overview of Fiscal Balance and Fiscal Deficit
How to understand fiscal balance. The measurement caliber and classification of fiscal deficit (or fiscal balance). Fiscal deficit
The compensation method and its economic effect.
Section 2 Fiscal Policy
What is fiscal policy. The main body of fiscal policy. Fiscal policy goals. Fiscal policy tools. Fiscal policy
The type of fiscal policy, the transmission mechanism of fiscal policy, the effect of fiscal policy, the coordination of fiscal policy and monetary policy.
The focus of the course is on the function of finance, the scale and structure of fiscal expenditure and revenue, and the management of fiscal budget.
The impact of the management system and fiscal policy on the macro economy.
The difficulty lies in the optimization of fiscal revenue and expenditure structure, and the coordinated use of fiscal policy and monetary policy.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
Teaching content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Go to school
Time)
Remarks
1
Introduction to Finance
3
Page 206
2
Scale and structure of fiscal expenditure
2
3, 4
Purchase expenditure
4
5
Transfer expenditure
2
Classwork and discussion
2
6
Financial revenue scale and structure
2
7
Principles of Taxation
2
8
tax policy
4
9
National debt and the national debt system
2
Classwork and discussion
2
10
National budget and international budget management
system
3
11
Fiscal balance and fiscal policy
2
review
2
6. Course assessment method
The overall assessment score of this course is composed of two parts:
First: Normal grades account for 50%, of which class attendance accounts for 20%, homework and answering class questions account for 15%.
Class discussions accounted for 15%.
Second: The final closed-book exam accounts for 50%.
7. Formulation Author: Wu Qingtian
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Real Estate Investment
Course number: 160507Z1
Course Name: Real Estate Investment
English name: real estate investment
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: none
Adaptation Major: Undergraduate majors (except English majors)
Reference materials:
[1]Principles (13 th ), Walt Huber, Educational Textbook Company, 2011
[2]Practice(6 th ) Walt Huber, Arlette Lyons, Educational Textbook
Company, 2011
[3]Law (7 th ), Walt Huber and Kim Tyler, Educational Textbook Company,
2011
[4] "Related Knowledge of Real Estate Brokers" (Fifth Edition), edited by Chai Qiang, China Construction Industry Press,
2011
Page 207
[5] "Theories and Methods of Real Estate Appraisal" (Fifth Edition), edited by Chai Qiang, China Construction Industry Press,
2011
Course introduction :
This course first introduces the basic knowledge of the real estate market; then introduces the housing closely related to real estate investment
Real estate transaction, property registration, property management and real estate taxation practical knowledge and relevant domestic and foreign policies; final details
Detailed introduction to real estate investment finance, real estate investment value and risk theory knowledge, and real estate investment insurance industry
Service.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is designed as a special professional course for finance majors. It is used in the role of real estate in the national economy
In a modern society where the proportion of real estate assets in personal financial assets has increased significantly, students will be familiar with
It is necessary to master the real estate market and the relevant knowledge and practical processes of real estate investment. Hope for setting up this course
Students can use the knowledge they have learned to find a real estate-related job that suits them and manage well after they enter the society
Own real estate financial assets.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
32 hours in class, students are required to be familiar with the entire process of real estate transactions and be able to use the financial and
Other relevant knowledge analyzes and predicts the price of the real estate market, and masters real estate investment risks and risk control.
Familiar with laws and policies related to real estate taxation and property management.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of the course includes three aspects:
4. Basic knowledge of the real estate market;
5. Real estate transactions, property rights registration, property management and real estate taxation closely related to real estate investment
Business knowledge and relevant domestic and foreign policies;
3. Real estate investment finance, real estate investment value and risk theory knowledge and real estate investment insurance industry
Service.
Key points and difficulties : real estate price theory and risk control of real estate investment, real estate financing costs,
Ways and benefits.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
Teaching content
Class hours
Which experiment
(School hours)
Remarks
The first part of the basic knowledge of the real estate market
8
the second part
Real estate price theory
6
Case discussion included
Part Three: Risk Control of Real Estate Investment
6
Case discussion included
Part Four Real Estate Financing Costs and Methods
6
Case discussion included
the fifth part
Real estate investment income
4
Case discussion included
Page 208
Review and answer questions
2
6. Course assessment method
Class attendance rate 20%, classroom teaching discussion and participation, and other learning attitudes, mastery and
Use the knowledge and ability to investigate 30%, and write related papers 50%.
7. Formulation writer: Luo Xiaoling
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Personal finance
Course number: 160508Z1
Course Name: Personal Finance
English name: Personal Finance
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: money and banking, advanced investment, financial management
Adapt to majors: Finance, Business Administration, Financial Management, Investment
Reference materials:
Textbook:
"Personal Finance" Editor-in-Chief Liu Wei, Shanghai University of Finance and Economics, February 2009
Bibliography :
[1] "Personal Finance" (U.S.) Madura, translated by Wang Student et al., July 2011
[2] "Personal Financial Planning" Chai Xiaowu, editor-in-chief Meng Xiaosu, November 2009
Course introduction:
Personal finance is a new course with strong professionalism and great market demand. This course is mainly divided into two parts,
The first part introduces the basic content of personal financial management and the development of personal financial
Financial foundation, basic process, risk management plan, investment plan, financing plan and retirement and inheritance plan six
This broad aspect explains the basic principles and details of personal finance.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Personal financial management formulates procedures for rational use of financial resources and achieving personal life goals. With the financial market
With the opening up of financial services, the competition in financial services has become increasingly fierce. Commercial banks have begun to face adjustments in business strategies and focus on individual
The development of business, therefore, the financial system has an urgent need for the training of senior financial planners. We educate
The institution will undertake the training of financial planners.
Through the teaching of personal financial management courses, students can have a more comprehensive understanding of the basic theories and basics of personal financial management
Knowledge, be familiar with various current wealth management products in my country, and master the content, nature, risks and
Profitability status; clarify the legal responsibilities that should be assumed in the process of personal financial management. Integrate theory with practice to improve students’ theory
Page 209
The ability to understand, use and operate personal financial management tools and analyze and solve practical problems in financial management.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
In the teaching of personal finance, the basic concepts, basic theories and basic knowledge of personal finance are taught systematically
Beyond knowledge, from the shallower to the deeper, from the outside to the inside, starting from the actual situation, put forward and analyze the theoretical questions of various financial products
Questions and operational skills to improve students’ independent understanding of problems in personal financial management scenarios, analysis of problems and solutions
Ability to solve problems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Basic content of the course:
This course covers the financial foundation, basic process, risk management plan, investment plan, financing of personal finance
The basic principles and content of personal finance are explained in six aspects including planning and retirement and estate planning.
Key points and difficulties of the course:
A classified introduction to the financial basis of personal financial management and major personal financial planning.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
Teaching content
Class hours
Which experiment
(School hours)
Remarks
1
Personal Finance Overview
2
2
The financial foundation of personal finance
2
3
The basic process of personal finance
4
4
Risk management and insurance plans
2
5
Stock investment plan
4
6
Bond Investment Plan
2
7
Securities Investment Fund Investment Plan
4
8
Real estate investment plan
2
9, 10
Foreign exchange investment plan, savings plan
2
11
Consumer Credit and Personal Credit Management Plan
4
12
Retirement and estate planning
2
review
2
6. Course assessment method
Attendance (10%) + classroom discussion (20%) + closed book exam (70%)
7. Formulation writer: Jinfaqi
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 210
Corporate Finance
Course ID : 160509Z1
Course Name : Corporate Finance
English name : Corporate Finance
Class hours and credits : 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites : Microeconomics, Macroeconomics, Econometrics, Money and Banking, Financial Markets
learn
Adapt to major : Finance
Reference materials :
[1] "Corporate Finance" (the 8th edition of the original book), Ross (Ross.SA), Westfield
(Westerfield.RW), Jaffe.JF, Wu Shinong, Machinery Industry Press, 2009-05
publishing
[2] "Corporate Finance" (2nd Edition), Zhu Ye, Fudan University Press, published on September 2011
[3] "Corporate Finance" Zhang Jinsheng, Tsinghua University Press, published on July 2010
[4] "Corporate Finance" Zhu Ye, Peking University Press, published in January 2009
[5] "Corporate Finance" Zhang Chun, Renmin University Press, 2008-08 published
[6] "Corporate Finance" Chen Qiwei, China Finance Press, published in 2003-01
Course introduction :
"Corporate Finance" is one of the three pillars of microfinance, which focuses on "the first law of corporate finance"
Line, emphasizing the microfinance foundation of corporate finance. "Corporate Finance" is based on modern company theory,
The status quo of the company’s operations and the internationalization of the financial market has been reviewed from a micro perspective on the company’s various financial
A more comprehensive explanation, including present value and value assessment, risk and return, investment evaluation methods and investment decisions,
Investment risk adjustment and real options, long-term financing decisions, capital structure theory, dividend policy, etc., and also involve
Financial behavior in related fields such as financial statement analysis, financial planning, corporate governance, mergers and acquisitions. "Corporate Finance"
It is one of the frontier topics in finance research.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Corporate Finance" (Corporate Finance) is a backbone of the financial professional curriculum system
The core courses are positioned at the basic theories, concepts and principles of corporate financial analysis, namely corporate financial decision-making goals,
The company's investment decisions, financing decisions and dividend policies, and through their optimization to achieve the greatest value of the company
Theories, methods and processes of transformation.
This course is offered in the fourth semester as a professional core course, focusing on company analysis, indicator application and acquisition
Mergers and other aspects highlight the applied characteristics of finance majors at the undergraduate level. Through teaching, the aim is to make students master
Grasp the company’s main methods of diagnosis and evaluation, capital operation, and financial
Lay a solid foundation for work.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the study of "Corporate Finance", students will be able to understand and master the theory of capital structure, stocks
Basic theories of corporate finance such as profit policy theory, modern company theory, and present value theory, and learn how to invest
The optimization of decision-making, financing decision-making and asset management to maximize the value of the company or maximize the wealth of shareholders
Page 211
Mark. Pay attention to case teaching in order to make up for the shortcomings of the curriculum that is too theoretical; grasp the trend of case analysis in the world
The characteristics of integration change the single-angle analysis method of case teaching, and combine the real cases in reality with the latest
The incident is introduced into the teaching; based on this, the (debate) interaction between students is added to the classroom to deepen learning
Students’ grasp and understanding of knowledge. Through the "debating between students and students, teachers and students"
Interactive teaching to change the "cracking duck" teaching method and stimulate students' interest in "Corporate Finance"
And the enthusiasm for active learning; based on the analysis of typical global cases in the actual economy,
The "arguing" discussion that appears in the form of a discussion is closely linked to the real economy, and through practical skills training,
The ability and purpose of students to analyze and solve problems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Basic content of this course
This course is divided into five knowledge modules with a total of 15 chapters.
The first knowledge module is value assessment. The value of all financial activities of the company depends on whether it
Has created the company value and whether the company value added has been realized. Therefore, the company needs to use certain means to
Estimate and appraise the value of the company and the value added of the company. This part of the content revolves around this theme. Introduction
The financial goals of corporate enterprises, the ways to increase the company’s value, and the existing in the process of achieving corporate goals
Conflict; introducing that the value of a financial asset is the discount value of the cash inflow that it can generate in the future validity period.
Important principles, and gives the rule of net present value used to judge whether to achieve value appreciation; introduce the single asset
Risks and returns try to theoretically explain the economic meaning of the discount rate.
The second knowledge module is investment decision-making. Investment decision is an important financial activity of the company, "Corporate Finance"
Usually it only involves project (or physical) investment decision-making. As for the relevant content of securities investment decision-making,
The main content of Information Science or Financial Market Studies. Due to the irreversible nature of physical investment,
Investors are required to make a capital budget before investing, depending on whether the net present value is greater than zero. Introduction is confirmed
The main static capital budgeting methods under the two situations of uncertainty and uncertainty; introduce the actual
Real option, real option value and impact on capital budget.
The third knowledge module is financing decision-making. Financing decisions are not just to solve the company’s funding gap, but also
Contribute to the realization of the company's value added. Therefore, to tie in with this theme, the main long-term financing
Tools and derivatives; introduce the main capital structure theories, and explain the company’s financing decision-making behavior theoretically,
To highlight the complexity of financing decisions; introduction is not only a company’s earnings distribution policy, but also a special financing decision
To explain the dividend policy formulation process and its impact on value creation.
The fourth knowledge module is financial planning and working capital management. In order to make the company's investment decision, financing
The decision is in line with the company's overall development strategy, and the company must systematically state the methods to achieve financial goals. To cope with
The company operates normally. While investing in fixed assets, the company needs to consider operating capital (operating capital).
capital) investment and raising. To this end, the method of financial planning is introduced; the investment of working capital and
Raising; introduced liquid asset management.
The fifth knowledge module covers some special problems of corporate finance. Corporate governance, mergers and acquisitions, bankruptcy are
Special topic. Although not all the content of these topics is entirely within the category of corporate finance, these topics
A large part of the content of the domain is related to corporate finance and requires the cooperation of corporate finance.
The specific content of each knowledge module and chapter is arranged as follows:
Knowledge Module 1: Value Evaluation
Chapter One
introduction
The first section of the company's concept
Section 2 The company’s financial goals
Page 212
Section 3 Financial Markets and Corporate Financial Activities
Section 4 Principles of Corporate Financial Activities
Section 5 Corporate Finance Theory Context
Chapter 2 Present Value and Value Evaluation
The first section present value and discount rate
Section 2 Calculation of Present Value
Section 3 Valuation
third chapter
Risks and benefits
The first section of the concept of profit and risk
Section 2 Portfolio Theory
Section 3 Capital Asset Pricing Model
Section 4 Arbitrage Pricing Theory
Knowledge Module 2: Investment Decision
Chapter Four
Capital budget
Section 1 Cost of Capital
Section 2 Capital Budget Method in Risk-Free State
Section 3 Risk Adjustment Method of Capital Budget
Chapter 5 Real Options and Capital Budgeting
Section One
Challenges to NPV Law
Section Two
Features of real options
Section Three
Real option types
Fourth quarter
Real option pricing
Knowledge Module 3: Financing Decision
Chapter VI Long-term Financing Decisions of the Company
Section 1 Market Effectiveness
Section 2 Ordinary Shares
Section 3 Corporate Bonds
Section 4 Preferred Shares
Section 5 Principles of Corporate Financing Decisions
Chapter 7 Risk Management
Section 1 Futures and forward contracts
Section 2 Option Contract
Section 3 Swap Contract
Section 4 How to determine the hedging plan
Section 5 International Risk Management
Chapter 8 Capital Structure
Section 1 Modern Capital Structure Theory
Section 2 New Capital Structure Theory
Chapter 9 Dividend Policy
Section 1 Dividend Policy
Section 2 Dividend Policy Decision
Section 3 Important Theories of Traditional Dividend Policy
Section 4 Modern Dividend Policy Theory
Page 213
Knowledge Module 4: Financial Planning and Working Capital Management
Chapter 10 Financial Plan
Section 1 Financial Planning
Section 2 Short-term Financial Plan
Chapter 11 Liquid Asset Management
Section 1 Cash and Securities Management
Section 2 Accounts Receivable Management
Chapter 12 Short-term Financing Management
Section 1 Short-term financing methods
Section 2 Short-term financing decisions
The third section short-term financing strategy
Knowledge Module 5: Some special problems of corporate finance
Chapter 13 Corporate Governance
The first section agency problem
Section 2 Remediation of Agency Problems
Section 3 Law and Corporate Governance
Chapter 14 Mergers and Acquisitions and Financial Cooperation
Section 1 Benefit Analysis of M&A
Section 2 Financial Cooperation in the M&A Process
Section 3 Anti-takeover Strategy
Section 4 Leveraged Buyout
Chapter 15 Financial Crisis and Financial Early Warning
Section 1 Definition of Financial Crisis
Section 2 Handling of Financial Crisis (Liquidation, Reorganization)
Section 3 Financial Early Warning System
Section 4 Financial Early Warning Methods
2. The key and difficult points of this course
The main focus is to understand and master company analysis methods, the analysis and application of company financial indicators,
Price and risk models, and general techniques of capital operation.
The main difficulty is the specific determination of financial methods and policies in corporate financial management
Analysis of financial model and confirmation of asset reorganization methods in the context of a given resource endowment.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(School hours)
Remarks
First knowledge module
Valuation (Chapters 1-3)
12
Second knowledge module
Investment decision (Chapter 4-5)
10
Page 214
The third knowledge module
Financing Decisions (Chapters 6-9)
12
The fourth knowledge module
Financial planning and working capital management
(Chapters 10-12)
7
The fifth knowledge module
Some special problems of corporate finance
(Chapters 13-15)
7
6. Course assessment method
Assessment form: closed book
7. Formulation Author: Wang Xiong
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
International Financial Correspondence
Course number: 160511Z1
Course Name: International Financial Correspondence
English name: Bank Letters and Telecommunications
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: International Finance, International Settlement, Commercial Banking and Operation
Adapt to major: Finance
Reference materials:
"International Financial Correspondence" (1st edition), Xiao Manjun, Peking University Press, 2009
Course introduction :
International financial correspondence includes the mastery of inter-bank letter format and writing skills and methods; telex format and internal
Content, Swift writing and conventions, and writing methods such as Fax and E-mail. Specifically related to the current bank
Confirmation of secret custody and seal; credit investigation; bank account and reconciliation; loan; letter of credit; collection;
The establishment of management relationships and other aspects of business. Through course study, students are expected to have strong financial business writing
And communication skills.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is one of the professional elective courses for the finance major of our school. With the development of the world economy
Internationalization, international financial exchanges and inter-bank cooperation are increasing. Therefore, it is necessary for students to adapt to this
Change and train students to have a firm grasp of the corresponding professional vocabulary and use English for economic and financial business
Good thinking and communication, with strong writing and communication skills.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Page 215
Through course study, improve students' ability to use English in actual banking business. Emphasis on listening, speaking, reading, writing and business
Can read and write general business letters and documents.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The content of the course includes the mastery of inter-bank letter format and writing skills and methods; telex format and content,
Swift writing and conventions, and writing methods such as Fax and E-mail. Specifically related to what the bank is currently engaged in
Confirmation of secret custody and seal; credit investigation; bank account and reconciliation; loan; letter of credit; collection; agency customs
The establishment of the department and other aspects of business.
The focus and difficulty lies in how to proficiently use English for international
Inter-financial cooperation and communication.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
1
Letter format and writing skills
4
2
Agency relationship
4
3
Credit Investigation
2
4
Accounting business
4
5
Banking inquiry
4
6
International trade settlement business
4
7
Non-international trade settlement business
2
8
Other business letters
2
9
TELEX, SWIFT style learning
4
10
Fax, E-mai, etc. writing
2
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of usual grades includes: class attendance, class discussion; it accounts for about 30% of the total grades.
Examination: Final written examination (open book or closed book can be considered). Written test scores account for about the total evaluation score
70%.
7. Formulation Author: Zhu Ning
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
International finance
Page 216
Course ID : 160512Z1
Course Name : International Finance
English name : International Finance
Class hours and credits : 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : Finance (Monetary and Banking), Microeconomics, International Trade Theory and Practice
Adapt to majors : undergraduate majors
Reference materials :
［1］ international Finance.【美】Thomas A.Pugel. fourteenth Ed.
Beijing: Renmin University of China Press, first edition in 2009
［2］International Economics -Theory and Policy.【美】Krugman Paul
and Maurice Obstfeld. eighth Ed. Beijing: Tsinghua University Press, 2011
[3] Jiang Boke. International Finance New Edition (Fourth Edition) Shanghai: Fudan University Press, 2010
First edition
[4] International Economics-Theory and Policy (Eighth Edition) (Volume II: International Finance Section) Beijing: China
Renmin University Press, First edition in 2011
Course introduction:
International finance studies the simultaneous realization of internal and external equilibrium goals in an open economy from the perspective of currency and finance
An independent discipline in China, also known as open macroeconomics. The focus of its research is to reflect the external equilibrium
Variables such as balance of payments, exchange rates, capital flows, and the interrelationships between internal and external equilibrium and policy responses to achieve internal and external equilibrium.
Use and international coordination. Through the study of this course, you will understand and master the balance of payments, foreign exchange rate, exchange rate system
The basic concepts and principles of foreign exchange reserves, international financial markets, international financial coordination and cooperation;
Knowledge and skills in exchange, international investment and financial risk management; balance of payments adjustment, exchange rate determination, international capital
The policy work of internal and external equilibrium contradictions under the conditions of capital flow, the international financial crisis, the reform of the international monetary system, and the open economy
Modern international financial theories and their latest developments such as the principles of management and control.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Status and purpose: International Finance is a backbone professional course in the undergraduate professional training program of finance.
The study of this course aims to enable students to understand the basic principles, main content and development trends of international finance, and to improve
The ability to analyze and solve practical problems in the international financial field.
Task: Through the study of this course, understand and master the balance of payments, foreign exchange rate, exchange rate system, foreign
The basic concepts and principles of foreign exchange reserves, international financial markets, and international financial coordination and cooperation; foreign exchange transactions, national
Knowledge and skills of international investment and financial risk management; systematic understanding of national revenue and expenditure adjustment, exchange rate determination, international
Policies for internal and external balance contradictions under the conditions of capital flow, international financial crisis, international monetary system reform, and open economy
The latest developments in modern international financial theories such as tools and control principles, and improve scores through the study of related theories
The ability to analyze and solve practical problems in the international financial field.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Master the balance of payments, foreign exchange rates, exchange rate regimes, foreign exchange reserves, international financial markets, and international finance
The basic concepts and principles of coordination and cooperation; master the basics of foreign exchange transactions, financial risk management and international investment
Knowledge; understanding of national revenue and expenditure adjustment, exchange rate determination, international capital flow, international financial crisis, international currency
Modern international financial theories such as system reform, policy tools and control principles for internal and external equilibrium contradictions under an open economy
s.
Page 217
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of this course includes: international payments; foreign exchange, exchange rate and foreign exchange market; exchange rate system; western
Balance of Payments and Exchange Rate Theory; International Reserves; International Financial Market; International Capital Flow and Foreign Capital Utilization;
International financial system; macro policy and coordination under an open economy.
The specific content arrangement can be adjusted according to different professional directions (modules).
The focus of this course is: balance of payments, foreign exchange rates, international capital flows and internal and external inequality in an open economy
Balance the contradiction and its resolution.
The difficulties of this course are: balance of payments theory, exchange rate theory, international capital flow theory, open economy
Under the macroeconomic policy and internal and external balance.
Fourth, curriculum practice teaching requirements
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
1
Balance of payments
4
2
Foreign exchange, exchange rate and foreign exchange market
8
3
Western Balance of Payments Theory
6
4
Western exchange rate theory
8
5
International capital flow and financial crisis
6
6
International Monetary System
4
7
Internal and external equilibrium under a fixed exchange rate system
4
8
Floating exchange rate and internal equilibrium
4
9
Exchange rate system choice
4
5. Course assessment method
The assessment of usual grades includes: attending class, class discussion, in and out of class exercises and essay report writing. About
50% of the total score.
Examination: Final written examination (closed book form). The written test results account for about 50% of the total evaluation results.
7. Formulation Writer: Xiao Ting
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
International credit
Course ID : 160513Z1
Page 218
Course name : International Credit
English name : International Credit
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: International Finance, Macroeconomics
Adapt to major : Finance, International Economics and Trade
Reference materials :
"International Credit", Song Haoping, Capital University of Economics and Business Press, 2006
Course introduction:
This course theoretically explores the flow of international capital and the form of international credit after the Second World War.
New developments, in practice, follow different international channels, including private channels, official channels, and semi-official channels.
Channels and international financial organizations to conduct in-depth analysis of the content, credit conditions and practices of various international credit businesses
explain. Finally, in light of the actual situation in China, a comprehensive analysis of my country’s foreign exchange loans and the
Types and conditions of industry loans.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Course status: International credit is an important research direction and content in the field of international economy and international finance. country
International credit is a discipline that studies cross-border credit activities and their laws. It is based on contemporary international economics, international
Based on financial theory, it explains the basic theories, basic knowledge, and basic skills related to international credit, focusing on practical
Professional courses for business operations.
Course purpose: through explaining different countries, various financial organizations and institutions, various financial institutions and enterprises
How to use short-term foreign trade credit, export credit, international bank credit, government
International credit methods such as loans, loans from international financial organizations, and international bonds, to explain the various ways to utilize foreign capital
Advantages and disadvantages, to help countries and enterprises achieve the goals of economic growth and income increase, and enhance credit risk prevention
knowledge.
Course task: Through the study of this course, students should master the basic theories of international credit and apply what they have learned
Prevent international credit risks in theory; be able to use various international credit methods proficiently, and be familiar with the features of various credit methods
System procedures and conventions.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
International Credit is a course with strong theoretical and practicality. In terms of teaching methods, classroom teaching,
Class discussion, homework and self-study are conducted. Teachers deal with the basic concepts of international credit,
The characteristics and methods are necessary to teach, and the key points, difficult contents and practical examples of each chapter are taught in detail. class
The post-work is based on current hot issues and submitted in the form of a paper based on the actual situation. Due to limited class time, the content of the textbook
Too much teaching and part of the content overlaps with other courses. The self-study content of this course accounts for about 30% of the theoretical teaching hours
about. Students should master basic international financial knowledge and the calculation methods of exchange rate and interest.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Basic content of the course: basic knowledge of international credit, credit conditions of various forms of international credit, basic
Procedures and customary rules (see 5 for details).
Key points and difficulties of the course: the main credit conditions, basic procedures, advantages and disadvantages of various international credit forms
International practice and related legal provisions.
Page 219
4. Requirements for course practice
no
Five, the distribution of course materials and hours
chapter
content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Prepare
Note
1
Overview of International Credit: Concept, History and Development of International Credit
trend
2
2
International commercial bank credit: credit terms, loan contract, bank
Group loans etc.
4
3
Foreign trade credit: credit forms, factoring, etc.
4
4
Export credit: type, buyer's credit, seller's credit, welfare
Ting et al
4
5
Government loans: conditions, features, procedures, etc.
2
6
International financial institution loans: IBRD, IDA, IFC loans, etc.
4
7
International leasing: features, types, procedures, financial lease contracts
Wait
2
8
International bond and bill financing: issuance, circulation, legal terms
Wait
4
9
International project financing: characteristics, parties, structural arrangements, project
Project guarantee, etc.
4
10
Mortgage loans: movable property mortgage loans, real property mortgage loans and
Floating encumber
2
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (30%) + written test (70%).
7. Formulation Author: Chen Jianzhong
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Money Banking
Page 220
Course number: 160514Z1
Course Name : Money and Banking
English name: MONEY&BANKING
Class hours and credits: 48 /3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: Macroeconomics, Microeconomics, Political Economics
Adapt to major: Finance major
Reference materials:
[1] "Money and Banking" (Third Edition), edited by Dai Guoqiang, Higher Education Press, 2009
[2] "Finance" (Third Edition), edited by Chen Xuebin, Higher Education Press, 2010
[3] "Monetary and Finance" [America] Mishkin, Renmin University Press, 2005
Course introduction:
"Money and Banking" is a professional basic course for undergraduates majoring in finance. It is a basic economics and financial
Bridge to professional courses. This course system describes the basic knowledge, basic theories, basic operating rules and
Basic research methods. Specifically, it includes currency, credit, interest, financial institutions, financial markets, commercial banks,
Basic knowledge of central bank, etc.; sequentially from money demand, money supply, inflation, monetary policy, etc.
In terms of analysis, the relationship between finance and economy as a whole is analyzed; from the financial perspective under the conditions of an open economy,
A comprehensive introduction to the basic concepts and operating laws of foreign exchange rates, foreign exchange markets, and international payments.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Money and Banking" is a professional basic course for undergraduates majoring in finance. It is a basic economics and financial
A bridge to professional courses; it is also one of the introductory courses and professional compulsory courses of finance, which will be offered in the fourth semester.
The teaching objectives and tasks of this course are as follows:
1. Enable students to have a comprehensive understanding and deep understanding of the basic theories of currency and banking,
Currency, credit, banking, financial market, financial macro-control, financial reform and development, etc.
The relationship and the law of movement have a more systematic grasp.
2. Through classroom teaching and extracurricular learning, students can combine the analysis and analysis of financial practices at home and abroad
Use, master the correct methods of observing and analyzing financial problems, and cultivate discriminative financial theory and solve financial reality
Problem capacity.
3. Improve students' literacy in social sciences, and lay the necessary for further study of other professional courses
Foundation.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course is based on the global economic and financial integration and my country’s financial reform and opening up.
On the basis of basic knowledge and basic theories, focus on introducing new theories and new
Viewpoints and new phenomena. Through this course, students can master currency, banking, financial market and open
The basic laws of finance, understand the basic meaning of a lot of financial information, and focus on the currency and monetary system,
Financial market system, commercial banks, central banks and monetary policy, foreign exchange and foreign exchange markets, and balance of payments
And other aspects of knowledge, and have a basic understanding of monetary theory and financial innovation, and then be able to use the basics of monetary finance
This principle and analysis of various economic and financial phenomena, understand the government’s various macro financial policies, and be able to conduct preliminary financial
Physical operation; able to grasp the forefront trend of current monetary and financial development, and the theory, policy and physical object of monetary and financial
Have a more comprehensive and systematic understanding, which can be used as the basis for in-depth study of monetary and financial issues in the future.
Page 221
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The main teaching content includes currency and monetary system, credit, interest, financial institutions, financial markets, business
Industrial banks, central banks and monetary policy, money demand, money supply, inflation, foreign exchange rates, foreign exchange
Foreign exchange market, balance of payments, international monetary system, etc.
The focus is on currency and monetary systems, credit and credit instruments, financial market systems, interest rates in financial markets,
Monetary policy and inflation, monetary supply and demand theory, etc.
The difficulty lies in the financial aggregate and macro-control, including the balance of money supply and demand, and the central bank’s monetary policy adjustment.
Means of saving economy and its regulation mechanism.
The specific content of each chapter is arranged as follows:
The first introduction
Chapter 1 Currency and Economy
Section 1 The Origin and Function of Currency
Section 2 The role of currency in the economy
Section 3 Currency Measurement
Chapter 2 Currency System
Section 1 The formation and constituent elements of the currency system
Section 2 Evolution of the Currency System
Section 3 Conditions for Stability of the Currency System
Chapter 3 Credit and Credit Tools
Section One Credit Form
Section 2 Credit Tools
Section 3 The Role of Credit in Modern Economy
Chapter 4 Financial Intermediaries
Section 1 The origin and evolution of banks
Section 2 Non-bank Financial Institutions
Chapter 2 Financial Market
Chapter 5 Financial Markets and Their Functions
Section 1 Overview of Financial Markets
Section 2 Direct Financing and Indirect Financing
Section 3 Structure and Organization Management of Financial Market
Section 4 Financial Market Theory
Chapter 6 Interest Rate Theory
Section 1 Interest and Interest Rate
Section 2 Ways of Interest Rate Changes Affecting the Economy
Section 3 Western interest rate theory
Section 4 my country's interest rate system and its reform
Chapter 7 Capital Market
Section 1 Stock Market
Section 2 Bond Market
Section 3 Stock Exchange
Chapter 8 Money Market
Section 1 Interbank lending market
Section 2 Bill Discount Market
Page 222
Section 3 Transferable Large-rated Deposit Certificate Market
Section 4 Repurchase Market
Chapter 9 Financial Derivatives Trading Market
Section 1 Futures Market
Section 2 Options Market
Section 3 Swap Market
Section 4 Credit Derivatives Transactions
Chapter Three Commercial Bank
Chapter 10 Overview of Commercial Banks
Section 1 Organizational System of Commercial Banks
Section 2 The dual function of commercial banks
Section 3 Commercial Bank Balance Sheet
Chapter 11 Commercial Banking
Section 1 Liability Business
Section 2 Asset Business
Section 3 Other Business
Chapter 12 Operation and Management of Commercial Banks
Section 1 Operating Principles of Commercial Banks
Section 2 Asset and Liability Management Theory of Commercial Banks
Section 3 "Basel Agreement" and Risk Management of Commercial Banks
Chapter 4. Central Bank and Monetary Policy
Chapter 13 Status and Functions of the Central Bank
Section 1 The emergence and development of the central bank
Section 2 Nature of Central Bank. Functions and Structure
Section 3 Supervision of the Central Bank
Section 4 Payment and Settlement of the Central Bank
Chapter 14 Monetary Policy
Section 1 Monetary Policy Target System
Section 2 Monetary Policy Tools
Section 3 Monetary Policy Transmission Mechanism
Chapter 15 Central Bank and Financial Supervision
Section 1 The objectives and scope of financial supervision
Section 2 Financial Supervision under Asymmetric Information
Section 3 Financial Supervision Theory
Section 4 The Reform and Development Trend of Financial Supervision Model
Chapter 5 Monetary Theory
Chapter 16. Money Demand Theory
Section 1 The meaning and measurement of money demand
Section 2 Western Theory of Money Demand
Section 3 Social Reproduction and Money Demand
Chapter 17 Money Supply Theory
Section 1 Banking System and Money Supply
Section 2 Money Supply Model
Page 223
Chapter 18 Inflation and Deflation
Section 1 Causes and manifestations of inflation
Section 2 The Economic Impact of Inflation
Section 3 Deflation and its impact
The fourth section of inflation and deflation governance
Chapter 6. Finance under Open Economy
Chapter 19 Foreign Exchange and Foreign Exchange Market
Section 1 Foreign Exchange Market
Section 2 Foreign Exchange Market
Section 3 Foreign Exchange Risk and the RMB Exchange Rate System
Section 4 Exchange Rate Determination Theory
Chapter 20 Balance of Payments
The first section of the balance of payments
Section 2 Balance of Payments Adjustment
Section 3 Theory of Balance of Payments Adjustment
Chapter 21 International Monetary System
Section 1 The emergence and development of the international monetary system
Section 2 Floating Exchange Rate System
The third section of the euro and its significance
Chapter 22 Financial Innovation
Section 1 International Background of Financial Innovation
Section 2 Types of Financial Innovation
Section 3 The Impact of Financial Innovation
4. Requirements for course practice
No experiment arrangement for this course
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
1
Currency and economy
2
2
Currency system
2
3
Credit and Credit Tools
2
4
Financial intermediary
2
5
Financial markets and their functions
3
6
Interest rate theory
3
7
capital market
2
8
currency market
2
9
Financial derivatives trading market
2
10
Commercial Bank Overview
2
11
Commercial Banking
2
12
Commercial Bank Operation Management
2
13
The status and functions of the central bank
2
Page 224
14
Monetary Policy
3
15
Central Bank and Financial Supervision
3
16
Money demand theory
2
17
Money supply theory
2
18
Inflation and deflation
2
19
Foreign exchange in the foreign exchange market
2
20
Balance of payments
2
twenty one
International Monetary System
2
twenty two
Financial Innovation
2
total
48
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of this course is divided into two parts: regular assessment and final assessment. The former mainly includes attendance, homework, class
Participate in questions, discussion speeches, papers or survey reports (accounting for 40% of the total grade); the latter is the final proposition
Exam (60% of the total score). The combined result of the two combined assessment is the final assessment result.
7. Formulation writer: Tian Meiyu
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Financial risk management
Course code: 160515Z1
Course Title: Financial Risk Management
English name: Finance Risk Management
Class hours and credits : 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites : Money and Banking, Financial Markets, Econometrics
Adapt to major : Finance major
Reference materials:
"Financial Risk Management", Liu Hailong, Wang Hui, China Financial and Economic Publishing House, 2009.3.
Course introduction:
Due to the deregulation and financial liberalization, information technology and financial innovation and other factors, financial
Declining stability and increasing volatility in financial markets have not only severely affected the normal operations of financial institutions and industrial and commercial enterprises.
It also poses a threat to the stable development of a country’s and even the world’s finance and economy. Therefore, financial risks cause
The world’s close attention and high attention, so that the theory, technology, strategy and engineering of financial risk management
With continuous development, financial risk management has gradually become the core content of financial management. "Financial Risk Management"
This is a course set up to meet the needs of this development trend of economics and finance to explain financial risk management
The basic theory and basic skills are the main tasks. It is a comprehensive professional course that combines theory and practice.
Page 225
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Financial risk is an inherent attribute of financial activities and an important feature of modern financial markets. Due to release
The deregulation and financial liberalization, information technology and financial innovation and other factors have reduced the stability of the financial system.
Increased volatility in the financial market has not only severely affected the normal operations of financial institutions and industrial and commercial enterprises,
Even the stable development of global finance and economy poses a threat. Therefore, financial risks have caused the world’s secrets
Pay close attention to and attach great importance to it, so that the theory, technology, strategy and tools of financial risk management continue to develop,
Financial risk management has gradually become the core content of financial management. "Financial Risk Management" This is to adapt to the economy
The development trend of finance requires a course established to explain the basic theories and theories of financial risk management
Basic skills are the main task, and it is a comprehensive professional course that combines theory and practice.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Deeply understand the basic concepts of financial risk management, and be familiar with the basic characteristics of various financial risks.
2. Master the general procedures of financial risk management, be familiar with financial risk management systems and organizational systems, and
Grasp the basic types and meanings of financial risk management strategies, and have a clear understanding of derivative financial instruments and financial risks
Management relationship.
3. Master the basic methods of analyzing and identifying financial risks.
4. A preliminary grasp of the main technical methods of financial risk measurement, including: sensitivity methods, volatility
Analysis, VaR method, stress test, extreme value theory, main methods of credit risk measurement (such as credit evaluation
Level, Creditmetrics model, KMV model, CreditRisk+ model).
5. General technical methods of asset-liability management, such as gap theory, immune theory, asset-liability matching
The optimized model of the configuration, etc.
6. Master the use of financial derivatives to formulate financial risk management strategies, and be able to use the financial style learned
The theoretical methods of risk management formulate scientific risk management plans for financial institutions.
7. Master the general methods of macro financial stability theory and financial stability analysis.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Overview of Financial Risk Management
The main content includes: the concept and basic types of financial risks; the basis of financial risks under financial globalization
Characteristics of the economy; the concept, motivation and significance of financial risk management; basic procedures for financial risk management; finance
Risk management system; the theoretical framework of financial risk management.
Chapter 2 Financial Risk Measurement Theory and Method
This chapter is the key learning chapter of this course. The main content includes: the mathematical basis of financial risk measurement;
An overview of financial risk measurement methods; financial risk sensitivity analysis method, volatility analysis method and VaR-based
Financial risk measurement method; stress test and extreme value theory overview; the latest development of credit risk measurement method
Overview (including: credit rating theory; Creditmetrics model, KMV model, CreditRisk+ model
Wait).
Chapter 3 Financial Risk Management Strategy Selection and Application
The main content includes: the basic types of financial risk management strategies (including prevention, avoidance, decentralization, transfer
Marriage, value preservation, compensation); financial derivatives and financial risk management (including futures, options, swaps and interest
Rate agreement, risk hedging and preliminary financial engineering); the meaning of asset-liability management theory and several important concepts
Ideas; general techniques and strategies for asset-liability management (gap management, duration management, immunity theory).
Chapter Four Financial Stability Analysis and Macro Financial Risk Management
Page 226
The main content includes: the general theoretical framework of financial stability analysis; the basic method of financial stability analysis
Law; Summary of the latest research progress in financial stability analysis; Basic concepts of macro financial risk management; Macro
Financial risk management strategy analysis.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(School hours)
Remarks
1
Basic Theory of Financial Risk Management
8
2
Financial risk measurement theory and method
16
3
Choice and Application of Financial Risk Management Strategy
16
4
Financial stability analysis and macro financial risk management
8
6. Course assessment method
Course examination (50%) + coursework (40%) + classroom attendance (10%) = 100%
7. Formulation Writer: Yang Huaidong
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Financial Supervision
Course code: 160516Z1
Course Title: Financial Supervision
English name: Financial Regulation
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: International Finance, International Settlement, Commercial Banking, Insurance, Securities Investment
Adapt to major: Finance major
Reference materials:
[1] "Financial Supervision" (2nd Edition), Guo Tianyong, China Finance Press, 2009
[2] "Financial Supervision" (1st edition), Li Cheng, Science Press, 2009
[3] "Financial Supervision" (1st edition), Bian Zhicun, People's Publishing House, 2011
Course introduction :
Financial supervision takes financial development and financial opening as the background, and comprehensively introduces the historical process of financial supervision.
Sort out the basic theories of financial supervision, summarize the financial supervision system and financial supervision system, and introduce the supervision of commercial banks
Regulation, securities industry regulation, insurance industry regulation, non-bank financial institution regulation, financial market regulation, international capital
Page 227
Flow supervision, financial deepening supervision, and international cooperation in financial supervision.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is one of the professional elective courses for the finance major of our school. Its purpose and task is to use modern economics
Economic research methods, a systematic and comprehensive analysis of the system, content, and methods of financial supervision
And summarize, and explain and explain in combination with the actual situation in China. Through learning, students can fully understand different supervision
The characteristics and differences of the target's supervision practice, and grasp the relevant theories, practices and international development trends of the financial supervision industry.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Aims to cultivate proficiency in the basic theories of financial supervision, familiar with the financial supervision system and financial supervision system, and close
Intermediate and senior compound talents who combine abstract theory and my country's real finance. Students should not only learn the content of the textbook, but also
To understand and master the actual business of financial supervision from various professional academic websites and other channels, and actively participate in class discussions
And paper writing.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of the course includes: basic theory of financial supervision; financial supervision system, structure and support system;
Distinguish the financial supervision practices carried out by different supervision objects; the development of financial supervision and international cooperation. Teaching in the course
The teaching method will be combined with the latest developments in the development of financial supervision at home and abroad, emphasizing the integration of theory with practice, and strengthening students
The actual working ability and the ability to analyze and solve problems.
The key and difficult points of the course are: financial supervision practices, changes in supervision models, mastery of legal texts and
To understanding.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
1
Basic Theory of Financial Supervision
4
2
Financial supervision system
4
3
Banking Regulation
4
4
Securities Industry Regulation
4
5
Insurance industry regulation
4
6
Supervision of other financial institutions
4
7
Financial market supervision
4
8
International coordination and cooperation in financial supervision
4
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of usual grades includes: class attendance, class discussion; it accounts for about 30% of the total score.
Examination: Final written examination (open book or closed book can be considered). Written test scores account for about the total evaluation score
70%.
Page 228
7. Formulation Author: Zhu Ning
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
financial economics
Course number: 160517Z1
Course Name: Financial Economics
English name: Financial Economics
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: Western Economics
Adapt to major: Finance major
Reference materials:
"Introduction to Financial Economics", edited by Song Fengming, Higher Education Press, 2006
Course introduction:
Financial economics, also known as financial theory, is the theoretical foundation of microeconomics in finance. In fact, it is
The extension of advanced microeconomics to an uncertain economy. It focuses on discussing financial assets from the equilibrium of financial markets
Valuation and pricing, and risk management of financial assets. Therefore, other important fields of finance such as financial engineering
The indispensable theoretical basis for engineering, investment, corporate finance, and financial institution management.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is the backbone of the finance major and the theoretical foundation of microeconomics in finance. It focuses on
Financial market equilibrium discusses the valuation and pricing of financial assets, and the risk management of financial assets. Therefore
Other important fields of finance such as financial engineering, investment, corporate finance, financial institution management, etc.
Lack of theoretical basis.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The course requires students to master the basic theories and knowledge of financial economics, and enhance their understanding of the complete financial
Fundamental theorems of economics, establish an understanding of the overall financial theory, and improve understanding of the laws of economic and financial development
Knowledge and grasp ability.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The teaching content of this course is to enable students to understand the basic concepts and meanings of financial economics,
Establish a rational financial behavioral basis and a basic equilibrium model as a basis to understand the financial under the framework of a multi-period model
Asset valuation and pricing; option pricing under the two-period model; portfolio selection theory and fund separation theorem
And asset pricing models-Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) and Arbitrage Pricing Theory (APT); and
Discuss the capital market’s valuation of enterprises and related corporate financial issues, so that students can learn from the financial market
To understand the financial issues of the company from the perspective of the company, establish an understanding of the overall financial theory, and then fully understand the financial
Page 229
The basic theorems of economics establish an understanding of the overall financial theory.
The focus and difficulty of the course are the equilibrium model under the two-period model framework and the financial under the multi-period model framework.
Valuation and pricing of assets.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Prepare
Note
1
Introduction
4
2
Preferences, utility and risk aversion
8
3
Financial market equilibrium and asset valuation: a two-period model
8
4
Discrete time financial market equilibrium and asset valuation
8
5
Options and the completeness of financial markets
4
6
The Choice of Portfolio and the Theory of Fund Separation
4
7
Effective combination boundary analysis
4
8
Capital Asset Pricing Model and Arbitrage Pricing Theory
4
9
Corporate Finance in the Financial Market
4
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of usual grades includes: class attendance and classwork, which account for about 30% of the total grades.
Examination: Final written examination (open book or closed book can be considered). Written test scores account for about the total evaluation score
70%.
7. Formulation Author: Duan Xiaoping
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Research on Frontier Financial Issues
Course number: 160518Z1
Course Title: Research on Frontier Issues of Finance
English name: Research Frontier of Finance
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: Money and Banking, International Finance, Commercial Banking, Financial Market
Adapt to major: Finance major
Reference materials: none
Course introduction:
Page 230
This course is for financial students who have systematically studied most of the economic and financial courses, and will soon enter
When entering society, in order to integrate the theories learned with contemporary economic and financial practices or major events
In-depth analysis and discussion of the system, deepen the integration of the knowledge learned and set up a course, part of the content can be
Adjust appropriately according to changes in the situation.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Research on Financial Frontier Issues" is a systematic study of all major basic courses and majors in this major.
After the course, according to the financial theory research and the needs of the development of the financial situation at that time, specialize the relevant knowledge
The courses of topic introduction and review are designed to integrate the theoretical knowledge learned before with practice based on the latest development trend.
Closely integrate, analyze the latest financial trends, and help students quickly enter the society, familiarize themselves with business, and improve hands-on practice
Ability to lay a good foundation.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course is highly applicable and requires students to apply relevant theoretical points on the basis of previous relevant knowledge
Analyze practical problems, ask students to do it themselves, understand and understand from various financial websites and academic special websites.
Grasp the ins and outs of what is being taught and actively participate in class discussions and essay writing.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The content of this course is adjusted randomly according to changes in the situation, but it is generally based on major financial issues at home and abroad.
Major breakthroughs in financial theoretical research, my country’s financial reforms and new developments in the financial market, the importance of teachers
The selection and organization of major scientific research achievements and innovations is a combination of theory and practicality, highlighting application
Sex courses.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
Teaching content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
1
Commentary on major international financial events
8
Self-study after class 8
2
Comments on major domestic financial events
4
Self-study after class 4
3
New Development of Financial Theory Research
4
Self-study after class 4
4
New developments in financial institution reform
4
Self-study after class 4
5
New Developments in Financial Market Reform
4
Self-study after class 4
6
New trends in financial innovation
4
Self-study after class 4
Interaction
4
6. Course assessment method
Attendance (10%) + class discussion (30%) + essay (60%).
7. Formulation Author: Deng Chao
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Page 231
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Financial history
Course ID : 160519Z1
Course Title: History of Finance
English name: History of Finance
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: Finance, International Finance, Chinese Economic History
Adaptation major: Finance and other economics undergraduate majors
Reference materials:
"A Brief History of Chinese Finance" (Second Edition), Yuan Yuanfu, China Finance Press, June 2007
Course introduction :
Finance is the blood of the economy, it promotes and promotes the social and economic development of a country (or region). Financial history
It is a report that reflects the continuous evolution of currency, monetary system, financial institutions, and financial system with the development of social economy
History of development. This course will follow the trajectory of my country’s historical development
Explore the basic conditions of the evolution and development of currencies, monetary systems, financial institutions, and financial systems in the historical period
Its development law clarifies the unique position of finance in historical changes, and better contributes to the development of modern society and economy.
service.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
The financial history course belongs to the professional basic course in the financial professional curriculum system. This course focuses on China
The main process of the occurrence, development and evolution of finance, introducing some of the main events in the process of China’s financial development,
Briefly describe the trajectory of China's financial evolution. By studying this course, students can understand and master Chinese finance
The historical development of China, understand some important events, phenomena and figures in Chinese financial history, and learn modern
Financial knowledge lays the foundation. At the same time, learning the history of financial development is also conducive to improving the knowledge of financial students
Structure, broaden your horizons, and improve the overall quality of students.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. A correct understanding of the nature, tasks and research objects of the course, a comprehensive understanding of the system and structure of the course,
Have an overall grasp of the history of China's financial development.
2. Grasp the main development process and historical events of China’s finance, understand the financial relations in China’s financial history
Departments, financial phenomena, financial events and financial figures, understand the various historical periods of Chinese finance
content.
3. Learn to integrate theory with practice and make it clear that history is the precipitation of reality, and reality is history that is being deduced.
Able to understand the development and evolution of China’s finance with a developmental perspective, so as to understand the current China’s financial reform
Inevitability.
Page 232
3. The teaching content and key difficulties of the course
Chapter One Currency and Credit in the Pre-Qin Dynasty
Teaching purpose and requirements: understand the origin and early development of ancient Chinese currency; master the Spring and Autumn Period and Warring States Period
The characteristics of currency; understand the pre-Qin credit.
The first section of pre-Qin currency
Section 2 Credit of the Pre-Qin Dynasty
Teaching focus: the characteristics of currency and the occurrence of credit in the Spring and Autumn Period and Warring States Period
Chapter 2 Finance from Qin to Sui Dynasty
Teaching objectives and requirements: understand the meaning of Qin Shihuang's unified currency; master the content of Emperor Wu's reform of the currency system;
Understand the currency system from the Three Kingdoms to the Sui Dynasty; understand and master the loan market in the Han Dynasty.
Section One Currency System from Qin to Sui Dynasty
Section 2 Credit from Qin to Sui Dynasty
Teaching focus: the significance of Qin Shihuang's unified currency system, the reform of the currency system by Emperor Wu of the Han Dynasty, and the loan market in the Han Dynasty.
Chapter 3 Finance of Tang, Song and Yuan Dynasties
Teaching purpose and requirements: understand the characteristics of the Tang Dynasty currency system; master the economic conditions for the generation and development of banknotes;
Understand and master the changes in the currency system of the Yuan Dynasty; understand the credit business and credit institutions in the Tang and Song dynasties;
Reasons for the rise and development of currency exchange industry.
Section 1 Currency and Currency System
Section 2 Credit and Credit Institutions
Teaching focus: the characteristics of the currency system of the Tang Dynasty, the development and management of paper money, the main beliefs of the Tang Dynasty
Use business.
Chapter 4 Finance in the Ming and Qing Dynasties (before the Opium War)
Teaching objectives and requirements: understand the paper currency system of the Ming Dynasty; clarify the establishment of the silver currency status of the Ming Dynasty;
The generation process of Chu bank and ticket number.
Section 1 Currency and Currency System
Section 2 Credit and Credit Institutions
Teaching focus: the establishment of silver currency status; the conditions for the generation of banks and bill numbers.
Chapter 5 Finance in the Qing Dynasty after the Opium War
Teaching purpose and requirements: understand and master the backwardness of the Qing Dynasty’s currency system; understand the Qing Dynasty after the Opium War
The changes in the Korean pawnbroking industry, the development of money houses, the rise and fall of bank notes, and the financial turmoil in the late Qing Dynasty; know foreign banks
Expansion, economic aggression and plunder of China; grasp the historical conditions of the rise of China’s banking industry and the Chinese banking industry
The characteristics of the rise; understand China Tong
The establishment of commercial banks and the emergence of private capital banks.
The first section of the crisis of the currency system
Section 2 Changes in Financial Institutions
Section 3 The invasion of capitalist financial forces
Section 4 The Rise of China's Banking Industry
Teaching focus: the crisis of the currency system in the late Qing Dynasty; economic aggression and plunder of foreign banks; Chinese banking
The characteristics of the rise.
Chapter VI Finance during the Beiyang Government
Teaching purpose and requirements: To understand the further aggression of imperialism against China during the period of the Beiyang government,
The control of China’s finances; clarify the development of China’s financial industry during this period; understand and master the period of the Beiyang government
Chaos currency circulation.
Page 233
Section 1 The expansion of imperialist financial power in China
Section 2 Development of China's Financial Industry
The third section of the chaotic currency circulation
Teaching focus: the expansion of foreign banking power in China, the development of China National Capital Bank.
Chapter 7 Finance in the Early Period of the Nationalist Government
Teaching purpose and requirements: understand the power competition of foreign banks in China during this period and the financial situation in Northeast China
Colonization; understand and grasp the political power of the national government to establish a bureaucratic capital financial monopoly system and monopoly
Cut the currency; clearly grasp the situation of abolishing the two yuan, the outflow of silver and the implementation of the legal currency policy;
Section 1 The competition between Britain, the United States and Japan in China
Section 2 Establishment of the Financial Monopoly System of Bureaucratic Capital
Section 3 Currency Reform
Section 4 The continued development of the national capital financial industry and the decline of the bank
Teaching focus: the establishment of the bureaucratic capital financial monopoly system and the currency reform in the early days of the Nationalist government.
Chapter 8 Finance during the Anti-Japanese War
Teaching purpose and requirements: To understand the reasons and characteristics of the development of the financial industry in the rear area during the War of Resistance Against Japan;
The financial control of the National Government during the period of the Nationalist Government; the establishment of the Quadruple General Office and its main functions and powers;
Inflation and the failure of measures to suppress inflation; understand the state of the national capital and financial industry during the War of Resistance and the Japanese Empire
The financial plundering of the occupied areas within the pass.
Section 1 Financial System during the Anti-Japanese War
Section 2 Inflation of Fiat Currency
Section 3 National Capital Financial Industry during the Anti-Japanese War
On the fourth holiday, the imperialists’ financial plunder of the occupied areas within the Guan
Teaching focus: the development of the financial industry in the rear during the Anti-Japanese War and the financial control of the National Government; the currency of fiat
Expansion and financial plunder of Japanese imperialists.
Chapter 9 The extreme expansion and collapse of bureaucratic capital finance
Teaching purpose and requirements: understand the financial market situation in the U.S.-dominant area; master the extremes of bureaucratic capital
Degree expansion and the total collapse of the monetary system; understand the process of national capital and financial industry decline.
Section 1 The U.S. monopolizes the financial market of the Kuomintang Controlled Area
Section 2 The extreme expansion of bureaucratic capital
Section 3 The total collapse of the monetary system
Section 4 The decline of national capital financial industry
Teaching focus: the extreme expansion of bureaucratic capital and the total collapse of the monetary system.
Chapter 10 New Democratic Finance
Teaching purpose and requirements: understand the destruction of the old financial system during the Agrarian Revolution; be clear and grasp
Grasp the establishment, currency issuance and management of the revolutionary base bank and the business of the base bank during the Anti-Japanese War
The establishment and tasks of border banks, currency issuance and currency circulation; understand the credit business of border banks
And financial business and financial management in the Liberated Area; understand the development of banks in the Liberated Area during the War of Liberation and the Chinese
The establishment of the People’s Bank of China and the formation of the new democratic financial system, the issuance of the renminbi and the unification of the national currency
process.
Section 1 The creation of new democratic finance during the Agrarian Revolution
Section 2 The development of new democratic finance during the War of Resistance Against Japan
Section 3 The Development and Growth of New Democratic Finance during the War of Liberation
Teaching focus: Bank establishment, currency issuance and banking business during the revolutionary base period; during the Anti-Japanese War
Page 234
The tasks and operations of banks in the border areas and the issuance and circulation of currency during this period; the establishment of the People’s Bank of China
Lihe renminbi issuance.
Chapter 11 Finance during the period of national economic recovery and the "First Five-Year Plan" period
Teaching objectives and requirements: to clarify and grasp the establishment and stability of the new China’s financial system during the recovery period of the national economy
Determine financial prices and fiscal and financial policies; understand that the People’s Bank of China provides credit for the state-owned economy and supports agricultural production
The situation of the development of the industry; understand and grasp the situation of the banks raising funds and using funds during the first five-year plan;
Be clear about the process of issuing new renminbi and establishing a highly centralized banking system.
Section 1 Finance during the recovery period of the national economy
Section 2 Finance during the first five-year plan
Teaching focus: financial system and financial policy during the period of national economic recovery; bank raising during the "First Five-Year Plan" period
The means of funds and the channels for using funds and the establishment of a highly centralized banking system.
Chapter 12 Finance during the "Great Leap Forward" period and the period of national economic adjustment
Teaching purpose and requirements: to be clear about the mistakes of financial work in the blind economic development during the "Great Leap Forward" period
And the impact of financial work mistakes on the national economy, understand the “left” corrections in financial work during this period
"Right" and the situation of entering work in the early stage of national economic adjustment;
The main content and implementation of the “Six Articles” clarify the financial performance of national economic adjustment performance.
The first section of the "Great Leap Forward" period of finance
Section 2 Finance during the period of national economic adjustment
Teaching focus: Financial errors during the "Great Leap Forward" period and their impact on the national economy; nationals
"Six Banking Work" and its implementation during the period of economic adjustment.
Chapter 13 Financial Work during the "Cultural Revolution"
Teaching purpose and requirements: understand the impact and destruction of the "Cultural Revolution" on financial work, understand financial
The department’s persistence in work in a difficult situation; know the two turning points and setbacks of the bank’s work during the "Cultural Revolution"
fold.
Section 1 The impact and destruction of financial work during the "Cultural Revolution"
Section 2 Two Turnarounds and Setbacks in Banking Work in the "Cultural Revolution"
Teaching focus: The impact and destruction of the "Cultural Revolution" on financial work
Chapter 14 Finance in the Period of Economic System Reform
Teaching purpose and requirements: clarify the specific situation of financial work during the economic system reform period, and master the economic system
The establishment of the central bank status of the People’s Bank of China and the formation of a new financial system since the reform of the financial system; and
During this period, efforts were made in reforming bank credit systems, developing international financial cooperation, and strengthening financial macro management.
Knowing that my country is deepening the reform of the financial system and flexibly using monetary policy to macroeconomic and financial
Observe regulation; understand the process of opening up China's financial industry.
Section 1 Finance in the period of economic system reform
Section 2 Finance Since the Reform of the Economic System (Part 1)
Section 3 Finance Since the Reform of the Economic System (Part 2)
Teaching focus: expounding the changes in China’s financial sector since the reform of the economic system
Financial work carried out.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Page 235
chapter
Teaching content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Prepare
Note
1
Currency and Credit in the Pre-Qin Dynasty
2
2
Finance from Qin to Sui Dynasty
2
3
Tang, Song and Yuan Finance
3
4
Finance in the Ming and Qing Dynasties (before the Opium War)
3
5
Finance in the Qing Dynasty after the Opium War
2
6
Finance during the Beiyang Government
2
7
Finance in the early days of the Nationalist Government
2
8
Finance during the Anti-Japanese War
2
9
The expansion and collapse of bureaucratic capital finance
2
10
Finance in the Era of New Democracy
2
11
Finance during the transition to socialism
2
12
Finance during the "Great Leap Forward"
2
13
Finance during the "Cultural Revolution"
2
14
Finance in the period of economic system reform
2
review
2
6. Course assessment method
closed book test
7. Formulation Author: Zhou Haoming
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
financial Marketing
Course number: 160520Z1
Course Name: Financial Market
English name: Financial Market
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: Western Economics, Currency and Banking, International Finance
Adaptation major: finance, economics
Reference materials:
"Financial Marketing" (3rd edition), edited by Zhang Yichun, Higher Education Press, March 2008
Course introduction:
This course is one of the core courses of finance majors. Through the study of this course, students will be
The basic types, basic functions, and basic operating mechanisms of the market are more comprehensive.
Page 236
Solution, the pricing mechanism of financial products is the focus and difficulty of this course.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Financial marketing is the study of the financial market operating mechanism and the behavioral laws of various subjects under the conditions of market economy
Science. With the deepening of China’s reform and opening up and the increasingly perfect socialist market economy system, the
Financial markets have become more and more the core of the entire economic system, and the status of financial markets has become more and more important. Financial market
As the main course of finance majors, students can fully grasp the operation of financial market under the conditions of market economy.
The principles and laws are adapted to the reform requirements of the Ministry of Education of "wide-calibre and thick foundation", and the socialist market economy
Economics is of great significance to the requirements of talents.
The study of this course aims to enable students to master the basic theories, basic knowledge and knowledge of modern financial markets
Basic skills, master various operating mechanisms of modern financial markets, including interest rate mechanism, exchange rate mechanism, risk
Mechanisms and securities price mechanisms; pricing methods for financial assets, including monetary funds, foreign exchange, risk assets,
Pricing methods for stocks, bonds, forwards, futures, options, etc.; the relationship between major financial variables and
Behaviors, including financing, investment, hedging, arbitrage, policy behaviors and regulatory behaviors; and can operate
Use the learned theories, knowledge and methods to analyze and solve related problems in the financial market.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
First, strengthen the explanation and analysis of basic theories so that students can master the advanced analytical methods of modern economics
law. The financial market is one of the fastest growing fields in today’s society. In order to cultivate students’ adaptability and creativity,
The teaching must be focused on theory. Strengthen the study of financial market theory that reflects the general laws of market economy
Study and research, strengthen the application of modern analysis methods such as mathematics and econometrics, and improve financial market education
The level and level of learning.
Second, focus on cultivating students' ability to analyze and solve problems. After fully understanding and mastering the basic principles
On the basis of theory, train students to analyze and solve problems through case teaching and after-class exercises
Ability.
Third, adhere to the principle of integrating theory with practice, and strengthen the ability to learn from life and use it flexibly. In the teaching process
Will contact the emerging new situations and problems in the financial market field, and use the basic theories and methods in the textbook
Carrying out analysis and research can not only solve the problem that teaching materials cannot fully reflect various actual conditions, but also cultivate
The ability to learn how to use in daily life.
Fourth, adhere to the principle of proceeding from reality. This course strives to fully reflect the more mature and cutting-edge world of today
Various theories.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The textbook is divided into three parts. The first part is basic knowledge, comprehensively and systematically expounding financial market and goods
Fundamental knowledge and basic theory of currency market, capital market, foreign exchange market, and derivative market. The second part is the machine
System and pricing, in-depth analysis of the basic principles of interest rate mechanism, exchange rate mechanism and risk mechanism, and detailed description of bonds
Based on the principles of common stock value analysis, it systematically analyzes the pricing methods of risk assets, forwards, futures, and options.
The third part is the behavior of the subject, focusing on the use of the basic knowledge, basic principles and basic methods learned in the previous section.
Analyze fund-raising, investment, hedging, arbitrage and regulatory behaviors, and train students to analyze and solve problems
force. The second part is the focus of the course. The difficulty of the course is the pricing mechanism and pricing model of the financial market.
4. Requirements for course practice links:
Page 237
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(School hours)
Remarks
1
Financial market overview
2
2
currency market
2
3
capital market
2
4
Foreign exchange market
2
5
Derivative market
4
6
Interest rate mechanism
4
7
Exchange rate mechanism
4
8
Risk mechanism
2
9
Risky asset pricing
2
10
Bond value analysis
2
11
Common stock value analysis
4
12
Pricing of forwards and futures
2
13
Option pricing
2
14
Fundraising
4
15
Investment behavior
2
16
Hedging behavior
2
17
Arbitrage
2
18
Financial market supervision
4
6. Course assessment method
Course examination (60%) + coursework (30%) + classroom attendance (10%) = 100%
7. Formulation Writer: Yang Huaidong
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Financial trust and leasing
Course number: 160521Z1
Course Title: Financial Trust and Leasing
Page 238
English name : Financial Trust and Leasing
Class hours and credits : 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : Currency and Banking, Commercial Banking, Technical Economics
Adapt to majors: finance, international finance, financial investment, etc.
Reference textbook : "Financial Trust and Leasing", Wang Shumin, Lu Shimin, China Finance Press, 2002
Course introduction:
This course draws on the cutting-edge achievements in the field of foreign trust and leasing, and systematically introduces the country’s trust and leasing business.
International and domestic development status, and classify the specific content of trust and leasing business and related management business
Explain, reveal the operating rules and systems of trust and leasing in the real economy, and fully demonstrate my country’s reform and opening up
Come to trust lease new ideas and developments in teaching and scientific research.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Course status: With the improvement of my country’s financial system and the
The knowledge and grasp of business is becoming more and more important. This course introduces the two financial fields of trust and leasing, which are very important
The important business is a backbone course for finance majors with strong theoretical and practicality.
Course purpose: to explain the basic meaning, function, characteristics, business types,
Business operation procedures and business management, etc., study the specific applications and risk prevention of various businesses, and reveal financial information
The internal law and operating mechanism of the trust and leasing business.
Course task: Through the study of this course, students should have a firm grasp of the trust and leasing involved in the course
Concept, master the basic framework of trust and leasing from both theoretical and practical levels, and be able to use the basic principles proficiently
To resolve practical problems involving trust and lease cases. Learn to integrate theory with practice, analyze and judge our country
The development status and future trends of the trust industry and leasing industry.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Financial trust and leasing is a theoretical and practical course. The teaching method uses classroom
Lectures, class discussions, homework and self-study are conducted. Teachers respond to trusts and leases in the classroom
Basic concepts, business characteristics, and business methods are taught as necessary, and the key points and difficulties of each chapter are taught in detail
Content and practical examples. After-school homework and self-study are aimed at current hot issues, combined with actual essays and learning
Submitted in the form of learning experience. Students should master the basic analytical methods of technical economics,
Conduct quantitative analysis on pricing, decision-making, and risk prevention of services.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of the course: the connotation, basic characteristics, business types, operating institutions and management of trust and leasing
Li, etc. (see 5 for details).
The key and difficult points of the course: the basic principles of various businesses, the comparison of related businesses, the business of trust and leasing
Business pricing and decision-making.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Page 239
chapter
content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Prepare
Note
1
Overview of Financial Trust: Development, Function, and Role
2
2
Trust relationship and its establishment: types, characteristics, constituent elements,
Rights and obligations
2
3 Foreign trust business: personal trust, corporate trust and general trust 8
4
my country’s trust business, trust institutions and their management: business types,
Operating organization and its regulatory regulations, etc.
6
5
Lease overview: classification, function, development, etc.
4
6
Rent: the composition and calculation of rent, etc.
2
7 Lease management and decision analysis: lease fund management, decision analysis 4
8
Lease law and contract: characteristics, signing, performance
2
9
Leasing agency and management
2
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (30%) + written test (70%).
7. Formulation Author: Chen Jianzhong
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Commercial Banking
Course number: 160523Z1
Course Name: Commercial Banking Management
English name: Commercial Bank Management
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: Money and Banking, Finance
Page 240
Adapt to major: Finance major
Reference materials:
[1] "Bank Management" (6th edition), MacDonald, S. Scott. and Koch, Timothy. Money
Translated by You Ni, Peking University Press, 2009
[2]Management of Banking (6th Edition), MacDonald, S. Scott and Koch,
Timothy., Cengage Learning, 2006
[3] "Commercial Bank Management" (3rd edition), edited by Dai Guoqiang, Higher Education Press, 2008
[4] "Commercial Bank Management", edited by Zheng Ming, Tsinghua University Press, 2005
Course introduction:
This course systematically expounds the background, functions and operating policies of commercial banking business development, and a comprehensive introduction
The various businesses of contemporary commercial banks, including capital business, liability business, asset business and other businesses,
Introduce the business performance evaluation and risk management tools of commercial banks, and systematically learn and master foreign modern banks
Management theories, methods and tools, and apply modern economics research methods to some contemporary commercial banks
Discuss important business ideas and management models, and at the same time make a more comprehensive analysis of the latest theories of bank business management
Introduction is a theoretical and practical course. This course implements bilingual teaching.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is one of the backbone courses of the finance major prescribed by the Ministry of Education.
This course aims to enable students to understand all aspects of decision-making in the process of commercial bank operation and management through teaching
The business ideas and decision-making procedures, methods and tools on which they are based, including how to evaluate bank performance, how to measure
Quantify and manage interest rate risk, characteristics of bank liabilities, regulatory capital requirements and overall liquidity analysis, as well as
How to manage credit and risk. At the same time, students can understand the competitive environment of the banking industry that is constantly changing
And the development trend of the banking industry.
This course is an important theoretical basis for students to engage in related work after graduation, especially banking work. Learn
Modern commercial bank’s management theory and successful experience, master the advanced commercial bank’s management thought and theory
To enhance students’ understanding of commercial banking’s business and processes, and provide practical
Ability to lay a good foundation.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course implements bilingual teaching. Students are required to fully understand the face of bank managers through course learning
To the key issues, understand the data analysis methods and basic financial models for decision-making, and understand the data analysis
The advantages and disadvantages of and the many balance relationships in the financial decision-making process.
This course is theoretically strong, and it also has a certain quantitative analysis and practicality. It requires students to be related to what they have learned before
On the basis of knowledge, systematically learn and master the management theories, methods and tools of modern foreign banks.
To learn the content of teaching materials, it is also necessary to understand and master the information of banks in our country from various banks’ websites and professional academic websites.
The actual business and operation methods must actively participate in class discussions and paper writing.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One The Changing Banking Environment
Teaching requirements: understand the background of bank management and current banking trends; understand the regulatory environment of the banking industry
Change and development process.
Key points and difficulties: the impact of key banking legislation on the banking industry, exposed by the 2008 financial crisis
Page 241
The contradiction between liquidity, profitability and safety in bank operations and financial supervision issues.
Chapter 2 Bank Performance Analysis
Teaching requirements: be familiar with the financial statements of commercial banks, understand the relationship between the balance sheet and the income statement;
Master how to use the equity rate of return model to analyze the bank’s profitability, and use financial indicators to analyze the bank’s risk
Risk analysis; familiar with the CAMELS rating system; understand the bank’s financial statement manipulation issues.
Key points and difficulties: Use the equity rate of return model to analyze the bank’s profitability, and use financial indicators for
Bank's risk analysis, CAMELS rating system.
Chapter III Management of Non-interest Income and Non-interest Expenses
Teaching requirements: understand the importance and main sources of non-interest income; master the methods used to measure cost control and
The pros and cons of the financial ratio of non-interest income growth; understand why banks should pay attention to customer profitability and
Business portfolio of expense income; understand how banks should use different non-interest expense management strategies to improve
Business performance.
Key points and difficulties: measuring the pros and cons of financial ratios for expense control and non-interest income growth; customer profitability
Capability and profitability analysis of business portfolio based on cost-benefit.
Chapter 4 Interest Rate Risk Management: Gap and Earning Sensitivity
Teaching requirements: understand the theoretical basis of using gaps to measure interest rate risk; master how to use static gap analysis
Analysis method and income sensitivity analysis method to analyze the bank's interest rate risk; understand the management steps.
Key points and difficulties: Use gap and income sensitivity analysis to manage the bank's interest rate risk.
Chapter 5 Bank Liabilities and Liquidity Management
Teaching requirements: understand the cost of various types of funds, understand financing behavior and bank liquidity, credit and interest rates
Relationship between risk positions; familiar with the characteristics of cash assets; understand liquidity, bank risks, and sources of funds
And the relationship between income; understand the pros and cons of traditional liquidity indicators and the bank’s reserve management.
Key points and difficulties: understand the relationship between liquidity, bank risks, funding sources and returns
Chapter VI Effective Utilization of Capital
Teaching requirements: understand the role of bank capital and its importance in the operation of commercial banks; understand various
Sources of internal and external capital; understand the latest capital standard framework, grasp changes in capital control requirements and their impact
The impact of commercial bank operations.
Key points and difficulties: the composition and role of bank capital, changes in capital control requirements and their impact on commercial banks
Operational shock.
Chapter 7 Overview of Credit Policy and Loan Features
Teaching requirements: understand the development trend of loan business; master the characteristics of various loans and the credit evaluation process
The basic steps of the process; think about the risks faced by certain specific credits.
Key points and difficulties: risk characteristics of various loans.
Chapter 8 Commercial Loan Evaluation
Teaching requirements: Master the four steps of quantitative analysis of commercial credit applications.
Key points and difficulties: use financial data to analyze the credit of corporate borrowers and estimate the business operations of corporate borrowers
Present
The process of gold flow.
Chapter 9 Consumer Credit Evaluation
Teaching requirements: understand the types of consumer loans and consumer credit control; master the steps of consumer credit analysis
Steps and methods; understand the differences between commercial loan evaluation and consumer credit evaluation.
Key points and difficulties: basic credit scoring model for individual borrowers, commercial loan evaluation and consumer credit evaluation
The difference.
Page 242
Four, experimental requirements
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
This course has a total of 48 hours, and the specific hours are allocated as follows:
chapter
Inside
Content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours) Remarks
1
The changing banking environment
4
2
Bank performance analysis
8
3
Management of non-interest income and non-interest expenses
4
4
Interest rate risk management: gaps and yield sensitivity
8
5
Bank liabilities and liquidity management
4
6
Effective use of capital
4
7
Overview of credit policy and loan characteristics
2
8
Commercial loan evaluation
4
9
Consumer credit evaluation
4
Group oral report
6
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of this course is divided into two parts: usual assessment (50%) and final assessment (50%). The former is mainly
Normal grades, including attendance, homework, class questioning, discussion and speech, group oral report; the latter is the end of the term
Proposition test. Combine the two to assess the comprehensive performance.
7. Author: Wei Ping
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Investment Banking
Course number: 160524Z1
Course Name: Investment Banking
English name: Investment Banking
Class hours and credits: 40/2.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: financial marketing, corporate finance, technical economy
Adapt to major: finance, financial management, investment
Reference materials:
[1] "Essential Lectures on Investment Banking" Ruan Qingsong, Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press, 2009
[2] "Investment Banking Course" Zheng Ming, Wang Cong, China Finance Press, 2005
Page 243
[3] "Investment Banking Guide" (United States) K• Thomas Leo, Economic Science Press, 2000
year
Course introduction:
Close contact with the practice of China’s capital market, analyze relevant cases of investment banks, and pay attention to reflection
The important role and practical significance of investment banks for the development of China's capital market and the deepening of economic reforms. Will help
Yu students fully understand the role of investment banks in the capital market and their important functions in China’s economic reform
Yes, familiar with various basic and innovative businesses of investment banks.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
1. It is the backbone course for the undergraduate major of finance.
2. Familiar with the basic knowledge of investment banking and the main business of investment banking, grasp domestic and foreign investment banking
Business development and development trends of investment banks.
3. Cultivate creative and cutting-edge financial talents.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Investment banks are the product of the development of the modern financial market and are the designers and engineers of financial products. by
The teaching of "Investment Banking" course enables students to understand the emergence, development, role and business of investment banks
The trend of internationalization, and master the main business of investment banks (such as securities underwriting, brokerage and proprietary, corporate
M&A, fund management, venture capital and other businesses) and innovation, and understand from two aspects of theory and practice
The connotation of investment banking.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Basic content: basic knowledge of investment banking, various businesses of investment banking, investment banking management,
Investment bank supervision and the development of investment banks in my country.
2. Focus: Basic knowledge of investment banking, securities issuance and trading, corporate valuation, corporate mergers and acquisitions,
Financial derivatives.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(School hours)
Prepare
Note
1
Overview of Investment Banking and Capital Market
The role of investment banks in the history of China's securities market
Case: Changes in investment banking business in the era of full circulation
4
2
Company restructuring
The purpose of restructuring
The role of restructuring
2
3
Issuance and underwriting of securities
Securities issuance system
Case analysis of stock underwriting and bond underwriting
10
Page 244
4
M&A business
M&A motivations and procedures MBO and LBO
M&A and anti-merger strategy case: M&A case
10
5
Business valuation
Company business analysis
Valuation theory valuation method
6
6
Asset securitization business
Asset securities overview the development history of asset securities
Structure case of asset securities: asset securitization case
6
7
Financial Derivatives Overview of the development history of financial derivatives
The structure of financial derivatives
Case: Financial Derivatives Innovation and Risk Case
10
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (30%) + written test (70%).
7. Formulation Author: Lipu
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Foreign exchange management
Course ID : 160525Z1
Course Name: Foreign Exchange Management
English name : Foreign Exchange Management
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites : International Finance, Macroeconomics, Central Banking
Adapt to major : Finance, International Economics and Trade
Reference materials :
"Foreign Exchange Management-Theory and Practice", Kong Liuliu, etc., Shanghai People's Publishing House (Second Edition), 2010
Course introduction:
The new changes in the foreign exchange management system are for companies, banks, individuals or the government’s foreign exchange management policies.
The strategy will have an important impact. For companies and banks, it is necessary to
The ability to change the rate of risk. For the government’s foreign exchange management department, it is necessary to deal with changes in the foreign exchange management system.
New challenges brought about by globalization, and resolve all kinds of frictions and contradictions that may arise during the transformation of the old and new systems. this
The course mainly describes the basic theories of foreign exchange management and foreign exchange macro management and micro management. The main contents include
The basic theory of foreign exchange and its management, the theory and practice of macro foreign exchange management, the theory of micro foreign exchange risk management
Theory and practice, etc.
Page 245
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Curriculum status: In the wave of internationalization and globalization, international exchanges are becoming increasingly close and important.
The foreign exchange receipts, expenditures, foreign exchange, exchanges, etc. generated by international exchanges are carried out under national control and regulation.
Domestic foreign exchange management policies are the prerequisite for foreign economic and financial exchanges. Although this course is an elective for finance majors
Curriculum, but has its importance in the real context.
Course purpose: to explain the basic theories of foreign exchange and foreign exchange management; various foreign exchange management systems
Degree, including current account foreign exchange management, capital account foreign exchange management, balance of payments management, exchange rate management, foreign
Foreign exchange reserve management, etc.; as well as corporate micro-foreign exchange risk management and methods, etc., reveal the need for the country’s foreign exchange management
And specific management systems, and discuss specific measures for corporate foreign exchange risk management.
Course task: through this course, students are required to have a firm grasp of the basic knowledge and methods of foreign exchange management
And its mutual influence on related macro variables and the national economy, understand the current situation of foreign exchange management at home and abroad, and be familiar with
The basic system of internal foreign exchange management, master the specific measures of corporate foreign exchange risk management, integrate theory with practice,
In actual work, it can accurately grasp the development trend of foreign exchange management, increase the standardization of foreign exchange business operations, and choose
Choose foreign exchange risk management measures that suit the company’s actual conditions.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Foreign exchange management is a highly practical course. In the teaching method, classroom lectures and classroom discussions are adopted.
Discussion, homework and self-study. Teachers respond to the basic concepts, characteristics,
The necessary teaching methods are given, and the key points, difficult contents and practical examples of each chapter are taught in detail. after class homework
In response to current hot issues, submit in the form of a paper based on the actual situation. Students should pay close attention to national policy trends,
Keep track of hot issues in time to increase understanding of national policies.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Basic content of the course: basic principles and methods of foreign exchange management; basic policies of foreign exchange management in my country
Policy and management system; basic situation of foreign exchange management in various countries; basic measures of corporate foreign exchange risk management, etc. (detailed
See 5).
The key and difficult points of the course: the basic characteristics of foreign exchange; the influencing factors of exchange rate and its impact on the economy;
Choice of rate system; current account foreign exchange management; basic system of capital account foreign exchange management and its management necessity
And development trends; basic measures for corporate foreign exchange management, etc.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(School hours)
Prepare
Note
1
Overview of foreign exchange management: foreign exchange characteristics, basic methods and effects of foreign exchange management
Wait
4
2
Current account foreign exchange management: basic framework and system, reform, etc.
8
3 Capital account foreign exchange management: necessity, management system, reform, etc. 8
4 Exchange rate management: the determination and influencing factors of exchange rate,
Page 246
Economic influence, formulation of exchange rate system, etc.
5
Foreign exchange reserve management: scale and structure of foreign exchange reserves
4
6 Enterprise foreign exchange management: objectives, basic measures for foreign exchange risk management, etc. 4
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (30%) + written test (70%).
7. Formulation Author: Chen Jianzhong
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Internet Finance
Course number: 160526Z1
Course Name: Online Finance
English name: E-Finance
Class hours and credits: 16/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: currency and banking, financial risk management, computer network foundation
Adapt to majors: finance, e-commerce
Reference materials:
[1] "Online Finance" (Second Edition) Yue Yiding, Wu Qingtian and Li Mingqing eds, Southeast University Press, 2010
[2] "Network Finance" Zhang Minghong, Chief Editor Zhang Lifang, Science Press, 2010
[3] "Online Financial Services" organized by Alibaba Business School, edited by Chen Jin, Tsinghua University Press,
2011
Course introduction:
This course is an interdisciplinary subject that combines multiple disciplines such as finance, computer science and network technology.
It is also a subject in continuous development. The course is based on the network that currently carries more financial activities on the Internet
Currency, online banking, online insurance, online financial market, etc. as the main content, introduces the conditions of the network economy
Changes and characteristics of the currency, banking, insurance, and financial markets; the operation mode of online finance to traditional finance,
The influence of operating rules and service content; the operating principles, development rules and operating procedures of online finance;
Types of financial risks, reasons for their formation, and basic methods and supervisory systems for network financial risk control.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is one of the professional courses for undergraduates majoring in finance. This course aims to enable students to
Understand the changes and characteristics of currency, banking, insurance, and financial markets under the conditions of the network economy, and use the learned
Economic and financial theories and methods to analyze the operation mode, operating rules and service
Content; familiar with the operating principles and development rules of online finance; master electronic money, online banking,
Page 247
Operational procedures and characteristics of securities trading, online insurance, and online financial markets; those who understand online personal financial management
Basic principles and operating methods; understand the types, causes and control of online financial risks
The basic methods and regulatory system.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The basic requirement of this course is to pay attention to the application of practicality and simulation in the network finance course, and strive for luck
Use the latest achievements of multimedia computer technology and network technology to fully reflect the theoretical and operability of network finance
And technical characteristics; students are required to master the development and operating procedures of network financial theory through learning,
At the same time, he can master the business technology and management of online banking, online securities trading, online insurance and online financial markets.
Principles; and learn to use the relevant theories and knowledge of online finance to analyze financial phenomena and
Problems, improve the ability to analyze and solve problems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Fundamental contents:
This course is based on online currency, online banking, online insurance,
The network financial market is the main content, introducing currency, banking, insurance, and financial markets under the conditions of the network economy.
The changes and characteristics of the market; the influence of online finance on the operation mode, operating rules and service content of traditional finance;
The operating principles, development rules and operating procedures of online finance; the types, causes and online financial risks of online finance
The basic methods and supervisory system of network financial risk control.
Focus:
Electronic money and its influence on currency circulation and central bank monetary policy; online banking, online securities
The operating principles, development rules and operating procedures of trading, online insurance, and online financial markets.
Difficulty: The basic methods of online financial risk control and its supervisory system.
Contents of each chapter
Chapter One Overview of Online Finance
The first section of the network economy and the rise of network finance
1. The meaning and characteristics of the network economy
2. The inevitability of the rise of online finance
3. Specific manifestations of the rise of online finance
Section 2 The concept, content and characteristics of online finance
1. The concept of online finance
2. The content of online finance
Third, the characteristics of online finance
Section 3 The Influence and Function of Online Finance
1. Online finance has changed the structure and operation mode of traditional financial institutions
2. Online finance greatly reduces financial transaction costs
3. The online financial industry can provide convenient and diversified services, and the efficiency of financial services has been significantly improved
4. The information acquisition and transmission capabilities of financial institutions have become increasingly prominent
5. Financial security issues are even more important
6. Online finance makes the boundaries between different financial institutions, financial institutions and non-financial institutions tend to be
Blurred, financial disintermediation intensified
7. Online finance challenges the traditional financial supervision system
Section 4 Overview of the Development of Online Finance at Home and Abroad
Page 248
1. Overview of Internet Banking Development
2. Overview of the development of online securities
3. Overview of Internet Insurance Development
Chapter 2 Electronic Money
The first section of the production and characteristics of electronic money
1. The development of currency forms and the emergence of electronic money
Second, the definition of electronic money
Three, the characteristics of electronic money
Section 2 Types of Electronic Money
1. Stored-value card-type electronic money
2. Credit card application electronic money
3. Deposit-use electronic money
Four, cash simulation electronic money
Section 3 Functions and Functions of Electronic Money
1. The functions of electronic money
2. The role of electronic money at the micro level
3. The role of electronic money at the macro level
Section 4 The Impact of Electronic Money on the Payment System
1. Electronic payment system
2. Modern payment system framework
3. The impact of electronic money on the security of the payment system
4. Measures to improve the security of electronic money payment
Section V impact of electronic money on the central bank's position wrong! No bookmarks defined.
1. The impact of electronic money on the central bank's monopoly on currency issuance
2. The impact of electronic money on the seigniorage revenue and independence of the central bank
3. The impact of electronic money on central bank assets and capabilities
Section 6 The Impact of Electronic Money on Monetary Policy
1. The influence of electronic money on the level of money supply and the law of money circulation
2. The impact of electronic money on the intermediary target of monetary policy
3. The impact of electronic money on monetary policy tools
4. The impact of electronic money on the monetary policy transmission mechanism
V. The impact of electronic money on the coordination of domestic and foreign monetary policies
Chapter 3 Introduction to Internet Banking
Section I Introduction to Internet banking error! No bookmarks defined.
1. The impact of the development of the network economy on traditional banks
2. Definition of Internet Banking
3. The emergence of online banking
Fourth, the basic features and functions of online banking
Section 2 The Influence of the Development of Internet Banking on Traditional Banks
1. Internet banking has changed the business philosophy of commercial banks
2. Internet banking makes commercial bank information assets an independent bank asset
3. The way that online banking enables commercial banks to obtain economic benefits has fundamentally changed
4. Online banking has changed the distribution model of traditional banks
Page 249
Section 3 Development Model and Organizational Structure of Internet Banking
1. The development model of online banking
2. The Organizational Structure of Online Banking
Section 4 Main Business and Basic Process of Internet Banking
1. Public information service business
2. Personal customer business
3. Corporate customer business
Fourth, the core of the Call Center of online banking-CRM
Section 5 Management of Internet Banking
1. Development and Management of Internet Banking
Second, the bank's marketing network management mistake! No bookmarks defined.
Three, function realization
Chapter IV Online Securities
Section 1: Overview of Internet Securities
1. The concept of online securities
Second, the characteristics of online securities
3. Comparison of online securities business and traditional securities business
Section 2 Online Securities Business
1. Online securities issuance
2. Online Securities Trading
3. Online securities settlement
Section 3 The Impact of Online Securities on the Securities Market
1. The positive impact of online securities on the securities market
2. Challenges of online securities trading to the securities market
Chapter 5 Network Insurance
Section 1 Overview of Network Insurance
1. The concept of cyber insurance
Second, the characteristics of network insurance
Third, the advantages of network insurance
Fourth, the role and impact of cyber insurance
5. The development model of cyber insurance
6. Problems and development trends in the development of network insurance
Section 2 Network Insurance Business
1. Basic business of cyber insurance
2. Subsidiary business of cyber insurance
3. The business process of cyber insurance
Section 3 Management of Network Insurance
1. Organization and management of cyber insurance
2. Marketing management of network insurance
3. Risk management of cyber insurance
Chapter VI Online Financial Market
Section 1 The emergence and characteristics of the online financial market
1. Changes in the financial market under the network economy-the emergence of the network financial market
Page 250
2. The definition of online financial market
Third, the characteristics of the online financial market
Section 2 Online Financial Investment
1. The meaning of online financial investment
2. Advantages of online financial investment
Third, the characteristics of online financial investment
Fourth, the basic method of online financial investment
5. Online personal finance
Section 3 Network International Capital Flow
1. The definition of online international capital
2. Characteristics of international capital flows on the Internet
3. The impact of international capital flows on the Internet
Section 1 Online Financial Risks
1. The concept of online financial risk
2. Types of online financial risks
3. Characteristics of online financial risks
Fourth, the causes of online financial risks
Section 2 Online Financial Supervision
1. The meaning and purpose of online financial supervision
2. Basic principles of online financial supervision
3. Contents and measures of online financial supervision
Fourth, the complexity of online financial supervision
Chapter 8 Financial Network System and Network Financial Security
Section 1 Introduction to the main financial network system
1. Major international financial network systems
2. my country's financial network system
Section 2 Information Security of Financial Network System
1. An overview of online financial security issues
two. Network Information Security Technology
3. Network and application system security technology
Four, network security protocol
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Prepare
Note
1
Overview of Internet Finance
1
2
Electronic money
2
3
online bank
2
4
Internet Securities
2
Page 251
5
Cyber ​​insurance
2
6
Internet financial market
2
7
Internet financial risk control and supervision
2
8
Financial Network System
1
6. Course assessment method
The overall assessment score of this course is composed of two parts:
First: Normal grades account for 30%, of which class attendance accounts for 10%, and homework and answering class questions account for 10%.
Class discussion accounts for 10%.
Second: The final closed-book exam accounts for 70%.
7. Formulation Author: Wu Qingtian
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Modern financial business
Course number: 160527Z1
Course Name: Modern Financial Business
English name: Modern Finance Practices
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: International Finance, International Settlement, Commercial Banking, Insurance, Securities Investment
Adapt to major: Finance major
Reference materials:
"Modern Financial Business" (2nd Edition), Financial English Certificate Examination Committee, Economic Science Press,
2011
Course introduction:
Modern financial business courses include China’s financial industry, financial institution supervision, foreign exchange system, accounting,
Intermediary business, loans, international settlement, securities and futures markets, insurance foundation, etc. In the way the course is taught
Bilingual teaching will be adopted, combined with the latest developments of Chinese and Western banks and financial institutions, emphasizing theory
Connect with reality to enhance students' practical work ability and ability to analyze and solve problems. Cultivate both proficient
Intermediate and senior compound talents who represent international financial business and can use English for financial business operation and management.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is one of the professional elective courses for the finance major of our school, and it is also one of the courses using bilingual teaching.
One. Its purpose and task is to comprehensively and systematically teach students relevant theories and practices of the financial industry. through learning,
To enable students to fully understand the characteristics and features of various businesses around the actual situation of modern banking
Reflect on the operation process and development direction, enhance students’ actual working ability in the financial industry and
Page 252
To meet the requirements of the internationalization of the financial industry.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Aims to train students who are proficient in modern international financial business and can use English to operate and manage financial business
Intermediate and senior compound talents. Familiar with the basic principles and procedures of financial business operations, and be able to read and write proficiently
Financial business English articles.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Course content includes China’s financial industry (Overview of the Financial Industry in
China), Supervision of Financial Institutions, foreign exchange system
(Foreign Exchange System), accounting (Accounting), intermediate business (Intermediary
Service), Loans (Loans), International Settlement, Securities and Futures
Securities and Futures Markets, Fundamental Insurance
Wait. Bilingual teaching will be adopted in the teaching method of the course, combined with the development of Chinese and Western banks and financial institutions
The latest developments, emphasizing the integration of theory with practice, enhancing students’ practical work ability and analyzing and solving problems
Ability.
The difficulty of the course lies in: banking supervision, foreign exchange system and reform, intermediary business, loans and international settlement
The physical operation and understanding of international conventions.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
1
Overview of the Financial
Industry in China
4
2
Supervision of Financial
Institutions
6
3
The Chinese Foreign Exchange
System
6
4
Accounting
6
5
Intermediary Services
6
6
Loans
6
7
International Settlement
6
8
Securities and Futures Markets
4
9
Fundamental Insurance
4
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of usual grades includes: class attendance, class discussion, which accounts for about 30% of the total evaluation grade.
Page 253
Examination: Final written examination (open book or closed book can be considered). Written test scores account for about the total evaluation score
70%.
7. Formulation Author: Zhu Ning
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
project financing
Course number: 160528Z1
Course Title: Project Finance
English name: Project Finance
Class hours and credits: 40/2.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: Currency and Banking, International Finance, Technical Economics
Adapt to major: Finance major
Reference materials:
[1] "Project Financing" (Second Edition) Li Chunhao, Qu Jiulong, Science Press, 2009
[2] "Project Financing" by Zhang Jijing, CITIC Press, 2003;
[3] "Project Financing" (third edition) edited by Jiang Xianling, China Finance Press, 2010.5;
[4]Modern Project Finance A Casebook, Benjamin C.Esty. John Wiley &
Sons, Inc, 2009.
[5] "Project Financing Theory and Cases" Ye Sudong, Tsinghua University Press
Course introduction:
The main content of this course includes: project financing overview, project financing overview, project investment structure, project
Project financing guarantee, project financing model (including project financing model foundation, BOT model and ABS financing, etc.),
Project financing options, project financing risk management, and project financing case analysis.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is one of the professional elective courses for undergraduates majoring in finance. Through teaching, make students system
Understand the basic characteristics, framework structure and scope of application of project financing;
The influence of project financing arrangements and mode selection; familiar with the basic operation methods of several main project financing modes;
Know how to arrange a suitable, competitive, and
And the financing plan required by all parties who have direct or indirect interest in project development;
It can effectively separate the risks of the project from the risks of all investors to a certain extent.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The basic requirements of this course are: focus on practical and operational application in project financing courses, and strive to
Introduce the current successful cases of project financing at home and abroad and the latest results; fully reflect the theoretical and
Page 254
Features of strong operability and technology; through one semester of study, according to the specific characteristics of the construction project,
Carry out financing decision analysis, and design a reasonable and feasible project financing plan.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Basic content: This course is from the perspectives of project investors and lenders, and is
The basic principles, methods, structures and cases of project financing are systematically explained and introduced, including project financing
The connotation, basic features, framework structure and scope of application; the organization of project financing and the relationship between the financing parties;
The investment structure of the project and its impact on project financing arrangements; main project financing models; project financing
Financial arrangement; guarantee and risk management of project financing; analysis of typical cases of project financing.
Key points: the basic characteristics of project financing; the basic design methods of several major project investment structures; projects
Guarantee and risk management of financing.
Difficulties: the choice of several main project financing modes and their basic operation methods; the guarantee and
Risk Management.
Contents of each chapter and key difficulties:
Chapter One Project Financing Overview
The first section of the meaning of project financing
1. Traditional financing methods: also known as corporate financing or general loans
2. The meaning of project financing
Section 2 Features of Project Financing
1. Project Orientation
2. Limited recourse
3. Risk sharing
4. Non-corporate debt financing
5. Diversified credit structure
6. Higher financing costs and longer time required
Section 3 Application Scope and Procedures of Project Financing
1. The scope of application of project financing
2. Project financing procedures
Chapter 2 Organization of Project Financing
The first party or participant of project financing
1. Actual investors of the project
2. Project company
3. Project loan bank
4. Purchasers of project products or users of project facilities
5. Engineering company/contracting company for project construction
6. Suppliers of project equipment, energy and raw materials
7. Project financing consultant
8. Relevant government agencies
9. Legal and tax consultants
Section 2 Basic Documents and Main Contracts of Project Financing
1. Project files
2. Financing documents
3. Guarantee and mortgage documents
Page 255
Four, supporting documents
5. Legal opinion
Chapter Three Project Feasibility Analysis and Structural Design
Section 1 Project Feasibility Analysis
1. Basis of project feasibility analysis
2. General requirements for project feasibility analysis
3. The main content of the feasibility analysis
Section 2 Project Financing Structure Design
1. Several main considerations of project investment structure design
2. Corporate joint venture structure
3. Partnership structure
4. Non-corporate joint venture structure
V. Trust Fund Structure
6. The impact of investment structure on project financing arrangements
Chapter 4 Major Project Financing Models
The first section project financing model design
1. How to achieve limited recourse
2. How to share project risks
3. How to use project tax losses to reduce investment costs and financing costs
4. How to realize the investors' requirement for 100% financing of the project
5. How to deal with the relationship between project financing and market arrangements
6. How to combine the short-term financing strategy and long-term financing strategy of project investors
7. How to realize investors' requirements for non-corporate debt financing
Section 2 Project financing model directly arranged by investors
1. Basic ideas
2. Advantages of Investors Arranging Project Financing Directly
3. Shortcomings of Investors' Direct Project Financing
Section 3 Investors arrange project financing models through the project company
1. Basic ideas
2. The advantages of arranging project financing through the project company
3. Disadvantages of arranging project financing through the project company
Section 4 Project Financing Model Based on "Facility Use Agreement"
A basic idea
2. The advantages of leveraged lease project financing
3. The disadvantages of leveraged lease project financing
Section 5 Project financing model based on "leverage lease"
1. Basic ideas
2. The advantages of leveraged lease project financing
3. The disadvantages of leveraged lease project financing
Section 6 BOT financing model
1. The basic idea of ​​BOT financing model
Second, the main content of the BOT model
3. The goals of the main participants in the BOT project
Page 256
Section 7 ABS financing model
1. Basic ideas
2. Operation process of ABS financing model
3. The role of ABS financing model
Section 8 Project financing model based on "production payment"
1. Project financing model based on "production payment"
2. Project financing model based on "gold loan"
Chapter V Fund Selection for Project Financing
The first section of the project’s fund composition and source of factors to be considered
1. The ratio of debt to equity funds
2. Reasonable use structure of project funds
3. The impact of tax arrangements on financing costs
Section 2 Equity Capital and Quasi-equity Capital
1. Equity capital
2. Quasi-equity capital
3. Equity funds in the form of loan guarantees
4. Other forms of credit guarantee as equity funds
Section 3 Debt Fund Arrangement
1. Determine the basic structural framework of debt funds according to financing requirements
2. Determine the basic form of debt funds based on market conditions
Chapter VI Project Financing Guarantee
Section 1 Overview of Project Financing Guarantee
1. The composition of project financing guarantee
2. Project Guarantor
Section 2 Scope and Steps of Project Financing Guarantee
1. Scope of project financing guarantee
2. Steps of project financing guarantee
Section 3 Types and Forms of Project Financing Guarantee
1. Types of project financing guarantees
2. Main forms of guarantee in project financing
Chapter 7 Risk Management in Project Financing
Section 1 Risk Composition of Project Financing
1. According to the stage of project risk
2. Divided according to the manifestation of project risk
3. Divided according to the input elements of the project
4. Divided according to the controllability of project risks
Section 2 Risk Management in Project Financing
1. The core risk management of the project
2. Environmental risk management of the project
3. Financial risk management
Chapter 8 Project Financing Cases
Section 1 Project background analysis
Section 2 Analysis of Project Financing Composition
Page 257
Section 3 Comparison of financing methods
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
1
Introduction to project financing
4
2
Project financing organization
4
3
Investment structure of project financing
6
4
Main project financing model
10
5
Funding arrangements for project financing
4
6
Project financing guarantee
4
7
Risk management of project financing
3
8
Project financing case analysis
3
review
2
6. Course assessment method
The overall assessment score of this course is composed of two parts:
First: Normal grades account for 30%, of which attendance accounts for 10%, homework and answering classroom questions account for 10%, case studies
Analysis 10%;
Second: The final closed-book exam accounts for 70%.
7. Formulation Author: Wu Qingtian
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Credit Management
Course ID : 160529Z1
Course Name: Credit Management
English name: Enterprise Credit Management
Class hours and credits : 32 /2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites : Macroeconomics, Microeconomics, Money and Banking
Adapt to major : Finance, Business Administration
Page 258
Reference materials:
Textbook:
"Enterprise Credit Management", Zhu Rongen, Ding Haoliang, China Times Economic Press, January 2005
reference book:
1. "Enterprise Credit Management" (first edition), edited by Li Min and others, Fudan University Press, July 2004;
2. "Personal Credit Information System" (first edition), edited by Chunan Zhong, China Finance Press, 2002
April;
3. "Principles of Enterprise Credit Investigation" (first edition), editor-in-chief by Zhong Xiaoying, China Finance Press, April 2004
4. "Credit Investigation Theory and Practice" (first edition) Du Jinfu, edited by Zhang Xinze, China Finance Press,
July 2004
5. "Overview of Credit Investigation Systems in Some Countries in the World" (First Edition), edited by Wang Xiaoyi, Economic Science Press,
May 2002
6. "Enterprise and Consumer Credit Management", Junyue Lin, Shanghai University of Finance and Economics Press, January 2005
7. "Credit Management", Zhu Yifeng, Wu Jingmei, Renmin University Press, May 2005
Course introduction:
"Credit" has gone beyond the limits of the moral category, and appears more in the field of economics and management.
in. This marks the vigorous development of "credit management" practical activities and heralds a new discipline-credit
The emergence and development of management. This course is highly applicable and focuses on planning scientific credit management process foundation
The above describes the practice of credit management, and discusses the informatization of corporate credit management and related legal issues in credit management
Make an introduction.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Enterprise credit management can be used as an elective course for the majors of finance and business administration. Pass this course
To learn about the meaning, principles and methods of corporate credit management, and to engage in credit management and its
He laid a good professional foundation for his management work.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course is practical. Students are required to understand the types and causes of corporate credit risks; master corporate credit
Management objectives, priorities and measures; have an understanding of the current development situation at home and abroad, and are basically competent for credit assistant positions
Bit work.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Basic content of the course:
This course introduces the main body of credit management, the social credit system, the principles of formulating corporate credit policies and corporate
The content of credit policies, customer management and credit risk transfer methods.
main difficulty:
Credit management practices, including credit investigation, credit risk analysis and control, credit sales policy formulation,
Credit risk transfer and accounts receivable management, etc.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
Page 259
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
Teaching content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
1
General
2
2
Credit management agencies and personnel
2
3
Enterprise credit management process
2
4
Credit Investigation
4
5
Credit risk analysis and control
4
6
Credit sales policy
4
7
Credit risk transfer
4
8
Accounts receivable management
4
9
Credit Management Informationization
2
10
Related legal issues in credit management
2
review
2
6. Course assessment method
Attendance (10%) + classroom discussion (20%) + closed book exam (70%)
7. Formulation writer: Jinfaqi
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Behavioral Finance
Course number: 160530Z1
Course Name: Behavioral Finance
English name: Behavioral Finance
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 3, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: Economics, Financial Markets, Securities Investment, Corporate Finance
Adapt to major: Finance
Reference materials:
"Behavioral Finance", Rao Yulei, Sheng Hu, Machinery Industry Press, 2010.7
Course introduction:
This course is an interdisciplinary subject that combines multiple disciplines such as finance, psychology, and behavioral science.
A subject in continuous development, it is currently one of the elective courses for master's degree in economics and management in some domestic and foreign universities
One. The course starts with the flaws of the efficient market hypothesis and explores the significance of behavioral finance theory for theoretical development.
Combining with the anomalies of domestic and foreign securities markets, recognize and understand the operating characteristics of financial markets and the psychology behind them
Theory, based on the analysis of human’s psychological and behavioral characteristics under uncertain decision-making, master prospect theory and
Page 260
Its replacement of the expected utility theory is aimed at the psychological and behavioral deviations of investors in financial market transactions.
Analyze its impact on asset pricing equilibrium, and propose behavioral asset pricing theory, behavioral portfolio theory, and behavioral
Is an investment strategy. Through the teaching of this course, students will learn to use the relevant theories and knowledge of psychology,
Analyze financial phenomena and problems in real life, and improve the ability to analyze and solve problems.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
The purpose of this course teaching is to let students understand the frontier and more realistic financial theory based on the psychological perspective
Understand the operating laws of financial markets, and master rational and scientific financial investment decision-making procedures and methods.
First, a basic introduction to the development of traditional financial theory, through the display of the results of psychological experiments
And the analysis of human cognitive characteristics and limitations, to analyze the psychological and behavioral deviations in the process of human investment decision-making,
And understand the impact of these deviations on investor’s individual behavior characteristics, group behavior characteristics, and financial market equilibrium.
The impact of sex and stability. On this basis, deduced behavior-based asset pricing theory and asset portfolio theory
Theory, to provide students with a deep understanding of financial market information efficiency and investment portfolio selection to provide a theoretical basis for more scientific
Rational investment decisions provide theoretical guidance.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The course requires students to understand the shortcomings of efficient markets and rational people’s assumptions, and understand how investors have made judgments and decisions.
Cognitive bias and emotional and behavioral bias in the process, to understand investors’ influence on asset prices in the psychological process of investors
Influence mechanism. In the learning process, students are required to collect relevant materials outside class and actively participate in class discussions in class.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The focus of this course is to understand the theoretical premise of the hypothesis of rational man and economic man and its defects;
Understand the cognitive and psychological biases, behavioral biases, and behavioral biases that exist in human financial investment decisions
Market inefficiency caused by the blind obedience of individual investors and agency conflicts of institutional investors and
The characteristics and harm of capital market bubbles caused by the promotion of society and media. The difficulty of the course is behavior
Asset pricing theory and behavioral asset portfolio theory, due to their in-depth research
It is difficult for students to understand, so in the teaching requirements, you can only outline the two aspects.
Point and ignore the model discussion.
4. Requirements for course practice
5. Course teaching hours allocation
This course has a total of 32 hours, including 29 hours for teaching and 3 hours for experiments. The specific hours are allocated as follows:
chapter
Inside
Content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Prepare
Note
chapter
content
learn
Time
Which experiment (on
Machine hours)
Remarks
1
Overview
1
2
The Efficient Market Hypothesis and Its Defects
2
3
Anomalies in the stock market
2
4
The Challenge of Psychological Experiments to Expected Utility Theory
2
5
Cognitive bias
2
1
Page 261
6
Psychological deviations and preferences
3
1
7
Prospect theory
3
1
8
Individual Psychology and Behavior Deviation in Financial Market
3
9
Characteristics of group behavior in financial markets and financial bubbles 3
10
Behavioral Asset Pricing Theory
2
11
Behavioral Portfolio Theory
2
12
Behavioral investment decision
2
13
Frontiers of Behavioral Finance Research
2
The course arranges 2-3 classroom psychological characteristic experiments: the "cash auction" experiment is used to deepen students
A deep understanding of the vicious capital increase phenomenon caused by overconfidence and confirmation bias; the number of "beauty pageant games"
The word experiment is used to deepen students’ equilibrium of the game between individual rationality and group irrationality in securities investment
understanding.
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of this course is divided into two parts: usual assessment (50%) and final assessment (50%). The former is mainly
Usually grades, including attendance, homework, classroom questions, discussion speeches, essays or survey reports; the latter is for the duration
The final proposition exam. Combine the two to assess the comprehensive performance.
7. Formulation writer: Rao Yulei
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Securities and futures trading simulation
Course number: 160531Z1
Course Name: Securities and Futures Trading Simulation
English name: Simulation of Securities and Futures transaction
Class hours and credits: 2 weeks/2 (in-class computer hours: 32)
Prerequisites: Currency and Banking, International Finance, Financial Markets, Securities Investment, Futures and Futures
right
Adapt to major: finance, financial management, international economics and trade
Reference materials:
"Securities, Futures, Foreign Exchange Simulation Experiments", edited by Li Jianyuan, Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press.
Course introduction:
This course is a comprehensive professional experimental course that cultivates students' comprehensive analysis ability and investment quality. Pass the certificate
The investment experiment of securities and futures, as well as the purpose, result and summary of each experiment, repeated verification
Whether the analysis and prediction of students are in line with reality, and mobilize students’ enthusiasm for obtaining investment information, so as to master the
Information methods, the establishment of an analysis framework for investment practical technology; allow students to fully experience the financial theory, investment
The application of capital theory, basic analysis methods, and technical analysis methods in securities, futures and foreign exchange investment practices
Page 262
use. Help students establish rational investment concepts, cultivate a good investment mentality and psychological quality.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a compulsory experimental course for finance, international economics and trade, and financial management. This course
A comprehensive professional program designed completely in accordance with the experimental teaching concept to cultivate students' comprehensive analytical ability and investment quality
Industry experiment courses.
Purposes and tasks include: (1) Integrate finance, securities investment, international finance and futures investment, etc.
The courses that are closely connected in theory and cross each other in reality are organically connected through experimental classes.
To train students to understand the inherent capital flow between the money market, capital market, foreign exchange market and futures market
The ability to grasp macroeconomic trends in contact; (2) Through the investment experiment of securities and futures and each actual
The purpose, results and summary of the three links of the test, repeatedly verify whether the students’ analysis and prediction are in line with reality, and adjust
Motivate students to obtain investment information enthusiasm, so as to master the methods of obtaining information and establish practical investment techniques
Analysis framework; (3) Allow students to fully experience the financial theory, investment theory and basic analysis methods and techniques they have learned.
The application of technical analysis methods in securities, futures and foreign exchange investment practices. Help students build rational investment
Concept, cultivate a good investment attitude and psychological quality.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
First, students are required to fully master and understand the basic theories of securities trading and analysis before the course
And basic methods.
Second, each experiment class should have a clear experiment purpose and content.
Third, the experimental platform and software should be a complete set of financial experimental solutions that can meet the needs of teaching
Yes, the simulated trading environment can be used to strengthen students’ understanding of financial knowledge and train students to practice trading
Ability to provide students with majors in finance, economic management, investment analysis and other related majors going to society
An internship environment combining theory with practice.
Fourth, the course time is synchronized with the actual trading time.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Basic knowledge of trading:
Including: disk recognition, K-line analysis, pattern analysis, index analysis, tangent analysis, wave analysis.
2. Investment diary writing.
3. Writing of investment reports.
4. Requirements for course practice
It is required to participate in stock and futures trading on the trading day within two weeks;
You can continue trading within 6 weeks after two weeks, and the trading results will be counted as admission points.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
2 weeks intensive internship + 6 weeks decentralized trading
6. Course assessment method
Coursework (40%) + classroom attendance (30%) + transaction records (20%) + income ranking (10
%) = 100%
Page 263
7. Formulation Author: Sheng Hu
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Central Banking
Course number: 160532Z1
Course Name: Central Banking
English name: Central Bank
Class hours and credits: 40/2.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: Western Economics, Money and Banking, International Finance, Commercial Bank Operation and Management
Adapt to major: Finance
Reference materials:
[1] "Central Banking" (3rd edition), Wang Guangqian and others, Higher Education Press, 2011
[2] "Central Banking" (1st edition), Ruan Jia et al., Tsinghua University Press, 2011
Course introduction :
Central Banking is the study of the laws of modern economic and financial operations from a macro perspective, discussing economic and financial stability
A discipline that defines the development mechanism. The course is guided by monetary and financial theory to study the emergence and development of central banks
Development, nature, function, operating mechanism and the objective laws of macroeconomic regulation and management, research based on economics
The basic principles, experience and methods of the modern central bank management system formed by the monetary policy requirements of the economic development law
Law integrates theory, business and practice.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is the core professional course of the finance major, which is to study modern economy and financial operation from a macro perspective
Laws, a course that explores economic and financial development mechanisms. The central bank is the currency and credit of the whole society
Regulators and special institutions that formulate and implement monetary policies, and supervise and manage the financial industry, in the modern economy and financial system
The status and role of the department have been extremely prominent.
Through the study of this course, understand the general laws of the emergence and development of central banks and the characteristics of central banks.
The basic theories of quality, function, status, etc.; the business operation of the central bank; the central bank as the country’s highest financial
Theories and operations of the regulatory authorities and the macroeconomic air regulation departments in formulating and implementing monetary policies.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The course requires students to master the basic theories and knowledge about central bank
Understanding of the important position and role in the economic system, familiar with the various business operations of the central bank,
Observe and analyze the overall economic operation from a perspective, improve the understanding and analysis ability of the economy and financial regulation
force.
Page 264
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The teaching content of this course is to enable students to understand the formation and development of the central bank system. In this context, detailed
Explain in detail the various businesses of the central bank (including assets, liabilities, payment and settlement services, etc.), with emphasis on lectures
The target selection and decision-making of the central bank’s monetary policy, the selection and use of monetary policy tools, and the monetary policy
The implementation effect of the policy. In order to improve students’ ability to analyze and solve problems, they will also pay attention to
Focusing on integrating theory with practice, using modern economic analysis methods and means,
Type representatives) to analyze the problems and policies they have formulated.
The focus and difficulty of the course are monetary policy and financial regulation.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of usual grades includes: attending class, class discussion, writing extra-curricular essay report, accounting for approximately the total score
30% of it.
Examination: Final written examination (open book or closed book can be considered). Written test scores account for about the total evaluation score
70%.
7. Formulation Author: Zhu Ning
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Commercial Banking Simulation
Course ID : 160533Z1
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Prepare
Note
1
The formation and development of the central bank system
4
2
Central Bank Balance Sheet
4
3
Central Bank Asset Business
4
4
Central Bank Liability Business
4
5
Other Central Bank Business
2
6
The Target Selection and Decision of the Central Bank's Monetary Policy
6
7
Central Bank Monetary Policy Tools and Business Operations
6
8
Monetary Policy's Mechanism and Effect Test
4
9
Central Bank and Foreign Exchange Management
4
10
External financial relations and business dealings of the Central Bank
2
Page 265
Course Title : Commercial Banking Business Simulation
English name : Commercial Banking Simulation
Class hours and credits: 2 weeks/2 (including experimental hours: 2 weeks)
Prerequisite course requirements : Commercial Banking Management
Adapt to major : Finance major
Reference materials:
"Commercial Bank Comprehensive Business Training Course", edited by Pang Haoyong, Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press, 2007
Course introduction:
In the financial simulation environment, the commercial banking simulation teaching platform is based on the current domestic commercial banking industry
Business system as a reference to restore the business systems of major commercial banks to the greatest extent, allowing students to pass through the gate
The study and practical operation of the course can fully grasp the current practical operation skills of the banking industry, thus greatly
Improve the employability and job ability of financial graduates, and change the traditional
The phenomenon of weak practical ability caused by practice.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a compulsory practical course for undergraduate majors in finance.
This course is designed completely according to the experimental teaching concept and is used to cultivate students' practical ability in banking business.
Forced professional experimental courses. In the financial simulation environment, each experiment is based on specific cases, highlighting key points,
Targeted teaching not only enables students to understand the linear operating procedures of various banking operations, but also through various
The data on the accounting statements enables students to familiarize themselves with the accounting operations of various banking operations, which is consistent with the theoretical knowledge of books.
Combine. Through the study of this course, students systematically master the various businesses of modern commercial banks. Focus on training
Cultivate students' learning ability, judgment ability, operation ability and analysis ability.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
First, students are required to fully grasp and understand the main business of modern commercial banks before the course.
The scope and types of services.
Second, each experiment class should have a clear experiment purpose and content.
Third, the experimental platform and software are a complete set of financial laboratory solutions. This course requires students to
After the course of study, systematically master the operation process of various main business of modern commercial bank, including
Personal savings business, corporate deposit business, corporate loan business, personal loan business, intermediary business, settlement business
Services, remittance services, etc., basically to the extent that they can be employed as soon as they graduate.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The banking simulation teaching platform adopts the mode of experimental courses. Modern Commercial Bank
Based on various main businesses. According to the planning and design of teaching objectives, the course content includes practical lectures on business processes
Solutions, business introduction, related vouchers, question bank and simulation experiments, which provide students with basic principles
From knowledge learning to simulation practice, and finally comprehensive assessment and evaluation such a complete step-by-step experiment
Cheng.
The bank simulation teaching platform is based on the current main business of commercial banks, specially designed and divided
9 experimental projects, the most comprehensive and detailed quantification of the bank’s various businesses, allowing students to understand the
Business operations.
Key points and difficulties: the linear operation process and ledger operation of each bank's main business.
Page 266
4. Requirements for course practice
The banking simulation teaching platform adopts the mode of experimental courses. Student business in the financial laboratory
Computer learning on the banking simulation platform for 2 weeks.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
This course has a total of 2 weeks (10 days) and is arranged at the beginning of the seventh semester. The specific hours are allocated as follows:
time
Inside
Content
Teaching and computer hours
first day
Experiment preparation
8
the next day
Experimental Project 1-Personal Savings-Passbook, Certificate of Deposit Business
Service
8
Third day
Experimental Project 2-Personal Savings-One Card, Personal
Cheque business
8
Fourth day
Experimental Project 3-Corporate Deposit Business
8
Fifth day
Experimental Project 4-Corporate Loan Business
8
Sixth day
Experimental Project 5-Personal Loan Business
8
The seventh day
Experimental Project 6-Intermediary Business
8
Eighth day
Experimental Project 7-Settlement Business
8
ninth day
Experimental Project 8-Remittance Business
8
tenth day
Assessment
8
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of this course is divided into two parts: usual assessment (50%) and final assessment (50%). The former is mainly
Daily results, including attendance, homework, computer practice time, computer performance, etc., with the help of bank simulation teaching level
The built-in teaching aid evaluation system in Taichung is automatically realized, and students are learning the course and simulating the actual operation process
In the system, the system records and evaluates student performance in real time. The latter is the operational assessment of experimental projects. Combined evaluation
Set comprehensive results.
7. Author: Wei Ping
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Rural Finance
Course number: 160534Z1
Course Title: Rural Finance
English name: Rural finance
Page 267
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: Economics, Money and Banking, Finance
Adapt to major: Finance major
Reference materials:
[1] "Rural Finance" (1st edition), Ma Shuguang, Qiao Yu, etc., Peking University Press, 2008
year
[2] "Rural Finance" (1st edition), edited by He Guangwen, China Agricultural University Press, 2011
year
[3] "Rural Finance" (1st edition), edited by Dong Xiaolin, Science Press, 2012
Course introduction:
This course provides a panoramic and systematic introduction to various fields of rural finance. The content of the course involves rural areas.
Cooperative Finance, Rural Private Finance, Agricultural Policy Finance, Rural Microfinance, Rural SME Financing,
Agricultural futures, agricultural insurance, etc. The course content integrates basic and cutting-edge, theoretical and practical
Together, we focus not only on the accurate interpretation of basic theories and basic concepts, but also on the results of cutting-edge academic research
And analysis of the latest financial practices.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Rural finance is an important professional course for finance majors. Through the teaching of this course, students will be
Have a more comprehensive understanding and a deeper understanding of the basic theories and basic knowledge of finance, and have a deeper understanding of the rural financial system,
Rural financial markets, rural microfinance, rural SME financing, agricultural insurance, agricultural product futures, and
And foreign rural finance and other aspects of the basic content has a relatively systematic grasp, and can comprehensively use modern economics
Relevant theories and viewpoints analyze the new situations and new problems in the development of rural finance in my country.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Understand and master the basic theories and basic knowledge of rural finance, and be familiar with the development of rural finance at home and abroad,
And be able to comprehensively use the principles of modern economics to analyze and study the hot spots in my country’s rural financial reform and development,
Difficulties and focal issues.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The entire teaching content includes seven chapters and twenty-two chapters: The first general introduction introduces the research methods and methods of rural finance
Research framework, Chapter 2 to Chapter 7 respectively introduce rural cooperative finance, rural private finance, and agricultural policy
Finance, rural microfinance, financing of rural SMEs, agricultural product futures and agricultural insurance. The key is
Rural microfinance, rural SME financing, rural private finance, rural cooperative finance, the difficulty lies in rural areas
Innovation of financial products and services. The specific content of each chapter is arranged as follows:
The first summary
Chapter One Introduction to Rural Finance: Methods and Framework
Section 1 Research on the significance of rural finance
Section 2 Research Objects and Basic Categories of Rural Finance
Section 3 Research Methods of Rural Finance
Section 4 The Basic Framework of Rural Finance
Chapter Two Financial Development Theory and Rural Financial Development
Section 1 Financial Development, Financial Repression and Economic Growth
Page 268
Section 2 Rural Financial Development: General Description
Section 3 General Theory of Rural Financial Development
Chapter III The Logical Starting Point of Rural Finance
Section 1 Farmers, Rural Areas and Agricultural Development
Section 2 Farmers' Credit and Farmers' Loans in the Transition Period
Section 3 Analysis of the Supply and Demand of Rural Credit
Chapter Two Rural Cooperative Finance
Chapter 4 Cooperation Theory and Cooperative Financial System
Section 1 The historical evolution of the cooperative system and its theory
Section 2 Basic Principles and Evolution of Cooperation System
Section 3 Development and Evolution of Cooperative Financial System
Section 4 Operating Mechanism, Efficiency and Applicability of Cooperative Financial Organization
Chapter 5 Global Cooperative Finance: Comparative Institutional Analysis
Section 1 German Cooperative Bank System
The rural cooperative financial system on the second holiday
Section 3 American Rural Credit Cooperative System
Section 4 French Agricultural Credit Mutual Banking System
Chapter VI Rural Credit Cooperation in China
Section 1 The history of my country's rural credit cooperation
Section 2 Evolution of the Rural Credit Cooperative System: Basic Disputes and Existing Problems
Section 3 Development Trend of Rural Credit Cooperation in my country
Chapter Three Rural Private Finance
Chapter VII The History and Institutional Roots of Rural Private Finance
Section One Overview of Rural Private Finance
Section 2 Current Status of Research on Private Finance at Home and Abroad
Section 3 The deep reasons for the existence of rural private finance
Chapter 8 Analysis of the Structure and Performance of Rural Private Finance
Section 1 Analysis of Rural Private Finance Structure
Section 2 Interest Rate Determination of Rural Private Finance
Section 3 Analysis of Rural Private Finance Performance
Chapter 9 my country's Rural Private Finance Reform
Section 1 The academic circles' disputes over the reform path of rural private finance
Section 2 Basic principles and strategies for the development of rural private finance
Section 3 Rural Financial Reform and Rural Private Finance
Chapter Four Agricultural Policy Finance
Chapter 10 General Theoretical Analysis of Policy Finance
Section 1 Theoretical and realistic basis of policy finance development
Section 2 The Positioning and Efficiency Analysis of Policy Finance
Chapter Eleven Global Agricultural Policy Finance Operation Mode Comparison
Section 1 The operating mechanism and characteristics of agricultural policy finance in various countries
Section 2 Comprehensive comparison of agricultural policy financial systems in various countries
Section 3 The Enlightenment of Foreign Agricultural Policy Finance to my country
Chapter 12 The Development Model of Agricultural Policy Finance
Page 269
Section 1 The historical evolution of agricultural policy finance
Section 2 Analysis of Problems in Agricultural Policy Finance
Section 3 Reform Mode and Path Selection of Agricultural Policy-based Financial System
Chapter Five Rural Microfinance
Chapter 13 The Connotation and Development of Rural Microfinance
The first section of the basic meaning and operating characteristics of microfinance
Section 2 Development Status of Microfinance in China
Section Three Development Philosophy and Challenges of Microfinance
Chapter 14 China's Rural Microfinance Model and Performance
Section 1 Comparison of the performance of different models of microfinance
Section 2 Microfinance Model and Institutional Analysis of Its Performance
Section 3 The design of the core system of rural microfinance in China and the construction of an inclusive financial system
Section 4 Existing Problems and Policy Recommendations in Rural Microfinance in China
Chapter 15 Microfinance Supervision and Legislative Framework
Section 1 Analysis of International Experiences in the Legislation and Supervision of Small Loans
Section 2 The Lag of Microfinance Development and Supervision in my country
Section 3 Several Basic Principles That my country's Microfinance Supervision Should Follow
Section 4 Seven Types of Microfinance Institutions in my country and Their Supervision Models
Section 5 Conclusion: Establish a loose and flexible non-prudential supervision system
Chapter 6. Financing of Rural SMEs
Chapter 16 The Structure and Dilemma of SME Financing
Section 1 Financing of SMEs: Basic viewpoints of domestic and foreign research
Section 2 Financing Structure of SMEs
Chapter Seventeen: International Comparative Analysis of SME Financing Support System
Section 1 Legal system and management department for financing support of SMEs
Section 2 Credit Management System of SMEs
Section 3 Credit (Loan) Guarantee System
Section 4 Local Small and Medium-Sized Banks and SME Financing
Chapter 18 The Solution to the Financing Dilemma of my country's Rural Small and Medium-sized Enterprises
The first section of the financing structure changes of township enterprises and analysis of their causes
Section 2 Solutions to the financing difficulties of township and village enterprises
Chapter 7. Agricultural Product Futures and Agricultural Insurance
Chapter 19 Basic Principles of the Futures Market
Section 1 Basic Concepts of Futures Trading
Section 2 Economic Functions, Transaction Process and Supervision Mode of Futures Trading
Chapter 20 The World’s Major Agricultural Products Futures Markets
Section 1 The development course, trend and enlightenment of world agricultural product futures
Section 2 Overview of the world’s major agricultural futures exchanges
Chapter 21 The Reform, Development and Future Trends of my country’s Agricultural Products Futures Market
Section 1 Overview of the development of my country's agricultural product futures market
Section 2 Positive Significance and Restrictive Factors of my country's Development of Agricultural Products Futures Market
Section 3 Development Trend of my country's Agricultural Products Futures Market
Chapter 22 Agricultural Insurance
Page 270
Section 1 Agricultural Risk and Risk Management
Section 2 Agricultural Insurance Market Failure
Section 3 Types and Functions of Agricultural Insurance
Section 4 Weather Index Insurance
Section 5 Development of China's Agricultural Insurance
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of this course is divided into two parts: the usual assessment and the final exam. The assessment of usual results includes attendance,
Classroom questions, discussion speeches, and course essays account for about 30%-50% of the total evaluation score; final exams account for about
50%-70% of the total score.
7. Formulation writer: Yue Yiding
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Sheng Hu
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
International Economic Law
Course ID : 160609Z1
Course Title : International Economic Law
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(School hours)
Remarks
1, 2, 3
General
4
4, 5, 6
Rural Cooperative Finance
5
7, 8, 9
Rural private finance
5
10, 11, 12
Agricultural policy finance
4
13, 14, 15
Rural microfinance
5
16, 17, 18
Rural SME financing
5
19, 20, 21, 22 Agricultural product futures and agricultural insurance
4
Page 271
English name : International Economic Law
Class hours and credits : 40/2.5
(Experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : international trade, international trade practice
Adapt to major : International Economics and Trade
Reference materials :
Introduction to International Economic Law, Zhang Ruiping, Gao Guozhu, Beijing: University of International Business and Economics Press, 2008
International Economic Law, Tang Qingyang, Xiamen: Xiamen University Press, 2008
International Business Law, Dang Wei, Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press, 2005
Course introduction:
This course will explain the basic theories of international economic law, international trade in goods law, international technology transfer law, national
International Maritime Law, International Economic Organization Law and International Dispute Settlement Law. This course focuses on theory and practice
Combination of connection, principle and application. Emphasizes the use of colorful legal examples to illustrate profound theories, and
Easy-to-understand basic principles to answer questions in practice, focusing on legal education and international economics and trade
The connection of education.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is one of the core courses in the professional education module of the undergraduate major of international economics and trade. through
After studying this course, understand and master domestic and international legal systems related to international economic and trade activities.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the study of this course, students can systematically master the basic concepts and principles of international economic law
And basic knowledge, especially the content of international conventions and international business practices, and an understanding of international economic law
The latest developments and related content, learn to use the theories and rules of international economic law to analyze cases and solve practical problems.
Problems encountered in the world. Through teaching, students can understand domestic laws, international conventions and international business practices,
Cultivate students' ability to adapt to foreign economic interactions and solve problems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Introduction: The emergence and development of international economic law, the basic principles of international economic law, the system of international economic law
Department and research methods. Understand the history and development of international economic law and its relations and differences with relevant sector law;
International economic law concepts, characteristics, legal status, legal sources, basic principles;
Key points and difficulties : sources of international economic law; basic principles of international economic law.
The first chapter　 International Sale of Goods Act
Teaching requirements:　 Through this chapter, learn to master the scope of international trade in goods law and the law of international goods sales
And conventions, the establishment of international goods sales contracts, the obligations of both parties, risks and ownership transfer, remedies, transportation
Use the legal system to analyze disputes over contracts for the international sale of goods.
Teaching content:
Section 1 Overview of International Trade in Goods Law
Section 2 International Goods Sale Contract
Section 3 International Business Practices
Section 4 Electronic Commerce Law
The key points and difficulties of this chapter: the conclusion of international goods sales contracts, liability for breach of contract, and risk transfer.
Chapter II　 International Carriage of Goods Act
Page 272
Teaching requirements: Through the study of this chapter, master the basic legal system of international cargo transportation and be able to use these
Analyze the legal system and solve practical problems.
Teaching content:
Section 1 Overview of International Freight Transport Law
Section 2 International Maritime Carriage of Goods Law
Section 3 International Air Cargo Transportation Law
Section 4 International Railway Freight Transport Law
Section 5 International Multimodal Transport Law
The focus and difficulty of this chapter : bill of lading legal system; charter party; multimodal transport
Chapter III　 international cargo transportation insurance law
Teaching requirements: through this chapter, learn to understand the basic legal system of international cargo insurance law;
Cargo insurance contract conclusion and claims; master the basic legal system of the international maritime cargo insurance law.
Teaching content
Section 1 Overview of International Cargo Insurance Law
Section 2 International Maritime Cargo Insurance Clauses
Section 3 International Air Cargo Insurance Law
Section 4 International Land Cargo Transportation Insurance Law
Key points and difficulties : International Maritime Cargo Insurance Clauses; International Air Cargo Insurance Law
Chapter IV　 International Trade Control Law
Teaching requirements: Through this chapter, learn to master the basic international trade control measures, export incentive measures, anti-dumping
Sales, countervailing, safeguard measures, WTO agreements and their basic control rules;
Teaching content:
Section 1 International Trade Control Measures
Section 2 Anti-dumping Law
Section 3 Countervailing Law
Section 4 Anti-Unfair Competition Law
Section 5 WTO International Trade Control Rules
Section 6 China's Foreign Trade Law
Key points and difficulties : anti-dumping law; anti-subsidy law; Chinese foreign trade law
Chapter V　 International Intellectual Property Law
Teaching requirements: master the concepts and characteristics of international technology trade through this chapter; master international licensing contracts
There have been international treaties on international technology trade.
Teaching content:
Section 1 Overview of International Intellectual Property Law
Section 2 International License Contract
Section 3 International Legislation on International Technology Trade
Section 4 Intellectual Property Agreements Related to Trade
Section 5 China International Technology Trade Law
Key points and difficulties : international licensing contracts; trade-related intellectual property agreements
Chapter VI International Investment Law
Teaching requirements: Through this chapter, learn to understand the main methods of international investment and foreign investment in capital importing countries
The main content of the law, the foreign investment legal system of the capital-exporting country; master the international public
The content of the agreement and its requirements.
Page 273
Teaching content:
Section 1: Overview of International Investment Law
Section 2 Legal System for Introducing Foreign Investment
Section 3 Legal System for Overseas Investment
Section 4 International Protection of International Investment
Section 5 China’s Foreign Investment Law and Bilateral Agreements
Key points and difficulties : the legal system for introducing foreign investment; China's foreign investment law and its bilateral agreements
Chapter VII of the　 International Monetary and Financial Law
Teaching requirements: Through this chapter, learn and master the concept and characteristics of international monetary and financial law. International monetary legal system
The basic content of the degree, the main content of the international credit legal system and the basic content of the international project financing legal system.
Teaching content:
Section 1 Overview of International Monetary and Financial Law
Section 2 International Currency Legal System
Section 3 International Credit Legal System
Section 4 International Project Financing Legal System
Section 5 International Financing Guarantee Legal System
Section 6 Relevant Chinese Legal System
Key points and difficulties : international currency legal system; international financing guarantee legal system
Chapter VIII　 International Tax Law
Teaching requirements: Learn and understand the concepts and characteristics of international tax law through this chapter; master the basic principles of international law,
The principle of determining tax jurisdiction, using international double taxation and overlapping taxation solutions.
Teaching content:
Section 1: Overview of International Tax Law
Section 2 Tax Jurisdiction
Section 3 International Double Taxation and Overlapping Taxation
Section 4 International Tax Avoidance and Tax Evasion
Section 5 International Tax Treaties
Section 6 China's foreign-related taxation and bilateral agreements
Key points and difficulties : tax jurisdiction; international double taxation and overlapping taxation
Chapter IX　 International Economic Settlement of Disputes
Teaching requirements: learn to master the types of international economic disputes, settlement methods and WTO dispute resolution through this chapter
Decision mechanism
Teaching content:
Section One Overview of International Economic Disputes
Section 2 Judicial Methods of International Economic Dispute Settlement
Section 3 Non-judicial Methods of International Economic Dispute Settlement
Section 4 International Commercial Arbitration
Section 5 WTO Dispute Settlement Mechanism
Key points and difficulties : judicial methods for the settlement of international economic disputes; international commercial arbitration
4. Requirements for course practice
no
Page 274
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Teaching content
Teaching hours
Teaching form
Hours
introduction
2
Teach
2
1. International Law on the Sale of Goods
10
Teach
8
Seminar
2
2. International cargo transportation law
4
Teach
4
3. International Cargo Transportation Insurance Law
2
Teach
2
4. International Trade Control Law
6
Teach
4
Seminar
2
5. International Intellectual Property Law
4
Teach
4
6. International Investment Law
2
Teach
2
Seminar
2
7. International Monetary and Financial Law
2
Teach
2
8. International Tax Law
2
Teach
2
9. Resolution of international economic disputes
4
Teach
4
6. Course assessment method
1. Normal results: including attendance, active participation in class discussions, essays, case reports and reading pens
The writing of notes accounts for (30-50)% of the total evaluation score;
2. Examination results: mainly written examination at the end of the term, accounting for about 50-70% of the total evaluation results
7. Formulation Writer: Zhang Can
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
international trade
Course number: 160610Z1
Course Name: International Trade
English name: International Trade
Class hours and credits: 40 / 2.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: microeconomics, macroeconomics
Adapt to major: International Economics and Trade
Reference materials:
International Trade (Second Edition), edited by Zhang Wei, Higher Education Press, 2nd Edition, March 2011
International Trade (Fifth Edition), by Xue Rongjiu, University of International Business and Economics Press, February 2008
5th edition
Page 275
Course introduction:
Through the study of this course, understand the emergence and development of international trade, and be familiar with the current situation of my country’s foreign trade.
Familiar with the basic analysis tools of international trade, master the theoretical basis of international division of labor and the division of trade interests
Distribution, familiar with trade policies such as tariff measures, non-tariff measures, export promotion and export control, special economic zones, etc.
Strategies and measures, master the form and development of regional economic integration, be familiar with international trade rules and practices, and be able to
Correctly analyze and explain the conventions, regulations, phenomena and problems in the field of international trade and foreign trade.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is the core course of the international economics and trade undergraduate major. Through the study of this course,
Analyze and explain the conventions, regulations, phenomena and problems in the field of international trade and foreign trade accurately, analyze problems
And the ability to solve problems is improved.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Understand the emergence and development of international trade, be familiar with the current situation of my country’s foreign trade, and be proficient in international trade
Basic analysis tools, master the theoretical basis of international division of labor and the distribution of trade benefits, master tariff measures,
Non-tariff measures, export promotion and export control, special economic zones and other trade policies and measures, master regional economy
The form and development of integration, familiar with international trade rules and practices.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Introduction to International Trade. Familiar with the concepts of international trade and related basic analysis tools;
Understand the emergence and development of international trade, and be familiar with the current situation of my country's foreign trade.
Chapter Two International Division of Labor and the World Market. Grasp the connotation, development history, influencing factors of the international division of labor,
Basic types and their relationship with international trade. Grasp the connotation of the world market and correctly understand the international competitiveness index
Be familiar with international value laws and master unequal exchanges.
The third chapter is the theory of international trade. Proficient in mercantilism, free trade theory, and protection trade
The theoretical views and practical applications of various schools of theory. Understand the new development of international trade theory.
Chapter Four International Trade Policy. Understand the basic types, development history and characteristics of international trade policies.
Master the strategic model of foreign trade development.
Chapter V Tariff Measures. Familiar with the meaning, mechanism, types, collection methods, and levies of tariffs
Acceptance basis, familiar with the impact of tariff measures on international trade.
Chapter VI Non-tariff barriers. Familiar with the connotation, characteristics and specific measures of non-tariff barriers
The impact of non-tariff barriers on international trade.
Chapter 7 Export Promotion, Export Control and Special Economic Zones. Familiar with export promotion and export control
Specific measures, familiar with the essential characteristics of various types of special economic zones.
Chapter 8 Regional Economic Integration. Grasp the form, development trend and related of regional economic integration
theory.
Chapter 9 International Trade Treaties, Agreements and Organizations. Master the types and main legal treatments of trade treaties
Articles, master the development and basic principles of GATT and WTO, and take a correct view of China’s accession to the WTO.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
Page 276
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Remarks of Class Hours Experimental Class Hours
Chapter One Introduction to International Trade
4
Chapter 2 International Division of Labor and the World Market
4
Chapter Three International Trade Theories
8
Chapter IV International Trade Policy
2
Chapter V Tariff Measures
4
Chapter VI Non-tariff barriers
2
Chapter VII Export Promotion, Export Control and Special Economic Zones
4
Chapter 8 Regional Economic Integration
4
Chapter IX International Trade Treaties, Agreements and Organizations
4
Discussion and review of hot issues
4
total
40
6. Course assessment method
At the end of the semester, a closed-book test is generally used, which accounts for 70% of the results of the periodical assessment; usually (attendance, classroom questions, discussions,
The short essay) accounts for 30% of the final assessment results.
7. Formulation Writer: Yin Hua
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Feng Zhengqiang
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
International Trade Practice
Course number: 160611Z1
Course Name: International Trade Practice
English name: The Practice of International Trade
Class hours and credits: 40/2.5
Prerequisite course requirements: international trade, economics, management, marketing
Adapt to majors: international economics and trade, marketing, e-commerce
Reference materials:
[1] Leng Baijun. International Trade Practices. Higher Education Press, 2006.08
[2] Li Xiaoxian. International Trade Practice (Third Edition). University of International Business and Economics Press, 2000.10
Course introduction:
International trade practice, also called import and export business, is the actual business of studying the process of international goods buying and selling.
A very practical professional basic course with the characteristics of foreign-related activities, which involves international trade theory and politics
Basic principles and knowledge of disciplines such as policy, international trade laws and practices, international finance, international transportation and insurance
The comprehensive use of. Through the study of this course, students will analyze the applicable international trade from a practical and legal perspective.
Relevant laws and conventions and various actual operations in the process of international goods sales, summarizing one of the import and export trade practices
Page 277
Some proven trade customs and practices.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
International trade practice, also known as import and export business, is a compulsory course for the undergraduate major of international economics and trade.
It is a professional core course.
The teaching purpose of the international trade practice course is: aiming at the characteristics and goals of international trade, enabling students to pass
The study of this course analyzes and studies relevant laws and practices applicable to international trade from the perspective of practice and law
And various actual operations in the international goods buying and selling process, summarizing some effective trade practices in the practice of import and export trade.
Easy habits and practices, learn to correctly implement my country’s foreign trade policies and policies in the import and export business.
Business intent to ensure the best economic benefits, and to act in accordance with international standards, so that our trade practices can serve the country
It is generally accepted by the international society and is in line with international standards.
The main task of the International Trade Practice Course is to learn the practical operation of each link in the international goods trading process
Work, master international trade theories and policies, international trade laws and practices, international finance, international transportation and national
The basic principles of international insurance and other disciplines, and comprehensive practical application.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Link theory with practice. The basic principles of international trade and the country’s foreign
I want to apply the basic theories and basic policies learned in the advanced courses in this course to
Organically integrate theory and practice, policy and business, and continuously improve analysis and solve practical business problems.
The ability to question.
2. Pay attention to the relationship between business and law and practice. Must pay attention to selectively study domestic and foreign laws
Laws and regulations, international treaties and international trade practices. According to the "United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods" and
According to the relevant provisions of the Contract Law of the People’s Republic of China, the establishment of an international goods
Statutory procedures and steps, and the performance of a contract is both a commercial act and a legal act.
The dispute in the agreement is actually to resolve legal disputes. When studying this course, it is required to learn from practice and law
Two aspects to study and teach the content of this course.
3. To be in line with international standards. In order to meet the needs of the development of international trade, international organizations such as the International Chamber of Commerce have successively
Various rules related to international trade have been formulated, such as "General Rules for the Interpretation of International Trade Terms", "Unified Collection
Rules" and "Uniform Customs and Practices for Documentary Credits", etc., these rules have become a recognized one in current international trade.
Common international trade practices, it is generally accepted and frequently used by people, and has become a
Abide by the code of conduct. When studying this course, it is necessary to study some common practices in the world based on my country’s national conditions.
Practices and generally practiced principles, and learn to use some effective international trade methods and customs flexibly
In order to accelerate the integration with the international market in terms of trade practices.
4. Persist in advancing with the times. The international political, economic and trade situation is constantly evolving and changing, especially
It was my country’s accession to the World Trade Organization in 2001 that required my country’s specific foreign trade practices to be consistent with international trade practices.
Get on track. Therefore, in the teaching and learning process of this course, the current international trade operations must be closely linked
And the actual situation of my country’s foreign trade, combined with the latest practices of current international trade practices and international trade practices
The latest development of regulations and rules, constantly update and supplement new teaching content, make it compatible with the development of international trade
Adapt to objective needs.
5. Adhere to the principle of combining learning and application. This course is a comprehensive and practical course with strong practicality
In the teaching process, we should combine the classic case and classroom case discussion at the end of each chapter.
Pay attention to case, case analysis and normal operation practice. Need to be in the subsequent supporting course "International Trade Practice Model"
Page 278
"Finally" further apply the knowledge learned in this course and actively carry out simulation teaching.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One The Basic Process of International Trade and Applicable Law
[Teaching requirements] International trade involves a wide range of areas and long lines, and there are close internal links between various links.
In order for international trade to proceed smoothly, it is very necessary to understand the basic process of international trade.
International trade business must comply with laws and regulations. Through the study of this chapter, understand the basic process of international trade
Importance, understand the specific content of the basic process of international trade, and master the laws and laws involved in international trade
On the basis of understanding relevant international trade practices, in order to further regulate international trade
Trade laws and practices provide important safeguards for conducting business.
【main content】
1. Under normal circumstances, the basic process of export trade can be divided into: the preparatory work stage before the transaction,
There are three major links in the transaction negotiation and contract signing stage, and the export contract fulfillment stage. Similar to export transactions,
The basic process of import trade also includes three stages, but the specific content is different from export trade.
2. In order to ensure the smooth progress of international trade and make international trade recognized and protected by law, the State
International trade business must comply with laws and regulations. In summary, the laws and regulations applicable to international trade mainly include:
International treaties, international trade practices, domestic laws, etc.
3. International treaties can be divided into bilateral treaties and multilateral treaties. At present, the main international
Treaties include international sales of goods, international transportation of goods, international payments, foreign trade management, and settlement of trade disputes
International investment and intellectual property rights, among which the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods
The most important international convention on the international sale of goods today.
4. Domestic law refers to a law formulated or approved by a certain country and effective within its sovereign jurisdiction.
Compared with international treaties, domestic laws cover a wider range of international trade, including regulating international
Sale of goods, international trade and transportation, international trade insurance, international payment of goods, foreign trade management, national
International trade arbitration.
5. With the rapid development of international economy and trade, the role of international trade practices has become more and more obvious. but
Laws and international trade practices are fundamentally different. International trade practice itself is not a law, and its application is based on
Based on the autonomy of the parties’ will. At present, common international trade practices in the field of international trade include:
International trade terminology, international payment collection, transportation and insurance, etc.
【main difficulty】
The focus of this chapter is the specific process of import and export business. The difficulty is the habit of international trade.
The nature and characteristics of the case.
Chapter 2 Preparations Before International Trade Transactions
【Teaching Requirements】
Enterprises are exploring the international market and face many and strong competitors. How to achieve success?
Achievement, the overall export strategy is very important, knowing the enemy and confidant, can win every battle. Through the study of this chapter, understand
The importance of preparatory work before international trade transactions, understand the significance and content of international commodity market research, and
Grasp the ways and conditions of entering the international market, and on the basis of understanding the relevant trademark registration laws and
Do a good job in international trade and lay a good foundation.
【main content】
1. International commodity market research includes research on market environment and market conditions. The market environment usually includes politics
Environment, economic environment, cultural environment, geographical environment and competitive environment. International commodity market research
The content mainly includes all aspects of marketing activities, including surveys on the production of export commodities, export commodities
Consumption research, research on the demand potential of the international commodity market.
Page 279
2. There are various channels for companies to enter the international market. To sum up, there are mainly three channels, namely
Receiving export, direct export and foreign production. The forms of direct export include: direct sales to end users,
Establish overseas offices, establish foreign marketing subsidiaries, use foreign agents or distributors, etc.
3. In order to have a basis for external negotiations and transactions, it is generally necessary to formulate business plans in advance and pass relevant
Related channels conduct necessary credit investigations on transaction customers to ensure the implementation and implementation of business intentions. import and export
The main contents of the commodity operation plan include: supply situation, foreign market situation, export operation situation, sales plan
Planning and measures.
4. Trademark is an intangible asset of an enterprise, as well as a powerful weapon for its participation in competition and a safeguard for protecting its own rights and interests.
Identity. There are two main ways for Chinese companies to register trademarks abroad: one is to apply directly to the country where they are located.
Standard registration means registering country by country; the second is to handle international trademark registration. Currently, the world is in the international registration of trademarks
In the system, there are mainly two treaties: one is the Madrid Agreement; the other is the Madrid Protocol. They group together
Madrid Union for the international registration of trademarks.
[Key and Difficult Points]　 The focus of this chapter is on the channels for companies to enter the international market and the international trademark registration.
The point is the content of international commodity market research and the specific process of trademark international registration.
Chapter III Negotiation and Conclusion of International Goods Sales Contracts
【Teaching Requirements】
International trade of goods occupies an extremely important position in international trade. International trade
The most basic and primitive form of Yi is the exchange of commodities between countries. Through the study of this chapter, understand the country
The characteristics and content of international goods sales contracts, understand the complexity and legality of contract negotiations, and master the
The necessary conditions for the establishment of a sales contract, based on understanding the relevant legal rules, gradually increase the
Skill and level.
【main content】
1. An international contract for the sale of goods refers to the sale of goods concluded by parties whose places of business are in different countries
contract. A contract for the sale of goods refers to a type in which the seller transfers the ownership of the goods to the buyer in order to obtain payment for the goods.
Two-way contracts are characterized by internationality, goods and sales. The signing of international goods sales contracts should be followed
The principles include the principle of equality, voluntariness, fairness, good faith, legality and respect for social justice
The principle of virtue.
2. Transaction negotiation refers to the transaction between buyers and sellers through certain procedures for the purpose of buying and selling a certain commodity
The whole process of negotiating various conditions and finally reaching an agreement. Transaction negotiation can be divided into oral and written forms
Two kinds of noodles. The general procedure of the transaction should include such links as invitation to offer, offer, counter-offer, acceptance and contract signing.
Among them, offer and acceptance are the basic links in the establishment of a transaction, and also a necessary condition for the establishment of a contract. According to the Convention
Requirements, an offer must meet three conditions: it is made to one or more specific persons;
The meaning of the contract; the content of the offer must be very certain. According to the interpretation of the Convention, constitutes effective acceptance
The conditions to be met are: the acceptance must be made by the offeree;
Form; the content of acceptance must be consistent with the content of the offer; the notice of acceptance must be delivered to the offer within the validity period of the offer
People can take effect.
3. Conditions that should be met for the establishment of an international sale of goods contract: there must be parties on a voluntary and true basis
Reached an agreement, the buyer and the seller should have the qualifications and capabilities for legal acts, and the contract must be based on the mutual
The principle of benefit and compensation, the subject matter and content of the contract must be legal, and the form of the contract must conform to the law
Claim.
4. In international trade business, written contracts mainly use sales contracts and sales confirmations. written
The content of the contract generally consists of the following three parts: the beginning of the agreement, the text and the end of the agreement. This article is the subject of the contract
Part, the main terms of the international goods sales contract are as follows: contract parties, subject matter terms, price terms,
Page 280
Delivery terms, payment terms, commodity inspection terms, force majeure and exemption, contract dispute resolution. In addition,
Generally, the number of copies of the contract, the language used and its validity, the time and place of contract and the effective time are listed.
[Key and Difficult Points] The focus of this chapter is the characteristics of international goods sales contracts and the form of transaction negotiation
As well as the constitutional conditions of a valid sale and purchase contract, the difficulty lies in the legal provisions of offer, counter-offer and acceptance.
Chapter 4 International Trade Terms
【Teaching Requirements】
In international economic and trade activities, whether the responsibilities and obligations of the parties are divided
The points are clear and directly related to whether the transaction can proceed smoothly. This chapter compares three related international trade practices
For example, in-depth analysis of commonly used trade terms in the "2000 General Rules", and pointed out that each term needs to be noted when used.
Intentional question. Through the study of this chapter, it is required to fully understand the meaning and function of trade terms and related international trade
The nature and main content of trade practices, especially to understand, comprehend and master the main trade
The characteristics of easy terminology, the division of risks, costs and responsibilities, and applicable transportation methods.
【main content】
1. Trade terms are derived from international trade practices, which are developed on the basis of long-term trade practices
of. At present, the most authoritative international practices mainly include: "Warsaw 1932-Oxford Rules", "1941
The Revision of the American Foreign Trade Definition in 2016 and the 2000 General Rules for the Interpretation of International Trade Terms. Among them, "2000
General Rules
2. "2000 General Principles" is the most far-reaching international rule in international trade today.
The terms are divided into four groups of "E, F, C, D", a total of 13 terms, including EXW, FCA, FAS, FOB, CFR,
CIF, CPT, CIP, DAF, DES, DEQ, DDU and DDP.
3. The CIF term is one of the most widely used terms in international trade today. When using this term,
Particular attention should be paid to the issue of symbolic delivery. The so-called symbolic delivery refers to the seller as long as the agreed date and place
Complete the shipment and submit the relevant documents including the property right certificate to the buyer, even if the delivery is completed, but no
The delivery must be guaranteed. It corresponds to the actual arrival. CIF is a typical symbolic delivery, that is, a
Document trading. Therefore, it is not appropriate to call CIF "CIF" in international trade.
4. In the use of FCA terms, the carrier is very important. According to the "2000 General Rules",
The carrier refers to any person who promises to use rail, road, air, sea, inland water transportation or
The combined mode of transportation described above is to perform transportation or to perform transportation by others. Under FCA terms, the seller only needs to send the goods
Delivery is completed by handing over to the carrier designated by the buyer at the designated place;
Take the goods, when the seller delivers the goods to this person, it is deemed to have fulfilled the delivery obligation.
5. According to the "2000 General Rules", the CIP term requires the seller to be responsible for contracting the delivery of the goods to the designated destination
The transportation contract at the agreed place, and at the same time, it is responsible for handling freight insurance and paying the insurance premium, but the goods are from the place of delivery
The risk in transit from the point to the destination is borne by the buyer. For transactions concluded by CIP, the insurance is
The seller’s contractual obligations.
[Key and Difficult Points] The focus of this chapter is on the specific contents of the "General Rules for the Interpretation of International Trade Terms 2000"
The difficulty lies in the specific application of FOB, CIF, and FCA.
Chapter 5 International Trade Commodity Prices
【Teaching Requirements】
In international trade, the price of commodities is directly related to the economic interests of buyers and sellers.
The important content of the quotient. Therefore, the price clause has become the core clause in the sales contract. Through the study of this chapter,
Grasp the principles and methods of formulating import and export commodity prices, understand various factors affecting commodity prices, and master the main
Price conversion of important trade terms, the meaning and calculation method of commissions and discounts, and the median price of international goods sales contracts
Page 281
Rules and pricing methods, understand the choice of pricing currency, export exchange costs and profit and loss
Calculation.
【main content】
1. The pricing principle of my country’s export commodities is based on the principle of equality and mutual benefit and based on international market prices.
According to the purchase and sale intention, the appropriate price shall be determined according to the country (region) policy. While imported goods
The specific method of pricing principle is to shop around and buy from the best. Due to different price components, affect the price
The factors of change are also diverse, and it should be noted that the same commodity should have a reasonable price difference under different circumstances.
2. The price clause in the contract generally includes two basic contents: the unit price and the total value of the goods. commodity
The unit price of is usually composed of four parts, namely the unit of measurement, the amount of unit price, the currency of denomination and the trade term.
The total value refers to the product of the unit price and the number of traded commodities. Foreign trade benefit cost accounting usually includes exported goods
Profit and loss ratio, exchange cost of export commodities and exchange rate created by export, etc.
3. In international trade, there are many pricing methods, which can be summed up as fixed prices and non-fixed prices.
Non-fixed price, or "live price", is a flexible approach, which can be used when the market changes drastically or the two parties fail to pay
There are certain advantages to adopting this approach when a consensus is reached.
4. Commission is the remuneration that an agent or broker receives for the principal to conduct a transaction. The company that calculates the commission
The formula is: commission amount per unit of goods = commission price × commission rate. Discount means that the seller gives the buyer a certain amount of
The calculation method of the percentage reduction is: unit discount amount = original price (or discount price included) × discount rate.
【main difficulty】
The focus of this chapter is the pricing principles and methods of import and export commodities, and commissions
Compared with the calculation of discounts, the difficulty lies in the specific application of cost accounting for foreign trade benefits.
Chapter VI Product Name, Quality, Quantity and Packaging
[Teaching requirements] In international trade, each commodity traded has its own specific name, and the table
Now it has a certain quality and quantity, and most of the commodities traded require certain packaging. Pass on this
Chapter study, master the importance of product name and quality, understand the basic content of the quantity
The specific method of product packaging, understand the content of the name, quality, quantity and packaging clauses in the contract.
【main content】
1. The article name clause is the main clause in the contract. The product name is an important basis for the buyer and seller to hand over the goods.
The content of the article name clause is to list the specific name of the commodity to be traded under the heading of the commodity name. Prescribed goods
Name clauses should be specific, clear, and realistic.
2. Quality is an important factor that determines the price of goods. The quality clause is an important clause in the sales contract
Pieces. In international trade, there are two types of methods for expressing quality: expressing quality in kind and expressing product
quality. In order to facilitate delivery, tolerance clauses or quality flexibility clauses can be added to sales based on instructions.
The allowed delivery quality can be higher or lower than the contract stipulation within a certain range.
3. The quantity condition is the basis for the buyer and seller to hand over the goods. Commonly used measurement units are by weight and by number
Quantity, length, area, volume, volume, etc. Weight calculation methods include gross weight, net weight, leather
Weight, metric, theoretical weight, legal weight, etc. A unified system of weights and measures is very important for both buyers and sellers. in order to
To facilitate delivery, for some commodities, a flexible range of quantity should be added in the contract, that is, the over- and short-package clause.
4. Commodity packaging is the continuation of commodity production. Packaging should reflect scientific, economical, firm, beautiful, and suitable
Sales and other requirements. Packaging can be divided into transportation packaging and sales packaging according to its role in the circulation field. Neutral package
Installation and label production are common in the circulation field, and bar codes are a necessary condition for entering foreign supermarkets. Luck
The signs on the packaging can be divided into identification signs, indicative signs and warning signs. Logo on the sales package
There are often barcodes, labels, etc. Packaging terms should generally include packaging methods, packaging materials, packaging specifications,
The burden of marking and packaging costs, etc.
Page 282
[Key and Difficult Points] The focus of this chapter is the expression method and sales package of commodity quality in import and export business
The difficulty of the related content of the packaging is the overfilling and short packaging clauses, neutral packaging and ordering.
Chapter VII International Cargo Transportation
【Teaching Requirements】
International cargo transportation is the transportation of goods between countries and between countries and regions.
An indispensable and important part of trade. After the commodity is traded, only through transportation, according to the agreed time and place
The goods are delivered to the other party according to the points and conditions, and the whole process of the trade is considered final. Through the study of this chapter,
Understand the main forms of international cargo transportation, be familiar with the relevant knowledge of ocean transportation, and master the standard of liner freight calculation
Standard; master the contents of the contract shipment clauses, especially the partial shipment and transshipment clauses; and understand the main transportation
The meaning and function of documents, especially the types and functions of ocean bills of lading.
【main content】
1. Ocean transportation is the most widely used mode of transportation, and its operating methods include liner transportation and chartering
Two kinds of transportation. The freight of liner transportation is generally composed of two parts: basic freight and surcharge. Charter shipping package
Including voyage charter, time charter and bareboat charter. The charter party is used to clarify the economic and legal relationship between the parties.
At present, the GENCON contract is the most representative voyage charter contract, and it is used most frequently in practice.
2. Other transportation methods commonly used in international trade include railway transportation, air cargo transportation, and
Container transportation, international multimodal transportation, postal and parcel transportation, road, inland river, land bridge, postal and pipeline transportation, etc.
Railway transportation can be divided into international railway freight transportation and domestic railway freight transportation. International air transportation methods are
Airline transportation, charter air transportation, centralized consignment, air express services, etc. Container transportation has now become a national
An important mode of transportation commonly used in the world. International multimodal transportation can improve the organization level of transportation,
Improve the connection between different modes of transportation, and realize the continuous transportation of various modes of transportation.
3. In an international contract for the sale of goods, the buyer and seller must discuss the delivery time, place of shipment and destination,
Whether it can be shipped in batches, transshipment, and transshipment is clearly stipulated in the contract. Method of specifying shipping time
It is mainly clear and specific shipping time. The port of shipment refers to the port where the goods are initially shipped, and the port of destination refers to the most
The port of final discharge. In international trade, the shipping port (place) is generally proposed by the seller and confirmed after the buyer’s consent.
The destination port (place) is generally proposed by the buyer and confirmed after the seller’s consent. Partial shipment refers to a contract
The goods under this item are shipped in several batches or periods. In bulk goods or transactions with a large number of transactions, buy
The seller and the seller may stipulate the partial shipment clause in the contract according to factors such as the delivery quantity, transportation conditions and market.
Demurrage and dispatch charges are generally terms in the voyage charter party. The dispatch rate is usually one of the demurrage rate.
half.
4. A transport document is a document issued to the exporter by the carrier on receipt of the cargo. It is the delivery
Important documents for settlement of goods, settlement of claims and claims, and settlement of payment to the bank or negotiation. Different shipping parties
The transportation documents used in different modes are also different, mainly including ocean bills of lading, sea waybill, railway waybill, postal receipt,
Air waybill and multimodal transport documents, etc. The nature and function of ocean bills of lading can be summarized in the following three aspects:
Goods receipt, property certificate and proof of transportation contract. Types of ocean bills of lading
Bill of lading, clean bill of lading and unclean bill of lading, registered bill of lading, bearer bill of lading and instruction bill of lading, direct bill of lading, transfer
Ship bill of lading and through bill of lading, etc.
【main difficulty】
The focus of this chapter is ocean transportation, shipping clauses and ocean bills of lading. The difficulty is the calculation of freight and batching.
Relevant international rules for shipment and transshipment.
Chapter 8 International Cargo Transportation Insurance
Page 283
【Teaching Requirements】
International cargo is insured with transportation insurance, which turns possible losses into fixed expenses.
When insuring losses within the scope of insurance, you can obtain timely financial compensation from the relevant insurance company, thus effectively
Promote the development of international trade. Through the study of this chapter, one should understand the basic principles of insurance and master international cargo
The various risks faced by transportation and the various losses and expenses that may arise from it, familiar with my country’s maritime cargo insurance
Insurance, the provisions of the London Insurance Association’s maritime cargo insurance and my country’s land, air, and parcel transportation
Insurance and export credit insurance, and reasonable use of insurance clauses in sales contracts.
【main content】
1. The basic principles of insurance mainly include: the principle of insurable interest, the principle of utmost good faith: the principle of compensation, the principle of agency
It is the principle of recovery and the principle of double insurance apportionment.
2. International trade goods may be exposed to various winds during maritime transportation, loading and unloading and storage.
Marine cargo transportation insurers mainly underwrite marine risks, marine losses and expenses, and external causes.
Risk loss caused. Maritime risks include natural disasters and accidents occurring at sea. Loss at sea
The degree of loss can be divided into total loss and partial loss; according to the nature, it can be divided into general average and individual average.
The cost of marine cargo insurance coverage includes rescue costs and rescue costs.
3. In my country, the most commonly used insurance clause for the transportation of import and export goods is the Chinese insurance clause. The clause is
There are four types of insurance clauses: ocean, land, air and parcel transportation insurance clauses. my country's marine cargo
The transportation insurance clause includes three basic risks, namely, Ping An, WPA and All Risks. Additional risks include one
General additional insurance and special additional insurance. The beginning and ending of insurance liability vary according to the different types of insurance. Basic risk
The beginning and ending of the liability of the international insurance industry adopt the “warehouse-to-warehouse clause” commonly used in the international insurance industry;
The "warehouse-to-warehouse clause" is not used and is limited to water hazards.
4. In the world marine insurance industry, the "Association Cargo Clause" formulated by the London Insurance Association
It has a wide-ranging influence on countries all over the world.
5. Land transportation, air cargo and postal parcel transportation insurance is developed on the basis of marine cargo insurance.
Since land transportation, air transportation and parcel transportation are the same as sea transportation, the types of risks that may cause loss of goods are different, so
There are also differences in the insurance coverage of land transport, air transport and parcel transportation insurance and marine cargo insurance and their coverage.
with.
6. In the international cargo sales contract, in order to clarify the responsibilities of both parties in the transaction
There are often insurance clauses, which mainly include: insurance applicants, insurance companies, insurance types, insurance
Matters such as the agreement on the rate and insurance amount. In international trade business, there are two main types of insurance documents commonly used
form.
【main difficulty】
The focus of this chapter is general average and individual average and my country’s marine cargo insurance clauses. The difficulty is
The beginning and ending of the insurance liability "warehouse-to-warehouse clause" and the calculation of insurance premiums.
Chapter 9 International Trade Payment Settlement
【Teaching Requirements】
International trade settlement, that is, the receipt and payment of payment for goods, is far more complicated than domestic business settlement. This is not only due to the use of
Currency is different, and there are big differences in practice. At the same time, it also involves the laws of different countries, international
Conventions and banking habits, etc. Through the study of this chapter, master the definitions, types and contents of drafts, promissory notes and checks
Content and its circulation procedures, understand the meaning of remittance and collection, the parties and processes, and master the meaning of letters of credit
Definition, type, content and payment procedures, clarify the nature and characteristics of the letter of credit, and the uniform practice of documentary credit
Page 284
Familiar with the meaning, type and main content of the bank guarantee, understand the characteristics of international factoring,
And learn to choose the appropriate payment method under different conditions.
【main content】
1. In international trade, the payment instrument is mainly bills. The main characteristics of bills are non-causal and essential.
And liquidity. The bills used in international trade settlement include bills of exchange, promissory notes, and checks, mainly bills of exchange. exchange
A ticket is an essential security, so it must be complete. Drafts can be divided into bank drafts and commercial drafts; bare drafts
And documentary bills, etc. Bills of exchange generally include drafting, presentation, endorsement, acceptance, payment, etc.; its basic principles
Principles and legal rules also apply to promissory notes and checks. The promissory note is an unconditional commitment made by the drawer, so there is no need
Prompt for acceptance. A cheque is an authorization issued by a bank deposit account to a bank to a person or its designated person or holder
An unconditional written payment order to pay a certain amount at sight. The types of checks can be roughly divided into registered checks,
Bearer checks, crossed checks, certified checks, etc.
2. Remittance is commercial credit. Due to the different settlement tools used, remittance can usually be divided into wire transfer,
There are three types: letter transfer and bill transfer. In international trade, remittance settlement methods are mostly used for advance payment and cash on delivery. although
Of course there are disadvantages, but remittance also has the advantages of simple procedures and low costs. The collection settlement method is by selling
The party issues a bill of exchange and entrusts the exporting bank to collect payment or labor from the buyer through a branch or agent bank abroad.
A settlement method for service expenses. Collection settlement methods can be divided into two types: clean collection and documentary collection. with
Single collection is further divided into documents against payment and documents against acceptance. The basic feature of collection is commercial credit, so in international trade
Yizhong is only used conditionally. But in actual business, collections can mobilize importers’ enthusiasm for purchasing.
Conducive to improving the competitiveness of exporters.
3. The letter of credit is gradually issued with the rapid development of international trade, shipping, insurance and international finance.
A settlement method developed. The characteristics of the letter of credit are shown in independence, document trading and bank credit. letter
There are four basic parties involved in the settlement method of the license, namely, the applicant, the issuing bank, the advising bank, and the beneficiary.
In addition, other related parties are involved, such as confirming bank, negotiating bank, accepting bank, paying bank, reimbursing bank, etc. according to
Depending on the purpose, nature, term, and circulation method, the letter of credit can be divided into: documentary letter of credit, irrevocable letter
L/C, Confirmed Letter of Credit, Sight Payment Letter of Credit, Negotiation Letter of Credit, Acceptance Letter of Credit, Deferred Payment Credit
Letters of Credit, Transferable Letters of Credit, Back-to-back Letters of Credit, Standby Letters of Credit, Counter-issued Letters of Credit, etc.
4. Bank guarantee refers to a bank as a guarantor issued to the beneficiary, guaranteeing that the guarantor must ask
The beneficiary fulfills a certain obligation, otherwise the guarantor will be responsible for paying the beneficiary’s loss guarantee documents. Bank insurance
There are three main parties involved in the letter business: the principal, the beneficiary and the guarantee bank. In addition, there are
Counter-guarantor, advising bank, confirming bank, etc.
5. International factoring business is an alternative international settlement method, and also a short-term trade financing.
Way of funding. It is a comprehensive after-sales service integrating accounting settlement, financial management, credit guarantee and trade financing
Service business, including accounts receivable collection, sales sub-account management, credit risk guarantee and factoring advance payment
And other service content. These services are provided jointly by the export factor and the import factor. International factoring business involves
Parties such as exporters, importers, export factors and import factors.
6. In international trade, the payment for a transaction can be settled by only one settlement method.
You can also combine two or more settlement methods according to your needs, which is conducive to facilitating transactions and timely collection.
Exchange etc. Common forms of combined use of different settlement methods are: combination of letter of credit and remittance, letter of credit and consignment
Combination of collection, remittance and bank guarantee or letter of credit, etc.
[Key and Difficult Points] The focus of this chapter is on drafts, collections, letters of credit and international factoring. Difficulties
It is the specific operating procedures of various letters of credit, and the comparison of the similarities and differences between bank guarantees and standby letters of credit.
Chapter 10 Prevention and Handling of International Trade Disputes
Page 285
【Teaching Requirements】
In the international trade business, not every contract clause can be fulfilled smoothly, and sometimes it will cause
dispute. In order to prevent possible disputes and to clarify how to deal with disputes, the buyer and the seller when signing the contract
Respond to agreements on commodity inspections, dispute claims, force majeure and arbitration conditions to defend their own integrity
When business interests. Through the study of this chapter, understand the importance of commodity inspection and claim work, and understand force majeure
Specific regulations, familiar with the specific methods of foreign trade arbitration, and master the prevention and handling of international trade disputes
method.
【main content】
1. Commodity inspection is an indispensable link in the handover process of import and export commodities. Content pack for commodity inspection
Including the quality, specifications, quantity, weight, packaging and safety and hygiene of the goods. The basis of commodity inspection is mainly
The relevant provisions of the sales contract and the letter of credit. Commodity inspection clauses mainly include inspection time, place, organization and inspection
certificate. The inspection time can be summarized into exporting country inspection, importing country inspection and exporting country inspection and importing country re-inspection.
The inspection certificate is a written document that proves the results of the inspection, and it is also an indispensable method for the seller to deliver the goods or for the buyer’s claim.
Law basis.
2. In international trade, due to the many business links and the wide range of coverage, the international market is unpredictable.
Disputes arise, leading to claims and settlement issues. The cause of the dispute can be summarized as the seller's breach of contract and the buyer's breach of contract.
Both buyers and sellers are liable for breach of contract. There are generally two methods for the provisions of the claim clause: Objection claim clause
And penalty clauses.
3. Force majeure is an exemption clause. When force majeure occurs, the contract cannot be performed or performed as scheduled
In the event of an accident, the party involved in the accident can be exempted from liability accordingly. The occurrence of force majeure may be caused by social forces,
It may also be caused by natural forces. The legal consequences of force majeure should be based on the cause, nature, and regulations of the accident.
Mode and its impact on the performance of the contract. The content of the force majeure clause mainly includes the scope of force majeure
Principles for handling force majeure, the time limit and method for notifying the other party after a force majeure accident,
The certification of the accident and the organization that issued the certification.
4. There are four ways to resolve international trade disputes: friendly negotiation, mediation, arbitration and judicial litigation.
The characteristics of arbitration determine that it is different from judicial litigation. There are two forms of arbitration agreement: one is when a dispute occurs
Arbitration clauses in previously concluded contracts; the other is an agreement to submit to arbitration concluded after a dispute occurs. Zhong
The arbitration clause usually includes the place of arbitration, the arbitration institution, the arbitration procedure, the validity of the arbitration award and the arbitration cost.
The recognition and enforcement of arbitral awards involves the issue of one country’s decision to be enforced by parties in another country.
【main difficulty】
The focus of this chapter is on the methods of commodity inspection and the characteristics of arbitration and the content of the clauses.
The difficulty is the comparison of the legal provisions of the deposit and the similarities and differences between arbitration and judicial litigation.
Chapter 11 Performance of Import and Export Contracts
[Teaching requirements] The performance of import and export contracts refers to the
Scheduled to perform a series of responsibilities such as delivery and receipt, until the entire process of receipt and payment. Through the study of this chapter,
Understand the general basic procedures for the performance of import and export contracts, and master the basic content and document review of reminders, verifications, and revisions
Basic principles of payment, familiar with various documents under cargo consignment, inspection, customs declaration, insurance and letter of credit
The specific method of the import business is to clarify the claims and compensation work.
【main content】
1. Most of my country’s export contracts currently adopt CFR or CIF trade terms, and they are collected by letter of credit
Payment. The general procedures for the fulfillment of export contracts mainly include stock preparation, reminder, review, change, charter and booking,
Application for inspection, customs declaration, insurance, shipment and foreign exchange settlement, etc. Among them, the four links of cargo, certificate, ship and payment are the most important.
Page 286
2. The mastery, management and use of the letter of credit mainly include three important links: reminder, review and change.
Section. Verification work is a policy, legal, and business work that is a common
responsibility. It is also common to modify the letter of credit, but the standard of whether it can be modified or not should be mastered.
3. The consignment of goods means that the seller fulfills the contract, delivers the goods to the buyer in accordance with the regulations and recovers them smoothly.
An important part of payment. After the export goods are ready, they should report to the
The Commodity Inspection Bureau applied for inspection. In accordance with the provisions of my country’s Customs Law, declare to the customs and release after inspection.
territory. This is my country's customs supervision of export commodities in accordance with the law. The export enterprise should prepare the goods and confirm the loading
After the date of shipment and the means of transport, fill in the insurance form to the insurance company for cargo transportation according to the contract or letter of credit
Insurance procedures.
4. Preparation of bills and settlement of foreign exchange is not only a task of import and export business, but also an indispensable one for collecting payment
Link. Taking the transaction under the letter of credit as an example, the documents that usually need to be prepared mainly include: draft, invoice, installation
Packing list, insurance policy, etc. When preparing the foreign exchange settlement documents, it is required to be correct, complete, timely, concise and tidy.
According to my country’s current foreign economic and trade policies, my country’s export companies are
After the foreign exchange is settled, the procedures for verification and cancellation of export receipts and export tax rebates shall be handled in a timely manner.
5. In the import business using letter of credit payment, the importer’s application to the bank to issue a letter of credit is
The primary link in fulfilling the contract is also a basic obligation of the buyer. Generally, there are letter format and
There are two kinds of electronic format. The content of the issuance must be consistent with the content of the contract, complete, clear and specific. Open letter of credit
After the issuance, if the content is found to be inconsistent with the application for issuance, the letter of credit needs to be revised.
6. To fulfill the import contract under the FOB delivery conditions, the importer shall be responsible for sending a ship to the exporter’s port to receive
To transport goods, we must do a good job in expediting delivery, chartering and booking space, and dispatching ships. Importers can use appointment insurance or case-by-case insurance
Insurance is handled in the form of insurance, and most of the insurance purchases under the contract are made by appointment. Payment for document review is an import contract
An important part of performance. When reviewing documents, we must follow the principles of sensibility, reasonableness and lawfulness, and pay overseas
After the payment for the imported goods, the foreign exchange payment verification procedures shall be processed in time. Purpose of the importer or its agent
After the port, you must declare and pay taxes in accordance with the methods prescribed by the customs, and the importer shall apply for commodity inspection. According to regulations, imports
The goods shall be handled by the consignee at the customs at the place of entry of the goods. When discovering the quality of imported goods,
When there are problems with the quantity and packaging, the importer shall, on the basis of obtaining the evidence of claim and clarifying the responsibilities,
Submit a claim to the relevant party in a timely manner within the time limit.
[Key and Difficult Points] The focus of this chapter is the work of reminding, reviewing, and changing certificates in the implementation of export contracts.
As well as the preparation and settlement of foreign exchange under the letter of credit, the difficulty is the handling of discrepancies under the letter of credit.
Chapter 12 International Trade Methods
[Teaching requirements]　 With the further development of the international division of labor, common international trade methods have become increasingly flexible
Leaping into the world economic field has brought greater convenience to importers and exporters, and further promoted the development of international trade.
development of. Learn through this chapter to understand the basic concepts and basic characteristics of various trade methods; be familiar with various trade
The basic approach of the method, clarify the legal relationship between the parties; master the two parties under the trade method
The rights and obligations of the company, and pay attention to and prevent problems that may arise in specific operations.
【main content】
1. Under the distribution method, both parties have established a relatively stable purchase and sale relationship through a distribution agreement
The relationship between the supplier and the distributor is a sales relationship. Agency refers to the
The trustee has reached an agreement with a foreign agent to authorize the agent to promote its products and sign a contract, resulting from this
The rights and obligations are directly effective for exporters. The consignment is carried out in accordance with the agreement signed by both parties.
Different from the distribution business, it is also different from the general sales agency business.
Page 287
2. With the deepening of the international division of labor, the use of bidding in the international arena has become increasingly widespread. Auction is
One of the oldest methods of property ownership transfer. The scope of the auction is very wide. Auction and bidding have essential areas
No, the specific performance is that the auction method can maximize the seller’s benefit; and the bidding method can maximize the buyer’s benefit.
Dahua.
3. Processing trade is a new type of trade. The form of processing trade mainly includes processing with supplied materials and import
There are two types of trade in processing materials. In addition, the overseas processing trade carried out by Chinese enterprises in overseas investment in recent years
The method is also regarded as a new form of processing trade. There are similarities between incoming processing and incoming processing, that is, both
However, there are obvious differences between the two methods of processing trade. Overseas processing trade is new in my country.
It has unique and distinctive characteristics.
4. Peer-to-peer trade includes barter trade, bookkeeping trade, compensation trade, mutual purchase trade, transfer trade,
Offset trade, etc. International technology trade is an international trade with the right to use pure technology as the main transaction object.
Karma. The methods it adopts mainly include licensing trade, technical services and consulting, and franchising.
5. International e-commerce adopts digital electronic methods for business data exchange and international trade activities.
Movement is an innovative way of international trade. It will become one of the important ways of international trade in the future. Butli
The international trade activities carried out by the e-commerce method are not only different from the general e-commerce, but also different
Based on traditional methods of international trade. Enterprise online transaction system, such as online procurement management, online sales management, etc.
It has become a realistic choice for companies engaged in international operations.
【main difficulty】
The focus of this chapter is processing trade, peer-to-peer trade and international e-commerce; difficulties
It is international technology trade, bidding and auction.
4. Requirements for course practice
Practical teaching of "International Trade Practice Simulation" is provided in conjunction with this course.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Remarks
Chapter One
General procedures for import and export trade (overview)
1
Chapter two
Clause of International Sales Contract
3
Extracurricular exercises
third chapter
International trade terms and conventions
6
Self-study outside class
Chapter Four
Quality, quantity, packaging
2
chapter Five
Import and export cargo transportation
2
Chapter Six
Import and export cargo transportation insurance
2
Chapter VII
Pricing
2
chapter eight
Payment
2
Chapter nine
Dispute handling
2
chapter Ten
Negotiation of import and export contracts
4
Extracurricular exercises
Chapter Eleven
Performance of import and export contracts
2
Chapter Twelve
International trade method
4
Self-study outside class
Case analysis and discussion
8
6. Course assessment method
A closed-book exam is used at the end of the term, which accounts for 70% of the results of the periodical assessment; usually (attendance, homework, case discussion)
Page 288
Account for 30% of the results of the periodical assessment
7. Formulation Writer: Zheng Chuanjun
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
International trade practice simulation
Course number: 160612Z1
Course Name: International Trade Practice Simulation
English name: International Trade Simulation
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites : All other professional courses at the undergraduate level of International Economics and Trade
Adapt to majors : international economics and trade, marketing, e-commerce
Textbook reference :
[1] Zhu Wei. Export trade simulation operation tutorial. Shanghai People's Publishing House, 2006 and its new edition
[2] Self-edited test instruction book.
Course introduction :
This course is the final practical teaching link for undergraduates majoring in international economics and trade on campus.
Computer simulation software teaching platform and the Internet, comprehensively using "International Trade Practice", "International Settlement", "Sea
Knowledge of all professional courses such as "Customs Practice" and "Foreign Trade Correspondence", personal experience and participation in the complete import and export business
Process. The purpose is to make students familiar with the international trade transaction process in the actual operation process, and master the
Basic operational skills for international goods trading. According to the characteristics of import and export trade, the course is carefully designed
The simulation training of import and export transactions under design, organization, control and guidance enables students to work in a simulated international business
Experience the entire process of commodity import and export transactions in a business environment, so that students can learn in a short time
Master the main operating skills of import and export trade in a comprehensive, systematic and standardized manner, so as to successfully embark on foreign trade
The job lays a good foundation.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
1. The status of the course in the training program: This course is for undergraduates majoring in international economics and trade on campus
The final practical teaching link for this major, and other majors such as marketing, e-commerce, etc. are optional
repair.
2. The teaching purpose of the international trade simulation internship course: to make students familiar with the international trade
Easy transaction process, and proficient in the basic operation skills of engaging in international goods trading. The course is based on import and export
The characteristics of trade, through carefully designed, organized, controlled and guided import and export
Students can experience the whole process of commodity import and export transactions in a simulated international business environment, so that they can learn
Students can master the main operations of import and export trade comprehensively, systematically and standardizedly in a short period of time
Skills lay a good foundation for trainees to successfully embark on foreign economic and trade positions.
Page 289
3. Teaching tasks: Comprehensive use of "International
Knowledge of all professional courses such as Trade Practice, International Settlement, Customs Practice, Foreign Trade Correspondence, etc., personally
Experience and participate in the complete process of import and export business.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. One or more professional course teachers serve as simulation experiment instructors, and laboratory personnel cooperate
guide;
2. The instructor should ask students to carefully preview the relevant chapters of the experimental textbook;
3. Before getting on the computer, the instructor should clarify the purpose, basic principles, and requirements of the experiment, and guide the students
Complete relevant experiments within the specified time;
4. Teachers will publish the answers online after spot-checking and evaluating the experimental report;
5. In the experiment, students make business documents according to the business operation requirements, according to the teacher’s requirements, according to the prescribed time
Online submission.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The teaching platform uses the "International Trade Simulation Practice Teaching" provided by the Shanghai University International Business Practice Center.
Learning Software", English name: Teach Me Trade (TMT).
The TMT experiment platform organically integrates 10 sets of coherent and complete export business cases, from establishing business relationships
From business negotiation, contract signing, contract performance to the final settlement of foreign exchange, involving international goods sales
The whole process, and each link specifically includes operational requirements and business feedback (such as letters from foreign customers,
(Response documents and documents from customs, shipping companies, insurance companies, banks and other institutions), operation tips and reference answers
case.
TMT is composed of three subsystems: "student platform", "teacher platform" and "management center". Through three ends
Interaction, creating a simulated business environment, so as to achieve effective export trade simulation training.
In the TMT experiment, students can enter 10 different companies according to the assignment of the project supervisor
Experiment and personally operate a complete export business. Although depending on the company, the delivery of student experimental business
The counterparties and trading commodities are different, but they all follow a common business procedure, which is divided into the following
16 steps:
Operation 1: Actively send letters to customers and establish business relationships
Operation 2: Receiving the customer's inquiry, perform quotation accounting
Operation 3: Write an offer letter
Operation 4: Receipt of the counteroffer from the customer and perform counteroffer accounting
Operation five: write counter-offer letter
Operation 6: Receive the customer acceptance letter and perform transaction accounting
Operation 7: Make sales confirmation
Operation 8: Receive the letter of credit, review the letter of credit, and issue review opinions
Operation 9: Write a letter of recertification
Operation ten: Receive the letter of credit amendment, prepare the cabin documents, and book the cabin with the shipping company
Operation eleven: receive the shipping receipt, prepare customs declaration documents, and declare to the customs
Operation 12: Receive the shipping order, apply for insurance from the insurance company, and send the shipping notice to the customer
Operation 13: Negotiate with the bank to prepare the foreign exchange settlement documents
Operation 14: Waiting for the bank review results, and at the same time reviewing the company’s foreign
Order
Page 290
Operation 15: Receive the bank notice and write a follow-up letter
Operation 16: Internship summary
Key content: writing of various business correspondence (English); price accounting; document review; document production.
Difficulty content: language organization and documentation of English correspondence.
4. Requirements for course practice
Computer simulation for all class hours. Complete all required procedures in the laboratory or dormitory, if time is not enough, you can
After class, use the campus network or go to the laboratory to find the empty machine to delay.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
32 hours, 2 credits. There are 11 simulation experiments in total, and the hours are allocated as follows:
Serial number
Simulation project
Class hours
l
Operation platform and transaction negotiation business process
2
2 Quotation calculation and offer
2
3
Counter-offer accounting and counter-offer
2
4
Transaction accounting
2
5
sign a contract
4
6
Operating platform and fulfillment orders
4
7
Review letter of credit
2
8
Modify letter of credit
2
9
Consignment booking and insured shipment
2
10
Export declaration
4
11
Document system and review
6
6. Course assessment method
1. Send the completed results of the above 11 items to the teacher with class + number + folder name for inspection and completion
Performance evaluation and filing, accounting for 50%;
2. Finally complete the simulated comprehensive exercises, and submit the paper results in a centralized manner before the end of the course for grade evaluation and
Archive, accounting for 50%.
7. Formulation Writer: Zheng Chuanjun
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
International Investment
Course ID : 160614Z1
Course Name : International Investment
English name : International Investment
Page 291
Class hours and credits: 40/2.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites : Western Economics/International Trade/International Finance and Securities Investment
Adapt to major : International Economics and Trade/Financial Management
Reference materials:
[1]. International Investment, Du Qihua, Higher Education Press, 2006 edition;
[2]. International Investment Course, Qi Jianhong, Tsinghua University Press, 2008 edition
Course introduction :
This course is based on the study of foreign investment and the introduction of foreign capital in an open economy with the international flow of capital as the center.
Important theoretical and practical issues such as the influence of the international capital flow and the law of international capital flow. Courses include international direct investment and
Two parts of international indirect investment, focusing on direct investment theory, direct investment forms, and the formation of direct investment
Channels, multinational corporations as the subject of direct investment, introduction of foreign capital, international investment environment assessment, and international financing
The basic content of capital and other aspects. Through the study of this course, it is required to understand and master the status quo of international capital flow,
The basic theory of international direct investment, the evaluation of international investment environment, multinational companies and the risk control of international investment
Important content such as system. This course focuses on training and improving students to analyze and solve international investment and financing under an open economy
The ability, technology and policy level of the problem.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a professional elective course for the majors of international economics and trade and financial management. It is the two majors
An important professional elective course in the training program. Through the study of this course, learners are required to understand and master
International direct investment and international indirect investment related theories, use these theories to explain the international investment field
And master the main assessment methods of the international investment environment and the main international investment risk management
Methods, understand the main differences between international direct investment and international indirect investment and their main implementation methods, and be familiar with
Understand the various laws and regulations of international investment, grasp the characteristics and future of the current multinational company’s organizational structure and global strategy
He is familiar with my country’s current policies on foreign investment and foreign investment.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course requires learners to understand the basic concepts of international investment
Main theories and main evaluation methods of the international investment environment. Through the study of courses, learners can be cultivated
The ability to use international investment theories to explain complex international investment phenomena is based on the evaluation of the international investment environment
The ability to choose appropriate investment solutions on the basis of globalization and the ability to grasp international direct investment and international
Ability to receive investment trends.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of this course mainly includes the following five aspects: introduction, theory, method, management
Articles and national conditions.
The introductory chapter mainly includes the introduction of the basic concepts of international investment, the background of international investment, international investment
The types of international investment, the characteristics and future development trends of international investment, the relationship between international investment and related disciplines, etc.
Theory chapters mainly include international direct investment theory, international indirect investment theory, and international investment environment evaluation
Methods and analysis of international investment effects.
The method chapter mainly includes the main realization forms and differences of international direct investment,
The main realization forms and differences, the organizational structure and global strategy of multinational companies.
The management chapter mainly includes risk management of international investment, legal management of international investment, and international investment projects.
Page 292
Project management and other content.
The chapter on national conditions mainly introduces the current situation of my country's utilization of foreign capital and foreign investment and related policies.
The focus of this course is the theory of international investment, the evaluation method of the international investment environment, and the
International direct investment. The difficulty of this course lies in the understanding of international direct investment related theories and the international investment environment
The mastery of evaluation methods and the use of international investment risk management methods.
4. Requirements for course practice
no.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One Introduction
2
Chapter 2 International Investment Theory
6
Chapter III Evaluation of International Investment Environment
4
Chapter 4 International Investment Effects
2
Chapter 5 International Direct Investment
6
Chapter VI International Indirect Investment
2
Chapter 7 Multinational Corporations and International Direct Investment
4
Chapter 8 Multinational Financial Institutions
2
Chapter 9 International Investment Risk Management
4
Chapter 10 International Investment Legal Management
2
Chapter 11 International Investment Project Management
2
Chapter 12 my country's Utilization of Foreign Investment and Foreign Investment
2
Case discussion, hot issue discussion
2
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of this course mainly adopts a combination of the final closed-book exam and the usual assessment. Final closed book exam
The test questions mainly include concept analysis, multiple choice, judgment correction, calculation, case analysis, elaboration, etc.
The final closed book test accounts for 50% of the total score. The usual assessment mainly includes attendance rate, course essays, case discussion tables
The current and the completion of the international investment environment assessment report, the usual assessment accounts for 50% of the total score.
7. Formulation Author: Fu Yi
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
International Political Economy
Course ID : 160615Z1
Page 293
Course Name : International Political Economy
English name : International Political Economics
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites : Political Economy, Western Economics and International Relations
Adapt to major : International Economics and Trade
Reference materials:
[1] China International Political Economy, Zheng Biao, Central Compilation and Translation Press, 2008 edition;
[2] International Economics and Politics, Zhang Yuyan and others, Shanghai People's Publishing House, 2008 edition;
[3] A Concise Course of International Political Economy, edited by Wang Jian, Fudan University Press, 2007 edition;
[4] Western International Political Economy, edited by Fan Yongming, Shanghai People's Publishing House, 2006 edition;
[5] International Political Economy: Market and Country in a Global Perspective, by Li Bin, Nanjing University Press,
2005 edition;
[6] General Theory of International Political Economy, Wang Zhengyi, Peking University Press, 2010 edition;
[7] Country and Market, Strange, Shanghai Century Publishing Group (Shanghai People's Publishing House), 2006
Year edition
[8] Political Economy of International Relations: Interpretation of the New International Economic Order, Gilpin, Shanghai Century Publishing
Group (Shanghai People's Publishing House), 2006 edition;
[9] Global Political Economy, Gilpin, Shanghai Century Publishing Group (Shanghai People's Publishing House), 2006
Year edition
[10] International Political Economy-Conflict and Cooperation in the Global System. Pearson waited, published by Peking University
Press, 2006 edition;
Course introduction:
This course aims to critically introduce the main concepts, theoretical schools and main research methods of international political economy
And use these theories and methods to analyze practical problems, helping students understand power and wealth, and economics
Interaction with politics in the field of international issues. After introducing the main theoretical schools of international political economy, this course
Cheng then analyzes the political and economic interactions in some international issue domains, which mainly include international trade, national
International trade system, international finance, international economic imbalances, international investment, regional integration, development issues,
Traditional security, globalization and global governance, China model, China and international system reform, etc. This course will focus on
To discuss the impact of the global financial crisis on international trade, international finance and investment, globalization and regional cooperation,
And how should China participate in the reform of the international system to achieve its own rise.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"International Political Economy" is a compulsory course for the major of international economics and trade, and an important part of this major
The basic course is also the only "interdisciplinary course" in this major, which is conducive to the development of international vision
To cultivate a unique perspective of analyzing problems plays a very important role in the professional training program.
The purpose and task of setting up this course is to learn the theory and policy of international political economy,
Deepen students’ understanding and grasp of these theories and policies, and more importantly, make them clear
The basic ideas, research methods and analysis process of theory in solving problems, so that students not only master international politics
Basic theoretical viewpoints of governance economics, and familiar with some research paradigms and analytical techniques of international political economy
And method tools to improve students' comprehensive ability of analyzing and solving problems.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Page 294
The basic requirement of this course is that through the study of this course, students have a systematic grasp of international politics and economy
The basic theories, basic policies and basic methods of analyzing international political and economic issues. The basics to master
Theories mainly include classical theories of the state and the market, contemporary theories of the state and the market, and international finance,
Analysis of practical experience in international trade, international direct investment and development. In the process, it is also required to learn
Students master the analysis and expression of international political economy theory. On this basis, students are required to be able to apply
The basic theory of international political economy analyzes certain international political and economic phenomena.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One International Political Economy: History, Theory and Method
Main content: The theoretical and historical background of the emergence of international political economy, and the inner nature of international political economy
Logic, the theory and method of international political economy;
The focus of this chapter: the separation and return of politics and economics, the logical starting point of the state and the market, the state
The meaning of international political economy
Difficulties in this chapter: the separation and return of politics and economics, the logical starting point of the state and the market
Chapter 2 The Formation and Development of International Political Economy
Main content: The era background of the formation and development of international political economy, the shape of international political economy
The actual basis for success and development, the theoretical basis for the formation and development of international political economy, international political economy
Theoretical school
The focus of this chapter: the realistic basis for the formation of international political economy, the economic foundation of international political economy,
Foundation of Political Economy, Foundation of Political Science
Difficulties in this chapter: national political school of international political economy, market economics school of international political economy,
Marxist School of International Political Economy
Chapter 3 Core Concepts and Theories of International Political Economy
Main content: growth and development theory, power and hegemony stability theory, dependency and interdependence theory,
Theory of Cooperation and International Mechanism
The focus of this chapter: the theory and source of growth and development, hegemony and hegemony theory, dependency and dependency theory, state
Inter-mechanism theory
Difficulties in this chapter: the measurement system and statistical indicators of growth and development, business cycles and hegemony cycles, international
Mechanism theory
Chapter IV Competition and Cooperation between Countries
Main content: national competitiveness, competition in the era of globalization, regionalism and integrated cooperation
The focus of this chapter: the theory of national competitiveness, the meaning of globalization, and the impact of globalization on the international political and economic structure
Response, regional integration theory and organizational form
Difficulties in this chapter: evaluation indicators of national competitiveness, the future development of globalization, regional integration theory and
Organizational form
Chapter 5 International Political Economics Analysis of International Trade
Main content: This lecture mainly applies the core theories and analytical framework of international political economy to international trade
In-depth analysis of several core issues in the
Analysis, International Political Economics Analysis of Regional Trade Pattern Changes, International Political Economics of Multilateral Trading System
Analysis, international political economy analysis of free trade zones and international political economy of various non-tariff barriers
analysis.
The focus of this chapter: international political economic analysis of changes in global trade patterns; changes in regional trade patterns
Analysis of international political economy; analysis of international political economy of multilateral trading system.
Page 295
Difficulties in this chapter: international political economy analysis of the multilateral trading system
Chapter VI International Political Economics Analysis of International Finance
Main content: Overview of the international financial system, international gold standard, Bretton Woods system, Jamaican system
system
The focus of this chapter: the content of the international financial system, the content and evaluation of the international gold standard, Breton
The content and defects of the forest system, the content and characteristics of the Jamaican system
Difficulties in this chapter: the causes of the collapse of the international gold standard, the causes of the collapse of the Bretton Woods system, Jamaica
Characteristics of the system
Chapter VII International Political Economy Analysis of Multinational Corporations and International Investment
Main content: Mainly apply the core theories and analytical framework of international political economy to
In-depth analysis of several core issues in international investment, including: international politics of the politicization of multinational companies
Economic analysis, regional investment liberalization and integration of international political economy analysis.
The focus of this chapter: international political economy analysis of the politicization of multinational corporations; regional investment liberalization and
An integrated international political economy analysis.
Difficulties in this chapter: international political economy analysis of the politicization of multinational corporations
Chapter 8 Analysis of Globalization in International Political Economy
Main content: Mainly apply the core theories and analytical framework of international political economy to deeply analyze the global
The reasons for globalization, the ways to achieve globalization, and the impact of globalization.
Teaching focus: international political economics analysis of the causes of globalization; international
Political economic analysis.
Teaching Difficulties: International Political Economics Analysis of the Causes of Globalization.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
content
learn
Time
Of which
Test
(on board
Class hours)
Remarks
Chapter One International Political Economy: History, Theory and Method 2
Chapter 2 The Formation and Development of International Political Economy
2
Chapter 3 Core Concepts and Theories of International Political Economy
6
Chapter IV Competition and Cooperation between Countries
4
Chapter 5 International Political Economics Analysis of International Trade
4
Chapter VI International Political Economics Analysis of International Finance
4
Chapter VII
The international political economy of multinational corporations and international investment
Economic analysis
4
Chapter 8 Analysis of Globalization in International Political Economy
4
Discussion of hot issues and introduction of important literature
2
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of this course mainly adopts a combination of the final closed-book exam and the usual assessment. Final closed book exam
Page 296
The test questions mainly include concept analysis, multiple choice, judgment correction, case analysis, and discussion. Closed book
The exam accounts for 50% of the total score. The usual assessment is mainly based on attendance rate, case reports on group hot issues, and classic
The masterpiece reading notes and other parts of the composition. Discussion of hot issues can be considered as follows: free combination of students
Discuss groups, find time for group discussions on selected hot issues after class, and keep a record of the discussions.
A case report meeting is held at the end of the semester. Each group recommends one to two students to represent the group to give oral reports to the group
The discussion situation and basic point of view, the time is 5 to 10 minutes, each member has the same score in this part. Usual assessment
Accounted for 50% of the total score.
7. Formulation Author: Fu Yi
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Customs practice
Course number: 160616Z1
Course Name: Customs Practice
English name: The Practice of the Customs Declaration
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: international trade, international trade practice, foreign trade correspondence and other professional courses.
Adapt to majors: international economics and trade, e-commerce, marketing.
Textbook reference:
[1] Customs General Summer Textbook Editing Committee. Customs Declarant Qualification Examination Tutorial. Beijing: China Customs Press,
The latest version of the teaching year
[2] Ni Shuru. Import and export customs declaration practice. Beijing: Electronics Industry Press, 2011.2
[3] Zhang Bing. Import and export customs declaration practice (2nd edition). Beijing: Tsinghua University Press, June 2010
Course introduction:
"Customs Practice" is a course that introduces customs declaration and customs clearance practices of inbound and outbound goods, articles and means of transportation.
It is a professional elective course for the major of international economics and trade. With the development of the integration of domestic and foreign trade, it is also suitable for
Elective for students majoring in e-commerce and marketing. This course starts from the perspective of customs brokers and customs brokers, and combines
The development trend of customs business, introducing what the customs brokers and customs brokers should do before customs declaration of import and export goods
Preparation work, what kind of control import and export goods need to be subject to, how to fill in the customs declaration unit and relevant documents, various
How to declare customs for trade methods and special import and export goods, how to calculate tariffs and other taxes, paperless trade
Knowledge in various aspects such as customs declaration automation and customs clearance practices at ports in various countries.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
1. The status of the course in the training program: an elective course for the major of international economics and trade, also
Suitable for elective courses for students majoring in e-commerce and marketing.
2. Course teaching purpose: through classroom teaching and extracurricular practice, to enable students to master the relevant aspects of international trade clearance
Page 297
Relevant knowledge of laws, practical operations, and inspection and quarantine of import and export commodities.
3. Course teaching task: explain the customs declaration and customs clearance business process of inbound and outbound goods, articles and transportation,
Make students understand the customs management system, customs laws and regulations, the basic content of customs declaration, and be familiar with the customs declaration management system and
Basic customs clearance system, master the principles and skills of import and export commodity classification, and be able to quickly fill in various customs declaration forms.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Learn the basic knowledge of customs, clarify the power of the customs and the role of the customs.
2. To enable students to master the whole process of customs declaration and how to declare customs in various trade methods.
3. Learn the main content of import and export commodity inspection regulations and the legal inspection system.
4. Learn to master the inspection and identification of import and export commodities, supervision and management, and the issuance of various certificates.
5. Through learning, students will be familiar with the theory and practice of my country’s foreign trade tariff system and commodity inspection system.
Practicing knowledge is easy to guide its actual work.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Basic content: the nature, tasks, powers, management system and institutions of the customs, customs regulations, reporting
The basic content of customs, related persons and their legal responsibilities, customs declaration management system, basic customs clearance system, special customs clearance
System, import and export commodity classification, import and export tax calculation, customs clearance procedures, import and export commodity inspection and identification,
Fill in the customs declaration form.
2. Teaching focus: customs declaration management system, basic customs clearance system, classification of import and export commodities, customs declaration form filling.
3. Teaching difficulties: commodity classification and customs declaration form filling.
4. Requirements for course practice
Understand all kinds of documents in the course of "International Trade Practice Simulation" and further study the main business documents
Fill in.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter 1 Overview of Customs Declaration
1
Chapter II Customs Regulations
2
Self-study outside class
Chapter III Basic Contents of Customs Declaration
2
Chapter 4 Persons Related to Customs Declaration and Their Legal Liabilities
1
Chapter V Customs Declaration Management System
4
Self-study outside class
Chapter VI Basic Customs Clearance System
4
Chapter VII Special Customs Clearance System
2
Chapter 8 Classification of Import and Export Commodities
2
Extracurricular exercises
Chapter 9 Inspection and Quarantine of Import and Export Commodities
2
Chapter 10 Import and Export Taxes
2
Chapter 11 Customs Clearance Procedure
2
Chapter 12 Customs Declaration Form Filling
8
Extracurricular exercises
6. Course assessment method
Closed book exams account for 70%; attendance, class performance, homework, etc. account for 30%.
Page 298
7. Formulation Writer: Zheng Chuanjun
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Econometrics
Course ID : 160617Z1
Course Name : Econometrics
English name: Econometrics
Class hours and credits: 40/2.5 (including experimental hours: 2, in-class computer hours: 2)
Prerequisite course requirements : microeconomics, macroeconomics, statistics
Adapt to majors : business administration, information management and information systems, accounting, financial management, finance, international
Economy and trade, e-commerce
Reference materials :
[1] Econometrics, Li Zinai, Beijing: Higher Education Press, 2000;
[2] Econometrics, Guzarati, translated by Lin Shaogong, Beijing: Renmin University of China Press, 2000
year;
[3] Foundation of Econometrics, Zhang Xiaotong, Tianjin: Nankai University Press, 2001.
Course introduction:
Econometrics is the use of mathematics and statistical data based on actual observations under the guidance of economic theory
Statistical methods, with the help of computer science and technology to engage in the study of economic relations and the quantitative laws of economic activities,
And an economics discipline with the establishment and application of econometric models as the core. It is a major of economic management
One of the core courses. This course integrates the theory, method and application of econometrics.
The primary content is the main content, and the intermediate content is appropriately absorbed; the classic linear model is mainly used, and some applicable
Expansion model; focus on cultivating students’ cognitive ability of basic econometrics theory and the basic model
Application Ability.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Through the teaching of this course, students will achieve: (1) Understand the characteristics of modern economics and understand econometrics
The role of the study course in modern economics and economics course system, understand the role of economic quantitative analysis in economics
The development of science and its role in actual economic work; (2) Master the basic classical econometric theory and methods,
And have a conceptual understanding of the expansion and new development of econometric theories and methods; (3) be able to establish and apply
A simple econometric model can perform actual analysis of quantitative relationships in real economic phenomena, and can
Measurement and measurement analysis software as a tool to establish measurement models; (4) With further study and application of advanced measurement experience
The foundation and ability of economic theory, methods and models.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Page 299
Focus on cultivating students’ cognition of basic theories of econometrics and their application of basic models
force.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
(1) Introduction
The introduction is the outline of the book. It gives a general introduction to econometrics, and discusses the establishment and application of econometrics.
The steps and main points of the economic model and its application are briefly explained. Through learning, students are required to:
Understand the concept of econometrics, the key points of modeling and the application of the model.
1. What is econometrics.
2. Steps and points of establishing an econometric model.
3. Application of econometric models.
(2) Single equation econometric model theory and method
The single-equation econometric model is relative to the simultaneous equation model. It takes a single economic phenomenon as
The research object, including only one equation in the model, is the most commonly used econometric model. Single equation
The theory and methods of econometric models are not only the most important part of the econometric content system
Division is also the basis of simultaneous equation model theory and method. Through learning, students are required to master the unitary linearity
Parameter estimation of regression model, parameter estimation of multiple linear regression model, statistics of multiple linear regression model
Test the confidence interval of multiple linear regression models, and be familiar with heteroscedasticity, serial correlation, and multicollinearity.
1. Parameter estimation of the unary linear regression model: ordinary least square method, maximum probability method.
2. Parameter estimation of multiple linear regression model: ordinary least squares estimation, the nature of parameter estimator,
Normal equations, sample size problem.
3. Statistical test of multiple linear regression model: goodness of fit test, equation significance test (F test
Test), variable significance test (t test).
4. Confidence interval of multiple linear regression model: confidence interval of parameter estimator, confidence interval of predicted value
Interval.
5. Heteroscedasticity: heteroscedasticity, heteroscedasticity in actual economic problems, the consequences of heteroscedasticity,
Ways to overcome heteroscedasticity.
6. Sequence correlation: sequence correlation in practical economic problems, the consequences of sequence correlation, sequence
Correlation test, generalized least square method, difference method.
7. Multicollinearity: Multicollinearity in practical economic problems, the consequences of multicollinearity, multiple
The test of collinearity is a method to overcome multicollinearity.
(3) Simultaneous equation econometric model theory and method
The simultaneous equation econometric model is relative to the single equation econometric model. Economic
The system is the research object to remind the quantitative relationship between various parts and factors in the economic system and the number of the system
Quantitative characteristics are the target, used for the prediction, analysis and evaluation of economic systems, and are an important group of econometric models.
Into parts. Through learning, students are required to: be familiar with some basic concepts of simultaneous equation econometric models,
The identification of simultaneous equations econometric models, etc.
1. The Proposal of Simultaneous Equations Econometrics Model: Simultaneous Equations Econometrics Issues in Economic Research
The problem of simultaneous equations in econometric methods.
2. Several basic concepts of simultaneous equation econometric models: variables, structural models, simplified formulas
Model, parameter relationship system.
3. The identification of simultaneous equations econometric model: the concept of identification, the condition of structural identification, simplify
Type identification conditions, empirical methods in practical applications.
Page 300
(4) Use of Eviews software and case analysis
4. Requirements for course practice
Preliminary grasp of the use of Eviews and simple case analysis
5. Course teaching hours allocation
content
Total class hours
Chapter One Introduction
2
Chapter Two Classic Single Equation Econometric Model: Unary Linear Regression Model
6
Chapter Three Classic Single Equation Econometric Model: Multiple Linear Regression Model
6
Chapter 4 Heteroskedasticity
6
Chapter 5 Autocorrelation
6
Chapter 6 Multicollinearity
6
Chapter 7 Simultaneous Equation Model
4
Chapter 8 Eviews Usage and Case Analysis
4
Total class hours
40
Six, assessment method
The course of this course is an exam, and the score consists of two parts:
(1) Daily results: 30% are scored based on daily homework, class performance and discipline
(2) Final examination results: closed-book or open-book written examination (depending on the professional direction), accounting for 70%
7. Formulation writer: Wang Zongrun
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Development Economics
Course ID : 160618z1
Course Title : Development Economics
English name : Development Economics
Class hours and credits : 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites : Microeconomics, Macroeconomics
Adapt to major : international economics and trade, etc.
Reference materials:
[1] Introduction to Development Economics (Second Edition), Tan Chongtai. Wuhan University Press, 2008
[2] Development Economics, Qi Liangshu. Higher Education Press, 2007
Page 301
[3] Development Economics, Zhang Peigang, Zhang Jianhua. Peking University Press, 2009
[4] Development Economics, Guo Xibao, Zhou Jun. China Finance Press, 2007
[5] Development Economics, Gillis, etc. Renmin University of China Press, 1998
Course introduction :
Development economics is a comprehensive discipline that has gradually formed since the late 1940s.
China is the research object, studying economic development issues from a long-term dynamic and global perspective. What it discusses
The relationship between economic growth and economic development, the determination of economic development thinking, how to accumulate capital, and how to human resources
How to advance development, industrialization and agricultural modernization, how to develop international trade, how to use foreign resources,
How to deal with economic globalization, how to play the role of the market and government, and how to achieve sustainable development.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Development Economics is a professional education course for international economics and trade, and an important part of the curriculum system
section. Its purpose and task is to enable students to have a solid foundation in economics theory and master economics through learning
Development theories, methods and applications, cultivate global vision, strategic thinking and scientific development concept, and better understand
Professional knowledge and mastering professional skills.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Master the basic theories and methods of development economics, and understand the frontiers, application prospects and development of the subject theory
Dynamic, able to use its theories and methods to analyze actual economic development phenomena and problems, and have the ability to analyze and solve problems
Problem capacity.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Development Economics is an economic discipline that studies the economic development of developing countries.
The basic content and key difficulties of the economics of getting rid of underdevelopment and entering a developed state are as follows.
Chapter 1 Introduction to Development Economics
1.1 Developing countries and their characteristics
1.2 Economic growth and economic development
1.3 The evolution of development economics
1.4 Development Economics and China's Economic Development
Key points and difficulties: the characteristics of developing countries and the evolution trend of development economics.
Chapter 2 Economic Growth Theory and Economic Development Ideas
2.1 Economic growth theory
2.2 Demonstration of basic ideas for economic development
Key points and difficulties: the feasibility of the new economic growth theory and economic development ideas.
Chapter 3 Capital Formation and Economic Development
3.1 Lack of capital hinders economic development
3.2 Promoting the theory of capital formation
3.3 Savings and capital formation
Key points and difficulties: lack of capital restricts economic development and impedes capital formation.
Chapter 4 Human Resources and Economic Development
4.1 Population and changing trends
4.2 Employment and human resource development
Page 302
4.3 Education and economic development
Key points and difficulties: the relationship between population and economy, the role of education, and the outflow of intelligence.
Chapter 5 Population Flow and Economic Development
5.1 Population mobility model
5.2 Population mobility policy
Key points and difficulties: Ranis-Fei Jinghan’s population flow model and rural development policy.
Chapter 6 Industrialization and Agricultural Progress
7.1 Industrialization and its importance
7.2 Agriculture in the process of industrialization
7.3 Progress in agriculture
Key points and difficulties: the coordinated development of industry and agriculture in the process of industrialization.
Chapter 7 Foreign Trade and Economic Development
9.1 Importance of developing countries' foreign trade
9.2 Theoretical analysis of developing countries' foreign trade
9.3 Foreign trade strategies of developing countries
Key points and difficulties: the choice of developing countries’ foreign trade development strategies and the response to economic globalization.
Chapter 8 Utilization of Foreign Capital and Economic Development
8.1 Analysis of the role of foreign investment
8.2 Foreign investment
8.3 Foreign aid
8.4 External debt
Key points and difficulties: effective use of foreign capital, control of external debt.
Chapter 9 Sustainable Development of Developing Countries
9.1 Basic Ideas of Sustainable Development
9.2 Factors influencing sustainable development
9.3 Sustainable development approach
Key points and difficulties: environmental protection system, sustainable development policy.
Chapter 10. Plans and Markets
10.1 Analysis of planning mechanism
10.2 Analysis of Market Mechanism
10.3 Relationship between market and plan
Key points and difficulties: government failure, market failure and their correction.
4. Requirements for course practice
Students may be required to conduct investigations on economic development issues based on what they have learned, and form research reports, and
have a discussion.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hour which experiment (on
Machine hours)
Remarks
Chapter 1 Introduction to Development Economics
4
Chapter 2 Economic Growth Theory and Economic Development Ideas 4
Chapter 3 Capital Formation and Economic Development
2
Page 303
Chapter 4 Human Resources and Economic Development
4
Chapter 5 Population Flow and Economic Development
2
Chapter 6 Industrialization and Agricultural Progress
4
Chapter 7 Foreign Trade and Economic Development
4
Chapter 8 Utilization of Foreign Capital and Economic Development
2
Chapter 9 Sustainable Development in Developing Countries
4
Chapter 10. Plans and Markets
2
total period
32
6. Course assessment method
The assessment method is a combination of the final exam and the usual results.
70%, usually 30%. The types of exam questions can be: noun explanation, fill in the blank questions, essay questions, calculations
Analysis questions, etc. The usual grades can be composed of attendance rate, usual homework, answering questions, discussions, essays, etc.
7. Formulation writer: Leng Junfeng
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Selected Readings of Business English Journals
Course ID : 160619Z1
Course Name : Selected Readings of Economic and Trade English Journals
English name : Selected English Readings of Economics and Trade Literature
Class hours and credits : 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : college English, foreign trade English correspondence, business English oral
Adapt to major : International Economics and Trade
Reference materials:
[1] A New International Business English Reading Course (Fourth Edition), Hu Yingkun, Sun Ning, Lu Xin, Dongbei Cai
The University Press Co., Ltd., 2012.3
[2] TIME "Time Weekly": www.time.com
[3] NEWS WEEK "News Weekly": www.Newsweek.com
[4] BUSINESS WEEK "Business Week": www.businessweek.com
[5] FORTUNE: www.fortune.com
[6] WALL STREET JOURNAL: "Wall Street Journal": www.wsj.com
[7] THE FINACIAL TIMES "Financial Times": http://news.ft.com/home/rw
[8] CHINADAILY "China Daily": http://www.chinadaily.com.cn/
Course introduction :
This course is based on the characteristics of the curriculum system and knowledge system of the international economics and trade major,
Relevant articles in Granville newspapers, magazines, websites and academic journals, and the selection of materials involves international trade, finance, and business communication
Page 304
Communication, marketing, e-commerce, business administration, etc. This course not only enhances students’ learning English
Interest and confidence, and can improve their English reading ability and use their knowledge to think about international business activities
Real problems in
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is an elective course for majors in international economics and trade. It is designed to train students to read professional English skills.
Material courses. The teaching of this course is student-centered, combining in-class learning with extra-curricular practice, focusing on training
Develop students’ ability to read publications in English-speaking countries, and also pay attention to improving students’ professional quality and English communication skills
can. Before class, let students briefly retell important news related to international economic and trade activities in English; check students’ background knowledge
Urge students to study the text in advance. After class, students are assigned to write text summaries in English,
Reading reports, production of information cards; regular economic and trade special research reports, debates, and simulated news releases
Activities such as conferences will enable students to consolidate the knowledge they have learned, establish good newspaper reading habits, combine learning with practice, and master
English vocabulary related to the major and familiar with the writing style of business English journals, expand and enrich the professional vocabulary
Professional knowledge, so as to lay a solid foundation for independent reading of various economic and trade English journals.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course requires students to independently complete the reading comprehension of the text under the guidance of the teacher, analyze the thoughts of the text,
Viewpoints, text structure, language use, stylistic rhetoric, improve English reading and expression skills;
In addition to students’ input and output abilities, they also focus on the cultivation of output abilities; improve students’ self-study ability (see
Data, tracking hotspots, analysis reports) and speculative skills (independent thinking, discussion and debate skills).
Through this course, you can fluently explain or summarize international trade, international marketing, international investment in English
Knowledge of capital, global integration and WTO, and proficient in relevant English vocabulary and terminology. learn
English newspaper reading skills, expand business English vocabulary, recognize 3000-5000 words, and use reference books to smoothly
It is very difficult to read in English-speaking countries such as the United States "Time" and "Newsweek"
Published newspapers, magazines and online information, and obtain the required information. On the basis of understanding, grasp
The main points, and can use the correct viewpoint to evaluate the thought content of the material, the reading speed is 100-120 per minute
The correct rate of comprehension is 70%-80%, and the reading volume of one semester is 35,000-50,000 words.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Unit 1 International Trade Theory
Focus: the principles of international trade theory
Difficulties: the differences between the explanation of comparative
advantage put forward by Heckscher and Bertil Ohlin and that offered by
David Ricardo
Unit 2 Exporting, Importing, and Counter-trade
Key points: (1) the financial devices that have evolved to cope with the
problem of trust in international trade: the letter of credit, the draft
(or bill of exchange), and the bill of lading
(2) types of countertrade
Difficulties: (1) steps of a typical export-import transaction
(2) comparison of different types of countertrade
Unit 3 Non-export Entry Modes----Strategic Alliances
Page 305
Focus: nature of strategic alliances, characteristics of strategic
alliances and major non-export modes of entry into foreign markets
Difficulty: different circumstances under which companies choose
corresponding non-export modes of entry
Unit 4 Foreign Direct Investment
Focus: FDI in the world economy and two types of FDI: Horizontal FDI
and vertical FDI
Difficulty: explanations to two types of FDI offered by the market
imperfections argument, analytical approaches to cultural factors
Unit 5 Cultural Environment in International Business
Focus: cultural factors in international business and analytical
approaches to cultural factors
Difficulty: influence of culture on the marketing environment
Unit 6 Frameworks of Cultural Differences
Focus: Hofstede's five dimensions of National Culture
Difficulty: Acculturation in international business Activities
Unit 7 Products and Branding in Brand Management
Key point: the definition of a brand, different forms in which brand
elements come and the valuable functions a brand provides for firms
Difficulty: the relationship and differences between a brand and a product
Unit 8 Managerial Importance of Customer Behavior
Focus: definition and category of customer behavior, the competitive
advantages a firm gains as it adopts a customer orientation strategy
Difficulty: customer behavior and the role it plays in deciding the fate
and fortunes of corporations around the world
Unit 9 E-commerce
Focus: the definition and basic characteristics of E-commerce
Difficulties: the advantages and disadvantages of E-commerce
Unit 10 Entrepreneurs: The Energizers of Small Businesses
Focus: unlimited entrepreneurial opportunities, rewards and drawbacks
of entrepreneurship, characteristics of entrepreneurs
Difficulty: age and entrepreneurial opportunity, preparation for
entrepreneurial careers
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
unit
content
Class hours
Unit 1
International Trade Theory
4
Unit 2
Exporting, Importing, and Counter-trade
3
Page 306
Unit 3
Non-export
Entry
Modes----Strategic
Alliances
4
Unit 4
Foreign Direct Investment
4
Unit 5
Cultural Environment in International
Business
3
Unit 6
Frameworks of Cultural Differences
2
Unit 7
Products and Branding in Brand Management
2
Unit 8
Managerial Importance of Customer Behavior
2
Unit 9
E-commerce
4
Unit 10 Entrepreneurs: The Energizers of Small
Businesses
2
examination
2
total
32
6. Course assessment method
At the end of the semester, an open-book test is generally used, accounting for 70% of the results of the periodical assessment; usually (attendance, classroom questions, discussions,
Essays, English data cards, English hot news tracking reports, etc.) account for 30% of the results of the periodical review.
7. Formulation Author: Tian Hui
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Multinational operation and management
Course ID : 160620Z1
Course Title : Multinational Operation and Management
English name: Transnational Operation ＆ Management
Class hours and credits : 40 / 2.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : economics, management, international trade, international trade practice
Adapt to major : International Economics and Trade, Business Administration
Textbooks and reference books :
1. John daniels waits, Shi Yongheng translation. International business environment and operation (11th edition of the original book). North
Beijing: Mechanical Industry Press, 2008.4
2.Michael R. Czinkota, Ilkka A. Ronkainen, Michael H. Moffett.
International Business 7th Edition.South-Western, 2005.
3.. Christopher Bartlett, Sumantra B. Ghoshal, Julian
Birkinshaw.Transnational Management: Text, Cases, and Readings In
Cross-Border Management, 4/e. McGraw-Hill, 2004
Course introduction :
Page 307
This course is a professional elective course. Mainly research the theory and strategy of implementing transnational management in the process of enterprise internationalization
Strategy and management methods. The basic content of the course includes: the concept, characteristics, generation and development of multinational companies;
Business market research methods; transnational business strategy and market entry methods; foreign direct investment; multinational company group
Organization structure, execution and control; international company human resource management; international logistics management; multinational company production system
System. Through studying this course, master the motives, methods and strategic orientations of transnational
Theories and main methods, general methods and methods of transnational business market research and strategic management,
Basic methods of planning, organization, coordination and control of business activities.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a professional elective course. Mainly research the theory and strategy of implementing transnational management in the process of enterprise internationalization
Strategy and management methods. Through studying the theoretical knowledge of this course, understand the process and general
Methods, master the formulation and implementation process of transnational business strategy, and master the management methods of transnational business activities.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Case teaching and classroom lectures are conducted interactively. International economics and trade majors can adopt bilingual teaching format
formula. Through studying this course, master the motives, methods and strategic orientations of transnational
Theories and main methods, general methods and methods of transnational business market research and strategic management,
Basic methods of planning, organization, coordination and control of business activities.
3. Course content and key difficulties
Course content: the concept, characteristics, emergence and development of multinational corporations; the motivation of multinational operations;
Division theory, market research methods of multinational operations, market strategies and market entry methods of multinational operations, multinational companies
Foreign direct investment, organizational structure of multinational companies, international human resource management, international logistics management, international students
Production system.
Teaching focus: multinational company theory, multinational business strategy and market entry methods, multinational company’s external
Direct investment, international human resource management.
4. Requirements for course practice
no.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Introduction
Syllabus
Course introduction and syllabus
1
Chapter 1
Chapter One
Expanding Abroad: Motivations, Means, and
Mentalities
Transnational business motives, methods and strategic orientation
3
Chapter 2
Chapter two
Theories
Multinational Corporation Theory
4
Page 308
Chapter3
third chapter
Building the Knowledge Base
Research Methods of Multinational Market
4
Chapter 4
Chapter Four
Strategy and Entry
Multinational business strategy and market entry methods
4
Chapter 5
chapter Five
Foreign Direct Investment
Foreign Direct Investment
4
Case Analysis I
Case study one
GM in China
GM in China
2
Chapter 6
Chapter Six
Organization, Implementation, and Control
Multinational company organization structure, execution and control
4
Chapter 7
Chapter VII
International Logistics Management
International logistics management
4
Chapter 7
Chapter VII
International Human Resource Management
International Human Resources Management
4
Chapter 8
chapter eight
International Production System
International Production System
4
Case Analysis II
Case study two
(Optional)
(Optional)
2
6. Course assessment method
1. Group speeches and case analysis: 20%
2. Attendance and discussion: 10%
3. Final exam: 70% (usually open book)
7. Formulation Writer: Zheng Chuanjun
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Business negotiation and etiquette
Page 309
Course ID : 160621Z1
Course Title : Business Negotiation and Etiquette
English name: Business Negotiation and Etiquette
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : international trade practice, marketing, management
Adapt to majors : international trade, marketing, management and other undergraduate majors
Reference materials :
[1] Business negotiation, Yin Qinglin, Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press Co., Ltd., 2009.
[2] Business Negotiation-Theories, Techniques, Cases (Third Edition) (New Century New Concept Economic Management Category
Series of textbooks), Fang Qi, China People's Publishing House, 2011.
[3] Business Negotiations, Editor-in-Chief Li Shuang, Yanpeng Gao, Ting Feng, Deputy Editor-in-Chief Liu Ping, Tsinghua University Press,
2007.
[4] Business Negotiation Theory and Practice (General Higher Education Economics and Management Planning Textbook), Yin Xiangzhou,
Tsinghua University Press, 2011.
[5] International Business Negotiation (Undergraduate International Trade), Liu Hong, Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press Co., Ltd.,
2011.
[6] Business Negotiation Practice, Zhang Bingda, Man Yuanyuan, Lixin Accounting Press, 2007.
[7] International Business Negotiations, [America] Frank-L-Akuf, translated by Liu Yongtao, Shanghai People's Publishing House,
1995.
[8] How to deal with foreigners—A guide to business culture, etiquette and customs in countries around the world, United Nations Trade Network
Edited by the Shanghai Center, World Book Publishing Company, 2009.
Course introduction :
"Business Negotiation and Etiquette" is a comprehensive applied science with strong practicality. The course is
The applied skills of students are the main guiding ideology, and relevant theoretical knowledge is integrated into the system of practical skills.
Through case teaching and simulation practice, students can understand and learn abstract basic theories in a relaxed atmosphere. The class
The selection of materials is practical and lively, with strong practicality and readability. In the structural arrangement, according to the learning points and objectives
Standards, guide cases, text, chapter summary, case analysis and reading materials are in order, step by step, from shallow
Enter the deep, and finally cultivate students' ability to analyze and solve problems and comprehensive application ability.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Business Negotiation and Etiquette" is a highly interdisciplinary course involving economics, management,
Linguistics, logic, psychology, cultural studies, folklore and many other social sciences and humanities,
It is the core professional course for undergraduates majoring in international economics and trade. This course aims to help students systematically master
The basic principles and practice of business negotiation, the strategies at each stage of negotiation, related skills and etiquette, so as to provide students with
Come to engage in international trade practice to provide useful guidance. The task of this course is to enable students to master business
Related theoretical knowledge, preparation for business negotiation, psychological basis, process, negotiation strategies and techniques at each stage
Skills, etiquette and negotiation styles of members of different cultures.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the study of this course, students are required to master the theoretical knowledge of business negotiation, the process of business negotiation and
Strategy, negotiation skills, basic etiquette and etiquette for negotiation, and the influence of cultural differences in different countries on negotiation, and can
Use these knowledge and skills in business negotiation practice. In addition, students are also required to master the negotiation principles and strategies
Page 310
Have strong analytical skills and flexible adaptability based on strategy; master the art of negotiation and have a certain text gap
Communication and processing capabilities.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One is an overview of business negotiations. Understand the concepts, characteristics, basic content, types, and
The basic principles of negotiation and the criteria for judging its success.
Focus: Types and basic content of business negotiations.
Difficulties: The selection of criteria for successful negotiation and the application of basic principles of negotiation.
The second chapter prepares for business negotiation. Understand the basic qualities of negotiators and the organization of the negotiating team
Organization, negotiation information management, etc.; master the formulation of negotiation plans and the organization and simulation of negotiation
management.
Focus: the organization and management of the negotiation team, and the preparation of the negotiation plan.
Difficulties: investigation of various background materials in business negotiations, the quality and ability requirements of negotiators.
The third chapter is the psychology of business negotiation. Understand the role of Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory in business negotiations and
Use, master the practical skills and taboos of personality utilization in business negotiation and business negotiation psychology.
Focus: Maslow's application of hierarchy of needs theory in business negotiations.
Difficulties: practical skills of business negotiation psychology and grasp of the psychological taboos of business negotiation.
The fourth chapter is the process of business negotiation. Understand the three stages of business negotiation: opening stage, negotiation stage
Features and tasks of the transaction phase.
Key points: the basic tasks and construction of the opening, the determination of the quotation standard and the grasp of the negotiation stage, the transaction letter
Number identification, expression of transaction intention and verification of the terms of the transaction contract.
Difficulties: taboo of opening behavior, selection of quotation timing and identification of transaction signals.
Chapter Five Business Negotiation Strategy.
Focus: Strategies in the initial stage of business negotiations, strategies in the negotiation stage of business negotiations and business negotiations
Strategies in the closing phase.
Difficulties: opening strategy, price negotiation strategy, concession strategy, judgment on the end of business negotiation and success
The use of delivery strategies.
Chapter VI Business Negotiation Skills. Understand the common skills in the business negotiation process.
Focus: Master the basic skills of business negotiation: use deadlock skills, reject opponent skills, language
Techniques and other techniques.
Difficulty: the role and application of the five skills in business negotiations.
Chapter 7 Etiquette in Business Negotiations. Understand the etiquette and etiquette related to business negotiations.
Key points: dress etiquette, manners and conversation etiquette, social etiquette and etiquette, banquet etiquette and western food etiquette
Specific requirements.
Difficulties: the practice and operation of dress etiquette, manners and conversation etiquette, social etiquette and etiquette, and western food etiquette
use.
Chapter 8 Cultural differences and taboos in business negotiations.
Focus: Business negotiation styles and taboos in different countries in China and Western countries.
Difficulty: Comparison of Chinese and Western business negotiation styles.
4. Requirements for course practice
Simulated business negotiation 4 hours
Page 311
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Contents of each chapter
Teaching content of each section
Teaching hours
Chapter One Business Negotiation Overview
The first section of the concept and characteristics of business negotiation
Section 2 Basic Elements of Business Negotiation
Section 3 Types and Characteristics of Business Negotiations
Section 4 Evaluation of Business Negotiation Results and Negotiation Principles
then
2
Chapter II Preparation for Business Negotiations
Section 1 Organization and Management of Negotiators
Section 2 Collection and Management of Negotiation Information
Section 3 Preparation of the negotiation plan
Section 4 Simulated Negotiation
4
Chapter 3 The Psychology of Business Negotiation
The first section Maslow's hierarchy of needs theory
Section 2 Use of Personality in Business Negotiations
Section 3 Practical skills of business negotiation psychology
Section 4 Psychological Taboos in Business Negotiations
2
Chapter 4 Process of Business Negotiation
First quarter opening stage
Section 2 Consultation Stage
Section 3 Transaction Stage
2
Chapter 5 Business Negotiation Strategy
The first section of the strategy at the beginning of business negotiations
Section 2 Strategies for the negotiation stage of business negotiations
Section 3 Strategies in the closing phase of business negotiations
6
Chapter VI Business Negotiation Skills
The first section uses and handles the deadlock skills
Techniques for rejecting opponents in the second quarter
Section 3 Language Skills and Other Skills
3
Chapter 7 Etiquette in Business Negotiations
Section 1 Dress etiquette, manners and conversation etiquette
Social etiquette and etiquette
The third banquet and western food etiquette
4
Chapter 8 Cultural Differences in Business Negotiations
And taboo
Section 1 Cultural Differences in Business Negotiations
Section 2 Negotiation Styles of Different Countries
Section Three Negotiation Taboos in Different Countries (Regions)
3
Simulated business negotiation
4
examination
2
total
32
Six, assessment method
Closed book exam: 60%
Simulated business negotiation and negotiation report: 10%
Normal results (attendance, classroom participation, etc.): 30%
Page 312
7. Formulation Author: Tian Hui
Reviewer: Yin Hua
Approver: Gong Yanping
Oral Business English
Course ID : 160622Z1
Course Name: Oral Business English
English name : English Conversations for International Business
Class hours and credits : 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : English listening and speaking
Adaptation major : International Economics and Trade, Finance
Reference textbook : Wang Yongmei, New Business English Oral Course, Tsinghua University Press, 2008
Course introduction:
The new oral business English course is for undergraduate and graduate students in colleges and universities, as well as
For those who work in international business or who will be engaged in international business, practice business English conversations in actual work.
A tutorial written by. This book combines professional knowledge of international business with English dialogue, and guides students step by step
Learn the whole process of international business in class. Through individual practice, pair practice and group activities,
Enhance students' practical ability to use English language and provide students with opportunities to practice English listening and speaking skills.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Through the study of this course, train and help students to master, understand and speak English, especially business English
English methods, skills and techniques, so as to be able to use English to engage in international economics and trade and finance professional work
Lay a solid foundation in English.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The ultimate goal of oral business English teaching is to train students to use English in an international business environment.
The ability of cultural business activities. The salient feature of oral business English classes is the combination of English language and international business
The learning of professional knowledge is closely integrated. In order to cultivate high-quality, solid basic business knowledge,
Compound talents with strong business English oral communication skills.
1. Students in each English mutual aid group will report the extracurricular English in the past week in English every time.
The content of learning activities;
2. Read an economic and trade newspaper article every month and dictate your feelings after reading;
3. The classroom is mainly interactive, taking the form of discussion, debate, role performance, etc., requiring all students to learn
Students must participate.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Page 313
The dialogue part of each lesson includes one or two specialized topics. The first and second units are about the 21st century country
The environment of international business is outlined. The focus of the conversation was that the company’s managers are planning to enter the international business
Service. The third and fourth units allow students to familiarize themselves with the practice of conducting business overseas. The dialogue part is in the trading pair
The progress of the business agreement between the parties. Commonly used business related to the topic through live dialogue
English is introduced during the dialogue.
Each lesson has a brief background to introduce the topic of the conversation in this lesson. `These introductory paragraphs
Help students initially understand the theme of the dialogue in this lesson.
The training of substitution exercises enables students to understand how to use professional skills correctly in actual business English conversations.
English, improve students’ business English conversation skills, so that students become more confident, speak more fluently and accurately
Indeed.
The focus is on cultivating students' habit of thinking in English, and greatly improving students' business English conversation and conversation
Judgment ability, comprehensively improve students' self-confidence in business activities in English and their ability to communicate with foreign businessmen.
4. Requirements for course practice
This course requires some English skits and rehearsal of the annual Christmas party program outside of class.
Practice.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Experimental hours
Remarks
1-2
Global economy, international competition
4
3-4
Export trade terms, formulate trade plans
4
5-6
E-commerce, international marketing
4
7-8
Access to global markets, international trade law
4
9-10 Inquiry\Price, Offer\Deal
4
11-12 Payment method, packaging\label
4
13-14 Freight\Insurance, Customs
4
Keynote speech
4
6. Course assessment method:
This course adopts an oral examination and a comprehensive assessment based on the usual results. The exam accounts for 60%, usually
Grades account for 40% (normal grades refer to class conditions, class performance and participation in English Christmas party).
7. Formulation writer: Wang Yongmei
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
World Trade Rules and Invisible Trade
Course ID : 160623Z1
Page 314
Course Title: World Trade Rules and Invisible Trade
English name : World trade rules and invisible trade
Class hours and credits : 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites Requirements : International Trade, International Trade Practice, Economic Law, International Commercial Law
Adapt to major: international economics and trade, e-commerce
Reference materials:
[1] Basic Knowledge Reader of the World Trade Organization. First edition. Chen Xiaohong. Hainan Publishing House, 2002.
[2] Knowledge Reader of China's Accession to the World Trade Organization (1). First edition. Shi Guangsheng. People's Publishing House,
2000.
[3] Introduction to the World Trade Organization. First edition. Xue Rongjiu. Higher Education Press, 2006.
[4] China's market economy after joining WTO. First edition. Xu Yaoyao. CPC Central Party School Press,
year 2004.
[5] International Trade in Services. First edition. Chen Shuanghua. Fudan University Press, 2010.
[6] International Technology Trade. First Edition. Xue Weixian. Xi'an Jiaotong University Press, 2009.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
World trade rules and invisible trade are major electives for majors in international economics and trade, e-commerce, etc.
Class, a systematic introduction to the development process, operating mechanism and basic principles of the World Trade Organization including the World Trade Organization
And related agreements and agreements courses; through studying this course, students will understand and master the World Trade Organization
The rules of the World Trade Organization under its jurisdiction and binding on all World Trade Organization members
Content, understand and analyze the opportunities and challenges that WTO rules bring to my country’s economic and trade development;
The concept and awareness that are compatible with the requirements of the World Trade Organization rules will improve the ability to act in accordance with internationally accepted rules.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Master the production and operation mechanism of the World Trade Organization;
2. Master the basic principles of the World Trade Organization;
3. Master the main rules of the World Trade Organization on trade in goods;
4. Grasp the content, development and trend, main rules, etc. of invisible trade;
5. Understand the WTO trade policy review and dispute settlement mechanism;
6. Understand the relationship between China and the World Trade Organization and understand the impact of "entry into the WTO" on the Chinese economy;
7. Cultivate students' ability to use economic theory to analyze practical problems.
3. The basic content, key points and difficulties of course teaching
This course mainly describes the basic rules of world trade rules and invisible trade, rules involving trade in goods,
Service trade rules, trade-related intellectual property rules, WTO dispute settlement mechanism, etc.
Students should understand and master the rules and disciplines of the World Trade Organization
Commitments made by the WTO in the aforementioned fields. The focus and difficulty lies in the various rules in foreign trade
How to use it.
4. Requirements for course practice
Through case discussion and analysis, students will deepen their understanding of the basic knowledge of the World Trade Organization.
Page 315
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Remarks
Chapter One From
GATT to WTO
GATT’s generation, development limitations, and
The establishment of WTO
6
Case Discussion
Chapter 2 WTO
Operating mechanism
WTO legal documents, accession and exit
Procedures, dispute resolution and trade policy
Review mechanism, etc.
6
Case Discussion
Including our country
The world probably passed
Cheng He asked
question
Chapter III WTO
The basic principle
Non-discrimination, free trade and competition,
Transparency etc.
6
Case Discussion
Chapter 4 WTO
Goods Trade Agreement
The main content of the agreement and our country’s
Development
4
Case Discussion
Chapter 5 Invisible
Trade overview
The main content and form of invisible trade
And development trend
2
Chapter 6 Invisible
Trade agreement
Service Trade Agreement, Intellectual Property Agreement
Discuss
3
Case Discussion
Chapter 7 WTO
Government functions
WTO’s requirements for the government,
Change direction of government functions, etc.
2
Chapter 8 WTO
Industry development
my country’s WTO commitments, my country’s industrial development
Development strategy
1
Chapter 9 WTO
course
Introduction to the WTO ministerial meetings 2
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (70%) + open book (30%)
The usual grades include submission of learning experience or essays and class attendance rate
7. Formulation writer: Wang Can
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Business English Correspondence
Course ID : 160624Z1
Course Name : Foreign Trade English Correspondence
English name: International Trade Correspondence
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Page 316
Prerequisite course requirements : basic English, international trade practice
Adapt to major: International Economics and Trade
Reference materials :
[1] Foreign Trade English Correspondence (Sixth Edition), Lan Tian, ​​Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press Co., Ltd.,
2011
[2] Foreign Trade English Correspondence (Third Edition), Sui Sizhong, Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press Co., Ltd.,
2010
[3] Business and Management Communication (English Edition. 8th Edition), (U.S.) Locke, Mechanical Industry Press, 2008
[4] Efficient Business Communication (English Edition 7th Edition, Herta A. Murphy, etc., Machinery Industry Press,
1998
Course introduction:
"Business English Correspondence" is a professional English course integrating international trade business knowledge and English
The role of the program is to enable students to master the knowledge of all aspects of foreign trade business, and at the same time to cultivate relevant business aspects
Language expression ability, especially the ability to write English letters used in all aspects of foreign trade. This course
Properly linking up with professional courses and basic English courses will help students develop a comprehensive
Combine skills and qualities.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a compulsory course for majors in international economics and trade. It is related to English and international trade courses.
Indivisible relationship. The course is based on the practical operation of international trade and business links. Through examples,
Systemically describe the translation and writing principles, methods and content of foreign trade letters and contracts. This course is based on
The industry is set up for the needs of international trade talents, and aims to train students to become foreign trade salesmen, export salesmen, and documentary
Applied talents in first-line professional positions. The task of the course is to master common English vocabulary and skills in foreign trade business.
English, abbreviations, idiomatic sentence patterns and expression methods, familiar with translation and writing of various correspondence in foreign trade business.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Learn the translation, writing methods and principles of various foreign trade English letters and contracts through sample letters and examples;
Grasp the expression methods of common vocabulary, terminology, abbreviations, and idiomatic sentence patterns in foreign trade English; through regular practice and modeling
The intended practice and written assignments consolidate the knowledge and skills learned in class. After completing this course, students should meet the following basic requirements
begging:
1. Through reading and studying the relevant chapters that introduce the business process of foreign trade, understand and be familiar with foreign trade
The key step of import and export.
2. Focus on mastering the key points of writing foreign economic and trade business letters, so as to be able to write accurate content under normal circumstances
Letters that are cut, expressed appropriately, conforming to specifications, fluent in sentences, and free of grammatical errors.
3. Understand the trend of business correspondence and marketing knowledge.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One General Introduction. The basic principles of business communication and the writing style of English letters
formula.
Emphasis: Master the writing format (all-over, improved, mixed, simplified) and structure of business letters
Cheng (letter head, number and date, address in the cover, notes, title, reason, letter, end honorific,
Signature, attachment, copy, postscript).
Page 317
Difficulty: Skillfully use the "7C" principles of business letter writing (polite, considerate, complete, clear and concise,
Specific and correct).
Chapter Two Establishing Business Relations. The writing content and writing of the diplomatic relations letter
Methods and related sentence patterns and vocabulary.
Key points: Master the content and structure of commonly used letters for establishing trade relations; understand related letter types:
The letter from the importer to the exporter, the exporter’s self-introduction, the letter from the exporter to the importer, the manufacturer’s self-introduction
My introduction, the letter from the manufacturer to the importer, etc.
Difficulty: master the commonly used sentences about establishing business relations, and can write proficiently to establish business relations
letter.
Chapter Three Enquiries. Translation and writing of inquiry letters, related sentence patterns and vocabulary.
Key points: Understand the types of enquiries (general enquiries and specific enquiries); master frequently used enquiries and answers
Requirements and methods for writing reply sentences, inquiries and reply letters. Can write short, clear, and relevant enquiries
And reply letter.
Difficulties: Understand the content and difference between general and specific enquiries.
Chapter Four Offers. The translation and writing content, methods, related sentence patterns and vocabulary of the offer letter.
Key points: understand the quotation (quotation and reply, send quotation, buyer request quotation and seller reply), push
The type and structure of sales letters (general sales, attempts to sell by sample).
Difficulties: master the writing form and requirements of quotations, sales letters, and offer letters, and master the commonly used forms of offer
Da, write his letter correctly.
Chapter 5 Counter Offers. Counter-pan translation and writing methods, content, related sentence patterns and vocabulary.
Key point: Understand the writing format and requirements of counter-offer and re-offer letters.
Difficulty: Master the common expressions of counter-offers and re-offers, and write their letters correctly.
Chapter VI Conclusion of Business. Completion letter writing, contract translation and writing,
Related sentence patterns and vocabulary.
Key points: Understand orders (orders, accept orders, reject orders), contracts (sales confirmation and shopping
The definition of contract), master the content requirements of its writing and related language expression.
Difficulty: master common terms related to orders and their execution, sales/purchase confirmation contracts, and write them correctly
Write relevant letters.
Chapter 7 Terms of Payment. Translation, writing and correspondence of various letters related to payment terms
Sentence patterns and vocabulary.
Key points: understand the relevant knowledge of common payment methods (letter of credit, collection, etc.) and letter writing requirements,
Master English vocabulary, terminology and useful expressions.
Difficulties: Knowledge about the letter of credit: meaning, characteristics, parties, types, and procedures for issuance, etc.
Master the writing requirements and relevant language expressions of letters related to payment conditions, and write such letters correctly, especially
Is to urge the opening of letters of credit and dunning letters.
Chapter 8 Establishment of L/C and Amendment. Letter of Credit Issuance and Amendment
Writing, related sentence patterns and vocabulary.
Key points: Understand the basic procedures for letter of credit and various types of letters of credit (confirmed, irrevocable credit
Letter of Credit; Standby Letter of Credit; Revolving Letter of Credit).
Difficulty: Master the requirements and methods for writing exhibition certificates and modifying letters of credit, and be able to write relevant letters accurately.
Chapter 9 Packing, Shipping Marks and Shipment. With packaging, shipping marks and packaging
Transport-related letter translation and writing, related sentence patterns and vocabulary.
Emphasis: The writing content requirements and related language expressions of business letters related to packaging issues.
Page 318
Difficulty: Distinguish between shipping notice and shipping instructions.
Chapter Ten Insurance. Translation and writing of insurance-related letters, insurance, insurance clauses, insurance
Different expressions of professional terms.
Emphasis: the concept of insurance value, premium, insurance policy and insurance certificate, business related to insurance matters
The writing content requirements of the letter and related language expression.
Difficulty: Insurance terms and abbreviations.
Chapter Eleven Agency. Agency business letter writing and translation.
Key point: Understand other forms of agency, such as looking for agency, processing trade, compensation trade and establishing joint ventures
Skills in writing professional and related letters.
Difficulty: Master the expression methods and related letter writing requirements for other forms of agency.
Chapter 12 Complaints and Claims. Complaints and claims writing content, methods and related
Sentence patterns and vocabulary
Key points: Master the requirements and expressions of general appeals and claims letters.
Difficulty: understand the appeals introduced in this chapter (appeals for wrongly delivered goods, late goods, poor quality)
And the scope of the claim (claims for poor quality, poor packaging, short weight).
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Chapter 1 General Introduction
4
Chapter 2 Establishing Business Relations
4
Chapter 3 Enquiries
4
Chapter 4 Offers
4
Chapter 5 Counter Offers
4
Chapter VI Conclusion of Business
4
Chapter 7 Terms of Payment
4
Chapter 8 L/C Establishment and Amendment
4
Chapter 9 Packing, Shipping Marks and Shipment
4
Chapter 10 Insurance
4
Chapter Eleven Agency
2
Chapter 12 Complaints and Claims
4
examination
2
total
48
6. Course assessment method
At the end of the semester, a closed-book test is generally used, which accounts for 70% of the results of the periodical assessment; usually (attendance, classroom questions, discussions,
Homework, etc.) account for 30% of the grades in the periodical assessment.
7. Formulation Author: Tian Hui
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 319
Industrial Economics
Course ID : 160625Z1
Course Name: Industrial Economics
English name: Industrial Economics
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: Microeconomics, Macroeconomics, Development Economics, Econometrics, Advanced Mathematics
Adapt to major : International Economics and Trade
Reference materials:
Principles of Industrial Economics (First Edition), edited by Song Shengzhou, Zheng Chunmei, Gao Hewen, etc., published by Tsinghua University
Society, March 2012 edition;
Industrial Economics (1st Edition), edited by Sun Zhijun, Wuhan University Press, September 2010 edition;
The Essence of Western Industrial Economics Classics (First Edition), edited by Ma Yunze, Economic Management Press,
September 2009 edition;
Industrial Economics (3rd Edition), edited by Su Dongshui, Higher Education Press, August 2010;
Industrial Economics (1st Edition), edited by Junhao Wang, Higher Education Press, June 2008;
New Industrial Economics (1st edition), edited by Jian Xinhua, Higher Education Press, May 2009 edition;
Course introduction :
This course is based on industry and its type→single industry analysis→industry and industrial relationship analysis→industry development
The logical sequence of exhibition→industry management constructs a curriculum system. Based on this course system, the main content of this course
The content includes: industrial organization, industrial structure (qualitative analysis of industry and industrial relations), industrial association (industrial
Quantitative analysis of industrial relations), industrial layout (spatial analysis of industrial and industrial relations), industrial development
And industrial policy. At the same time, this course also enriches and updates the content of traditional industrial economics, mainly adding or
Adjusted the industrial revolution, industrialization and industrialization path, type of industrial structure, rationalization of industrial layout, production
Industrial agglomeration, rationalization of industrial organization, individual industrial status, industrial quality, industrial competitiveness, industrial value chain,
Industry "hollow", "modularization", "integration" and "ecologicalization" and other content. This course also reflects
Chinese characteristics not only reflect Chinese characteristics in the framework and basic content, but also highlight the introduction and discussion
Industrial development, industrial structure, industrial layout, individual industrial status, and other industrial economy that China needs more at this stage
theory.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Industrial economics is one of the most active and fruitful fields of economic theoretical research in recent years.
"Mesoeconomics" between microeconomics and macroeconomics, with industry as the research object, research and
Explore the competition and cooperative relationships among enterprises in the industry and their impact on economic performance and corresponding public policies,
At the same time, it also studies the structural relationships, economic and technological linkages and corresponding industrial policies between different industries. Industry Economics
The research fields of economics mainly cover industrial organization, industrial association, industrial structure, industrial layout, and industrial policy
And industry development and trends. This course is a professional elective course for the major of international economics and trade. It is
Page 320
The only representative course of "Medium Economics" in this professional training program. The establishment of this course is not only conducive to learning
The improvement of the knowledge structure of students is also conducive to the display of the characteristics of the profession. Therefore, this course is established in the country
It has a very important position in the training program of international economics and trade.
Through the study of this course, through the study of this course, students are required to master industrial organization, industrial relations,
Basic theories on industrial structure, industrial layout, industrial policies, and industrial development trends can apply all
These theories studied analyze my country’s current real economic problems, and make objective decisions about my country’s current industrial policies.
evaluation of.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Understand and master the basic concepts and core theories of industrial economics, and be familiar with the main aspects of industrial economics
Schools and policies, master the qualitative and quantitative analysis methods of industrial economics
Industrial economics is a relatively strong theoretical and practical course, so students learn theoretically in the classroom
At the same time, we must pay attention to case reading and cultivate analytical skills. Teachers respond to the basic concepts of industrial economics in class
The concepts, theories and applications should be taught as necessary, and the main content of each chapter should be taught in detail;
Attention should be paid to integrating theory with practice, and through necessary cases to show students’ thinking, and deepen students’ understanding of industry
Understanding and mastering the relevant theories of economics. Case discussions should be fully designed and consider various possible
Situation, guide students to use the knowledge of industrial economics they have learned to analyze and solve practical problems. This course is self-study
The amount of content can be mastered at about 20% of the theoretical teaching hours, mainly arranged in the relevant background in the relevant chapters
In terms of information and easy-to-understand content, self-study does not take up class hours. Exam question types should be as diverse as possible.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Introduction
Basic teaching content and requirements: through the study of this chapter, clarify the concept of industry and the research of industrial economics
Research objects and subject systems, understand the research significance and research methods of industrial economics, and grasp the overall
The research field and main content of industrial economics.
Teaching focus: the concept of industry and industrial economics; the research field and subject system of industrial economics;
Research methods of industrial economics.
Teaching difficulties: the evolution of the discipline system of industrial economics.
Chapter II Industrial Structure
Basic teaching content and requirements: through the study of this chapter, understand the main methods of
The meaning of industrial structure, understand the formation and development process of industrial structure, and grasp the general laws of industrial structure evolution
And main theories, master the relevant theories of industrial structure optimization, be familiar with the factors that affect industrial structure changes,
Know the selection and cultivation methods of leading industries.
Teaching focus: general laws and main theories of industrial structure evolution; related theories of industrial structure optimization
Teaching difficulties: the main theory of industrial structure (especially the structuralist economic growth theory).
Chapter III Industry Association
Basic teaching content and requirements: be familiar with the inter-industry relationship and the ripple effect between industries, master investment
Input-output principles, input-output methods and policy implications.
Teaching focus: Types of industry association methods; economic meaning of each part of the input-output table; input-output
Various coefficients; the inductance coefficient and influence coefficient of the industry.
Teaching difficulties: the economic meaning of each part of the input-output table; various input-output coefficients.
Chapter IV Industrial Layout
Basic teaching content and requirements: understand location and region and concepts, understand the basic theory of industrial clusters,
Page 321
Familiar with the basic principles of industrial layout and main schools of industrial layout theory, understand the formation of industrial layout theory
And development. Clarify the research content of industrial layout theory, be familiar with the influencing factors of industrial layout theory,
The goal and purpose of the national industrial layout, as well as the basis, basic trend, and regional industry
Choice of industry growth point and main mode of regional industry layout
Teaching focus: the research content of industrial layout theory; the choice of national industrial layout goals; regional
The main mode of industrial layout and its application.
Teaching difficulties: The formation of the industrial layout theory is based on development.
Chapter 5 Industrial Organization
Basic teaching content and requirements: understand the concept and theoretical origin of industrial organization, master the Harvard School SCP
Analyze the content of the framework, grasp the main content of market structure, market behavior and market performance, and clarify one of the three
Relationship between. Clarify the similarities and differences in the main points of view between the Harvard school, the Chicago school and the competitive market theory.
Understand the theory of enterprises in mainstream western economics
Teaching focus: the content of the SCP framework of the Harvard school; the theory of the Chicago school and the theory of competitive markets
Content; the main content of market structure, market behavior, and market performance and the relationship between them.
Teaching difficulties: the similarities and differences in the main points of view between the Harvard school, the Chicago school and the competitive market theory;
Calculation of the Gini coefficient; the relationship between the Herfindahl-Hirschmann index and the entropy index.
Chapter VI Industrial Development
Basic teaching content and requirements: understand the basic content of economic growth theory, and be familiar with the development trends of the three industries
Trends and industrial development model selection, understand the main theoretical methods and policy views of development economics on industrial development
point. Master the concept of industrial development and the three models of life cycle theory of industrial development, and be familiar with industrial development
The model and the connotation of sustainable development, clarify the sustainable development trend of the industry, and understand the latest industry development
trend.
Teaching focus: the meaning of industrial development; industrial life cycle theory; industrial development model; sustainable development
The meaning of development; the sustainable development of the industry; the latest trends in the development of the industry.
Teaching Difficulties: Harold-Domar Economic Growth Model; Neoclassical Economic Growth Theory and New Economic Growth
Theoretical understanding; the latest trend of industrial development.
Chapter 7 Industrial Policy
Basic teaching content and requirements: master the concept of industrial policy and its functions and limitations, clarify industrial policy
The classification, objectives, means and characteristics of policies, and understanding of the meaning, standards and systems of industrial policy evaluation . Key palm
Grasp the meaning and content of industrial organization policy and industrial structure policy, understand industrial layout policy, industrial technology policy
The concept and content of policy and comprehensive industrial policy. Master the concept of industrial regulation and three types of Western industrial regulation
Model, familiar with the concept and classification of government regulation, understand the reasons for the deregulation of natural monopoly industries and the major countries
Deregulation of natural monopoly industries. Understand the industrial policies before the reform and opening up, and focus on the reform and opening up
Future industrial policies, especially those after the "Eighth Five-Year Plan" period.
Teaching focus: the role and limitations of industrial policy; industrial organization policy; industrial structure policy; the West
Three modes of industrial regulation.
Teaching Difficulties: The difference and connection of the three models of Western industrial regulation.
Chapter 8 Frontier Issues of Industrial Economics
Basic teaching content and requirements: understand industrialization and industrialization roads, industrial clusters, industrial "hollowing",
Frontier issues such as industrial "convergence", industrial "ecologicalization" and strategic emerging industries.
Teaching focus: new industrialization path with Chinese characteristics; industry "hollowing"; strategic emerging industries.
Teaching difficulties: strategic emerging industries; new industrialization path with Chinese characteristics.
Page 322
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One Introduction
2
Chapter two
Industrial structure
6
third chapter
Industry connection
4
Chapter Four
Industrial organization
6
chapter Five
Industrial Distribution
4
Chapter Six
Industrial Development
4
Chapter VII
Industrial policy
4
Chapter 8 Frontier Issues of Industrial Economics
2
6. Course assessment method
The assessment of this course mainly adopts a combination of the final closed-book exam and the usual assessment. Final closed book exam
The test questions mainly include concept analysis, multiple choice, judgment correction, calculation, case analysis, and discussion. period
The final closed book test accounts for 50% of the total score. Usually the assessment is mainly composed of attendance rate, group industry analysis report, etc.
constitute. The group industry analysis report can consider the following forms: students freely combine to form a discussion group, after class
Find time for yourself to conduct group discussions on selected industries and keep a record of the discussions. Dedicated to industry
Analysis report report meeting, each group recommends one or two students to represent the group to report the industry analysis report of the group
The basic situation and basic views of the students, the time is 10 to 15 minutes, and each member has the same score in this part. Usual exam
Nuclear accounts for 50% of the total score.
7. Formulation Author: Fu Yi
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Theory and Practice of International Trade
Course number: 160626Z1
Course Title: International Trade Theory and Practice
English name: Theory and Practice of International Trade
Class hours and credits: 40 / 2.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: microeconomics, macroeconomics
Adapt to majors: finance, e-commerce, business administration, accounting, financial management, marketing, information
Management and Information System
Reference materials:
Page 323
International Trade-Theory, Policy and Operation, Feng Zhengqiang, Wang Guoshun, Wuhan University Press, 2005
October
Theory and Practice of International Trade——Exercises and Practice Guidance, Lu Danping, Tsinghua University Press, 2006
February
Course introduction:
Understand the role of international trade and master the general tools and methods of international trade analysis. Master various international
The basic theories of trade and international division of labor, and master the various methods and measures that have an impact on international trade
And the mechanism of action. Understand the relevant agreements and agreements of the World Trade Organization. Master commonly used international trade terms and
Its use. Understand the basic content of various clauses of import and export trade contracts, and be proficient in the prices and expenses in the contract
Pay and other content. Familiar with the procedures and legal steps of contract negotiation, and understand the procedures for performing contracts of different natures.
Understand the differences between international technology trade and goods trade.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"International Trade Theory and Practice" is an elective course, which mainly studies the international exchange of goods and labor
Basic theory, basic knowledge and basic skills. Understand the motivations, basis of trade and income from international trade;
Know international trade policies and measures; familiar with the basic procedures and operating practices of import and export business.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Understand the emergence and development of international trade, be familiar with the current situation of my country’s foreign trade, and be proficient in international trade
Basic analysis tools, master the theoretical basis of international division of labor and the distribution of trade benefits, master tariff measures,
Non-tariff measures, export promotion and export control, special economic zones and other trade policies and measures, master regional economy
Integrated form and development, familiar with international trade rules and practices; proficient in general international trade in goods
Basic knowledge of transaction procedures, conventional practices, transaction negotiation, contract formation and contract performance, and flexibility
use.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Introduction to International Trade. Familiar with the concepts of international trade and related basic analysis tools;
Understand the emergence and development of international trade, and be familiar with the current situation of my country's foreign trade.
Chapter Two International Division of Labor and the World Market. Grasp the connotation, development history and influencing factors of the international division of labor
And basic types. Grasp the connotation of the world market, understand the law of international value and unequal exchange.
The third chapter is the theory of international trade. Proficient in mercantilism, free trade theory, and protection trade
The theoretical views and practical applications of various schools of theory. Understand the new development of international trade theory.
Chapter Four International Trade Policy. Understand the basic types, development history and characteristics of international trade policies.
Master the strategic model of foreign trade development.
Chapter V Tariff Measures. Familiar with the meaning, mechanism, types, collection methods, and levies of tariffs
Acceptance basis, familiar with the impact of tariff measures on international trade.
Chapter VI Non-tariff barriers. Familiar with the connotation, characteristics and specific measures of non-tariff barriers
The impact of non-tariff barriers on international trade.
Chapter 7 Export Promotion, Export Control and Special Economic Zones. Familiar with export promotion and export control
Specific measures, familiar with the essential characteristics of various types of special economic zones.
Chapter 8 Regional Economic Integration. Grasp the form, development trend and related of regional economic integration
theory.
Page 324
Chapter 9 International Trade Treaties, Agreements and Organizations. Master the types and main legal treatments of trade treaties
Articles, master the development and basic principles of GATT and WTO, and take a correct view of China’s accession to the WTO.
Chapter 10 Negotiation of Import and Export Contracts. Familiar with the general procedures of import and export business, understand before the transaction negotiation
Preparation work, master the form, content and procedures of transaction negotiation, understand the form and establishment of import and export contracts
condition.
Chapter 11 Product name, quality, quantity and packaging. Familiar with the expression and conclusion of product quality
Matters needing attention in quality clauses; familiar with measurement units and quantity clauses in import and export contracts; familiar with transportation packaging
The logo and packaging terms.
Chapter 12 International Cargo Transportation. Familiar with the classification of international cargo transportation and its transportation bill
It is understood that the marine transportation and shipment clauses in import and export contracts.
Chapter 13 International Cargo Transportation Insurance. Understand the coverage of marine cargo insurance
Foreign shipping cargo insurance insurance, understand the cargo insurance of other modes of transportation, and be familiar with insurance documents and insurance clauses.
Chapter Fourteen International Trade Terms. Based on INCOTERMS 2010 ("General Rules 2010"), familiar with shipment
Three commonly used trade terms for port delivery and three commonly used trade terms for cargo carriers. Learn about other trade terms
language.
Chapter XV commodity prices. Familiar with export accounting, commissions and discounts, price conversion, understand pricing
Methods and price clauses in import and export contracts.
Chapter 16 Receipt and Payment of International Payments. Understand payment tools, master remittance, collection, letter of credit
Three payment methods, understand the bank guarantee (standby letter of credit), understand the payment terms in import and export contracts.
Chapter Seventeen: Prevention and Handling of Disputes. Familiar with dispute resolution methods, understand force majeure and progress
The inspection clause, claim clause, force majeure clause and arbitration clause in the export contract.
Chapter 18 Performance of Import and Export Contracts. Familiar with the implementation links and precautions of import and export contracts.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
A total of 40 hours, including 36 hours for lectures and 4 hours for case discussions. The specific hours are allocated as follows:
Chapter One Introduction to International Trade
3 class hours
Chapter 2 International Division of Labor and the World Market
1 class hour
Chapter Three International Trade Theories
3 class hours
Chapter IV International Trade Policy
1 class hour
Chapter V Tariff Measures
3 class hours
Chapter VI Non-tariff barriers
2 class hours
Chapter VII Export Promotion, Export Control and Special Economic Zones
2 class hours
Chapter 8 Regional Economic Integration
2 class hours
Chapter IX International Trade Treaties, Agreements and Organizations
2 class hours
Chapter X Negotiation of Import and Export Contracts
2 class hours
Chapter 11 Product Name, Quality, Quantity, Packaging
2 class hours
Chapter 12 International Cargo Transportation
2 class hours
Chapter 13 International Cargo Insurance
2 class hours
Chapter 14 International Trade Terms
2 class hours
Chapter 15 Prices of Commodities
2 class hours
Page 325
Chapter 16 Receipt and Payment of International Payments
2 class hours
Chapter 17 Prevention and Handling of Disputes
2 class hours
Chapter 18 Performance of Import and Export Contracts
1 class hour
Case Discussion
4 class hours
6. Course assessment method
At the end of the semester, a closed-book test is generally used, accounting for 70% of the results of the periodical assessment; usually (attendance, classroom questions, discussion)
Account for 30% of the results of the periodical assessment
7. Formulation Writer: Yin Hua
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Feng Zhengqiang
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Geography of International Trade
Course ID : 160627Z1
Course Name : Geography of International Trade
English name : Geography of international trade
Class hours and credits : 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: General Theory of Economic Management
Adapt to major : International Economics and Trade
Textbooks and reference books:
1. "Geography of International Trade". First edition. Zhu Xianru editor in chief. China Foreign Economic Relations and Trade Press, 2006.
2. "World Atlas of Economy and Trade". Hunan Map Publishing House, 2007.
3. "International Trade Exercise Book". First edition. Zhu Xianru editor in chief. China Foreign Economic Relations and Trade Press & Shandong
Provincial Map Publishing House, 2005.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is an optional course for majors in international economics and trade. The course mainly studies the major countries and regions in the world
The regional division of labor of commodity production, the geographical distribution of commodity exchange, and the rules for the formation, development and change of geographical patterns
law. Including the distribution and characteristics of the world's physical geography and human geography factors and their influence on international trade;
The main methods, routes and ports of easy cargo transportation; the current economic characteristics,
Foreign trade commodity structure and market structure, etc.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the study of this course, master the basic theories and knowledge of economic and trade geography, and learn comprehensive analysis and regional analysis
Analysis methods to solve practical problems in my country’s foreign trade and meet the needs of the diversification of my country’s foreign trade market
want.
Page 326
3. Basic content, key points and difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Introduction. The research object and subject attributes of international trade geography, the main research content and three items
Tasks, research methods.
Chapter 2 Natural Geographical Environment and International Trade. The distribution of land and sea in the world, the main climate types in the world
Characteristics and distribution, the hydrological conditions of the world's rivers and lakes and their development and utilization methods, and the representation method of geographic locations
And its economic significance. The impact of various natural elements on human economic and trade activities.
The third chapter social and human factors and international trade. Humanities such as countries, residents, religions and cultures of the world
The diversity and complexity of the elements, the geographical distribution of the above factors, and the various human factors, economic and technical factors
The impact of international trade.
Chapter 4 The formation and transfer of the International Trade Center. European Regional Trade Center, World Trade Center
The formation of the heart zone, the Asia-Pacific region-the emerging trade center.
Chapter 5 World Regional Economic and Trade Groups. The concept, type division and shape of regional economic grouping
Conditions, basic characteristics, and favorable and unfavorable effects on the world economy and trade. European Union, North American Free Trade Area,
The basic situation and differences of regional groups such as APEC and Association of Southeast Asian Nations. World Economy One
Dialectical relationship between integration and regional economic and trade grouping.
Chapter VI National Trade and Transportation. The characteristics and functions of foreign trade transportation and general domestic transportation are different
Same point. According to the characteristics of various transportation methods, transportation channels, port conditions and the requirements of the nature of the goods,
In the transportation of imported goods, select the appropriate transportation method and transportation route.
Chapter VII World Special Economic Zones. The role of various special economic zones in promoting national economic and trade development
Use, the conditions for location selection, the similarities and differences between my country’s special economic zones and foreign special economic zones, the relevant special zones
Development experience and lessons.
Chapter 8 The United States. U.S. superior natural geographical conditions, economic development history and current economic characteristics,
The industrial structure and the distribution of industrial sectors, the status of foreign trade, the differences in regional economic development. Objectively evaluate the United States
The experience and lessons of forming a superpower.
Chapter 9 Japan. Understand that Japan’s small size, island country and lack of natural resources are such geographical conditions.
Japan’s role in forming a typical processing trade country and fully aware of the conditions for Japan’s post-war economic boom
And the characteristics of the current economy, understand the imbalance of economic regional development and the serious dependence on foreign trade.
Chapter 10 The Four European Union Countries. Understand the basic geography of the four EU countries, Britain, France, Germany, and Italy.
Natural conditions and its impact on economic development, the status and distribution of major industrial sectors, foreign trade status
Regarding China-EU economic and trade relations, we fully understand the status and role of the four countries in the world economy and trade.
Chapter XI Russia. Geographical overview, Russian economic conditions before and after the collapse of the Soviet Union, the Ministry of Major Industries
China, foreign trade and market conditions, major economic zones. According to Western Siberia, Eastern Siberia and Far
The resources and industrial conditions of the Eastern District will analyze the trend of strengthening Sino-Russian economic cooperation.
Chapter 12 Canada and Australia. Canada's location, territory and natural conditions, population and ethnicity
Situation and economic overview. Australia's geographical profile and economic profile.
Chapter 13: Newly Industrialized Countries: South Korea, Singapore and Brazil. Geography of South Korea, Korean War
Post-economic development and foreign trade. Geographical overview of Singapore, Singapore’s economic development history, major industries
Doors and foreign trade. Geographical overview of Brazil, post-war Brazilian economic development, Brazilian industry and agriculture, Brazil
Foreign trade.
Chapter Fourteen: Big Developing Country: India. Humanities and physical geography of India, industry and agriculture,
Foreign trade.
Page 327
Chapter 15: Geography of Production and Trade of Petroleum and Agricultural Raw Materials. World energy consumption structure, oil storage,
Production, processing and consumption, Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC), Saudi Arabia, Mexico, Iraq,
Oil production status, relevant industry sectors and distribution in oil-producing countries such as Venezuela and Nigeria. Agricultural and mineral raw materials
Production and trade overview, main agricultural and mineral raw material producing countries.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Chapter One Introduction
2
Chapter 2 Natural Geographical Environment and International Trade
2
Chapter Three Social Human Factors and International Trade
2
Chapter 4 The Formation and Transfer of the International Trade Center
4
Chapter 5 World Regional Economic and Trade Groups
2
Chapter VI International Trade and Transportation
2
Chapter VII World Special Economic Zones
2
Chapter 8 United States
2
Chapter 9 Japan
2
Chapter 10 Europe
2
Chapter 11 Russia
2
Chapter 12 Canada and Australia
2
Chapter 13 Newly Industrialized Countries
2
Chapter 14: A Big Developing Country-India
2
Chapter 15 Geography of Production and Trade of Petroleum and Agricultural Raw Materials
2
Six, assessment method
At the end of the semester, an open-book test is generally used, accounting for 70% of the results of the periodical assessment; the usual results (attendance, class discussion,
Assignments, essays) account for 30% of the grades of the periodical assessment.
7. Formulation writer: Wang Can
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Yin Hua
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
IT project management and practice
Course number: 160701Z1
Course Title : IT Project Management and Practice
English name : IT Project Management and Implement
Page 328
Class hours and credits: 40/2.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 8)
Prerequisite course requirements: information system development environment and tools
Adapt to majors : information management and information systems, e-commerce
Textbooks and reference books :
1. Textbook: "IT Project Management" by Kathy Schwalbe. Machinery Industry Press
2. Reference book: "Project Management" edited by Qiu Wanhua. Science Press
Course introduction:
Through the teaching of this course, students will master the basic principles and basic skills of IT project management and be able to
Determine the scope of the project according to the characteristics and needs of the project stakeholders, and set specific items after planning and analysis.
The goal is to effectively achieve the goal with the support of information technology.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
IT project management is a compulsory professional course for majors in information management and information systems. Pass this course
Teaching to enable students to master the basic principles and basic skills of IT project management, and be able to follow the characteristics of the project
Requirements, determine the scope of the project, plan, analyze, and set specific project goals. In the information technology
Effectively achieve goals with support. The purpose of this course is to train project managers who can adapt to specific industries
member.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Students are required to master 9 major knowledge areas of project management: overall project management, scope, time, cost,
Quality, human resources, communication, risk and procurement management and all five process groups: start-up, planning,
Execution, control and finishing. In the learning process, the principle of integrating theory with practice is required to be conscientiously implemented.
While basic concepts, theories and methods, consciously apply the theories and methods learned to analyze and process the management
Practical problems, cultivate the ability to analyze and solve practical problems in the profession.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1 Overview of project management
Main content: what is project management, project management system concept, project stage and project life
Cycle, understanding organization, relevant skills that project managers should have, project management process
Teaching requirements: master the system concept of project management, project phases and project life cycle and process
2 Overall project management
Main content: What is the overall project management, the formulation of the project plan, the execution of the project plan, the overall
Change control, need senior management support
Teaching requirements: master the overall project management, plan formulation and execution, and overall change control.
3 Project scope management (course emphasis, difficulty)
Main content: What is project scope management, project initiation: strategic plan and project selection, scope planning
Planning preparation and scope statement, scope definition and work breakdown structure, scope review and scope change control
Teaching requirements: master project scope management, scope planning, scope definition and work breakdown structure
4 Project time management (key points and difficulties of the course)
Main content: importance of project schedule, sequence of activities, estimation of activity duration, and schedule
Plan and control project schedule changes
Teaching requirements: master the duration of project activities, make schedules, control project schedule changes
Page 329
5 Project cost management
Main content: the importance of project cost management and its basic principles, resource planning, cost estimation, cost
This budget and cost control.
Teaching requirements: master the principles of project cost management, resource planning, cost estimation, and cost budgeting
law.
6 Project quality management
Main content: the quality of IT projects, what is project quality management, modern quality management, quality planning
Planning, quality assurance, quality control, quality control tools and techniques, and improving the quality of IT projects
Teaching requirements: master the concept of project quality management, quality planning, quality assurance, and quality control
7 Project human resource management
Main content: What is the key of project human resource management, personnel management, organization plan preparation, project
Problems in project personnel acquisition and team building
Teaching requirements: master the key to personnel management and the preparation of organizational plans.
8 Project communication management
Main content: communication plan preparation, information transmission, performance report, management closing suggestions to improve communication
Teaching requirements: master communication plan preparation, information transmission, performance report
9 Project Risk Management (Key Points and Difficulties of the Course)
Main content: General sources of IT project risks, risk identification, risk quantification, risk response plan
Development and response control
Teaching requirements: master the source, identification, quantification and control of IT project risks
10 Project Procurement Management
Main content: preparation of procurement plan, preparation of inquiry plan, supplier selection, inquiry, contract management
Teaching requirements: master purchase plan preparation, inquiry plan preparation, supplier selection, inquiry and contract management.
11 Process of project management
Main content: project initiation, project planning, project execution, project control, project closing
Teaching requirements: master the basic process of project management
12 Project for project management (course focus)
Main content: Use the Project environment to deepen the understanding of project management tools
Teaching requirements: master the Project environment.
4. Requirements for course practice
1. Learn to install Java programming environment
2. Computer debugging through data access, graphical interface, object-oriented program
3. Master the use of Java common class libraries
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Week
Zhou Xue
Time
content
teaching
Hours
extracurricular
Hours
Teaching group
Weaving method
Description
Week 1 4
Project management overview
4
4
Teach
Week 2 2
Overall project management
2
2
Teach
Week 3 2
Project scope management
2
2
Teach
Week 4 4
Project time management
2
2
Teach
Week 5 4
Project cost management
2
2
Teach
Page 330
Week 6 4
Project quality management
2
2
Teach
Week 7 4
Project Human Resource Management 2
2
Teach
Week 8 4
Project communication management
2
2
Teach
Week 9 4
Project risk management
2
2
Teach
Week 10 4
Project procurement management
2
2
Teach
Week 11 4
The process of project management
2
2
Teach
Week 12 4
Project
management
2
2
Teach
Week 13 4
Course review and summary
4
4
Teach
6. Course assessment method
1. Evaluation method: examination
2. Assessment scope: see course content
3. Achievement evaluation standard: 30% homework score + 70% test score
4. Whether to use the test question bank: No
Seven, formulation writer: Bi Wenjie
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Matlab and its applications
Course number: 160702Z1
Course name: Matlab and its applications
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 24)
English name: Matlab Programming & Applications
Prerequisites: Advanced Mathematics, Linear Algebra, Probability Theory, Computer Culture Foundation
Adaptation major: major in information management and information systems
Reference materials: Wang Zhenglin, Liu Ming. Proficient in MATLAB 7. Electronic Industry Press, 2007.2.
Course introduction:
MATLAB and its application is a basic tool course for this major. MATLAB is a company developed by Math Works.
A set of high-performance numerical calculation and visualization simulation software developed by the company, it uses powerful scientific calculation and visualization
Functional, easy-to-use, open and extensible environment, especially with more than 30 kinds of
Toolbox support, making it a computer-aided design and analysis, algorithm research and
Basic tools and preferred platform for application development.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is an elective course for the major of Information Management and Information System in Business School.
Page 331
The study of this course requires students to deeply understand and master the use of MATLAB language; through examples
Make students learn to use MATLAB and its toolbox to solve practical problems, improve students’ analysis of problems and solve problems
The ability to question.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the study of this course, students are required to understand what is MATLAB language and its basic characteristics, and understand
MATLAB language and main toolbox, master the grammar, structure, data types and procedures of MATLAB language
Basic technology of design. Able to use MATLAB language for programming and numerical analysis.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Introduction to Matlab System
1.1 The development history of MATLAB
1.2 System structure of MATLAB
1.3 MATLAB7 toolbox
1.4 MATLAB installation and uninstallation
1.5 Start and Exit of MATLAB
1.6 Main Menu and Functions of MATLAB
1.7 MATLAB command window and workspace
1.8 Demos and the help function of Matlab
Chapter 2 Basic Concepts of MATLAB
2.1 Matrix, matrix function and matrix operation
2.2 Array functions and array operations
2.3 Multidimensional array and its operation
2.4 Structure and cell body
2.5 String
2.6 MATLAB data loading and saving
Chapter 3 MATLAB Programming Foundation
3.1 Data types and numeric types
3.2 Relations and logical operators
3.3 Process control and error control
3.4 Script M file and function M file
3.5 M file debugging and analysis
Chapter 4 File Management and I/O
4.1 MATLAB search path
4.2 Text data file
4.3 Spreadsheet file
4.4 Scientific standard format file
4.5 Data Import Wizard
4.6 Low-level file I/O
Chapter 5 MATLAB Graphics Processing Functions
5.1 MATLAB graphics window
5.2 Two-dimensional graphics
5.3 Three-dimensional graphics
Page 332
5.4 Three-dimensional grid and surface map
5.5 Coordinate axis control and graphic annotation
5.6 Use color and light and shadow
Chapter 6 Numerical Analysis and Calculation
6.1 Overview of data analysis and data preprocessing
6.2 Mathematical Statistics Functions
6.3 Data interpolation and fitting
6.4 Polynomial processing
6.5 Calculus solution
6.6 Ordinary differential equations
6.7 Fourier transform
6.8 Sparse matrix
Chapter 7 Handle Graphics and GUI Design
7.1 Overview of handle graphics
7.2 Graphic window objects
7.3 Core Graphics Objects
7.4 Handle graphic object operation
7.5 GUI and GUIDE
7.6 Use GUIDE to create GUI interface
7.7 Callback function
Chapter 8 MATLAB Toolbox
8.1 Optimization Toolbox
8.2 Basic Statistics Toolbox
8.3 Genetic Algorithm Toolbox
4. Requirements for course practice
MATLAB language is a widely used, easy to write, efficient programming, easy to learn and understand computer
High-level language. In the fields of control, communication, signal processing, finance and scientific computing, MATLAB has been widely used
Widely used. This course is theoretically and practically strong, and the understanding of the course teaching content can be learned through the computer
To achieve the purpose of the application. Improve students' hands-on ability, programming ability and learning through computer internship
Interest in MATLAB language, and flexibly use the knowledge learned, and gradually write practical programs. Train students
Basic ideas and ability to use computers to solve problems.
Students are required to deepen their understanding of the teaching content through experiments, especially some grammar rules;
MATLAB language program development environment; learn to debug programs on the computer.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Course Introduction
Course outline, bibliography introduction, base
Basic test
1
Chapter One
Introduction to MATLAB System
1.1 The development history of MATLAB 1.2
System structure of MATLAB 1.3
1
Page 333
MATLAB7 Toolbox 1.4 MATLAB
Installation and Uninstallation of 1.5 MATLAB
Start and exit 1.6 the main MATLAB
Menus and functions 1.7 MATLAB command window
Port and workspace 1.8 Demos and
Matlab's help function
Chapter two
Basic concepts of MATLAB
2.1 Matrix, matrix function and matrix operation
Math 2.2 Array functions and array operations
2.3 Multi-dimensional array and its operation 2.4 Conclusion
Structure and cell body 2.5 string
2.6 MATLAB data loading and saving
4
2
third chapter
MATLAB programming foundation
3.1 Data types and numeric types 3.2
Relations and logical operators 3.3 process control
Control and error control 3.4 Script M file
And function M file 3.5 M file debugging
And anatomy
6
4
Chapter Four
File management and I/O
4.1 MATLAB search path 4.2 Text
Data file 4.3 Spreadsheet file
4.4 Scientific standard format file 4.5 Number
According to Import Wizard 4.6 Low-level File I/O
4
2
chapter Five
MATLAB graphics processing functions
5.1 MATLAB graphics window 5.2 Two-dimensional
Figure 5.3 Three-dimensional figure 5.4 Three-dimensional net
Grid and surface Figure 5.5 Coordinate axis control and
Graphic annotation 5.6 Use color and light and shadow
4
4
Chapter Six
Numerical analysis and calculation
6.1 Overview of data analysis and data preprocessing
6.2 Mathematical statistical functions 6.3 Data
Interpolation and fitting 6.4 Polynomial processing
6.5 Solving Calculus 6.6 Ordinary Differential Square
6.7 Fourier transform 6.8 Sparse moment
Array
4
2
Chapter VII
Handle graphics and GUI design
7.1 Overview of handle graphics 7.2 Graphics window
口Object 7.3 Core Graphics Object 7.4
Handle graphical object operations 7.5 GUI and
GUIDE 7.6 Use GUIDE to create a GUI
Interface 7.7 callback function
6
4
chapter eight
MATLAB toolbox
8.1 Optimization Toolbox 8.2 Basic Statistics
4
2
Page 334
Toolbox 8.3 Genetic Algorithm Toolbox
6. Course assessment method
1. Course assessment methods: final exam, written exam.
2. The composition of the overall assessment scores: 40% of homework and attendance, and 60% of test scores.
7. Formulation Writer: Zhou Yanju
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
E-commerce security and technology
Course number: 160703Z1
Course Name : E-commerce Security and Technology
English name: E-Commerce Security and Technology
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 8)
Prerequisite course requirements : data communication and computer network, database technology, e-commerce foundation
Adapt to majors : information management and information systems, e-commerce
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbook: "E-commerce Security Technology", edited by Zhang Aiju, Tsinghua University Press
Reference book: "E-commerce Security", edited by Bo Zhang, East China University of Science and Technology Press
"E-commerce Security and Management", edited by Lao Shiling, Higher Education Press
Course introduction :
E-commerce security and technology is a professional course. The course mainly includes: basic knowledge of e-commerce security,
The content introduces the basic knowledge of network information security, network information security standards and management, e-commerce security
Issues, the main security elements of e-commerce, e-commerce security technology framework; encryption technology, including
Overview of encryption technology, traditional encryption methods, data encryption standards DES and IDEA, public key encryption algorithms
Law; access control and firewall technology, the content is divided into access control technology, the basic concept of firewall, fire prevention
Wall technology, firewall design strategy and security strategy, firewall implementation method; intrusion detection and security review
Technology, the content introduces the overview of intrusion detection, the design principle of intrusion detection system, the deployment of intrusion detection,
The development direction of intrusion detection, modern security audit technology; hacker and virus protection technology, the main content is prevention
Basic knowledge of hackers, common attack methods of hackers, basic steps of hacker attacks, analysis of common system vulnerabilities,
Security measures to prevent hackers, computer virus overview, computer virus detection, computer virus prevention;
Authentication technology, content introduction message authentication technology, identity authentication technology, digital signature technology; database security
Technology, the content mainly includes database security requirements, database access control, database encryption, database users
Management; Web security technology, mainly introduces the security challenges faced by the web server,
Set, ASP.NET-based Web security technology, J2EE-based Web security technology. Through learning, make
Students have a basic understanding of e-commerce security strategies and technologies, and train them to make preliminary e-commerce security
Strategies, analyze the hidden dangers of e-commerce security, prevent hackers and virus attacks, and better adapt to e-commerce
Page 335
Development needs.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"E-commerce Security and Technology" is an elective course for e-commerce and related majors. It uses confidentiality,
Based on knowledge of data communication, computer network, database technology, etc.
One of the most important knowledge and skills for preparing equipment, especially in the growing popularity of e-commerce and network information security facing more
This is especially true in the age of challenge. The course mainly introduces the basic concepts, principles and technologies of e-commerce security.
The following objectives are achieved through the teaching of this course:
1. Enable students to have a basic understanding of e-commerce security strategies and technologies;
2. Cultivate students' ability to initially formulate e-commerce security strategies and analyze hidden dangers of e-commerce security;
3. Provide students with basic data encryption, firewall settings, intrusion detection, hacker and virus protection,
The ability to design certification schemes and select safe software products.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Grasp the basic concepts and theories of e-commerce security; understand the architecture of e-commerce security technology; be familiar with
Know the main strategies to ensure the security of e-commerce; master encryption technology, access control and firewall technology, intrusion
Detection and security audit technology, hacker and virus protection technology, authentication technology, database security technology, Web
The basic principles and main methods of safety technology.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Basic knowledge of e-commerce security (emphasis)
Basic knowledge of network information security
Network information security standard specification and management
E-commerce security issues
The main security elements of e-commerce
E-commerce security technology framework
2. Encryption technology (emphasis, difficulty)
Encryption technology overview
Traditional encryption method
Data encryption standard DES and IDEA
Public key encryption algorithm
3. Access control and firewall technology
Access control technology
Basic concepts of firewall
Firewall technology
Design strategy and security strategy of firewall
How the firewall is implemented
4. Intrusion detection and security audit technology
Overview of Intrusion Detection
Design Principles of Intrusion Detection System
Intrusion detection deployment
The development direction of intrusion detection
Page 336
Modern security audit technology
5. Hacker and virus protection technology (focus)
Basic knowledge of anti-hacking
Common attack methods used by hackers
Basic steps of hacking
Analysis of common system vulnerabilities
Security measures to prevent hackers
Computer virus overview
Computer virus detection
Computer virus prevention
6. Certification technology (focus)
Message authentication technology
Identity authentication technology
Digital signature technology
7. Database security technology
Database security requirements
Database access control
Database encryption
Database user management
8. Web security technology (difficulty)
Security Challenges Facing Web Servers
Web server security settings
Web Security Technology Based on ASP.NET
Web security technology based on J2EE.
4. Requirements for course practice
This course is equipped with experiments on the main practical technology of e-commerce security, but because of the less time and relative
Due to the impact of software tools on the laboratory environment, the experiments are arranged outside of class.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Experimental hours
Remarks
1
Basic knowledge of e-commerce security
2
2
Encryption Technology
6
4
3
Access control and firewall technology
4
2
extracurricular
4
Intrusion detection and security audit technology
4
2
extracurricular
5
Hacker and virus protection technology
6
6
extracurricular
6
Authentication technology
6
4
7
Database security technology
2
8
Web security technology
2
2
extracurricular
6. Course assessment method
The examination mainly adopts the closed-book method. The scope of the examination should cover all the content taught, and the content of the examination should be able to
Views reflect students’ memory and mastery of the main concepts of this course, and their understanding and mastery of relevant theories
Page 337
And comprehensive application ability.
Overall assessment scores: 30% of attendance and experiments are usually taken, and 70% are closed-book exams.
7. Formulation writer: Hu Dongbin
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section and Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
E-commerce website development technology
Course number: 160704Z1
Course name: e-commerce website development technology
English name: Techology of E-Commerce Website Empoldering
Class hours and credits : 56/3.5 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 24)
Prerequisite course requirements : C language programming foundation, database principle and technology
Adapt to major : e-commerce
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbook: "E-commerce Website Construction" Xue Wanxin Tsinghua University Press 2007-8-1
reference book:
(1) "E-commerce Website Construction and Management" Wang Yuefen, Peking University Press, 2002.1
(2) "E-commerce website construction and management training" Chen Menghua Tsinghua University Press 2005.10
(3) "E-commerce Website Construction and Management" Huang Liqun Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press 2005.1
(4) "DreamWeaver MX 2004 and ASP Dynamic Web Page Basics and Examples" Zhong Bin Machinery Industry
Publishing House 2004
(5) "IIS5.0 System Management Guide" Tsinghua University Press Patrick Santry, Mitch
Tulloch, Yu Qian, translated by Li Bo, 2000.12
(6) "E-commerce Project Implementation Management" Bennett P. Lienzkaiser, Publishing House of Electronics Industry
Lin·P·Lei Translated by Shen Ting 2003.1
Course introduction:
With the rapid development and popularization of network technology and related electronic technologies, e-commerce companies are increasing
many. It has become fashionable to use the Internet to conduct business and online marketing activities.
One of the most important means of international competition. This course is suitable for e-commerce majors, mainly learning e-commerce network
Site overview, e-commerce site planning, e-commerce site operating environment, e-commerce site development technology,
XML markup language, ASP technology foundation and application, ASP advanced application, e-commerce website management and maintenance
And other content.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
E-commerce website development technology course is one of the compulsory courses for e-commerce majors. The course integrates e-commerce
The latest concepts and the latest application technologies for the construction and management of business websites, from the overall design of e-commerce websites
Page 338
Start with road and planning, comprehensively and systematically teach the overall structure and system design process of e-commerce website design,
On this basis, it focuses on introducing the development technology of the website and the application of main tools, and the management system and method of the website.
law. The practical aspects of the course should occupy an important position in the teaching process, so attention should be paid to
Cultivation of practical skills.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course is a professional core course. Before learning this course, students should be familiar with object-oriented, mathematical
According to relevant courses and knowledge such as database design, learn OOP and database modeling during the course, and write independently
And organize design and development documents. Learn the website framework, have high organization, planning and control capabilities, and be able to
Enough to independently organize the development and design of website products.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter 1 Overview of e-commerce website construction
Fundamental contents:
This chapter introduces the basic knowledge of e-commerce websites. Through the study of this chapter, master the e-commerce website
Basic framework and composition system; understand the knowledge of e-commerce website development and project management; master electronic
The development technology and main development tools of business website construction, and the basic structure of e-commerce development platform;
Have knowledge of the network environment, software and hardware platforms of e-commerce websites, and website operation. Specific
The content includes: Web technology, web page and website overview, Web technology, web page, website and e-commerce website
Operating environment
Key points: the composition structure of the enterprise e-commerce system, the architecture and main functions of the e-commerce system,
The development technology of e-commerce website and its operating environment.
Difficulty: Understand the framework of e-commerce application system, the development environment and basic platform shape of e-commerce system
Know and master as a whole.
Chapter 2 E-commerce website analysis and design
Fundamental contents:
This chapter introduces website planning, website system analysis and website system design during the construction of e-commerce websites.
The content of the plan. Through the study of this chapter, you should understand the basic content of the feasibility analysis of website construction, and focus on mastering
Requirements analysis, business process analysis and data flow analysis methods, learn to apply functions in website system design
Module design and code design methods to solve practical problems. The specific content is: e-commerce website
System analysis and e-commerce website system design.
Focus: Master the methods of demand analysis, business process analysis and data flow analysis, and learn to apply the website department
The method of functional module design and code design in system design is used to solve practical problems.
Difficulty: Design an e-commerce system website.
Chapter 3 Building a Web Site
Basic content: This chapter introduces the relevant knowledge of building a Web site, specifically introduces the configuration management of IIS,
Lay a good foundation for the development of e-commerce websites. Through the study of this chapter, you should understand the C/S mode and the B/S mode,
Grasp the general principles that should be followed when choosing a network operating system, understand the commonly used architecture of Linux,
Unix and Windows operating systems, master the installation and configuration methods of IIS under Windows 2000. specific
The contents are: website structure classification, Web server review, IIS 5.0
Focus:
The characteristics and differences between C/S mode and B/S mode, and the general principles that should be followed when selecting a network operating system.
Difficulty: How to install and configure IIS under Windows2000.
Page 339
Chapter 4 Web Design Techniques
Fundamental contents:
This chapter introduces HTML and two commonly used teaching languages, JavaScript language and VBScript language.
Through the study of this chapter, you should be able to master the use of HTML and the programming of JavaScript and VBScript
Know how. The specific content is: HTML, JavaScript, VBScript.
Focus:
Knowledge of JavaScript programming, its objects and their properties, methods and events.
difficulty:
Knowledge of VBScript programming, its objects and their properties, methods and events.
Chapter 5 Database Design
Basic content: This chapter introduces database-related knowledge. Through the study of this chapter, you should learn to use Access
Create a database, understand the basic grammar of SQL, understand the built-in objects of ASP, and master the common objects of ASP
Collections, attributes and methods, master the use and creation of ADO common objects, master the configuration of ODBC
law. The specific content includes: database overview, database design method, Access, structured query language
Language SQL, ASP, ADO and ODBC.
Focus:
The basic syntax of SQL, the use of ASP common objects.
Difficulties: how to configure ODBC using ADO objects.
Chapter 6 Use software to create a complete e-commerce website
Basic content: This chapter introduces the method of implementing a complete e-commerce website in DreamWeaver MX,
Comprehensively use the knowledge learned in the previous chapters to build part of the functions of an online bookstore. Specific content
There are: creating an e-commerce site, database connection, and realization of the main functions of the website.
Focus:
Master the creation of sites, database connections, creation of record sets, server behavior "duplicate records", service
Server behavior “dynamic text”, server behavior “user registration”, “user login”, “user logout”, “restricted
Access to the page".
difficulty:
The use of SQL statements in the creation of record sets and the registration and login of users in online bookstores, browsing and shopping
The flow of things.
Chapter 7 Management and Maintenance of E-commerce Website
Basic content: This chapter introduces the content and methods of e-commerce website management and maintenance. Learn through this chapter
Should master the content and tools of website testing, master the management methods of e-commerce websites and website management software
Software, understand e-commerce website performance measurement indicators, optimization strategies and related tools, and understand website optimization techniques.
The specific contents are: e-commerce website testing, e-commerce website management, e-commerce website
Performance optimization.
Focus:
E-commerce website management content, methods and some representative tool software.
difficulty:
How to effectively manage e-commerce websites.
4. Requirements for course practice
Four experiments were completed during the course of teaching. The specific experiment contents are as follows:
Experiment 1 : Experiment with HTML tags, master common tags
Page 340
Experiment 2 : Create a web page with HTML language
Experiment 3: Simple programming using VBScript language
Experiment 4: Complex programming using VBScript language
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
In class
Class hours
extracurricular
Class hours
Chapter One
Overview of e-commerce website construction
2
0
Chapter two
E-commerce website analysis and design
4
0
third chapter
Build a Web site
4
0
Chapter Four
Web design technology
6
0
chapter Five
Database Design
6
0
Chapter Six
Create a complete e-commerce website with software
6
0
Chapter VII
Management and maintenance of e-commerce website
4
0
experiment
6 experiments
twenty four
total
56
0
6. Course assessment method
Attendance accounted for 10%, usual grades (including homework, computer practice and course design) accounted for 40%, and written examination accounted for
50%.
7. Formulation Author: Liu Zhiyong
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
E-commerce system construction practice
Course number: 160705Z1
Course name : Practice of e-commerce system construction
English name : Electronic Commerce System Construction Practice
Class hours and credits : 4 weeks/4
Prerequisite course requirements : e-commerce website development technology, e-commerce system construction and management
Adapt to major: E-commerce major
Textbooks and reference books:
Page 341
[1] Chen Song. J2EE e-commerce system development from entry to proficiency-based on Struts and
Hibernate technology implementation. Tsinghua University Press, 2007
[2]Zhao Zuyin. E-commerce website construction tutorial (second edition). Tsinghua University Press, 2008
Course introduction:
It is a compulsory professional practice course for students majoring in e-commerce and a comprehensive knowledge of related e-commerce systems
Combined use. The course guides students to realize specific e-commerce department through learning examples of e-commerce system construction
System to enhance students’ development capabilities.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"E-commerce System Construction Practice" is one of the required professional courses for e-commerce majors.
Comprehensive application of knowledge related to business system construction.
The course guides students to use software development tools and databases by learning examples of e-commerce system construction
Technology and e-commerce system development and design methods to implement specific e-commerce systems to enhance students
Development capabilities.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course is mainly systematic and practical. Ask students:
1. Familiar with and master the theories, methods, standard techniques and tools of e-commerce system development, understand and
National standards related to e-commerce system development.
2. Able to choose development tools reasonably according to specific conditions and use them proficiently.
3. Able to comprehensively use the knowledge learned to independently develop a small e-commerce system.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Experiment: Design and implementation of e-commerce system
[Experimental purpose and requirements]
This experiment requires students to design and implement a small student information management e-commerce department under the guidance of teachers
The purpose is to familiarize students with the development process of e-commerce system.
[Experimental content and steps]
1. Problem definition:
As the management of student information in colleges and universities tends to become more complex and diversified, with the widespread use of computers
Application, more and more colleges and universities have adopted the computerized management mode. Query, modify, enter, delete
Basic operations such as using computer database technology. Compared to the previous method of using cards
Progress, easy management, easy to update, greatly facilitate the management of student information. Therefore, to improve
Work efficiency, reduce the burden of staff, decided to develop student information management system software.
2. Refer to the steps in the experimental principle and develop the system under the guidance of the teacher. The experiment focuses on demand
Take the analysis and design of the system. Implementation, testing, installation and maintenance are optional.
[Experiment report requirements]
Students should carefully complete the experiment report.
4. Requirements for course practice
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Page 342
Edit
number
Experiment title
Specific requirements
real
Test
learn
Time
real
Test
class
do not
teach
learn
shape
formula
1
Student Information Management Electronics
Business system design and
achieve
This experiment requires students to set up
Design and realize a small-scale student information management
E-commerce system, the purpose is to familiarize students with
Know the development process of e-commerce system.
4 weeks
Comprehensive
Combine
open
put
6. Course assessment method
1. Evaluation method and form
Assessment method: examination; assessment method: large-scale operation.
2. The composition and evaluation criteria of comprehensive scores
This course has a total score of 100 points. In principle, it accounts for 30% in normal times and 70% at the end of the semester. Due to the needs of teaching reform,
Other assessment methods can be used.
Seven, formulation writer: Bi Wenjie
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
E-commerce system construction and management
Course number: 160706Z1
Course name: E-commerce system construction and management
English name: The Development and Management of Electronic Commence System
Class hours and credits:
48 /3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 16)
Prerequisite course requirements: basic database application, operations research, probability theory and mathematical statistics, computer programming,
Introduction to E-commerce, Management Information System
Adapt to major: e-commerce, logistics management, management science and engineering, business administration
Textbooks and reference books:
1. Sun Baowen, Wang Tianmei. "E-commerce System Construction and Management" Higher Education Press, 2002.1
2. Editor-in-chief Zhao Zuyin: "E-commerce Website Construction Tutorial", Tsinghua University Press, 2004 1
month.
3. Yan Junjie: "Network Programming-ASP", Tsinghua University Press, 2002
4. Xiao Ping, etc.: "E-commerce Website Design and Management", Southeast University Press, 2002
5. Oriental Renhua: "Introduction and Improvement of Webpage Production", Tsinghua University Press, 2001
Course introduction:
"E-commerce System Construction and Management" is one of the required courses for e-commerce majors. Practical according to the course
Characteristics, the content of the course involves introduction to e-commerce, e-commerce system planning, system structure, software and hardware
Page 343
Software platform, analysis and design, implementation, maintenance and operation, safety management system, promotion, evaluation, and case
Case analysis and other content.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"E-commerce System Construction and Management" is a compulsory course for e-commerce majors.
In recent years, e-commerce has developed rapidly in my country. It has become the core of the digital business society
Heart, and will become the mainstream way of future enterprise development and survival. New social needs for e-commerce
Application talents put forward higher training requirements, master the methods and technologies of e-commerce website construction to become electronic
Essential skills for business application talents. According to the practical characteristics of the course, the practical link is in the teaching process
Chinese should occupy an important position, for this reason, the training of practical skills must be strengthened in teaching.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
During the teaching process of "E-commerce System Construction and Management", specific teaching should be carried out according to the following requirements
Learning:
1. In the teaching process, teachers pay attention to the explanation of the basic ideas, principles and methods of this course, and their
The connection and difference between.
2. In the teaching process, the teaching method pays attention to the heuristic teaching method, while paying attention to the use of classroom
The way of asking questions and class discussions.
3. Teachers should pay attention to the combination of theory and practice in the teaching process, and use examples and case teaching as much as possible.
4. Organize e-commerce major students to develop actual systems; supplement a number of special lectures; consciously
Students are divided into several groups to conduct literature review and information system software development discussions on specific issues.
5. Students understand and master this lesson in the process of learning (preparatory study, lecture, computer practice and review)
The basic concepts, principles, methods and basic ideas, tools and use of the process.
Through the study of this course in specific courses, students should meet the following basic requirements:
Theoretical courses: basic knowledge of website construction
Skills and operations: master homepage design, be able to perform a certain functional module of a simple e-commerce website
Construction.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One E-commerce Engineering and Application Framework
Through the teaching in this chapter, students will understand basic] e-commerce applications, commonly used e-commerce technologies,
In addition, understand e-commerce engineering and e-commerce application framework.
The main contents are: e-commerce application, e-commerce technical background, e-commerce engineering, e-commerce
Application framework
Key difficulty: the basic system model of e-commerce application framework.
Chapter 2 WEB Application Client Development Technology
Master the B/S structure, be familiar with the working principle of the Web, master the core Web protocol HTTP, master the basics
HTML syntax.
The main contents are: network applications evolve from C/S structure to B/S structure; HTML client development;
JAVASCRIPT client development; Applet client development application; client development tool
Key difficulty: JAVASCRIPT client development
Chapter 3 Servlet Basics
Page 344
Grasp the basics of Servlet programming, master the interaction methods between web pages and Servlets, and understand common
Servlet container, master the configuration methods of common containers, master the publishing method of servlet, master Chinese characters
Garbled processing.
The main contents are: Servlet's role, advantages and working principle, Servlet development environment, process
Order structure and Servlet release
Chapter 4 Servlet Advanced Development
Master servlet session tracking, including URL rewriting, hidden form fields, Cookie, Session,
Focus on the session and cookie.
The main content includes: Servlet session tracking overview; URL rewriting to achieve session tracking; hidden form
Domain implements session tracking; Cookie implements session tracking; Session implements session tracking, HttpSession
Use of classes
Chapter 5 Servet database access
Grasp the basic concepts of JDBC, be familiar with commonly used JDBC classes, and master the use of JDBC to increase the database,
Delete and modify.
The main contents are: JDBC overview; JDBC environment; Servlet container and common database server connection
General configuration; detailed introduction of commonly used database access, different database connection methods.
Chapter 6 Introduction to JSP and JavaBean
Grasp the working mechanism of JSP, understand the basic syntax of JSP, understand the concept of JavaBean, understand JSP,
JAVABEAN and SERVLET combined development and the concepts of Struts and Hibernate.
The main contents are: JSP overview; JSP element development basis; JSP connection database; JavaBean overview
Introduction; Overview of JSP, JAVABEAN and SERVLET combined development; Open source projects Struts and Hibernate
Introduction
Chapter 7 Maintenance and operation of other commonly used technologies and e-commerce systems
Understand the security development technology in e-commerce, and understand Java-related security classes. Understand the XML application
Use development technology. Master the basic methods of e-commerce system maintenance and operation. Maintenance of e-commerce system,
Security management system for operations and e-commerce systems.
The main contents are: the basic concepts of security and the security threats faced by the e-commerce system, to achieve security
Certified Java programming class. Understand the technical basis of XML development.
4. Requirements for course practice
Familiar with the whole process of analysis, design and implementation of a typical e-commerce system.
Experiment 1: Browsing a lot of e-commerce websites and completing a preliminary plan for website construction. 2 class hours
Experiment 2: IIS settings. 2 class hours
Experiment 3: Website design and development. Including: user registration, user login, product addition, product repair
The realization of 7 modules of change, product display, product query, and shopping cart. 10 hours
Experiment 4: Website test. Register for a free space, upload website content, and test it. 2 class hours
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One
E-commerce engineering and application frame
frame
2
Chapter 2 WEB Application Client Development Technology
2
2
Page 345
Technique
Chapter 3 Servlet Basics
4
2
Chapter 4 Servlet Advanced Development
6
2
Chapter 5 Servet database access
8
4
Chapter 6 Introduction to JSP and JavaBean
6
6
Chapter VII
Other commonly used technologies and e-commerce
Maintenance and operation of service system
4
Total class hours
32
16
6. Course assessment method
The assessment method adopts a combination of written examination and hands-on practice.
Total score = written test*60% + computer*20% + homework*20%
The written test is a closed-book form and is randomly formed from a set of test questions. Questions are completed within 120 minutes and points are allocated
For: 20 points for multiple-choice questions, 10 points for true or false questions, 10 points for short-answer questions, 10 points for short-answer questions
5 30 points for small questions, 20 points for essay questions, and 10 points for analysis questions.
The practical results on the computer consist of tasks completed and attendance.
7. The author: Lai Bangchuan
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Information Resource Management
Course ID : 160707Z1
Course Name : Information Resource Management
English name: Information Resource Management
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites : Basic courses such as principles of management, computer communication and network technology, database technology, etc.
Adapt to majors : major in information management and information systems, major in e-commerce
Reference materials :
1. Ma Feicheng and Lai Maosheng, "Information Resource Management", Beijing: Higher Education Press, 2006.
2. Xiao Ming, "Information Resource Management (2nd Edition)", Beijing: Electronic Industry Press, 2008.
3. Zhong Jiagui, "Information Resource Management (E-commerce Professional Series Textbooks for Colleges and Universities)", Chinese People
University Press, 2008.
4. Tan Xiangjin, Dang Yuewu, "Introduction to Information Management", Beijing: Higher Education Press, 2000.
5. Meng Guangjun, "Introduction to Information Resource Management", Beijing: Science Press, 1998.
6. (U.S.) Maddie Krossropon, "Frontier Fields of Information Resource Management", Beijing: Science Press,
2005.
Course introduction:
Page 346
Information resource management was first developed in the United States in the late 1970s and early 1980s, and then gradually spread globally.
An applied theory that has been broadcast is that modern information technology, especially computer and modern communication technology, is the core
A new type of information management theory spawned by the application of information technology. Information as a resource, and material,
Energy is collectively referred to as the three pillars of modern society. It is the prerequisite or basis for the development and utilization of other resources,
Some industrialized countries even regard the development and utilization of information resources as a national policy. This course requires modern management
Seek to start, introduce the relevant theories and technologies of information resource management and organization, and combine with our country’s actual situation
Carry out analysis to improve students' comprehensive management and utilization of corporate information resources.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a professional basic course for undergraduates majoring in information or management.
An elective course for management undergraduates.
The goal of this course is mainly to enable students to master the beliefs through a teaching mode that combines theory and practice.
The basic theories, principles, methods and technologies of information management, information resource management and information system management;
Students’ information literacy, enabling them to successfully acquire, use, organize and manage
Management information; enable students to fully understand the importance of information management and the strategic significance of information management to social information
To understand the important position and role of information management as a whole.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the teaching of this course, students need to understand the basic theoretical knowledge and main research content of the subject.
Recognize the research frontiers of this subject, understand the importance of information technology and quantitative analysis methods to the research of this subject,
Master the qualitative analysis methods and quantitative analysis methods used in the research of this subject, proficient in information collection, sorting,
Organization, processing and handling skills.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Information and information resources
1.2 Overview of Information Resource Management
1.3 The evolution and development of information resource management
basic requirements
1. Grasp the concepts and basic characteristics of information and information resources.
2. Master the origin and development of information resource management
3. Understand the origin and development of information resource management, and information resource management.
Chapter 2 Content Management in Information Resource Management
2.1 Types of information resources
2.2 Information collection
2.3 Information organization
2.4 Information retrieval
2.5 Information analysis
2.6 Development and Utilization of Information Resources
basic requirements
1. Master the theoretical basis of information resource management
2. Master the content of information science
Page 347
3. Understand the relevant theories of information resource management science
Chapter 3 Information System Management
3.1 Information Technology and Information System
3.2 Development strategy of information system
3.3 Information system development method
3.4 Operation Management of Information System
3.5 Standardization of Information Resources
3.6 Project management of information system construction
basic requirements
1. Understand enterprise information construction and management
2. Master the basic methods of information system development and management
Chapter 4 Enterprise Information Resource Management
4.1 The background and development of enterprise information resource management
4.2 The content and mode of enterprise information resource management
4.3 Enterprise informatization construction and management
4.4 The development trend of enterprise informatization
basic requirements
1. Understand the development of enterprise information resource management and enterprise information structure
2. Understand enterprise information construction and management
3. Master the content and methods of enterprise information resource management
Chapter 5 Government Information Resource Management
5.1 The emergence and development of government information resource management
5.2 Types and characteristics of government information resources
5.3 The content and mode of government information resource management
5.4 Government information construction and management
basic requirements
1. Understand the origin of government information resource management
2. Master the basic functions and tools of government information resource management
3. Understand the relevant principles of e-government
Chapter 6 Information Policies and Regulations
6.1 Overview of information policies and regulations
6.2 Information disclosure system and laws
6.3 Intellectual Property Protection Law
6.4 Information security policies and regulations
basic requirements
1. Understand relevant policies and laws regarding the collection, dissemination and utilization of information resources
2. Understand the relevant laws and regulations of information security
Chapter 7 Optimal Configuration of Information Resources
7.1 Economic theory of resource allocation
7.2 Information resource allocation and information welfare
7.3 Information resource allocation mechanism
7.4 Allocation of property rights of information resources
7.5 The efficiency of information resource allocation
Page 348
7.6 Information resource sharing
basic requirements
1. Understand the value measurement of information
2. Understand the allocation of information resources
3. Master the value measurement of information products and services
Chapter 8 Knowledge Management
8.1 From information resource management to knowledge management
8.2 The main content of knowledge management
8.3 Realization of knowledge management
8.4 CIO and CKO
basic requirements
1. Understand the origin of knowledge management
2. Understand the theory and knowledge of knowledge management
4. Requirements for course practice
no.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
sequence
number
Main teaching content
Class hours
Teach
the way
Remarks
1
Lecture 1 Introduction
1.1 Information and information resources
1.2 Overview of Information Resource Management
1.3 The evolution and development of information resource management
4
Teach
2
Lecture 2 Content Management in Information Resource Management
2.1 Types of information resources
2.2 Information collection
2
Teach
3
2.3 Information organization
2.4 Information retrieval
2
Teach
4
2.5 Information analysis
2.6 Development and Utilization of Information Resources
2
Teach
communicate with
discuss
5
Lecture 3 Management of Information System
3.1 Information Technology and Information System
3.2 Development strategy of information system
3.3 Information system development method
2
Teach
communicate with
discuss
6
3.4 Operation Management of Information System
3.5 Standardization of Information Resources
3.6 Project management of information system construction
2
Teach
7
Lecture 4 Enterprise Information Resource Management
4.1 The background and development of enterprise information resource management
History
4.2 The content and mode of enterprise information resource management
2
Teach
communicate with
discuss
Page 349
8
4.3 Enterprise informatization construction and management
4.4 The development trend of enterprise informatization
2
Teach
9
Lecture 5 Government Information Resource Management
5.1 The emergence and development of government information resource management
5.2 Types and characteristics of government information resources
5.3 The content and mode of government information resource management
5.4 Government information construction and management
2
Teach
communicate with
discuss
10
Lecture 6 Information Policy and Laws
6.1 Overview of information policies and regulations
6.2 Information disclosure system and laws
2
Teach
11
6.3 Intellectual Property Protection Law
6.4 Information security policies and regulations
2
Teach
communicate with
discuss
12
Lecture 7 Optimal Allocation of Information Resources
7.1 Economic theory of resource allocation
7.2 Information resource allocation and information welfare
2
Teach
13
7.3 Information resource allocation mechanism
7.4 Allocation of property rights of information resources
2
Teach
communicate with
discuss
14
7.5 The efficiency of information resource allocation
7.6 Information resource sharing
2
Teach
communicate with
discuss
15
Lecture 8 Knowledge Management
8.1 From information resource management to knowledge management
8.2 The main content of knowledge management
8.3 Realization of knowledge management
8.4 CIO and CKO
review
2
Teach
communicate with
discuss
total
32
6. Course assessment method
1. Evaluation method: Examination
2. Scope of assessment: teaching content
3. Performance evaluation standard: usual results × 30% + examination results × 70%
4. Whether to use the test question bank: No
7. Formulation Writer: Xu Chen
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 350
E-commerce professional English
Course number: 160708Z1
Course Name : Professional English for E-commerce
English name: E-Business Professional English
Class hours and credits : 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisites: College basic English, college computer foundation, introduction to e-commerce, management
Adapt to major: E-commerce major
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbook:
Editor-in-Chief Wang Ye. E-commerce Professional English Course. Publishing House of Electronics Industry, 2007
Editor-in-Chief by Lan Tian. Foreign Trade English Correspondence. Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press, 2000.9
Course introduction:
E-commerce professional English is an elective professional course for e-commerce majors. This course passes and
Gu's English language learning, the application of English in e-commerce and the professional knowledge of e-commerce
Learning, aims to cultivate students’ ability to use English in e-commerce practice, and strengthen students’
Mastery of professional terms, basic concepts and theories. Enable students to consciously use English as a tool
Yan's professional knowledge lays a solid foundation for further professional study and work.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
E-commerce English is an elective professional course for e-commerce majors. The course is arranged in the sixth
Semester.
This course takes into account the study of English language, the application of English in e-commerce majors and the e-commerce
The learning of three aspects of professional knowledge aims to cultivate students' ability to apply English in e-commerce practice, and at the same time
Strengthen students' mastery of e-commerce professional terms, basic concepts and theories. Enable students to consciously use English
The language tool acquires cutting-edge professional knowledge and lays a solid foundation for further professional learning and work.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Master the unique language features, professional vocabulary usage and translation skills of professional English, and be familiar with the writing and foreign trade industry
All kinds of e-mails in the business. Train students to proficiently read and translate various e-commerce English documents and write e-commerce
The ability of business correspondence.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Text study (emphasis)
·Unit 1 Electronic Commerce Theory
·Unit 2 Internet and Protocols
·Unit 3 Economics of Electronic Commerce
·Unit 4 Web Publishing
Page 351
·Unit 5 Logistics
·Unit 6 EDI and Its Application
·Unit 7 Electronic Marketing Structure and Direct Marketing
·Unit 8 SCM and Electronic Commerce
·Unit 9 Advertising Strategies
2. Discrimination of word formation, memory method and word meaning of professional vocabulary (emphasis)
·Word Formation
·Memory method
·Analysis of the meaning of words
3. Translation skills (difficulty)
·Selection method
·Extension Law,
·Add wording,
·Subtraction,
4. Business letter writing (difficulty)
·The first chapter General Introduction. The basic principles of business communication and the writing of English letters
format.
·The second chapter Establishing Business Relations. The writing content and writing of the diplomatic relations letter
Method of work and related sentence patterns and vocabulary.
·The third chapter Enquiries. Translation and writing of inquiry letters, related sentence patterns and vocabulary.
·Chapter IV Offers. The translation and writing content, methods, related sentence patterns and vocabulary of the offer letter.
·Chapter 5 Counter Offers. Counter-pan translation and writing methods, content, related sentence patterns and words
exchange.
·Chapter VI Conclusion of Business. Completion letter writing, contract translation and writing,
Related sentence patterns and vocabulary.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Prepare
Note
Chapter 1 Electronic Commerce Theory
2
Chapter 2 Internet and Protocols
2
Chapter 3 Economics of Electronic Commerce
4
Chapter 4 Web Publishing
2
Chapter 5 Logistics
4
Chapter 6 EDI and Its Application
4
Chapter 7
Electronic Marketing Structure and
Direct Marketing
4
Chapter 8 SCM and Electronic Commerce
4
Chapter 9 Advertising Strategies
4
Page 352
Course learning summary
2
6. Course assessment method
The examination mainly adopts the closed-book method. The scope of the examination should cover all the content taught, and the content of the examination should be able to
Views reflect students’ memory and mastery of the main concepts of this course, and their understanding and mastery of relevant theories
And comprehensive application ability. Exam question types should be as diverse as possible.
Overall assessment results: 30% of the usual homework, 70% of the closed-book examination.
7. Formulation writer: Bianli
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approved by (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Business Intelligence
Course Number : 160709Z1
Course Name : Business Intelligence
English name : Business Intelligence
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 12)
Prerequisite course requirements : basic database application, mathematical statistics
Adapt to majors: information management and information systems, e-commerce
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbook: Data Mining Concepts and Techniques, by Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber, Fan Ming,
Translated by Meng Xiaofeng, Machinery Industry Press
Reference book: ①Business Intelligence and Data Mining Microsoft SQL Server Application, edited by Xie Bangchang,
Machinery Industry Press②Knowledge Discovery, edited by Shi Zhongzhi, Tsinghua University Press
Course introduction:
Business intelligence is a basic professional course. This course introduces an overview of data mining technology, data warehouse technology, data
According to preprocessing, concept description: characterization and comparison, association rule mining, classification and prediction, cluster analysis, etc.
content. At the same time, the data mining tool MATALB (SPSS or SQL Server) is arranged in the relevant chapters.
Computer experiment of the software package. Through the study of this course, students will have a comprehensive and in-depth grasp of the basics of data mining
This concept and principle, commonly used data mining algorithms, cutting-edge data mining research fields, and data mining
Application in management.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Business intelligence is one of the basic professional courses. Through this course, students will understand the concept of business intelligence
And basic theories, master various data warehouses and knowledge discovery technologies, and help students understand how to use knowledge and
Methods to solve actual business intelligence problems.
Page 353
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Business intelligence involves a wide range of content and is a new product that integrates management, technology, and application.
Xing disciplines. This course requires students to master the relevant knowledge of business intelligence theory in theory, and in practice
Can use data mining tools MATALB (SPSS or SQL Server) software package and some data mining tools
Data mining is performed on the data set and the output results of data mining are interpreted. Can be completed independently through this course
Data mining research work to solve practical problems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One Overview of Data Mining Technology
Data mining generation, concepts, functions, data types of data mining, data mining system classification, data
According to the main problems of mining primitives and data mining
Focus: data mining functions, data types of data mining, data mining primitives
Difficulty: None
Chapter 2 Data Warehouse Technology
Data warehouse concept, multidimensional data model, data warehouse system structure, data warehouse design, data warehouse
Library realization, connection between data warehouse and data mining technology, further development of data cube technology
Focus: Data warehouse system structure, data warehouse design, data warehouse realization
Difficulty: data warehouse design
Chapter 3 Data Preprocessing
Reasons for data preprocessing, data cleaning, data integration and transformation, data reduction and dimensionality reduction, discretization
And concept layer generation
Focus: Data cleaning and reduction and dimensionality reduction
Difficulty: data reduction and dimensionality reduction
Chapter 4 Concept Description: Characterization and Comparison
Definition of concept description, data generalization/statistical characterization, analytical characterization, class comparison, large
Statistical measurement
Focus: Data generalization/statistical characterization, class comparison
Difficulty: data generalization/statistical characterization
Chapter 5 Association Rules Mining
The concept of association rule mining, single-dimensional Boolean association rules---Apriori and FP tree, multi-level relations
Association rule mining, multi-dimensional association rule mining, association rule mining and correlation analysis
Focus: Association rule mining algorithm
Difficulty: the realization of Apriori algorithm
Chapter 6 Classification and Prediction
The concept of classification mining, decision tree technology, Bayesian classification (emphasis on naive Bayesian classification, Bayesian
Belief Network is only an introduction), BP neural network classification technology, introduction to other classification technologies, prediction, classification accuracy
Measure
Focus: Decision tree technology, Bayesian classification, BP neural network classification technology
Difficulty: algorithm thinking and implementation
Chapter 7 Cluster Analysis
Partition-based method (introduction of k-average, k-center point algorithm and CLARA algorithm), layer-based method
Method (introduction of AGNES and DIANA methods), density-based method (introduction of DBSCAN), grid-based method
Method (introduction), model-based clustering (introduction to statistical methods and neural network methods), outlier analysis
Page 354
Focus: based on the method of partition (introducing k-average, k-center point algorithm and CLARA algorithm), layer-based
Second method (introducing AGNES and DIANA methods), density-based method (DBSCAN)
Difficulty: Density-based method (DBSCAN)
4. Requirements for course practice
This course is a subject that combines technology and application. Each chapter is equipped with computer-based practice related to classroom teaching.
Experiment, using SQL Server as the experimental language of data warehouse technology, other experiments using MATLAB (or
SPSS) tool software is used as a business intelligence analysis tool. The content and requirements of the experiment are as follows:
1. Data warehouse technology experiment: design a data warehouse and online analysis and processing example;
2. Data preprocessing experiment: realize data import, coding, sorting, missing data processing, etc.;
3. Concept description experiment: realize the method based on data cube OLAP and attribute-oriented induction method;
Attribute or dimension correlation analysis through examples;
4. Association rule mining experiment: realize single-dimensional Boolean association rules---Apriori and FP tree,
Examples of multi-layer association rules mining;
5. Classification and prediction experiment: Realization of decision tree classification, Bayes classification and BP neural network classification
Example; 6. Cluster analysis experiment: Realize partition-based methods (k-average, k-center point algorithm and
CLARA algorithm), layer-based methods (AGNES and DIANA methods) and density-based methods (DBSCAN).
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Zhangji
content
Class hours of which experiment (on computer time) Remarks
1
Overview of Data Mining Technology
4
0
2
Data Warehouse Technology
6
2
3
Data preprocessing
6
2
4 Concept description: characterization and comparison 6
2
5
Association rule mining
8
2
6
Classification and prediction
10
4
7
Cluster analysis
8
2
6. Course assessment method
Closed-book exams, of which 30% are usually scores, and 70% are final exams.
7. Formulation Author: Hu Junhua
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Network economics
Course ID : 160710Z1
Course Name: Network Economics
Page 355
English name: Network Economics
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: none
Adapt to major : E-commerce major
Reference materials:
Textbook: Electronic Commerce and Network Economics, Wang Xiaojing, Zhong Qi, Tsinghua University Press, 2011
year
Reference book: E-commerce and network economics, (United States) Edward J. Dick, Yang Qing, Zheng Xianqiang
Translation, Dongbei University of Finance and Economics Press, 2006
Course introduction:
In the era of the new economy, the Internet and e-commerce have had a profound impact on economics. The purpose of this course is
Explore the similarity of the emerging network economy and traditional economy and the new development of network economics to traditional economic theory
Development; and study e-commerce issues from the perspective of economics, and explain how economic ideas can help explain e-commerce
Socio-economic issues in the business age.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
The network economics course is a required basic course for e-commerce majors.
This course introduces the network economy market structure and operation, network economy market performance and government functions, etc.
Economic theory, combined with domestic e-commerce cases, guide students to apply economic principles to understand e-commerce
Socio-economic issues of the modern era.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Students are required to not only learn the basic concepts and basic theories of network economics, but also understand the theories of network economics
Differences from traditional economic theories in the formation background, applicable fields and main concepts, principles and methods, more
It is necessary to cultivate and use the basic theories of network economics to analyze and solve economic problems in the practice of e-commerce.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
1. Introduction to the Internet Economy
10. Overview of the network economy
11. Thinking of economic problems caused by e-commerce
2. Theoretical Foundation of Network Economics
12. Overview of Network Economics
13. Relevant economic principles of network economics
14. Related laws of network economics
3. Value creation of network economy
15. Customer Value Analysis of Network Economy
16. Customer value creation strategy of network economy
17. Enterprise value appreciation under the network economy environment
18. Virtual value chain
4. Market structure and equilibrium analysis
19. Perfect competition
20. Monopoly
Page 356
21. Monopolistic competition
22. Oligopoly
5. Market structure changes under the network economy (emphasis)
23. New changes in market structure under the network economy
24. Market entry barriers under the network economy
25. The impact of structural entry barriers on market structure
26. The impact of strategic entry barriers on market structure
27. The impact of institutional barriers to entry on market structure
28. The impact of mergers on market structure
6 Market control in the network economy (difficulty)
29. Overview of market control
30. Strategies for the realization of market control in the network economy
31. The weakening of market control in the network economy
7. Market pricing, sales and profits under the network economy (difficulties)
32. Pricing theory and general methods
33. Market pricing strategy under the network economy
34. Market profits under the network economy
8. Network externalities (emphasis)
35. Overview of network externalities
36. Network externalities and market competition
37. Competitive strategies in the network externality market
9. Network economic efficiency (focus)
38. Basic Theory of Efficiency
39. Efficiency and Network Economy
40. Analysis of market efficiency under the network economy
10. Government functions in the network economy (focus)
41. Theoretical discussion on government functions
42. The influence and role of network economy on government functions
43. Government and government functions under the network economy
44. Network Economy and Government Governance
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
Section
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
1 Introduction to the Internet Economy
2
0
2 Theoretical basis of network economics
2
0
3 Value creation of the network economy
4
0
4 Market structure and its equilibrium analysis
2
0
5 Market structure changes under the network economy
4
0
6 Market control in the network economy
4
0
Page 357
7 Market pricing, sales and profits under the network economy
4
0
8 Network externalities
2
0
9 Network economic efficiency
4
0
10 Government functions in the network economy
2
0
review
2
0
6. Course assessment method
The examination mainly adopts the closed-book method. The scope of the examination should cover all the content taught, and the content of the examination should be able to
Views reflect students’ memory and mastery of the main concepts of this course, and their understanding and mastery of relevant theories
And comprehensive application ability. Exam question types should be as diverse as possible.
Overall assessment results: 30% of the usual homework, 70% of the closed-book examination.
7. Formulation Author: Shao Liuguo
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Internet marketing
Course number: 160711Z1
Course Name: Internet Marketing
English name: Network Marketing
Class hours and credits: 32 /2 (including experimental hours: 8, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: marketing, e-commerce, computer foundation
Adapt to majors: majors in e-commerce, business administration, international trade, information management and information systems
Textbooks and reference books:
1. Textbook:
Qu Pengzhi, "Network Marketing (Second Edition)", Higher Education Press.
2. reference book:
Li Chao, edited by Chen Weidong, "Network Marketing", Southwest University of Finance and Economics Press.
Yin Shuangxi et al., "Network Marketing Fundamentals", Fudan University Press.
Edited by Qu Yunbo and Jin Limin, "Network Marketing", Enterprise Management Press.
Feng Yingjian, "Network Marketing Foundation and Practice", Tsinghua University Press.
Course introduction:
This course is based on the principles of modern marketing, combined with actual cases, and systematically explain the network in detail
The theoretical basis and development of marketing; the similarities, differences and integration between network marketing and traditional marketing; network market and network
Consumer characteristics; network marketing systems and sites; network marketing strategies; network marketing implementation goals,
Channels, methods, tools, and means; and the management and control of the implementation of online marketing. At the same time, through the course
The case link allows students to have a perceptual understanding and understanding of the implementation and operation of network marketing, and master a
Determine the ability and skills to develop online marketing.
Page 358
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
"Network Marketing" is an emerging discipline that emerged in the practice of e-commerce and adapted to the needs of practice.
This subject is a brand-new marketing method based on the Internet, and a new development of the marketing subject in the information age.
Development direction. As a course, "Network Marketing" is the core professional course for e-commerce and marketing majors.
It is also an important professional elective course for majors in industry and foreign trade.
The task of this course is to master the network through the study, research and analysis of the theory and practice of network marketing
Basic knowledge and principles of online marketing, understand its current situation and development trends, and improve the practice of e-commerce
Practical theoretical literacy and marketing ability, so as to be able to adapt to the 21st century business management informatization
development trend.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The teaching links of this course include: classroom teaching combined with actual case, so that students understand the basics of network marketing
This principle; case discussion, curriculum design, preparation of network marketing implementation planning report, so that students can strengthen the network
Network marketing is a combination of theory and practice; various forms of final exams (closed book theory, practical operation,
Essay defense), to assess students’ knowledge.
Internet marketing is a very practical course, and the principle of combining theory and practice must be adhered to.
On the basis of clarifying the basic theoretical knowledge, special attention should be paid to case teaching and practical links.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
(1) Basic content of the course:
1. Basics of Internet Marketing
The meaning, generation, content, characteristics, applicable products, network marketers, network marketing and
The theoretical basis of traditional marketing and network marketing: direct marketing, relationship marketing, soft marketing, integrated marketing, regional
Divided into direct marketing, direct marketing, MLM, network marketing management models, the current development status and existence of network marketing in my country
problem.
2. Online marketing market analysis
The external environment, social culture, systems and regulations, science and technology, online market, online consumer
Consumer behavior analysis, corporate network transaction analysis, government network procurement analysis.
3. Online market research
The meaning, characteristics, strategies of online market research, the steps and methods of online market research, general steps,
Methods, direct investigation, indirect investigation, distribution of indirect market information on the Internet, Internet information retrieval technology, basic
Market intelligence collection based on RSS.
4. Website strategy
No website network marketing, website construction goals, site functions, classification, website construction planning, domain name application
Please, the construction, improvement, maintenance and promotion of the site.
5. Product Strategy
Product level, classification and characteristics in network marketing, new product development in the network age, network marketing
Brand strategy.
6. Price strategy
The characteristics of online marketing pricing, competitive pricing strategies, low-price pricing strategies, customized production pricing strategies,
Use pricing strategy, auction pricing strategy, discount pricing strategy, reputation pricing strategy.
Page 359
7. Channel Strategy
The functions of marketing channels, terminals, the use of information technology to transform traditional distribution channels, indirect online sales,
With the help of the channel model of network information intermediaries.
8. Promotion strategy
The meaning and function of online promotion, online business promotion, online advertising, online public relations .
9. Online customer service
The rise, classification, characteristics of online marketing services, the different needs of online customers, and the implementation of online services:
Content, building customer networks, customer service tools. The basic function of customer relationship management, call center.
10. Internet marketing methods
E-mail marketing, search engine marketing, viral marketing, network membership marketing, cross network marketing
pin.
(2) Key points and difficulties of the course
The focus of this course is: the external environment of online marketing; the steps and methods of online market research; website
Construction goals, site functions, classification, website construction planning, domain name application, website promotion; online marketing
The product level, classification and characteristics of the product, the development of new products in the Internet era; the characteristics of Internet marketing pricing, low prices
Pricing strategy, usage pricing strategy, auction pricing strategy, discount pricing strategy, reputation pricing strategy; marketing
The function of the channel, the terminal, the use of information technology to transform traditional distribution channels, indirect sales on the Internet,
The channel model of online information brokers; the meaning and function of online promotion, online business promotion, online advertising,
Online public relations; E-mail marketing, search engine marketing, online membership marketing network.
The difficulties of this course include: enterprise network transaction analysis, government network procurement analysis; network information retrieval technology
Technology, RSS-based market intelligence collection; brand strategy in online marketing; low-price pricing strategy, use
Price strategy; with the help of the channel mode of network information intermediaries; network advertising, network public relations; network meeting
Membership marketing network.
4. Requirements for course practice
no
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Chapter number
Course content
lecture
experiment
Maneuver
1
Fundamentals of Internet Marketing
2
2
Network marketing market analysis
4
3
Internet market research
4
4
Website strategy
4
5
Product Strategy
2
6
Price Strategy
2
7
Channel strategy
4
8
Promotion strategy
4
9
Online customer service
2
10
Internet marketing methods
2
11
Review, maneuver
2
total
32
Page 360
6. Course assessment method
Written exam (closed book) is used as an exam class, written exam (closed or open book) or
Report form.
7. Formulation writer: Ma Benjiang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Introduction to E-Commerce
Course number: 160712Z1
Course Title: Introduction to E-commerce
English name: E-Commerce
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including computer hours in class: 8)
Prerequisites: Management, Data Communication and Computer Network, Marketing
Adapt to majors: e-commerce, information management and information systems, business administration, international trade
Textbooks and reference books:
Textbook: Kenneth C. Laudon, Carol Guercio Traver, Lao Guoling and other translations, "Electronics
Business-Business, Technology and Society", Higher Education Press, 2004
Reference book: Fang Meiqi, "Introduction to Electronic Commerce" Second Edition, Tsinghua University Press, 2002
Li Qi, Zhang Qin, Yan Jianyuan, etc., "Introduction to Electronic Commerce", People's Posts and Telecommunications Press, April 2002
First edition
Qin Zheng, "Introduction to Electronic Commerce" Second Edition, Higher Education Press, January 2006 Second Edition
Course introduction:
E-commerce is an edge subject that integrates network technology, information technology and business. Through this course
The teaching of the process enables students to understand the development trend, basic concepts, framework, functions, and development of the new e-commerce
Some issues in the basic theory of e-commerce have a more comprehensive understanding and understanding.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a compulsory course for business school e-commerce major, information management and information system major, engineering
Elective courses for business management and international trade.
Through the teaching of this course, students will understand the basic content of e-commerce
The development trend of sub-commerce, the social environment and technical environment of e-commerce operation, master the basics of e-commerce
Concepts, principles and related technologies. The completion of this course will help students understand the basic knowledge of e-commerce,
And lay the foundation for further learning other courses of e-commerce in the future.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the study of this course, students should be familiar with the basic concepts, frameworks, functions,
Page 361
Have a comprehensive knowledge and understanding of the basic theories of e-commerce such as some problems in the development; enable students to use
Course-related knowledge explanation and analysis of various phenomena in the network economy; through large-scale homework and related case discussions
On stimulating students’ interest and hobbies in e-commerce and training students to use network tools to engage in e-commerce activities
And the ability to discover business opportunities.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Part One Introduction to Electronic Commerce
Chapter One Understanding E-commerce
Key points and difficulties: the concept of e-commerce, the difference between the first and second generation of e-commerce
1.1 The rise and development of e-commerce
1.2 The first and second generation of e-commerce
1.3 Understanding e-commerce
1.4 Case discussion
Chapter Two Business Models and Concepts of E-commerce
Key points and difficulties: the elements of the business model of e-commerce, the main elements of B2B, B2C, and C2C e-commerce
Business model, mobile commerce concept and business model
2.1 The business model of e-commerce
2.2 The main business model of B2C e-commerce
2.3 The main business model of B2B e-commerce
2.4 Business models in the emerging e-commerce field
2.5 How the Internet and WWW change business
2.6 Case discussion
The second part of the technical basis of e-commerce
Chapter 3 Internet and WWW: The Infrastructure of Electronic Commerce
Emphasis and difficulty: TCP/IP protocol, packet exchange protocol, Internet, Intranet and Extran
The difference and connection of et, the main features of the second-generation Internet
3.1 Internet: Technical background
3.2 Today's Internet
3.3 The second generation of Internet: the infrastructure of the future
3.4 WWW
3.5 Internet and WWW: Special Services
3.6 Case discussion
Chapter 4 Establishing an e-commerce website
Key points and difficulties: Web site system development life cycle, the basic skills that Web server software should have
Yes, the main web page generation tool, the main way to deal with the increasing demand for website services, the successful e-commerce
Elements of a service website
4.1 Building an e-commerce website: a systematic approach
4.2 Choose server software
4.3 Hardware purchase of e-commerce websites
4.4 Other e-commerce website tools
4.5 Case discussion
Chapter 5 Security and Encryption
Key points and difficulties: the composition of e-commerce security, the main security threats of e-commerce, e-commerce network
Page 362
The main technical solutions to counter security threats, the characteristics and differences of several encryption methods, SSL protocol
5.1 E-commerce security environment
5.2 Security threats in the e-commerce environment
5.3 Technical solutions
5.4 Strategies, procedures and laws
5.5 Case discussion
Chapter VI Electronic Commerce Payment System
Key points and difficulties: the characteristics and differences of the main payment forms of e-commerce, the SET protocol, and digital money
package
6.1 Payment system
6.2 E-commerce transactions using credit cards
6.3 E-commerce digital payment in the B2C field
6.4 B2B payment system
6.5 Case discussion
Part Three Business Concept
Chapter 7 Principles of E-commerce Marketing
Key points and difficulties: online consumer behavior patterns, major online marketing techniques, market entry strategies
7.1 Internet users and consumer behavior
7.2 Basic marketing concepts
7.3 Network marketing technology
7.4 E-commerce marketing and brand strategy in B2B and B2C
7.5 Online market research
7.5 Case discussion
Chapter 8 E-commerce Marketing Communication
Key points and difficulties: main network marketing communication mode, main network marketing communication tool
8.1 Network marketing communication
8.2 The cost and benefit of online marketing communication
8.3 Internet marketing communication tools
8.4 Case discussion
4. Requirements for course practice
Students are required to be familiar with various e-commerce business models and their actual business operation procedures, and learn basic e-commerce
Sub-business web development tools develop simple e-commerce websites.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Chapter content
learn
Time
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
One understanding of e-commerce
4
.
2. The business model and concept of e-commerce
9
4
.
three
Internet and WWW: the foundation of e-commerce
facility
5
.
Four building an e-commerce website
8
4
.
Page 363
Five security and encryption
6
.
Six e-commerce payment system
6
.
Seven Principles of E-commerce Marketing
4
.
Eight e-commerce marketing communication
4
review
2
.
6. Course assessment method
Assessment method: 40% of the usual score, 60% of the final written test
7. Formulation Author: Liu Yongmei
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Chen Ke
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Distribution channel management
Course number: 160801Z1
Course Name: Distribution Channel Management
English name : Channel of Distribution Management
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including 0 experimental hours and 0 computer hours in class)
Prerequisites: Microeconomics, Management, Marketing
Adapt to major: marketing
Reference textbook: Distribution Channel Management, Zhang Guangling, Wuhan University Press, 2005
Course introduction:
Distribution channel management is the forefront of companies competing for market share and profit, and also corporate marketing
One of the most complex and active areas of activity. This course studies the relevant theories of distribution channels,
Strategic design and selection, distribution channel management, distribution channel organization, logistics and supply chain management, and
Contents such as the development trend of distribution channels. This course helps students master the composition, planning and design of distribution channels
And basic theories and basic skills in management and other aspects.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is an important part of marketing management and one of the backbone courses of marketing undergraduate majors
One. Through the systematic study of the design, organization, management and evaluation of distribution channels in the corporate marketing system,
It is helpful to cultivate students' ability to analyze and solve practical problems in marketing channels.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through the study of this course, students are required to apply the basic theories of distribution channel management to corporate marketing practices.
International fields, enabling them to use the knowledge and skills they have learned to observe, analyze, think and solve
Typical phenomena and problems related to distribution channels provide necessary knowledge and capabilities for future practical work
Page 364
ready.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of the course is as follows, among which the key points are marked with (Z) and the difficult points are marked with (N).
The definition and characteristics of distribution channels, the status and functions of distribution channels, the process and structure of distribution channels,
The meaning of distribution channel management; the environmental composition of distribution channels (Z); the meaning and process of distribution channel strategic planning
Sequence; the construction of distribution channels for different types of products (Z) (N); the nature, source, and channel
The use of Tao power (Z) (N); the types and causes of distribution channel conflicts, the resolution of distribution channel conflicts (Z)
(N); distribution channel performance evaluation (Z); distribution channel integration (Z); types of wholesalers, wholesalers’ management
Management; composition of retailers, management of retailers (Z); establishment and management of franchise organizations (Z) (N);
Network distribution channels, flat channels, and channel strategic alliances.
4. Requirements for course practice
There are no practical requirements for this course.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Prepare
Note
Chapter One
Overview of Distribution Channel Management
2
Chapter two
Distribution channel environment
2
third chapter
Strategic planning of distribution channels
2
Chapter Four
Construction of distribution channels
4
chapter Five
Power in the distribution channel
2
Chapter Six
Distribution channel performance management
2
Chapter VII
Distribution channel conflict management
2
chapter eight
Distribution channel integration
2
Chapter nine
Wholesaler
2
chapter Ten
Retailer
2
Chapter 11 Franchise Organization
2
Chapter 12 Development Trends of Distribution Channels
4
Comprehensive case analysis
2
Summary review
2
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (accounting for 30% of the total evaluation score) + final exam (accounting for 70% of the total evaluation score). Final exam is closed
The total score is 100 points and the test time is 100 minutes.
7. Formulation Author:　 Gong Yanping
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute):　 Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 365
Service Marketing
Course number: 160802Z1
Course Name : Service Marketing
English name: Services Marketing
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: Management, Marketing
Adapt to major: marketing
Reference materials:
Service Management: Operations, Strategy and Information Technology, James A. Fitzsimmons, Machinery Industry
Press, 2005; Service Marketing, Valarie A·Zeihaml, Machinery
Industry Press, 2004
Course introduction:
With the development of the service economy, the research on the marketing behavior of service companies has been paid more attention.
It has become a major branch of marketing and an important field of future marketing development. This course is
One of the backbone courses of the marketing major, it focuses on researching service, service economy and service market, customer, customer
Customer expectations, customer perception, customer satisfaction and service quality, and consumer behavior in service.
Field surveys understand the needs and expectations of customers for services, as well as the unique response methods of customers to services, and then propose services
Market segmentation, target market selection theories and methods of service marketing, as well as service corporate marketing strategies, service
Theories and methods of pin combination.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is an elective course for marketing majors. The purpose of teaching is to enable students to initially master the economics of service marketing.
The role of economic development, the nature of service marketing, the definition, elements and measurement methods of service quality, service
The application of business strategy, the formulation of the overall service process, and the construction method of the customer service team will help students learn from
Lay the foundation for marketing management or service marketing planning.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Have an overall understanding of the conceptual principles, functions and development history of service marketing, and have a preliminary understanding of service marketing
Management ability and planning ability.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter One The Role of Services in the Economy
1.1 Definition of Service
1.2 The importance of service management
1.3 Economic evolution
1.4 Several stages of economic development
1.5 Experience economy
Chapter II Nature of Services
2.1 Service classification
2.2 Service Pack
Page 366
2.3 Characteristics of the service
2.4 Service classification with strategic implications
Chapter III Service Quality
3.1 Define service quality
3.2 Service quality measurement
3.3 Service remediation
3.4 Service quality wheel
Chapter 4 Service Strategy
4.1 Service profit chain
4.2 Service strategic positioning
4.3 Service Marketing Mix 7P
Chapter 5 Overall Service Process
5.1 Overall marketing
5.2 Business process optimization-removal of non-value-added activities
Chapter 6 Customer Service Team Building
6.1 Service team leadership assessment
6.2 The purpose of team building and three steps of building
Chapter 7 Five Practices of Service Staff
7.1 Look-Tips to be one step ahead of customers
7.2 Listening-closer relationship with customers
7.3 Laughter-the charm of smiling service
7.4 Say-Customers care more about what you say
7.5 Mobility-techniques for using body language
The key difficulty of the course lies in the cultivation of students’ practical ability and service, marketing, management awareness and skills.
high. Ability to use theory to solve practical problems, be able to analyze cases correctly, and obtain skills from cases
The promotion.
4. Requirements for course practice
There are no practical requirements for this course.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One The Role of Services in the Economy
4
Chapter II Nature of Services
2
Chapter III Service Quality
4
Chapter 4 Service Strategy
6
Chapter 5 Overall Service Process
6
Page 367
Chapter 6 Customer Service Team Building
4
Chapter 7 Five Practices of Service Staff
6
6. Course assessment method
1. The composition of student scores is: 30% of usual scores + 70% of test scores
2. The usual results include: classroom questions, speeches, discussions, homework, planning books, research reports, camps
Marketing design, service planning, etc.
3. The examination focuses on the comprehensive application of basic theories and knowledge of service marketing.
7. Formulation Author: Zhou Wenhui
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute):　 Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Public Relations
Course number: 160803Z1
Course Title : Public Relations
English name: Public Relations
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : management, marketing
Adapt to major: marketing
Reference textbook: Public Relations, Wu Qintang, Wuhan University Press, 2004
Course introduction:
Public relations is formed with the needs of my country’s reform and opening up, social progress, and economic development
A new and highly applied subject is the study of how to organize in modern administrative management and modern business management.
Special courses for communication with the public environment. It involves a wide range of content, and it is related to business management,
Marketing, organizational behavior, corporate culture, mass communication, news writing and other disciplines
cut. This course is designed to enrich the knowledge structure of students, improve their public relations quality and public relations
Relationship skills.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Public relations is a new comprehensive social science. In teaching, we must fully reflect its practicality
In the classroom, apart from teaching the principles of public relations, we will also spend some time teaching public relations practices
And skills. In addition to the teacher’s explanation, according to the characteristics of this course, appropriate public relations skills training will also be conducted.
Practice, truly apply what you have learned.
Page 368
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The study of this course requires students to establish public relations awareness, master the basic principles and methods of public relations,
Skills and can be used in public relations practice.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter 1 Overview of Public Relations
Section 1 The meaning of public relations
1. The elements of public relations
2. The basic characteristics of public relations
Section 2 Multidimensional Definition of Public Relations
1. The difference between public relations and management
2. The difference between public relations and news dissemination
3. The difference between public relations and sales
Fourth, the difference between public relations and advertising
5. The connection and difference between public relations and interpersonal relations
6. The difference between public relations and vulgar relations
Section 3 What is Public Relations
1. Definition of Public Relations
2. The research object and scope of public relations
Chapter 2 The Historical Evolution of Public Relations
Section 1 "Public Relations" in the Early Human
1. "Public Relations" in the Ancient West
2. "Public Relations" in Ancient China
Section 2 The emergence and development of modern public relations
1. The beginning of modern public relations
2. The emergence and preliminary development of modern public relations
3. The new development of modern public relations
Section 3 The Rise of Public Relations in China
1. The emergence of public relations in China
2. Problems in the development of public relations
Chapter III Basic Functions and Principles of Public Relations
Section 1 Basic Functions of Public Relations
1. Establish an image and build a good relationship
2. Collecting information and consulting suggestions
3. Communicate information and coordinate relationships
Section 2 Basic Principles of Public Relations
1. The principle of fact first
2. Principles of studying the public
3. Principles of scientific guidance
Fourth, the principle of unification of interests
Five, the principle of public relations
Chapter 4 Basic Means of Public Relations-Communication
The first section of the basic principles of communication
Page 369
1. The basic concept of communication
Second, the process mode of communication
3. Public relations communication methods and characteristics
Section 2 Communication Symbols and Media
1. Spread the symbol
2. Media
Section 3 Conditions for Effective Communication of Public Relations
1. Create the best source conditions
2. Establish the best information conditions
3. Seriously study public objects
4. Pay attention to the influence of the spread of environmental atmosphere
5. Improve communication skills
Chapter 5 Public Relations Work Object——The Public
Section 1 The meaning and classification of the public
1. Definition of the public
2. The basic characteristics of the public
3. Classification of the public
Section 2 Coordination of Organization and Public Relations
1. Coordination of media relations
2. Coordination of employee relations
3. Coordination of customer relations
4. Coordination of shareholder relations
5. Coordination of government relations
6. Coordination of community relations
7. Coordination of International Public Relations
Chapter VI Organizational Structure of Public Relations
Section 1 Public Relations Department within the organization
1. The inevitability of the Ministry of Public Relations
2. Functions of the Public Relations Department
3. The ideal position of the Public Relations Department
4. Organizational Types of the Public Relations Department
V. Staffing of the Public Relations Department
Section 2 Public relations companies outside the organization
1. The inevitability of public relations companies
2. Types of public relations companies
3. The working procedures of the public relations company
Fourth, the advantages of public relations companies
Section 3 Public Relations Personnel
1. The quality of public relations personnel
2. Training of public relations personnel
Chapter VII Basic Procedures of Public Relations
Section 1 Public Relations Investigation
1. The content of the public relations survey
Page 370
2. Application effect of public relations survey
3. Basic methods of public relations investigation
Fourth, the principle requirements of public relations investigation
Section 2 Public Relations Planning
1. The basic procedures of public relations planning
2. The scientific and artistic nature of public relations planning
3. "Making News" in Public Relations Planning
Four, the basic principles of public relations planning
Five, the writing program of public relations planning book
Section 3 Public Relations Communication
1. The characteristics of the implementation of the public relations plan
2. The main obstacles to be overcome in the implementation of public relations
Third, the basic principles of public relations implementation
Section 4 Public Relations Evaluation
1. The content of public relations evaluation
2. Methods of public relations evaluation
Chapter 8 Public Relations Practice Activities
The first public relations speech
1. The language skills of the opening speech
2. Language skills of the closing speech
3. The language skills of the speech body
Fourth, the skills of speech situation language
Section 2 Public Relations Advertising
1. The characteristics of public relations advertising
2. Types of PR Advertising
Third, the skills of public relations advertising
Section 3 Public Relations Negotiation
1. What is negotiation
2. The negotiation process
3. Common tricks in negotiation
Fourth, the countermeasures in the negotiation process
5. Negotiation language and skills
Section 4 Public Relations Special Activities
1. Press Conference
2. Exhibition (sales) meeting
3. Visiting activities
4. Sponsored activities
Five, the organization of the banquet
Chapter 9 Public Relations and Social Etiquette
1. Etiquette of address
Second, the etiquette of shaking hands
3. Introduction Etiquette
Fourth, the etiquette of handing over business cards
Page 371
5. Etiquette of visiting and receiving
6. Etiquette of appearance
7. Etiquette for attending the banquet
8. Etiquette for attending the ball
9. Etiquette for applying for a job
10. Foreign-related etiquette and customs
The key points and difficulties of the course: 1. Familiar with the meaning and expression of public relations; 2. Master public relations
The constituent elements of; 3. Understand the scope of public relations research.
4. Requirements for course practice
There are no practical requirements for this course.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment (on
Machine hours)
Remarks
Chapter One
Overview of Public Relations
2
Chapter two
The history of public relations
2
third chapter
The basic functions and principles of public relations
2
Chapter Four
The basic method of public relations-communication
4
Chapter 5 Public Relations Work Object——The Public
2
Chapter Six
Public relations organization
2
Chapter VII
Basic procedures of public relations
4
chapter eight
Public Relations Practice Activities
8
Chapter nine
Public relations and social etiquette
6
6. Course assessment method
1. The composition of student scores is: 30% of usual scores + 70% of test scores
2. The usual grades include: classroom questions, speeches, discussions, homework, scenario simulations, etc.
3. The examination focuses on the comprehensive application of basic theories and knowledge of public relations.
7. Formulation Author: Zhou Wenhui
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 372
Advertising
Course number: 160804Z1
Course name : Advertising
English name: Advertising
Class hours and credits: 32 /2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: Marketing
Adapt to major: marketing, business administration
Reference textbook: Introduction to Advertising, Cui Xiaowen, Tsinghua University Press, 2009; Advertising Course, Ni Ning,
Renmin University of China Press, 2009
Course introduction:
This course mainly includes the basic theories and basic knowledge of advertising; advertising planning, creativity, production, release,
And the basic knowledge of advertising survey and marketing and the basic ability of market analysis; familiar with the policies and laws related to advertising
Regulations; have basic knowledge and activity ability of public relations; understand the current situation and development trend of China's advertising industry,
Understand the development trends of foreign advertising. The teaching purpose of this course is to enable students to master the advertising survey
Method, basic skills of advertising planning, writing method of advertising copy, measurement of advertising effect, and advertising experience
Business management will lay the foundation for students to engage in advertising management or advertising planning in the future.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a professional elective course. The purpose of teaching this course is to enable students to grasp the methods of advertising survey
Method, basic skills of advertising planning, writing method of advertising copy, measurement of advertising effect and advertising management
Management, to lay the foundation for students to engage in advertising management or advertising planning in the future.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Have an overall understanding of the conceptual principles, functions and development history of advertising, and have preliminary ad appreciation capabilities
And planning ability.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
(1) Advertising and Advertising
1. Advertising overview
2. The function and role of advertising
3. Research object of advertisement
4. The relationship between advertising and other disciplines
(2) The origin and development of advertising
1. The history of Chinese advertising
2. History of foreign advertising
3. Development status of foreign advertising
(3) Analysis of advertising environment
1. Macro-environment analysis of advertising
2. Consumer behavior analysis
3. Products and brands
Page 373
(4) Advertising planning
1. The meaning and principles of advertising planning
2. Thinking mode, main content and workflow of advertising planning
3. Advertising budget
4. Writing of advertising planning book
(5) Creativity and performance of advertising
1. Determination of advertising theme
2. Advertising creativity
3. Advertising performance
(6) Advertising media
1. Overview of advertising media.
2. The characteristics of various advertising media.
3. Evaluation and selection of advertising media
4. Advertising media planning.
(7) Measurement of advertising effect
1. Advertising effect and its measurement
2. Measurement of advertising communication effect
3. Measurement of advertising sales effect
4. Measurement of advertising social effects
(8) Advertising audience analysis
1. Audience and advertising audience
2. Advertising audience and information dissemination
(9) Advertising organization
1. The evolution of advertising agency organization
2. Professional advertising organization
3. Advertiser advertising organization
4. Media advertising organization
5. Advertising group organization
(10) Advertising management
1. Advertising agency system
2. Operation and management of advertising companies
(11) Advertising management
1. Overview of advertising management
2. Advertising regulation management
3. Self-discipline in the advertising industry
4. Modern advertising supervision and management
(12) International Advertising
1. The characteristics of international advertising
2. International advertising strategy
3. The development trend of international advertising
The key difficulty of the course lies in the cultivation and improvement of students' practical ability and appreciation level.
4. Requirements for course practice
Page 374
There are no practical requirements for this course.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One
Advertising and Advertising
2
Chapter two
The origin and development of advertising
2
third chapter
Advertising environment analysis
2
Chapter Four
advertisement plan
6
chapter Five
Creative and performance of advertising
6
Chapter Six
Advertising media
2
Chapter VII
Advertising effect measurement
2
chapter eight
Advertising audience analysis
2
Chapter nine
Advertising organization
2
chapter Ten
Advertising management
2
Chapter 11 Advertising Management
2
Chapter 12 International Advertising
2
6. Course assessment method
1. The composition of student scores is: 30% of usual scores + 70% of test scores
2. The usual results include: classroom questions, speeches, discussions, homework, planning books, research reports,
Report design, advertising planning, etc.
3. The examination focuses on the comprehensive application ability of the basic theory and knowledge of advertising.
7. Formulation Author: Hu Pingjie
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute):　 Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Marketing Planning
Course number: 160805Z1
Course Name: Marketing Planning
English name: Marketing Planning
Class hours and credits: 40 / 2.5 (including 0 experimental hours and 0 computer hours in class)
Prerequisites: Microeconomics, Management, Marketing
Adapt to major: marketing
Reference materials :
Page 375
Marketing Planning, Hu Qihui, Higher Education Press, 2011; Marketing Planning: Theory and Skills,
Zhang Ding Weidong, Publishing House of Electronics Industry, 2007
Course introduction:
Marketing planning is an important part of marketing, and it has been paid more and more attention by enterprises. this
The curriculum system studies the basic theories and skills of marketing planning, including the presentation and definition of planning issues, creativity and
Creative thinking, marketing planning methods, planning of all aspects of the marketing mix, and marketing planning group
Organization and personnel, marketing plan writing and other content.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is one of the core courses for marketing majors, with strong application. Help students master the camp
The basic theory of marketing planning, understand the general process of marketing planning; master the general methods of marketing planning and
Specific planning skills and techniques in various fields related to marketing; understand the operation and marketing of marketing planning organizations
The basic qualities of planners and the structure and writing requirements of the marketing plan.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course requires a mastery of general theories and methods of marketing planning, and the ability to apply the theoretical knowledge and skills learned
Can technically propose specific marketing planning problems, analyze the proposed marketing problems, and propose solutions
Plan to form a valuable plan and write a standardized marketing plan.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of the course is as follows, among which the key points are marked with (Z) and the difficult points are marked with (N).
Marketing planning tasks, marketing planning principles, procedures and content (Z); marketing planning organization, marketing
The quality of planners (Z); the structure of marketing plan books, the writing of marketing plan books (Z); marketing plan questions
Definition and presentation of questions (Z), methods of raising marketing planning issues (Z) (N); characteristics of marketing creativity, innovation
Types of creative thinking (Z); individual marketing planning methods (Z), collective marketing planning methods (Z) (N);
The composition of marketing strategy, marketing strategy planning (Z); new product development planning (Z), new product promotion planning,
Brand planning, packaging planning; pricing planning, price adjustment planning (N); channel planning (Z), channel management
Planning; advertising planning (Z) (N), personnel sales planning, public relations planning, sales promotion planning (Z);
Internet marketing planning, direct marketing planning, email marketing planning, Weibo marketing planning, database marketing
plan.
4. Requirements for course practice
This course requires students to carry out project marketing planning in groups outside of class.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Prepare
Note
Chapter One
Marketing Planning Overview
2
Chapter two
Marketing planning organization and personnel
2
third chapter
Marketing Planning Book
2
Chapter Four
Marketing planning issues
4
Page 376
chapter Five
Creativity and creative thinking
4
Chapter Six
Marketing planning method
4
Chapter VII
Marketing strategy planning
4
chapter eight
product planning
2
Chapter nine
Pricing planning
2
chapter Ten
Channel planning
2
Chapter 11 Promotion Planning
4
Chapter 12 Network Marketing Planning
2
Comprehensive case analysis
4
Summary review
2
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (accounting for 30% of the total evaluation score) + final exam (accounting for 70% of the total evaluation score). Final exam is open
The total score is 100 points and the test time is 100 minutes.
7. Formulation Author:　 Zhang Xuejun
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute):　 Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Customer Management and Key Account Marketing
Course ID : 160806Z1
Course Name : Customer Management and Key Account Marketing
English name: Customer Marketing and Management
Class hours and credits : 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: management, marketing, consumer behavior, etc.
Adapt to major : marketing
Reference materials:
Customer Management Management (Second Edition), Shao Bingjia, Tsinghua University Press, 2010; Customer Relationship Management
——Establishment and Maintenance of Customer Relationship (Second Edition), Su Zhaohui, Tsinghua University Press, 2010
Course introduction:
This course takes the relationship between the enterprise and the customer as the research object, and flexibly uses management, marketing,
Relevant theories of sociology, closely related to the reality of corporate management of customer relations, systematically and comprehensively
The theoretical basis of customer relationship management, how to establish customer relationships, how to maintain customer relationship concepts, strategies and methods
Method, as well as the techniques and methods of marketing to major customers.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Customer relationship management and key account marketing are important courses for marketing majors.
Page 377
Further deepening of the content of marketing and other courses. Through the study of this course, let scholars understand and master relevant customers
Basic theories and methods of customer relationship management and key account marketing. Through theoretical study, case discussion and practice
To enable students to understand the latest developments in marketing, master the basic theories and methods of customer relationship management,
The theoretical literacy of high school students cultivates students' practical ability and realizes the organic unity of theoretical knowledge and practical activities.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Understand the background of customer relationship management, understand the meaning and connotation of customer relationship management, and be familiar with
Classification of customer relationship management systems. 2. Understand the background and market share of customer relationship management theory
Value and customer share competition related strategies and their relationship, the system architecture of customer relationship management theory, customer relationship
Department of management philosophy. 3. Clarify customer profitability analysis, customer segmentation and management strategies, and grasp customer acquisition
Management strategies, customer churn analysis and countermeasures, contact points and
Contact analysis and management strategy. 4. Master the techniques and methods of large household registration marketing. 5. Training in case discussion
Cultivate the ability to analyze and evaluate practical problems using the basic theories of customer relationship management. 6. Choose a local company
The industry conducts research, tries to design corporate customer relationship management programs, and cultivates students' ability to solve time problems.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Basic content of the course: The basic content of this course is composed of three parts: basic theory and core issues
Chapter, Technical Practice Chapter. The basic theory chapter includes basic concepts, background of customer relationship management, customer relationship
Department of management category, theoretical basis of customer relationship management, etc. The core issue chapter systematically analyzes customer relationship management
The whole process of customer recognition, customer differentiation, customer interaction, customer personalization, customer relationship evaluation and
Maintenance, data warehouse and customer relationship management, data mining and customer relationship management, customer relationship management capabilities
Etc. The technical practice chapter is mainly to master the basic techniques and methods of using customer relationship management software and key account marketing
law. Course focus: basic theory of customer relationship management; customer identification and classification; customer relationship evaluation and maintenance
Protect. Course difficulty: basic theory of customer relationship management; touch point management.
4. Requirements for course practice
There are no practical requirements for this course.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Table of Contents
learn
Time
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One Overview of Customer Relationship Management
2
Chapter Two Theoretical Foundation of Customer Relationship Management
4
Chapter 3 Identifying Customers
2
Chapter 4 Differentiating Customers
2
Chapter 5 Customer Interaction
4
Chapter 6 Customer Personalization
2
Chapter 7 Customer Relationship Evaluation and Maintenance
4
Chapter 8 Customer Relationship Management Software System
2
Chapter 9 Data Warehouse and Customer Relationship Management
2
chapter Ten
Data mining and customer relationship management
2
Chapter 11 Customer Relationship Management Capability
2
Page 378
Chapter Twelve Customer Relationship Management Project Implementation
2
Chapter 13 Key Account Marketing Theory
2
Chapter 14 Key Account Marketing Techniques and Methods
4
6. Course assessment method
1. Class discussion and usual performance accounted for 20%; 2. Homework accounted for 20%; 3. Final exam accounted for 60%.
7. Formulation writer: Su Lujun
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Brand management
Course number: 160807Z1
Course Name: Brand Management
English name: Brand Management
Class hours and credits: 32/2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : microeconomics, management, marketing
Adapt to major : marketing
Reference textbook: Brand Management, Zhang Mingli, Feng Ning, Tsinghua University Press, 2010
Course introduction:
More and more business managers have realized that brand is the most valuable intangible asset of a company. Brand Management
The course systematically introduces the basic theories of brand management, and introduces many domestic and foreign brand management cases
Analysis, including: brand management overview, brand connotation, brand design, brand positioning, brand characteristics,
Brand culture, brand communication, brand experience, brand strategy, brand loyalty, brand equity, brand crisis management
Management, network brand, global brand.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Brand management is an applied marginal science based on marketing and modern management theories
Branch. Mainly research the corporate brand operation and management activities and their regularity centered on satisfying consumer needs.
The specific purpose and task of setting up this course are: through the teaching of this course, students can establish brand management
Management awareness, establish marketing concepts, comprehensively and systematically master the basic theories and basic methods of brand management
Method; through the teaching of this course, students can improve their ability to solve problems, analyze problems, and apply to society
Abilities; cultivate and improve the ability to correctly analyze and solve brand operation and management problems so that students
Can better meet the needs of marketing management work practice.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Understand the basic theories of brand management, master the classic and modern knowledge of brand management, and learn the brand environment
Page 379
Analysis and brand system development and design, operation and management, measurement, maintenance and improvement, and through cases,
Experiment, practical training or internship teaching, comprehensively apply brand management knowledge and skills in practice to improve students’
Ability to learn, practice and innovate.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of the course: brand meaning, brand classification, brand management meaning; brand products
Attributes, external attributes of the brand, internal attributes of the brand; brand identity, brand intangible element design, brand tangible
Element design; meaning and principles of brand positioning, brand positioning process, brand positioning strategy; brand culture
Composition, shaping of brand culture; brand communication media, brand reputation communication; brand extension strategy, multi-brand
Strategy; brand loyalty measurement, brand loyalty strategy; characteristics and types of brand crisis, brand crisis prevention
And processing; brand globalization strategy.
The focus of the course: brand intangible element design, brand tangible element design, brand positioning process, brand
Positioning strategy, brand extension strategy, multi-brand strategy, brand loyalty strategy, brand globalization strategy. course
Difficulties: shaping brand culture, measuring brand loyalty, preventing and handling brand crises.
4. Requirements for course practice
There are no practical requirements for this course.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Prepare
Note
Chapter One
Brand management overview
2
Chapter two
Brand connotation
2
2
third chapter
brand design
2
Chapter Four
Brand Positioning
4
chapter Five
Brand Culture
4
Chapter Six
branding
2
Chapter VII
Brand strategy
4
chapter eight
Brand loyalty
2
Chapter nine
Brand crisis management
2
chapter Ten
Brand globalization
2
Comprehensive case analysis
4
Summary review
2
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (accounting for 30% of the total evaluation score) + final exam (accounting for 70% of the total evaluation score). Final exam is closed
The total score is 100 points and the test time is 100 minutes.
7. Formulation Author:　 Zhang Xuejun
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute):　 Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Page 380
Market research and forecast
Course number: 160808Z1
Course Title: Market Research and Forecast
English name: Market investigation and prediction
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: economics, statistics, management, marketing
Adapt to major: marketing
Reference materials :
Contemporary market research, Carl McDaniel, translated by Li Guihua, Machinery Industry Press, 2012; Market
Marketing research application orientation, Naresh k. Malhotra, translated by Tu Ping, Electronic Industry Press, 2007
Course introduction:
Market research and forecasting is a very methodological and applicable course, and it is an important part of marketing.
One of the most important core courses. As competition among enterprises becomes more and more brutal, the environment faced by market decision-making is complex
Complex and changeable, how to obtain refined information under such conditions, so as to make scientific marketing for the enterprise
Decision-making provides a basis, which is the main problem to be solved in the teaching of this course. This course mainly trains students to have
Develop tools for collecting information, master the main channels of information acquisition, and improve the ability of data sorting and analysis.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a highly applied subject and course. It uses management, statistics, probability theory
Based on other knowledge, it is the core course of marketing. The main purpose is to help students master the market
The basic methods of investigation and forecasting, the ability to develop a variety of information collection tools, and the ability to organize information and analyze data
The ability of data to help companies make scientific decisions and provide evidence. The main task is to let students have a market
Basic ability to investigate and predict.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Combination of theoretical study and practice; combination of theoretical teaching and case analysis.
3. The basic content, key points and difficulties of course teaching
Basic content: overview of market research; basic methods of market research; market research plan design, letter
Information collection tool design, variable design and measurement, sampling design, data sorting and analysis, regression analysis
Forecasting, non-regression analysis forecasting, report writing of market research results, etc.
Teaching focus: market research plan design, sampling design, questionnaire design, regression analysis and prediction, market
Sorting out and analysis of survey data. Teaching difficulties: sampling design, questionnaire design, regression analysis and prediction.
4. Requirements for course practice
This course requires a certain amount of practice outside of class to investigate and analyze selected items.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Page 381
Chapter One
Introduction to Market Research
2
Chapter two
The basic process of market research
2
third chapter
Collection of second-hand information
4
Chapter Four
Focus group discussions, in-depth interviews and other
Non-quantitative
4
chapter Five
Observation Method and Experimental Method
2
Chapter Six
survey design
6
Chapter VII
Attitude measurement
4
chapter eight
Data collation and analysis
4
Chapter nine
Regression analysis prediction
4
chapter Ten
Non-regression analysis prediction
4
Chapter nine
Market research report writing
2
chapter Ten
Market research case analysis
10
6. Course assessment method
This course adopts a closed-book examination method, combined with usual scores for comprehensive evaluation.
7. Formulation Author: Liu Jiagang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute):　 Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Market research
Course number: 160809Z1
Course Name: Market Research
English name: Marketing Research
Class hours and credits: 32/ 2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : Economics, Management, Marketing
Adapt to major: business administration, international economics and trade, e-commerce
Reference materials : Market Research, Qu Yuan, Economic Science Press, 2007; Modern Market Research, Wang Jing,
Capital University of Economics and Business Press, 2005
Course introduction:
Market research is a theoretical and applied subject and course. It uses management, statistics,
Based on knowledge such as probability theory, it is the core course of business administration, e-commerce and international trade. Its base
This content includes the basic process of market research, the basic method of market research; market research plan design, extraction
Sample design, questionnaire design; collation and analysis of market research data; report of market research results.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
Page 382
Market research is a highly applied subject and course. It uses management, statistics, probability theory, etc.
Knowledge-based, it is the core course of business administration, e-commerce and international trade. The main purpose is
It is to help students master the basic methods of market research, have the ability to develop a variety of information collection tools, and master the entire
The ability to manage information and analyze data, so as to help companies make scientific decisions and provide a basis. The main task is
Let students have the basic ability of market research.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Combination of theoretical study and practice; combination of theoretical teaching and case analysis.
3. The basic content, key points and difficulties of course teaching
Basic content: overview of market research; basic methods of market research; market research plan design, letter
Information collection tool design, variable design and measurement, sampling design, data sorting and analysis; market research
Report writing of results, etc.
Teaching focus: market research plan design, sampling design, questionnaire design; collation of market research data
and analyse. Teaching difficulties: sampling design, questionnaire design.
4. Requirements for course practice
This course requires a certain amount of practice outside of class, and the students will organize a research project in groups.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter One
Market research overview
2
Chapter two
Market research process
2
third chapter
Collection of second-hand information
2
Chapter Four
Focus group discussions, in-depth interviews and other
Non-quantitative
4
chapter Five
Observation Method and Experimental Method
2
Chapter Six
survey design
4
Chapter VII
Attitude measurement
2
chapter eight
Data collation and analysis
2
Chapter nine
Market research report writing
2
chapter Ten
Market research case analysis
10
6. Course assessment method
This course adopts an open-book examination method, combined with usual results for comprehensive evaluation.
7. Formulation Author: Liu Jiagang
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school):　 Gong Yanping
Page 383
Marketing training
Course ID : 160810Z1
Course Name: Marketing Training
English name: Practical Training of Marketing
Class hours and credits : 2 weeks/2
Prerequisites: Marketing
Adapt to major: marketing
Reference materials: none
Course introduction:
This course is oriented to solve corporate marketing practices, and flexibly uses management, economics and marketing
And other related theories and methods, analyze and diagnose the status quo of the enterprise market, and accurately analyze the target market
And forecast, formulate marketing strategies in line with the reality of the corporate market based on 4P theory, 4C theory, etc., and improve students
The ability to analyze and solve problems.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
From a professional level, it is a professional course for marketing majors, learning the principles of management,
The marketing theory courses are established on the basis of the courses, which lays the foundation for professional courses. From the course level, it is a
This is a practical training course that is oriented towards job groups and pays more attention to application. Through the learning of marketing training courses, students
On the basis of comprehensively mastering the basic theories, methods and skills of marketing, train students to analyze problems and solve practical problems
Ability to solve practical problems. Deepen students’ knowledge and understanding of marketing concepts and strengthen their knowledge of marketing theory
Memory; cultivate students’ thinking skills, communication skills, investigation and research skills, and solve problems based on the marketing environment
Ability to answer questions; quickly adapt to marketing research, planning, marketing, and product sales positions.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
1. Master and be able to flexibly use the basic theories and methods of marketing. 2. Can apply SWOT, PEST, etc.
Method to analyze the status quo and existing problems of enterprise marketing. 3. Based on the diagnosis of corporate marketing,
Can apply 4P theory and 4C theory to formulate corresponding marketing plan. 4. Design research based on the actual situation of the enterprise
Questionnaire. 5. Master the basic format of the research report and write the corresponding research report.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Basic content of the course: The course adopts a modular teaching method, and the organization of each module generally
To solve problems", "items to be discussed", "scenarios to be planned", etc., and then arrange students based on their own
To study and solve problems with their own understanding, and finally, teachers and students participate in summing up some valuable views and commonalities.
Techniques or universal laws to be promoted. The training modules arranged include: analysis of the status quo of enterprise marketing, enterprise
Industry marketing diagnosis, market segmentation and target market positioning, survey questionnaire design, 4Ps marketing strategy, promotion
Sales skills training, overall marketing plan planning.
Course focus: analysis and diagnosis of the status quo of enterprise marketing; target market positioning and target customer behavior characteristics
Levy analysis; overall marketing plan planning
Course Difficulties: Analysis and Diagnosis of Enterprise Marketing Status; Marketing Overall Plan Planning
Page 384
4. Requirements for course practice
Enterprise inspection, group discussion, simulation scenario analysis, etc.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
The course adopts the method of combining the company's on-site inspection and the training room on the computer. The company's on-site inspection is about 2 days
The rest of the time is for computer and group discussions.
6. Course assessment method
After the entire marketing training is over, scores are based on multiple indicators weighted evaluation.
7. Formulation writer:　 Su Lujun
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school):　 Gong Yanping
Marketing
Course number: 160811Z1
Course Name: Marketing
English name: Marketing
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including 0 experimental hours and 0 in-class computer hours)
Prerequisites: Microeconomics, Management
Adapt to majors: majors in business school
Reference materials: Marketing, Luo Nong, Tsinghua University Press, 2008; Marketing (4th edition),
Wu Jianan, Tsinghua University Press, 2010
Course introduction:
Marketing was first established in the United States at the beginning of the 20th century. It is a course based on economic science and behavior
Applied disciplines based on science and modern management theory. Marketing systematically expounds modern marketing
Scientific basic theories, universal laws, basic principles, general strategies and methods. Its main contents include:
Market and marketing core concepts, marketing concepts; analysis of various environmental factors affecting corporate marketing activities,
Marketing opportunities and environmental threats; consumer and organization market purchasing behavior and purchasing decision analysis; market segmentation and
Theories and methods of selecting target markets, market positioning strategies; research on corporate marketing strategies. This course is in high
The core professional basic courses offered by economics and management majors in other colleges and universities are
It also focuses on strategic research and practical application of management courses.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a theoretical and applied subject and course. It uses economics, management, and
Based on theoretical knowledge such as engineering and behavior, it is an important knowledge and skill that modern college students should possess. by
Study, so that students can improve the comprehensive analysis ability, actual planning ability and innovation ability of marketing as a whole.
Page 385
Better meet the needs of corporate marketing and market competition.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The basic requirements of this course are: establish modern marketing concepts and awareness, master the basics of marketing
Theoretical system, master the basic skills of marketing, and understand the new development of marketing.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of the course is as follows, among which the key points are marked with (Z) and the difficult points are marked with (N).
The emergence and development of marketing (Z), the significance of learning marketing, the study of marketing
Scope and content, marketing research methods; basic concepts of market and marketing (Z) (N), market
Marketing management, marketing concept (Z), new development of marketing (N); marketing environment, market
Marketing macro environment analysis (Z), marketing micro environment analysis (Z); consumer buying behavior analysis (Z),
Industrial market buying behavior analysis (Z), middlemen buying behavior analysis, government buying behavior analysis; market operation
Marketing information system, content and steps of market research, method of market research (Z), market forecast (Z) (N);
Marketing strategy and marketing strategy plan, marketing strategy planning process, market competition strategy (Z), marketing strategy linkage
Alliance; Overview of target marketing, market segmentation (Z), target market selection (Z), market positioning (Z);
Product overall concept and product classification (Z), product portfolio strategy (Z), brand strategy (Z), packaging strategy, production
Product life cycle strategy (Z), new product development strategy (Z); factors affecting price decision (Z), pricing
Basic method (Z) (N), main pricing strategy (Z), price change strategy (N); functions of distribution channels
And composition, distribution channel design (Z), middleman selection and management (Z), distribution channel management; promotion
The meaning and combination of advertising strategy (Z), personnel marketing strategy, sales promotion strategy (Z), public relations strategy
Strategy; marketing plan (Z), marketing organization, marketing control; service marketing, international marketing
Field marketing, network marketing (N), marketing ethics.
4. Requirements for course practice
There are no practical requirements for this course.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Remarks
introduction
2
Chapter One Market and Marketing
4
Chapter 2 Analysis of Marketing Environment
2
Chapter Three Market Purchase Behavior Analysis
4
Chapter 4 Market Research and Forecast
4
Chapter 5 Marketing Strategy
4
Chapter VI Target Marketing
4
Chapter 7 Product Strategy
4
Chapter 8 Price Strategy
4
Chapter 9 Distribution Strategy
4
Chapter 10 Promotion Strategy
4
Chapter 11 Marketing Plan, Organization and
2
Page 386
control
Chapter 12 The Expansion of Marketing
4
Summary of Full Course Study
2
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (accounting for 40% of the total evaluation results) + final exam (accounting for 60% of the total evaluation results). Final exam
It is a closed book, with a total score of 100 points and the test time is 100 minutes.
7. Formulation Author:　 Gong Yanping
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute):　 Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Marketing topics
Course number: 160812Z1
Course Name: Marketing Topics
English name : Special Topic of Marketing
Class hours and credits: 32/2
(Experimental hours: 0, computer hours in class: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements: marketing, marketing related core courses
Adapt to major: Marketing major
Reference textbook: General Theory of Marketing (Fourth Edition), Guo Guoqing, Renmin University of China Press, 2009
Course introduction:
This course will be divided into topics to comprehensively and systematically introduce the cutting-edge concepts, theories and methods of marketing. And pick
Use a combination of qualitative and quantitative methods to accurately explain marketing principles. In full consideration of the 21st century
The new development of the marketing environment, based on the latest achievements of domestic and foreign marketing
The cutting-edge concepts, principles and methods of marketing make it easy for students to master, digest, absorb and apply.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a high-end course for marketing and related majors. It combines reasonable weights,
The frontier knowledge modules of the industry are presented to students in an orderly manner. Build a marketing theory frame for students step by step
At the same time, cooperate with the discussion of various thematic cases, and exercise the logical analysis and practice of students’ movement while enriching the course content.
International operations and other capabilities. In order to enhance students’ understanding of the new development of marketing theory, better understand and
Grasp the cutting-edge results of marketing.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through learning, students are required to have a comprehensive understanding of the relevant theories of marketing and
Hot marketing issues must be sensitive. Be good at thinking and analyzing the key issues and development direction of the discipline, and
Can put forward their own unique thinking and insights through the knowledge learned in class.
Page 387
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The course comprehensively introduces the concepts and theories of marketing through a systematic and in-depth knowledge framework with a reasonable structure.
And new developments in methods. Explain the latest theories and developments of marketing, while fully considering
The new development of the marketing environment in the 21st century has been estimated in advance to the new opportunities brought by the information society to marketing.
Will meet new challenges. And adopt a combination of qualitative and quantitative methods to accurately explain marketing principles and fully
Reflect the scientific nature of the marketing discipline. Especially in new product pricing theory, marketing research, marketing
In the discussion of marketing plans and other issues, try to use quantitative methods to analyze and explain, while consolidating the theory
Improve students' analytical skills.
4. Requirements for course practice
There are no practical requirements for this course.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
class schedule
content
Class hours
First lecture
The evolution and development of marketing theory: 4P—4C—4R
3
Second lecture
New Marketing Concept I: Green Marketing
3
Third lecture
New Marketing Concept II: Positioning Theory
3
Fourth lecture
New Marketing Concept III: Customer Relationship Management
3
Fifth Lecture
New Marketing Concept IV: Blue Ocean Theory
3
Sixth Lecture
New Marketing Concept V: Integrated Marketing Communication Theory
3
Seventh lecture
New Marketing Concept Ⅵ: Network Marketing
3
Eighth lecture
New Marketing Concept Ⅶ: Database Marketing
3
Lecture 9
New Marketing Concept Ⅷ: Value Marketing
3
Tenth Lecture
New Marketing Concept Ⅸ: Symbol Marketing
3
Comprehensive review and assessment
2
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (40%) + examination (60%). In the usual grades, 20% is attendance and 20% is classroom performance (e.g.
Hand-speaking, answering questions, etc.); the final exam is open-book, including mastery of each topic theory and case analysis.
7. Formulation writer: Luo Jianhong
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute):　 Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Professional English for Marketing
Page 388
Course number: 160813Z1
Course Name : Professional English for Marketing
English name: Marketing English
Class hours and credits: 32 /2
Prerequisite course requirements : Marketing
Adapt to major: marketing
Reference textbooks : Yuan Qi (adapted), J. Paul Peter (author), James H.
Donnelly (James H.Donnelly.Jr) (Author), Renmin University Press, 2009; Marketing
English, Zheng Qi, Li Guihua, Nankai University Press, 2009
Course introduction:
With the increasing globalization of the economy, marketing also breaks through national boundaries, and continues to promote international marketing and even the whole world.
With the development of global marketing, business English is becoming more and more important. This course is designed to help students
Grasp marketing professional English vocabulary and usage, improve marketing professional English reading comprehension and use English
The ability to communicate and negotiate business in English, cultivate students’ habit of reading the most cutting-edge literature in marketing and
skill.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a professional elective course. The purpose of teaching this course is to help students improve their marketing professional English
The level of reading comprehension and the ability to use English for business communication and negotiation. Cultivate both an understanding of marketing theory and
A compound talent with skills and proficiency in foreign languages.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The basic requirement of course teaching is that students can better master the professional English vocabulary and usage of marketing, and
Be able to communicate in English proficiently in the process of external marketing.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
Chapter 1 Strategic Planning and the Marketing Management Process
The Marketing Concept
What Is Marketing?
What Is Strategic Planning?
Strategic Planning and Marketing Management
The Strategic Planning Process
The Complete Strategic Plan
The Marketing Management Process
Situation Analysis
Marketing Planning
Implementation and Control of the Marketing Plan
Marketing Information Systems and Marketing Research
The Strategic Plan, the Marketing Plan, and Other
Functional Area Plans
Marketing's Role in Cross-Functional Strategic Planning
Conclusion
Page 389
Chapter 2 Marketing Research: Process and Systems for Decision
Making
The Role of Marketing Research
The Marketing Research Process
Purpose of the Research
Plan of the Research
Performance of the Research
Processing of Research Data
Preparation of the Research Report
Limitations of the Research Process
Marketing Information Systems
Conclusion
Chapter 3 Consumer Behavior
Social Influences on Consumer Decisi6n Making
Culture and Subculture
Social Class
Reference Groups and Families
Marketing Influences on Consumer Decision Making
Product Influences
Price Influences
Promotion Influences
Place Influences
Situational Influences on Consumer Decision Making
Psychological Influences on Consumer Decision Making
Product Knowledge
Product Involvement
Consumer Decision Making
Need Recognition
Alternative Search
Alternative Evaluation
Purchase Decision
Post－purchase Evaluation
Conclusion
Chapter 4 Business, Government and Institutional Buying
Categories of Organizational Buyers
Producers
Intermediaries
Government Agencies
Other Institutions
The Organizational Buying Process
Purchase-Type Influences on Organizational Buying
Straight Rebuy
Modified Rebuy
Page 390
New Task Purchase
Structural Influences on Organizational Buying
Purchasing Roles
Organization-Specific Factors
Purchasing Policies and Procedures
Behavioral Influences on Organizational Buying
Personal Motivations
Role Perceptions
Stages in the Organizational Buying Process
Organizational Need
Vendor Analysis
Purchase Activities
Post－purchase Evaluation
Conclusion
Chapter 5 Market Segmentation
Delineate the Firm's Current Situation
Determine Consumer Needs and Wants
Divide Markets on Relevant Dimensions
A Priori versus Post Hoe Segmentation
Relevance of Segmentation Dimensions
Bases for Segmentation
Develop Product Positioning
Decide Segmentation Strategy
Design Marketing Mix Strategy
Conclusion
Chapter 6 Product and Brand Strategy
Basic Issues in Product Management
Product Definition
Product Classification
Product Quality and Value
Product Mix and Product Line
Branding and Brand Equity
Packaging
Product Life Cycle
Product Adoption and Diffusion
The Product Audit
Deletions
Product Improvement
Organizing for Product Management
Conclusion
Chapter 7 New Product Planning and Development
New Product Strategy
New Product Planning and Development Process
Page 391
Idea Generation
Idea Screening
Project Planning
Product Development
Test Marketing
Commereialization
The Importance of Time
Some Important New Product Decisions
Quality Level
Product Features
Product Design
Product Safety
Causes of New Product Failure
Need for Research
Conclusion
Chapter 8 Integrated Marketing Communications: Advertising, Sales
Promotion, Public Relations and Direct Marketing
Chapter 9 Personal Selling, Relationship Building, and Sales
Management
Chapter 10 Distribution Strategy
Chapter 11 Pricing Strategy
Chapter 12 The Marketing of Services
Chapter 13 Global Marketing
The focus and difficulty is to cultivate students' ability to conduct marketing communication in English.
4. Requirements for course practice
There are no practical requirements for this course.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(Computer hours)
Remarks
Chapter 1 Strategic Planning and the
Marketing Management Process
4
Chapter 2 Marketing Research: Process and
Systems for Decision Making
4
Chapter 3 Consumer Behavior
2
Chapter 4 Business,
Government
and
Institutional Buying
2
Chapter 5 Market Segmentation
2
Chapter 6 Product and Brand Strategy
2
Chapter 7 New
Product
Planning
and
Development
2
Page 392
Chapter 8 Integrated
Marketing
Communications: Advertising, Sales
Promotion, Public Relations and
Direct Marketing
4
Chapter 9 Personal Selling, Relationship
Building, and Sales Management
2
Chapter
10
Distribution Strategy
2
Chapter
11
Pricing Strategy
2
Chapter
12
The Marketing of Services
2
Chapter
13
Global Marketing
2
6. Course assessment method
1. The composition of student scores is: 30% of usual scores + 70% of test scores.
2. The usual grades include: classroom questions, speeches, discussions, homework, etc.
3. The examination focuses on students' practical application ability of marketing English professional knowledge.
7. Formulation Author:　 Hu Pingjie
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute):　 Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Sales theory and skills
Course ID : 160814Z1
Course Title: Sales Theory and Skills
English name : Selling Theory and Skills
Class hours and credits: 32/ 2 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 0)
Prerequisite course requirements : microeconomics, management, marketing
Adapt to major : marketing
Reference textbook : Modern Sales Theory and Skills, Wu Jianan, Higher Education Press, 2005; Sales Skills and
Actual Combat, Pan Jinlong, Yin Fei, Tsinghua University Press, 2010
Course introduction:
This course is to meet the training of marketing and sales talents, improve the professional quality of existing marketers and
Set up for the needs of improving sales performance, and strive to highlight the characteristics of science, practicality and readability. The course
On the basis of extensively absorbing domestic and foreign sales practice experience and related research results, we are committed to the creation of sales theory
New, to explore the phenomenon of sales communication from the level of social communication, in order to clarify the confusion of the promotion methods and methods,
Page 393
Summarize the four major methods of sales combination, and use this as the main framework to develop the internal sales practices and techniques
Content, the curriculum also reflects on the analysis of sales barriers and the classification of sales tools.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is based on theoretical knowledge such as economics, management, statistics, and behavior.
The basic theories and methods of theory and skills, in order to satisfy the training of marketing and sales talents, and improve the existing marketing personnel
Set up for the needs of professionalism and improve sales performance, and strive to highlight scientific, practical and readability
specialty.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
The basic requirements of this course are: establish modern marketing concepts and awareness, and master the basic theories of marketing
System, master the basic skills of sales, understand the new development of sales theory and skills.
3. Basic content, key points and difficulties of course teaching
1. Basic content of the course
Chapter One Introduction to Marketing
What is sales; the essence of sales; principles of sales.
Chapter II Quality and Ability of Salespersons
The quality and ability of salespersons; the control and motivation of salespersons; the etiquette of salespersons.
Chapter Three Sales Theory and Model
Master the content of the salesperson grid; master the content of the customer grid; understand the salesperson grid and customers
Checkered relationship.
Chapter 4 Promotion Plan, Procedure and Communication
The formulation of the marketing plan; the determination of the marketing target; the proper communication in the marketing; the communication with various types of customers
Communication points; two-way communication in sales.
Chapter 5 Sales Process
The basic process of sales activities; methods to find prospective customers; methods and skills to approach customers; effective sales
Interview skills.
Chapter 6: Psychological Sales for Customers
The mental process of customer purchase; customer purchasing ability; sales promotion based on customer temperament; customer purchase
Purchasing motives to promote; to promote the purchase behavior of customers.
Chapter 7 Handling and Transaction of Customer Objections
Understand the reasons for customer objections; correctly understand customer objections; master the methods and methods for handling customer objections
Skills; master the basic trading strategies and various trading methods.
Chapter 8 Key Account Development Skills
Key account sales model; customers’ buying and selling points; sales iceberg theory; bidding techniques; problematic sales
Sale.
Chapter Nine: Insights in sales practice
The main points of different types of goods or services in the promotion; the classic terms in the promotion; the frequently used handling of objections
Method; the inspiration of the sales master.
2. Focus of the course
Focus on explaining the main framework of sales, including: sales theory and mode; sales plan, procedures and
Page 394
Communication; the main points of communication with various types of customers; the sales process; the methods and skills of approaching customers; effective promotion
Skills and other parts of the interview.
3. Difficulties of the course
This course is a pragmatic course without system theory. The instructor can only explain in combination with actual cases.
Can deepen students’ understanding and impression; there are many hot issues in selling theories and skills, new concepts, new internal
Content and new methods are emerging in an endless stream with environmental changes. Instructors should appropriately introduce developments in this field in each chapter.
Exhibition dynamics. Therefore, the lecturer is required to have very rich professional knowledge and information, and the teaching process requires students to have
Full participation, case teaching and writing of sales plan is the focus of teaching.
4. Requirements for course practice
This course requires students to conduct simulated sales, or actual sales, outside of class.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Remarks
Chapter One Introduction to Marketing
2
Chapter II Quality and Ability of Salespersons
3
Chapter Three Sales Theory and Model
4
Chapter 4 Promotion Plan, Procedure and Communication
4
Chapter 5 Sales Process
4
Chapter 6: Psychological Sales for Customers
4
Chapter 7 Handling and Transaction of Customer Objections
3
Chapter 8 Key Account Development Skills
3
Chapter Nine: Insights in sales practice
3
Summary of Full Course Study
2
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (40%) + final exam (60%), final exam total score 100 points, exam time
100 minutes.
7. Formulation writer: Lei Jingsheng
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute):　 Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Internet creative marketing
Course number: 160815Z1
Course Name: Internet Creative Marketing
Page 395
English name: Creative Network Marketing
Class hours and credits: 48/3 (including experimental hours: 0, in-class computer hours: 48)
Prerequisite course requirements : marketing, computer network
Adapt to majors: marketing majors, business administration majors
Reference textbook: "Network Marketing Promotion Practical Collection" (First Edition), Jiang Likun, Electronic Industry Press, 2012
Course introduction:
This course is an online interactive teaching course jointly offered by many famous schools on both sides of the Taiwan Strait. teaching
Mainly with the help of the Action Office (Joinnet) provided by Taiwan Taiyu Technology, the professors’ exercises in the online classroom
Rotate lectures in an operating environment. Through real-time text, video and audio transmission, students, teachers and students can communicate independently
Flow interactive, learn and master the relevant knowledge and skills of online creative marketing from both theoretical and practical levels. before
One-third of the class hours are taught by teachers, and the last two-thirds of class hours are mainly for students forming a team for creative plan design and
Class reports, teachers make comments, students make revisions and reports, and finally form a more complete network
Network creative marketing plan.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is a special quality course for marketing majors. The course realizes cross-strait multi-school network cloud exchange
Active teaching, so that students have the opportunity to listen to the knowledge and insights of other famous school professors on network creative marketing, and give
There are plenty of opportunities for students and teachers to communicate equally and easily in the process of real-time interaction. In completion
On the basis of teaching, students in each school find their own interests and creativity in groups, through online and offline
Communication and collaboration, make full use of the knowledge of online creative marketing to complete marketing plans. Theory and practice
Effective combination to enhance students' communication skills, collaboration awareness and knowledge application ability.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
Through learning and practice, students are required to have a basic understanding and mastery of relevant theories and models of online creative marketing
example. Have the ability to analyze and use knowledge flexibly, the awareness of interpersonal communication and team coordination, and strong autonomy
Learning ability and self-consciousness to ensure normal and orderly teaching in the virtual classroom environment.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The theoretical teaching of this course is composed of famous people from both sides of the strait, such as Central South University, Jinan University,
Many professors from the school told students about the relevant knowledge of online creative marketing and their unique insights into industry trends
solution. With the text and voice transmission windows in the online classroom, this course creates equal communication between teachers and students, real-time
Interactive platform. Students in various places can freely exchange views and ask questions, and teachers can also address problems
Answer in time. In practical teaching, students from various schools are mixed and organized to coordinate discussions through online and offline spare time.
Finally completed a network creative marketing plan. And give a detailed explanation and exhibition in the classroom on the production process of the scheme
Teachers and students communicate independently and put forward suggestions and suggestions for improvement.
4. Requirements for course practice
Students install mobile classroom software on their computers, equipped with their own headset microphones, and maintain video conditions
Unblocked.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
Page 396
chapter
content
Class hours
First lecture
Innovative Thinking of Internet Marketing
3
Second lecture
Blog Marketing and Internet Promotion
3
Third lecture
Market research under the network environment
3
Fourth lecture
Taobao operation and marketing promotion case
3
Fifth Lecture
Analysis of Elements of Online Business Model
3
Sixth Lecture
Long Tail Economy and Internet Marketing
3
Seventh lecture
Creative idea group report
3
Eighth lecture
Creative idea group report
3
Lecture 9
Preliminary creative plan group report
3
Tenth Lecture
Preliminary creative plan group report
3
Lecture 11
Preliminary creative plan group report
3
Twelfth Lecture
Improved creative plan group report
3
Lecture 13
Improved creative plan group report
3
Lecture Fourteen
Improved creative plan group report
3
Lecture 15
Comprehensive review and assessment
3
Lecture 16
Comprehensive review and assessment
3
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (40%) + examination (60%). In the usual grades, 20% is attendance and 20% is classroom performance (application
Please speak, answer questions, etc.); the final exam content is the final creative marketing plan of each group, which will be evaluated by each professor
Price and other groups of students will score anonymously, and the final plan report will be used for comprehensive evaluation.
7. Formulation writer: Luo Jianhong
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute): Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping
Consumer Behavior
Course number: 160816Z1
Course Title : Consumer Behavior
English name: Consumer Behavior
Class hours and credits: 40 / 2.5 (including 4 experimental hours and 0 in-class computer hours)
Page 397
Prerequisites : Microeconomics, Management, Statistics, Marketing
Adapt to majors: marketing, e-commerce
Reference textbook : Consumer Behavior (Second Edition), Fu Guoqun, Higher Education Press, 2010; Consumer
Behavioral Science, Wang Man et al., Machinery Industry Press, 2006
Course introduction:
Consumer behavior is an important field of business management education today, which is a multi-disciplinary integration
The academic field is widely permeated with the influence of economics, sociology, psychology, and statistics. This course research film
The various factors that affect consumer purchase and consumption behavior and their mutual interaction. This course helps
Understand the potential space of consumer research, understand the prospects of consumer behavior research, different research methods and perspectives
Points, and the skills that a consumer behavior researcher should have.
Syllabus:
1. Course nature, purpose and tasks
This course is one of the core courses for marketing majors and has a strong theoretical nature. Help students manage
And use perspectives to understand and understand consumer behavior, and to understand the internal factors that affect consumer behavior, such as perception,
Learning, motivation, attitude and memory; understand the relationship between environmental factors and consumer behavior, master the use of camp
Strategies and methods in which sales mix factors affect consumer behavior.
2. Basic requirements for course teaching
This course requires mastering the research objects, research development and research methods of consumer behavior, and mastering consumption
Consumer’s mental activity process, consumer’s personality psychology, consumer’s needs and motivations, consumer environment to consumers
The impact of behavior, to understand the latest developments in consumer behavior.
3. Basic content and key difficulties of course teaching
The basic content of the course is as follows, among which the key points are marked with (Z) and the difficult points are marked with (N).
The research object of consumer behavior (Z), the development of consumer behavior, the research of consumer behavior
Significance, research methods of consumer behavior (Z) (N); consumer attention (Z), consumer perception (Z)
(N), consumer perception (Z); consumer memory (Z), consumer imagination (Z), consumer thought
Dimension; consumer’s emotions and emotions (Z), consumer’s will; consumer’s personality (Z), consumer’s self
I concept (Z), consumer lifestyle (Z) (N); consumer needs, consumer motivation; consumption
Learners' learning (Z), consumer attitudes (Z) (N); cultural factors and consumer behavior (Z); social factors
And consumer behavior (Z); situational factors and consumer behavior (Z) (N); marketing mix and consumer behavior;
Consumer purchasing behavior theory (Z), consumer purchasing behavior model (Z) (N), consumer purchasing behavior process.
4. Requirements for course practice
The experiments of this course include: sensory marketing (2 class hours), purchase behavior decision (2 class hours). 50-60 at a time
Human scale, computer networking, need specific equipment and specific software.
5. Course teaching hours allocation
chapter
content
Class hours
Which experiment
(On computer
Time)
Prepare
Note
Chapter One
Overview of Consumer Behavior
4
Page 398
Chapter two
Consumer attention, feeling and perception
2
2
third chapter
Consumers' memory, imagination and thinking
2
Chapter Four
Consumers' emotions, emotions and will
2
chapter Five
Consumer's personality, self-concept and life
Way of living
4
Chapter Six
Consumer needs and motivation
2
Chapter VII
Consumer's learning and attitude
4
chapter eight
Cultural factors and consumer behavior
2
Chapter nine
Social factors and consumer behavior
2
chapter Ten
Situational factors and consumer behavior
2
Chapter 11 Marketing Mix and Consumer Behavior
2
Chapter 12 Consumer Buying Behavior Analysis
2
2
Comprehensive case analysis
4
Summary review
2
6. Course assessment method
Normal results (accounting for 30% of the total evaluation score) + final exam (accounting for 70% of the total evaluation score). Final exam is closed
The total score is 100 points and the test time is 100 minutes.
7. Formulation Author:　 Zhang Xuejun
Reviewer (Director of Teaching and Research Section or Director of Research Institute):　 Zhang Xuejun
Approver (dean of teaching school): Gong Yanping

原文

课程教学将采取理论教学、案例分析、社会调查、
提供更好的翻译建议